what is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach 636584

Abbitt Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its

most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$142

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

2,500

Units sold

2,300

Units in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$22

Direct labor

$57

Variable manufacturing overhead

$1

Variable selling and administrative

$6

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$82,500

Fixed selling and administrative

$41,400

What is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach?

A) $55,200

B) $82,500

C) $137,700

D) $123,900

what is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach 636585

Abbitt Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its

most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$142

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

2,500

Units sold

2,300

Units in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$22

Direct labor

$57

Variable manufacturing overhead

$1

Variable selling and administrative

$6

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$82,500

Fixed selling and administrative

$41,400

What is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach?

A) $137,700

B) $55,200

C) $41,400

D) $82,500

what is the net operating income for the month under variable costing 636586

Abbitt Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its

most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$142

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

2,500

Units sold

2,300

Units in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$22

Direct labor

$57

Variable manufacturing overhead

$1

Variable selling and administrative

$6

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$82,500

Fixed selling and administrative

$41,400

What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?

A) $4,900

B) $11,500

C) $6,600

D) ($11,100)

what is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing 636587

Abbitt Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its

most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$142

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

2,500

Units sold

2,300

Units in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$22

Direct labor

$57

Variable manufacturing overhead

$1

Variable selling and administrative

$6

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$82,500

Fixed selling and administrative

$41,400

What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?

A) ($11,100)

B) $11,500

C) $6,600

D) $4,900

what is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing 636588

Feasal Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$108

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

7,700

Units sold

7,500

Units in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$26

Direct labor

$38

Variable manufacturing overhead

$3

Variable selling and administrative

$4

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$184,800

Fixed selling and administrative

$90,000

What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?

A) $71

B) $67

C) $95

D) $91

what is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing 636589

Feasal Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$108

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

7,700

Units sold

7,500

Units in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$26

Direct labor

$38

Variable manufacturing overhead

$3

Variable selling and administrative

$4

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$184,800

Fixed selling and administrative

$90,000

What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?

A) $71

B) $67

C) $95

D) $91

what is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing 636591

Feasal Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$108

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

7,700

Units sold

7,500

Units in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$26

Direct labor

$38

Variable manufacturing overhead

$3

Variable selling and administrative

$4

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$184,800

Fixed selling and administrative

$90,000

What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?

A) $2,700

B) $7,500

C) $4,800

D) ($10,700)

what is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing 636592

Feheln Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$114

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

7,300

Units sold

7,200

Units in ending inventory

100

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$30

Direct labor

$53

Variable manufacturing overhead

$3

Variable selling and administrative

$8

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$73,000

Fixed selling and administrative

$57,600

What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?

A) $94

B) $86

C) $96

D) $104

what is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing 636593

Feheln Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$114

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

7,300

Units sold

7,200

Units in ending inventory

100

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$30

Direct labor

$53

Variable manufacturing overhead

$3

Variable selling and administrative

$8

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$73,000

Fixed selling and administrative

$57,600

What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?

A) $104

B) $94

C) $96

D) $86

what is the net operating income for the month under variable costing 636594

Feheln Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$114

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

7,300

Units sold

7,200

Units in ending inventory

100

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$30

Direct labor

$53

Variable manufacturing overhead

$3

Variable selling and administrative

$8

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$73,000

Fixed selling and administrative

$57,600

What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?

A) $1,000

B) $14,400

C) $13,400

D) $4,800

what is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing 636596

Jamil Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$71

Units in beginning inventory

400

Units produced

8,100

Units sold

8,200

Units in ending inventory

300

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$20

Direct labor

$15

Variable manufacturing overhead

$6

Variable selling and administrative

$4

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$64,800

Fixed selling and administrative

$139,400

The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units  vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.

What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?

A) $49

B) $41

C) $53

D) $45

what is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing 636597

Jamil Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$71

Units in beginning inventory

400

Units produced

8,100

Units sold

8,200

Units in ending inventory

300

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$20

Direct labor

$15

Variable manufacturing overhead

$6

Variable selling and administrative

$4

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$64,800

Fixed selling and administrative

$139,400

The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units  vary from month to month. The company”s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.

What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?

A) $45

B) $53

C) $41

D) $49

delphi s management has stipulated that the new product must earn a profit of at lea 636523

Delphi Company has developed a new product that will be marketed for the first time during the next fiscal year. Although the Marketing Department estimates that 35,000 units could be sold at $36 per unit, Delphi”s management has allocated only enough manufacturing capacity to produce a maximum of 25,000 units of the new product annually. The fixed expenses associated with the new product are budgeted at  $450,000 for the year. The variable expenses of the new product are $16 per unit.

Required:

a. How many units of the new product must Delphi sell during the next fiscal year in order to break even on the product?

b. What is the profit Delphi would earn on the new product if all of the manufacturing capacity allocated by management is used and the product is sold  for $36 per unit?

c. What is the degree of operating leverage for the new product if 25,000 units are  sold for $36 per unit?

d. The Marketing Department would like more manufacturing capacity to be devoted to the new product. What would be the percentage increase in net operating income for the new product if its unit sales could be expanded by 10% without any increase in fixed expenses and without any change in the unit selling price and unit variable expense?

e. Delphi”s management has stipulated that the new product must earn a profit of at least $125,000 in the next fiscal year. What unit selling price would achieve this  target profit if all of the manufacturing capacity allocated by management is usedand all of the output can be sold at that selling price?

what dollar sales must the company achieve in order to earn a net operating income o 636524

Parkins Company produces and sells a single product. The company”s income statement for the most recent month is given below:

Sales (6,000 units at $40 per unit)

 

$240,000

 

Less manufacturing costs:

 

 

Direct materials

$48,000

 

Direct labor (variable)

60,000

 

Variable factory overhead

12,000

 

Fixed factory overhead

30,000

150,000

Gross margin

 

90,000

Less selling and other expenses:

 

 

Variable selling and other expenses

24,000

 

Fixed selling and other expenses

42,000

66,000

Net operating income

 

$ 24,000

There are no beginning or ending inventories.

Required:

a. Compute the company”s monthly break even point in units of product.

b. What would the company”s monthly net operating income be if sales increased by 25% and there is no change in total fixed expenses?

c. What dollar sales must the company achieve in order to earn a net operating income of $50,000 per month?

d. The company has decided to automate a portion of its operations. The change will reduce direct labor costs per unit by 40 percent, but it will double the costs for fixed factory overhead. Compute the new break even point in units.

find the margin of safety in terms of dollars 636526

Penury Company offers two products. At present, the following represents the usual results of a month”s operations:

 

Product K

Product L

 

 

 

Per

 

Per

 

 

Amount

Unit

Amount

Unit

Combined

Sales revenue

$120,000

$1.20

$80,000

$0.80

Amount

Variable expenses

60,000

0.60

60,000

0.60

$200,000

Contribution margin

$ 60,000

$0.60

$20,000

$0.20

120,000

Fixed expenses

 

 

 

 

80,000

Net operating income

 

 

 

 

50,000

Required:

a. Find the break even point in terms of dollars.

b. Find the margin of safety in terms of dollars.

c. The company is considering decreasing product K”s unit sales to 80,000 and increasing product L”s unit sales to 180,000, leaving unchanged the selling price per unit, variable expense per unit, and total fixed expenses. Would you advise adopting this plan?

d. Refer to (c) above. Under the new plan, find the break even point in terms of dollars.

e. Under the new plan in (c) above, find the margin of safety in terms of dollars.

the inventory value shown on the balance sheet is generally higher under absorption 636528

1. The inventory value shown on the balance sheet is generally higher under absorption costing than under variable costing.

2. Under variable costing, inventoriable product costs consist of direct materials, direct labor, variable manufacturing overhead and variable selling and administration expenses.

3. Under variable costing, an increase in the fixed factory overhead will have no effect on the unit product cost.

4. Under the absorption costing method, a portion of fixed manufacturing overhead cost is allocated to each unit of product.

5. Under variable costing, it is possible to defer a portion of the fixed manufacturing overhead costs of the current period to future periods through the inventory account.

6. Under absorption costing, a portion of fixed manufacturing overhead cost is released from inventory when sales volume exceeds production volume.

7. Contribution margin and gross margin mean the same thing.

8. When reconciling variable costing and absorption costing net operating income, fixed manufacturing overhead costs deferred in inventory under absorption costing should be deducted from variable costing net operating income to arrive at the absorption costing net operating income.

9. If production equals sales for the period, absorption costing and variable costing will produce the same net operating income under LIFO.

10. When the number of units in inventories decrease between the beginning and end of the period, absorption costing net operating income will typically be greater than variable costing net operating income.

11. When viewed over the long term, accumulated net operating income will be the same for variable and absorption costing if there are no ending inventories at the end of the term.

12. Under absorption costing, the profit for a period is not affected by changes in inventory.

13. When using absorption costing, a company may be able to show a profit even if it is operating below the breakeven point.

14. Variable costing is more compatible with cost volume profit analysis than is absorption costing.

15. Just In Time (JIT) methods generally increase the difference between absorption and variable costing net operating income.

what is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing 636547

A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

2,900

Units sold

2,500

Units in ending inventory

400

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$27

Direct labor

$20

Variable manufacturing overhead

$6

Variable selling and administrative

$4

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$72,500

Fixed selling and administrative

$2,500

What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?

A) $57

B) $53

C) $78

D) $82

what is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach 636548

A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling Price

$85

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

5,000

Units sold

4,600

Units in ending inventory

400

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$19

Direct labor

$15

Variable manufacturing overhead

$2

Variable selling and administrative

$10

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$110,000

Fixed selling and administrative

$69,000

What is the total period cost for the month under the variable costing approach?

A) $179,000

B) $110,000

C) $115,000

D) $225,000

what is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach 636550

A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling Price

$78

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

5,300

Units sold

4,900

Units in ending inventory

400

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$31

Direct labor

$14

Variable manufacturing overhead

$2

Variable selling and administrative

$5

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$68,900

Fixed selling and administrative

$58,800

What is the total period cost for the month under the absorption costing approach?

A) $152,200

B) $83,300

C) $68,900

D) $58,800

what was the variable costing net operating income last year 636552

The following data pertain to last year”s operations at Tredder Corporation, a company that produces a single product:

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

20,000

Units sold

19,000

Selling Price per  unit

$100.00

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$12.00

Direct labor

$25.00

Variable manufacturing overhead

$3.00

Variable selling and administrative

$2.00

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$500,000

Fixed selling and administrative

$600,000

What was the variable costing net operating income last year?

A) $12,000

B) $57,000

C) $2,000

D) $27,000

the total contribution margin for the month under the variable costing approach is 636554

A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following  data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling Price

$102

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

8,700

Units sold

8,300

Unit in ending inventory

400

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$29

Direct labor

$31

Variable manufacturing overhead

$2

Variable selling and administrative

$6

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$269,700

Fixed selling and administrative

$8,300

The total contribution margin for the month under the variable costing approach is:

A) $282,200

B) $74,700

C) $332,000

D) $12,500

the total gross margin for the month under the absorption costing approach is 636556

A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following  data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling Price

$123

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

5,900

Units sold

5,700

Unit in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$40

Direct labor

$32

Variable manufacturing overhead

$3

Variable selling and administrative

$5

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$135,700

Fixed selling and administrative

$108,300

The total gross margin for the month under the absorption costing approach is:

A) $245,100

B) $162,100

C) $142,500

D) $5,700

the total gross margin for the month under the absorption costing approach is 636557

A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling Price

$86

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

3,500

Units sold

3,400

Unit in ending inventory

100

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$37

Direct labor

$15

Variable manufacturing overhead

$5

Variable selling and administrative

$10

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$24,500

Fixed selling and administrative

$27,200

The total gross margin for the month under the absorption costing approach is:

A) $81,200

B) $74,800

C) $64,600

D) $13,600

what is the net operating income for the month under variable costing 636558

A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling Price

$85

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

2,900

Units sold

2,700

Unit in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$22

Direct labor

$13

Variable manufacturing overhead

$3

Variable selling and administrative

$5

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$46,400

Fixed selling and administrative

$51,300

What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?

A) $8,100

B) $15,700

C) $18,900

D) $3,200

what is the net operating income for the month under variable costing 636559

A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling Price

$103

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

1,700

Units sold

1,600

Unit in ending inventory

100

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$46

Direct labor

$14

Variable manufacturing overhead

$4

Variable selling and administrative

$9

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$11,900

Fixed selling and administrative

$22,400

What is the net operating income for the month under variable costing?

A) $7,300

B) $14,400

C) $13,700

D) $700

what is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing 636560

A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling Price

$103

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

1,700

Units sold

1,400

Unit in ending inventory

300

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$39

Direct labor

$32

Variable manufacturing overhead

$6

Variable selling and administrative

$5

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$6,800

Fixed selling and administrative

$8,400

What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?

A) $14,200

B) ($8,900)

C) $1,200

D) $15,400

what is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing 636561

A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling Price

$122

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

8,600

Units sold

8,500

Unit in ending inventory

100

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$34

Direct labor

$37

Variable manufacturing overhead

$7

Variable selling and administrative

$4

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$292,400

Fixed selling and administrative

$34,000

What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?

A) $17,000

B) $3,400

C) $5,800

D) $13,600

what is the total cost that would be assigned to cutterski s finished goods inventor 636569

Cutterski Corporation manufactures a propeller. Shown below is Cutterski’s cost structure:

 

Variable

Total fixed

 

cost per

cost for the

 

propeller

year

Manufacturing cost

$114

$810,000

Selling and administrative

$20

$243,000

In its first year of operations, Cutterski produced 60,000 propellers but only sold 54,000.

What is the total cost that would be assigned to Cutterski”s finished goods inventory at the end of the first year of operations under the variable costing method?

A) $765,000

B) $684,000

C) $804,000

D) $912,000

which costing method variable or absorption will generate a higher net operating inc 636571

Cutterski Corporation manufactures a propeller. Shown below is Cutterski’s cost structure:

 

Variable

Total fixed

 

cost per

cost for the

 

propeller

year

Manufacturing cost

$114

$810,000

Selling and administrative

$20

$243,000

In its first year of operations, Cutterski produced 60,000 propellers but only sold 54,000.

Which costing method (variable or absorption) will generate a higher net operating income in Cutterski”s first year of operations and by how much?

A) variable by $81,000

B) variable by $108,000

C) absorption by $81,000

D) absorption by $108,000

what is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing 636572

Abbey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$129

 

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

6,300

Units sold

6,100

Units in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$32

Direct labor

$50

Variable manufacturing overhead

$5

Variable selling and administrative

$11

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$88,200

Fixed selling and administrative

$97,600

What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?

A) $87

B) $101

C) $112

D) $98

what is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing 636573

Abbey Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$129

 

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

6,300

Units sold

6,100

Units in ending inventory

200

Variable costs per unit:

 

Direct materials

$32

Direct labor

$50

Variable manufacturing overhead

$5

Variable selling and administrative

$11

Fixed costs:

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$88,200

Fixed selling and administrative

$97,600

What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?

A) $101

B) $98

C) $87

D) $112

what would the net operating income be if sales increase by 25 636501

The following budgeted income statement was prepared by Fullton Corporation:

Sales (100 units at $100 a unit)

 

$10,000

Cost of goods sold:

 

 

Direct labor (variable)

$1,500

 

Direct materials

1,400

 

Variable factory overhead

1,000

 

Fixed factory overhead

500

4,400

Gross margin

 

5,600

Selling expenses:

 

 

Variable

600

 

Fixed

1,000

 

Administrative expenses:

 

 

Variable

500

 

Fixed

1,000

3,100

Net operating income

 

$ 2,500

What would the net operating income be if sales increase by 25%?

A) $3,125

B) $3,750

C) $4,000

D) $5,000

what would be the sales at the break even point if fixed factory overhead increases 636502

The following budgeted income statement was prepared by Fullton Corporation:

Sales (100 units at $100 a unit)

 

$10,000

Cost of goods sold:

 

 

Direct labor (variable)

$1,500

 

Direct materials

1,400

 

Variable factory overhead

1,000

 

Fixed factory overhead

500

4,400

Gross margin

 

5,600

Selling expenses:

 

 

Variable

600

 

Fixed

1,000

 

Administrative expenses:

 

 

Variable

500

 

Fixed

1,000

3,100

Net operating income

 

$ 2,500

What would be the sales at the break even point if fixed factory overhead increases by $1,700?

A) $6,700

B) $8,400

C) $8,666

D) $9,200

the break even point last year was 636503

Barnes Corporation manufactures skateboards and is in the process of preparing next year’s budget. The pro forma income statement for the current year is presented below.

Sales (100 units at $100 a unit)

 

$1,500,000

Cost of goods sold:

 

 

Direct labor (variable)

$250,000

 

Direct materials

150,000

 

Variable factory overhead

75,000

 

Fixed factory overhead

100,000

575,000

Gross margin

 

925,000

Selling expenses:

 

 

Variable

200,000

 

Fixed

250,000

450,000

Net operating income

 

$ 475,000

 

The break even point (rounded to the nearest dollar) for Barnes Corporation for the current year is
A. $146,341.
B. $636,364.
C. $729,730.
D. $181,818.
E. $658,537.

the management of barnes corporation anticipates a 10 percent increase in total sale 636504

Barnes Corporation manufactures skateboards and is in the process of preparing next year’s budget. The pro forma income statement for the current year is presented below.

Sales (100 units at $100 a unit)

 

$1,500,000

Cost of goods sold:

 

 

Direct labor (variable)

$250,000

 

Direct materials

150,000

 

Variable factory overhead

75,000

 

Fixed factory overhead

100,000

575,000

Gross margin

 

925,000

Selling expenses:

 

 

Variable

200,000

 

Fixed

250,000

450,000

Net operating income

 

$ 475,000

For the coming year, the management of Barnes Corporation anticipates a 10 percent increase in sales, a 12 percent increase in variable costs, and a $45,000 increase in fixed expenses.
The break even point for next year would be
A. $729,027.
B. $862,103.
C. $214,018.
D. $474,000.
E. $700,000.

if the dollar contribution margin per unit is increased by 10 and if total fixed exp 636505

Holger Incorporated, which produces and sells a single product, has provided the following

data:

Sales

2,000 units

Selling price

$60 per unit

Variable expense

$40 per unit

Fixed expense

$20,000

Consider each of the following questions independently.

If the dollar contribution margin per unit is increased by 10% and if total fixed expense is decreased by 20%, net operating income is expected to:

A) increase by $2,000

B) increase by $12,000

C) increase by $8,000

D) increase by $16,000

if the sales volume decreases by 25 and the variable expense per unit increases by 1 636506

Holger Incorporated, which produces and sells a single product, has provided the following

data:

Sales

2,000 units

Selling price

$60 per unit

Variable expense

$40 per unit

Fixed expense

$20,000

Consider each of the following questions independently.

If the sales volume decreases by 25% and the variable expense per unit increases by 15%, net operating income is expected to:

A) decrease by $19,000

B) decrease by $1,000

C) increase by $1,750

D) decrease by $15,000

consider each of the following questions independently 636507

Holger Incorporated, which produces and sells a single product, has provided the following

data:

Sales

2,000 units

Selling price

$60 per unit

Variable expense

$40 per unit

Fixed expense

$20,000

Consider each of the following questions independently.

If the company”s fixed expenses increased by $8,000, how many units must be sold to  reach a target net operating income of $36,000:

A) 1,400 units

B) 2,200 units

C) 2,400 units

D) 3,200 units

if the company s sales volume in units decreases by 30 and if it desires a targeted 636508

Holger Incorporated, which produces and sells a single product, has provided the following

data:

Sales

2,000 units

Selling price

$60 per unit

Variable expense

$40 per unit

Fixed expense

$20,000

Consider each of the following questions independently.

If the company”s sales volume in units decreases by 30%, and if it desires a targeted net operating income of $29,000, then the selling price should be:

A) $58.85

B) $60.75

C) $64.50

D) $75.00

if sales decrease by 500 units by how much would fixed expenses have to be reduced t 636509

Given the following data:

 

Total

Per Unit

Sales

$30,000

$10

Less variable expenses

18,000

6

Contribution margin

12,000

$ 4

Less fixed expenses

9,000

 

Net operating income

$ 3,000

 

If sales decrease by 500 units, by how much would fixed expenses have to be reduced to maintain current net operating income?

A) $5,000

B) $3,000

C) $1,500

D) $2,000

the company has an opportunity to secure a special order of 800 units if it is willi 636510

Given the following data:

 

Total

Per Unit

Sales

$30,000

$10

Less variable expenses

18,000

6

Contribution margin

12,000

$ 4

Less fixed expenses

9,000

 

Net operating income

$ 3,000

 

The company has an opportunity to secure a special order of 800 units if it is willing to  drop the selling price on these units to $9. In addition to the usual variable expenses, the costs of securing the special order would be $1,000. The company”s regular sales  would not be affected by the special order. If the special order is accepted, the company”s overall net operating income will:

A) increase $2,400

B) increase $1,400

C) increase $2,200

D) decrease $2,200

what is the company s break even point in sales dollars 636511

Junior Bodway, Inc., has provided the following budgeted data:

Sales

10,000 units

Selling price

$50 per unit

Variable expense

 $30 per unit

Fixed expense

 $180,000

Sales

10,000 units

Selling price

$50 per unit

Variable expense

 $30 per unit

What is the company”s break even point in sales dollars?

A) $450,000

B) $180,000

C) $300,000

D) $500,000

how many units would the company have to sell in order to have a net operating incom 636512

Junior Bodway, Inc., has provided the following budgeted data:

Sales

10,000 units

Selling price

$50 per unit

Variable expense

 $30 per unit

Fixed expense

 $180,000

Sales

10,000 units

Selling price

$50 per unit

Variable expense

 $30 per unit

How many units would the company have to sell in order to have a net operating income of $40,000?

A) 20,000 units

B) 9,000 units

C) 11,000 units

D) 7,333 units

at the budgeted sales level of 10 000 units what is the company s degree of operatin 636513

Junior Bodway, Inc., has provided the following budgeted data:

Sales

10,000 units

Selling price

$50 per unit

Variable expense

 $30 per unit

Fixed expense

 $180,000

Sales

10,000 units

Selling price

$50 per unit

Variable expense

 $30 per unit

At the budgeted sales level of 10,000 units, what is the company”s degree of operating leverage?

A) 10.0

B) 6.0

C) 22.5

D) 5.0

the break even point last year was 636514

Pricher Corporation”s income statement for last year appears below:

Sales

 

$2,000,000 

Cost of goods sold:

 

 

Direct materials

$500,000

 

Direct labor (variable)

150,000

 

Variable manufacturing overhead

50,000

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

600,000

 

Gross margin

$500,000

1,300,000

Selling and administrative expenses:

150,000

700,000

Variable

100,000

 

Fixed

300,000

400,000

Net operating income

 

$ 300,000

The break even point last year was:

A) $1,500,000

B) $2,571,429

C) $1,250,000

D) $900,000

the degree of operating leverage last year was 636515

Pricher Corporation”s income statement for last year appears below:

Sales

 

$2,000,000 

Cost of goods sold:

 

 

Direct materials

$500,000

 

Direct labor (variable)

150,000

 

Variable manufacturing overhead

50,000

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

600,000

 

Gross margin

$500,000

1,300,000

Selling and administrative expenses:

150,000

700,000

Variable

100,000

 

Fixed

300,000

400,000

Net operating income

 

$ 300,000

The degree of operating leverage last year was:

A) 0.33

B) 2.33

C) 4.00

D) 3.33

if fixed selling and administrative expenses increase by 60 000 and sales remain at 636516

Pricher Corporation”s income statement for last year appears below:

Sales

 

$2,000,000 

Cost of goods sold:

 

 

Direct materials

$500,000

 

Direct labor (variable)

150,000

 

Variable manufacturing overhead

50,000

 

Fixed manufacturing overhead

600,000

 

Gross margin

$500,000

1,300,000

Selling and administrative expenses:

150,000

700,000

Variable

100,000

 

Fixed

300,000

400,000

Net operating income

 

$ 300,000

If fixed selling and administrative expenses increase by $60,000 and sales remain at the $2,000,000 level, what is the margin of safety in sales dollars:

A) $300,000

B) $200,000

C) $500,000

D) $400,000

how many units would the company have to sell in order to have a net operating incom 636518

Highjinks Inc. has provided the following budgeted data:

Sales

20,000 units

Selling price

$100 per unit

Variable expense

$70 per unit

Fixed expense

$450,000

How many units would the company have to sell in order to have a net operating income equal to 5% of total sales dollars?

A) 18,000 units

B) 20,000 units

C) 15,333 units

D) 14,286 units

the break even in sales dollars for the expected sales mix is closest to 636519

Douglas Corporation produces and sells two models of vacuum cleaners, Standard and Deluxe. Company records show the following data relating to these two products:

 

Standard

Deluxe

Selling price per unit

$140

$155

Variable production costs per unit

$110

$116

Variable selling and admin. expense per unit

$15

$12

Expected monthly sales in units

600

1,200

The company”s total monthly fixed expense is $15,000.

The break even in sales dollars for the expected sales mix is closest to:

A) $140,000

B) $85,000

C) $107,000

D) $98,000

if the expected monthly sales in units were divided equally between the two models 9 636520

Douglas Corporation produces and sells two models of vacuum cleaners, Standard and Deluxe. Company records show the following data relating to these two products:

 

Standard

Deluxe

Selling price per unit

$140

$155

Variable production costs per unit

$110

$116

Variable selling and admin. expense per unit

$15

$12

Expected monthly sales in units

600

1,200

The company”s total monthly fixed expense is $15,000.

If the expected monthly sales in units were divided equally between the two models (900 Standard and 900 Deluxe), the break even level of sales would be:

A) the same as with the expected sales mix.

B) higher than with the expected sales mix.

C) lower than with the expected sales mix.

D) cannot be determined with the available data.

what is your recommendation to management concerning which manufacturing method shou 636522

Candice Corporation has decided to introduce a new product. The product can be manufactured using either a capital intensive or labor intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality or sales of the product. The estimated manufacturing costs of the two methods are as follows:

 

Capital

Labor

 

intensive

intensive

Variable manufacturing cost per unit

$14.00

$17.60

Fixed manufacturing cost per year

$2,440,000

$1,320,000

The company”s market research department has recommended an introductory selling  price of $30 per unit for the new product. The annual fixed selling and administrative expenses of the new product are $500,000. The variable selling and administrative expenses are $2 per unit regardless of how the new product is manufactured.

Required:

a. Calculate the break even point in units if Candice Corporation uses the:

1. capital intensive manufacturing method.

2. labor intensive manufacturing method.

b. Determine the unit sales volume at which the net operating income is the same for the two manufacturing methods.

c. Assuming sales of 250,000 units, what is the degree of operating leverage if the company uses the:

1. capital intensive manufacturing method.

2. labor intensive manufacturing method.

d. What is your recommendation to management concerning which manufacturing method should be used?

obtain the most recently issued annual report of a publicly owned manufacturing or m 636390

Obtain an annual report Throughout this course, you will be asked to relate the material being studied to actual financial statements. After you complete this course, you will be able to use an organization’s financial statements to make decisions and informed judgments about that organization. The purpose of this assignment is to provide the experience of obtaining a company’s annual report. You may wish to refer to the financial statements in the report during the rest of the course.

Required:

a. Obtain the most recently issued annual report of a publicly owned manufacturing or merchandising corporation of your choice. Do not select a bank, insurance company, financial institution, or public utility. It would be appropriate to select a firm that you know something about or have an interest in. If you don’t know the name or title of a specific individual to contact, address your request to the Shareholder Relations Department. Company addresses are available from several sources, including the following reference books in the library:

Standard & Poor’s Register of Corporations, Directors and Executives,

Vol. 1–Corporations.

Moody’s Handbook of Common Stocks.

Standard & Poor’s Corporation Stock Market Encyclopedia.

Moody’s Industrial Manual.

b. Alternatively, you may be able to obtain an annual report by using information about annual report ordering. By using Intel as your firm name, for example, you will discover that the most recent financial statements can be downloaded into Microsoft Excel files for subsequent manipulation.

find read outline and prepare to discuss a brief article from a general audience or 636391

Read and outline an article The accounting profession is frequently in the news, not always in the most positive light. The purpose of this assignment is to increase your awareness of an issue facing the profession.

Required:

Find, read, outline, and prepare to discuss a brief article from a general audience or business audience publication about accounting and/or the accounting profession.

The article should have been published within the past eight months and should relate to accounting or the accounting profession in general; it should not be about some technical accounting issue. The appropriate topical headings to use in the Business Periodicals Index or the computer based retrieval system to which you have access are accountants, accounting, and/or accounting (specific topic).

find financial information from the set of financial statements acquired for e1 1 de 636393

Identify information used in making an informed decision Charlie and Maribelle Brown have owned and operated a retail furniture store for more than 30 years. They have employed an independent CPA during this time to prepare various sales tax, payroll tax, and income tax returns, as well as financial statements for themselves and the bank from which they have borrowed money from time to time. They are considering selling the store but are uncertain about how to establish an asking price.

Required:

What type of information is likely to be included in the material prepared by the CPA that may help the Browns establish an asking price for the store?

Auditor independence Using the search engine you are most comfortable with, identify at least five sources on the general topic of auditor independence. Write a brief memo to provide an update on the current status of the auditor independence tandard setting process. The Business in Practice box on page 12 should serve as the starting point for this exercise. Note: You might find it useful to contrast the opinions expressed by any of the Big 4 accounting firms to those expressed by non accounting professionals.

Find financial information From the set of financial statements acquired for E1.1, determine the following:

a. Who is the chief financial officer?

b. What are the names of the directors?

c. Which firm conducted the audit? Have the auditors reviewed the entire report?

d. What are the names of the financial statements provided?

e. How many pages of explanatory notes accompany the financial statements?

f. In addition to the financial statements, are there other reports? If so, what are they?

match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided 636396

Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–15). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.

a. Accumulated depreciation

p. Earnings per share of common

b. Balance sheet

stock

c. Accrued liabilities

q. Paid in capital

d. Current assets

r. Common stock

e. Current liabilities

s. Additional paid in capital

f. Merchandise inventory

t. Retained earnings

g. Revenues

u. Dividends

h. Expenses

v. Par value

i. Gains

w. Going concern concept

j. Losses

x. Matching concept

k. Net sales

y. Accrual concept

l. Cost of goods sold

z. Opportunity cost

m. Gross profit

n. Income from operations

o. Net income

1. The difference between the total amount invested by the owners and the par value or stated value of the stock issued.

2. Outflows or using up of assets or incurrence of liabilities during a period from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or carrying out other activities that constitute the entity’s major operations.

3. The financial statement that is a list of the entity’s assets, liabilities, and owners’ equity at a point in time.

4. A document distributed to stockholders that contains the financial statements for the fiscal year of the reporting firm with the report of the external auditor’s examination of the financial statements.

5. A distribution of earnings to the owners of a corporation.

6. An arbitrary value assigned to a share of stock when the corporation is organized.

7. Net income available to the common stockholders divided by the average number of shares of common stock outstanding during the period.

8. Items held by an entity for sale to potential customers in the normal course of business.

9. Inflows of cash or increases in other assets, or settlement of liabilities during a period from delivering or producing goods, rendering services, or other activities that constitute the entity’s major operations.

10. Cash and those assets likely to be converted to cash or used to benefit the entity within one year of the balance sheet date.

11. Cumulative net income that has not been distributed to the owners of a corporation as dividends.

12. The difference between gross profit and operating expenses. Also referred to as operating income and earnings from operations.

13. Increases in net assets from incidental transactions and other events affecting an entity during a period except those that result from revenues or investments by owners.

14. A presumption that the entity will continue in existence for the indefinite future.

15. Net sales less cost of goods sold.

identify accounts by category and financial statement s listed here are a number of 636407

Identify accounts by category and financial statement(s) Listed here are a number of financial statement captions. Indicate in the spaces to the right of each caption the category of each item and the financial statement(s) on which the item can usually be found. Use the following abbreviations:

Category

Financial Statement

Asset

A

Balance sheet

BS

Liability

L

Income statement

IS

Owners’ equity

OE

Revenue

R

Expense

E

Gain

G

Loss

LS

Cash

_________

_________

Accounts payable

_________

_________

Common stock

_________

_________

Depreciation expense

_________

_________

Net sales

_________

_________

Income tax expense

_________

_________

Short term investments

_________

_________

Gain on sale of land

_________

_________

Retained earnings

_________

_________

Dividends payable

_________

_________

Accounts receivable

_________

_________

Short term debt

_________

_________

indicate in the spaces to the right of each caption the category of each item and th 636408

Identify accounts by category and financial statement(s) Listed here are a number of financial statement captions. Indicate in the spaces to the right of each caption the category of each item and the financial statement(s) on which the item can usually be found. Use the following abbreviations:

Category

Financial Statement

Asset

A

Balance sheet

BS

Liability

L

Income statement

IS

Owners’ equity

OE

Revenue

R

Expense

E

Gain

G

Loss

LS

Accumulated depreciation

_________

_________

Long term debt

_________

_________

Equipment

_________

_________

Loss on sale of short term

_________

_________

investments

_________

_________

Net income

_________

_________

Merchandise inventory

_________

_________

Other accrued liabilities

_________

_________

Dividends paid

_________

_________

Cost of goods sold

_________

_________

Additional paid in capital

_________

_________

Interest income

_________

_________

Selling expenses

_________

_________

understanding financial statement relationships the information presented here repre 636410

Understanding financial statement relationships The information presented here represents selected data from the December 31, 2010, balance sheets and income statements for the year then ended for three firms:

Firm A

Firm B

Firm C

Total assets, 12/31/10

?

$435,000

$155,000

Total liabilities, 12/31/10

$80,000

?

75,000

Paid in capital, 12/31/10

55,000

59,000

45,000

Retained earnings, 12/31/10

?

186,000

?

Net income for 2010

68,000

110,000

25,500

Dividends declared and paid during 2010

12,000

?

16,500

Retained earnings, 1/1/10

50,000

124,000

?

Required:

Calculate the missing amounts for each firm.

calculate retained earnings from the following data calculate the retained earnings 636411

Calculate retained earnings From the following data, calculate the retained earnings balance as of December 31, 2010:

Retained earnings, December 31, 2009

$311,800

Cost of equipment purchased during 2010

32,400

Net loss for the year ended December 31, 2010.

4,700

Dividends declared and paid in 2010

18,500

Decrease in cash balance from January 1, 2010, to December 31, 2010

13,600

Decrease in long term debt in 2010

14,800

calculate retained earnings from the following data calculate the retained earnings 636412

Calculate retained earnings From the following data, calculate the retained earnings balance as of December 31, 2009:

Retained earnings, December 31, 2010

$841,200

Decrease in total liabilities during 2010

183,200

Gain on the sale of buildings during 2010

64,400

Dividends declared and paid in 2010

18,000

Proceeds from sale of common stock in 2010

197,600

Net income for the year ended December 31, 2010

90,400

briefly explain why the amount of cash available to stockholders computed in part a 636416

Calculate cash available upon liquidation of business Kimber Co. is in the process of liquidating and going out of business. The firm’s accountant has provided the following balance sheet and additional information:

Assets

Cash

$ 18,400

Accounts receivable

62,600

Merchandise inventory.

114,700

Total current assets

$195,700

Land

$51,000

Buildings & equipment.

343,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

(195,000)

Total land, buildings, & equipment

199,000

Total assets

$394,700

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 46,700

Notes payable

58,500

Total current liabilities

$105,200

Long term debt

64,800

Owners’ Equity

Common stock, no par R

$110,000

retained earnings

114,700

Total owners’ equity

224,700

Total liabilities and owners’ equity

$394,700

It is estimated that all but 12% of the accounts receivable can be collected, and that the merchandise inventory can be disposed of in a liquidation sale for 85% of its cost. Buildings and equipment can be sold at $40,000 above book value (the difference between original cost and accumulated depreciation shown on the balance sheet), and the land can be sold at its current appraisal value of $65,000. In addition to the liabilities included in the balance sheet, $2,400 is owed to employees for their work since the last pay period, and interest of $5,250 has accrued on notes payable and long term debt.

Required:

a. Calculate the amount of cash that will be available to the stockholders if the accounts receivable are collected, the other assets are sold as described, and all liabilities and other claims are paid in full.

b. Briefly explain why the amount of cash available to stockholders (computed in part a ) is different from the amount of total owners’ equity shown in the balance sheet.

what was the average income tax rate for pope rsquo s garage for 2010 636417

Understanding and analyzing financial statement relationships—sales / service organization Pope’s Garage had the following accounts and amounts in its financial statements on December 31, 2010. Assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year then ended.

Accounts receivable

$ 33,000

Depreciation expense

12,000

Land

27,000

Cost of goods sold

90,000

Retained earnings

59,000

Cash

9,000

Equipment.

71,000

Supplies

6,000

Accounts payable

23,000

Service revenue.

20,000

Interest expense

4,000

Common stock

10,000

Income tax expense

12,000

Accumulated depreciation.

45,000

Long term debt

40,000

Supplies expense

14,000

Merchandise inventory

31,000

Sales revenue

140,000

Required:

a. Calculate the total current assets at December 31, 2010.

b. Calculate the total liabilities and owners’ equity at December 31, 2010.

c. Calculate the earnings from operations (operating income) for the year ended December 31, 2010.

d. Calculate the net income (or loss) for the year ended December 31, 2010.

e. What was the average income tax rate for Pope’s Garage for 2010?

f. If $16,000 of dividends had been declared and paid during the year, what was the January 1, 2010, balance of retained earnings?

calculate the difference between current assets and current liabilities for gary rsq 636418

Understanding and analyzing financial statement relationships— merchandising organization Gary’s TV had the following accounts and amounts in its financial statements on December 31, 2010. Assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year then ended.

Interest expense

$ 36,000

Paid in capital

80,000

Accumulated depreciation.

24,000

Notes payable (long term)

280,000

Rent expense

72,000

Merchandise inventory

840,000

Accounts receivable

192,000

Depreciation expense

12,000

Land

128,000

Retained earnings

900,000

Cash

144,000

Cost of goods sold

1,760,000

Equipment.

72,000

Income tax expense

240,000

Accounts payable

92,000

Sales revenue

2,480,000

Required:

a. Calculate the difference between current assets and current liabilities for Gary’s TV at December 31, 2010.

b. Calculate the total assets at December 31, 2010.

c. Calculate the earnings from operations (operating income) for the year ended December 31, 2010.

d. Calculate the net income (or loss) for the year ended December 31, 2010.

e. What was the average income tax rate for Gary’s TV for 2010?

f. If $256,000 of dividends had been declared and paid during the year, what was the January 1, 2010, balance of retained earnings?

what is the company rsquo s average income tax rate 636419

Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of changes in owners’ equity; analyze results The following information was obtained from the records of Breanna, Inc.:

Accounts receivable

$ 10,000

Accumulated depreciation.

52,000

Cost of goods sold

128,000

Income tax expense

8,000

Cash

65,000

Sales

200,000

Equipment.

120,000

Selling, general, and administrative expenses

34,000

Common stock (9,000 shares)

90,000

Accounts payable

15,000

Retained earnings, 1/1/10.

23,000

Interest expense

6,000

Merchandise inventory

37,000

Long term debt

40,000

Dividends declared and paid during 2010

12,000

Except as otherwise indicated, assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year ended December 31, 2010. There were no changes in paid in capital during the year.

Required:

a. Prepare an income statement and statement of changes in owners’ equity for the year ended December 31, 2010, and a balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for Breanna, Inc.

Based on the financial statements that you have prepared for part a, answer the questions in parts b–e. Provide brief explanations for each of your answers and state any assumptions you believe are necessary to ensure that your answers are correct.

b. What is the company’s average income tax rate?

c. What interest rate is charged on long term debt?

d. What is the par value per share of common stock?

e. What is the company’s dividend policy (i.e., what proportion of the company’s earnings are used for dividends)?

what interest rate is charged on long term debt 636420

Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of changes in owners’ equity; analyze results The following information was obtained from the records of Shae, Inc.:

Merchandise inventory

$264,000

Notes payable (long term)

300,000

Sales

900,000

Buildings and equipment.

504,000

Selling, general, and administrative expenses

72,000

Accounts receivable

120,000

Common stock (42,000 shares)

210,000

Income tax expense

84,000

Cash

192,000

Retained earnings, 1/1/10

129,000

Accrued liabilities.

18,000

Cost of goods sold

540,000

Accumulated depreciation.

216,000

Interest expense

48,000

Accounts payable

90,000

Dividends declared and paid during 2010

39,000

Except as otherwise indicated, assume that all balance sheet items reflect account balances at December 31, 2010, and that all income statement items reflect activities that occurred during the year ended December 31, 2010. There were no changes in paid in capital during the year.

Required:

a. Prepare an income statement and statement of changes in owners’ equity for the year ended December 31, 2010, and a balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for Shae, Inc.

Based on the financial statements that you have prepared for part a, answer the questions in parts b–e. Provide brief explanations for each of your answers and state any assumptions you believe are necessary to ensure that your answers are correct.

b. What is the company’s average income tax rate?

c. What interest rate is charged on long term debt?

d. What is the par value per share of common stock?

e. What is the company’s dividend policy (i.e., what proportion of the company’s earnings is used for dividends)?

indicate the amount and effect or minus of each transaction on total assets total li 636422

Transaction analysis—quantitative; analyze results Kenisha Morgan owns and operates Morgan’s Furniture Emporium, Inc. The balance sheet totals for assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity at August 1, 2010, are as indicated. Described here are several transactions entered into by the company throughout the month of August.

Required:

a. Indicate the amount and effect (+ or −) of each transaction on total assets, total liabilities, and total owner’s equity, and then compute the new totals for each category. The first transaction is provided as an illustration.

Owner’s

Assets

Liabilities

Equity

August 1, 2010, totals

$700,000

$550,000

$150,000

August 3, borrowed $24,000 in cash from the bank

+24,000

+ 24,000

New totals

$724,000

$574,000

$150,000

August 7, bought merchandise inventory valued at

$38,000 on account

_________

_________

_________

New totals

August 10, paid $14,000 cash for operating expenses

_________

_________

_________

New totals

August 14, received $100,000 in cash from sales of

merchandise that had cost $66,000.

_________

_________

_________

New totals

August 17, paid $28,000 owed on accounts payable

_________

_________

_________

New totals

August 21, collected $34,000 of accounts receivable

_________

_________

_________

New totals

August 24, repaid $20,000 to the bank plus $400 interest

_________

_________

_________

New totals

August 29, paid Kenisha Morgan a cash dividend of $10,000

_________

_________

_________

New totals

b. What was the amount of net income (or loss) during August? How much were total revenues and total expenses during August?

c. What were the net changes during the month of August in total assets, total liabilities, and total owner’s equity?

d. Explain to Kenisha Morgan which transactions caused the net change in her owner’s equity during August.

e. Explain why dividend payments are not an expense, but interest is an expense.

f. Explain why the money borrowed from the bank increased assets but did not increase net income.

g. Explain why paying off accounts payable and collecting accounts receivable do not affect net income.

complete the balance sheet at december 31 2010 636424

Complete the balance sheet using cash flow data Following is a partially completed balance sheet for Epsico, Inc., at December 31, 2010, together with comparative data for the year ended December 31, 2009. From the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2010, you determine the following:

Net income for the year ended December 31, 2010, was $26.

Dividends paid during the year ended December 31, 2010, were $8.

Cash increased $8 during the year ended December 31, 2010.

The cost of new equipment acquired during 2010 was $15; no equipment was disposed of.

There were no transactions affecting the land account during 2010, but it is estimated that the fair market value of the land at December 31, 2010, is $42.

Required:

Complete the balance sheet at December 31, 2010.

EPSICO, INC.

Balance Sheets

December 31, 2010 and 2009

2010

2009

2010

2009

Assets

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

Current assets:

Current liabilities:

Cash

$

30

Note payable

49

40

Accounts receivable

126

120

Accounts payable

123

110

Inventory

241

230

Total current assets

$

380

Total current liabilities

172

150

Long term debt

80

Land

$

$ 25

Total liabilities

$

230

Equipment

375

Owners’ Equity

Less: Accumulated

Common stock

200

200

depreciation

(180)

(160)

Retained earnings

190

Total land & equipment

$

$240

Total owners’ equity

$

390

Total liabilities and

Total assets

$

620

owners’ equity

$

620

calculate the missing amounts for each year 636425

Understanding income statement relationships—Levi Strauss & Co. Following are selected data from the November 30, 2008, and November 25, 2007, consolidated balance sheets and income statements for the years then ended for Levi Strauss & Co. and Subsidiaries. All amounts are reported in thousands.

2008

2007

Net revenues

4,400,914

$

Cost of goods sold

?

2,318,883

Gross profit

2,139,802

2,042,046

Selling, general, administrative, and other operating

expenses, net

?

1,401,005

Operating income

?

?

Interest expense and other expenses, net

156,903

265,415

Income before income taxes

368,169

?

Income tax expense (benefit)

?

(84,759)

Net income

229,285

$ 460,385

As at November 30 and 25, respectively:

Total assets

2,776,875

$ ?

Total liabilities

3,125,800

3,244,575

Total stockholders’ deficit

?

(393,909)

Required:

Calculate the missing amounts for each year.

explain how your projected income statement for the semester is likely to impact you 636427

Prepare a personal balance sheet and projected income statement; explain financial statement relationships.

a. Prepare a personal balance sheet for yourself as of today. Work at identifying your assets and liabilities; use rough estimates for amounts.

b. Prepare a projected income statement for yourself for the current semester. Work at identifying your revenues and expenses, again using rough estimates for amounts.

c. Explain how your projected income statement for the semester is likely to impact your financial position (i.e., balance sheet) at the end of the semester. (Note: You are not required to prepare a projected balance sheet.)

d. Identify the major sources (and uses) of cash that you are expecting to receive (and spend) this semester. (Note: You are not required to prepare a projected statement of cash flows.)

e. Give three possible explanations why a full time college student might incur a substantial net loss during the fall semester of her junior year, yet have more cash at the end of the semester than she had at the beginning.

the break even point for the expected sales mix is round to nearest whole unit 636495

Mark Corporation produces two models of calculators. The Business model sells for $60, and the Math model sells for $40. The variable expenses are given below:

 

Business

Math

 

Model

Model

Variable production costs per unit

$15

$16

Variable selling and administrative expenses per unit

$9

$6

The fixed expenses are $75,000 per month. The expected monthly sales of each model are: Business, 1,000 units; Math, 500 units.

The break even point for the expected sales mix is (round to nearest whole unit):

A) 833 of each

B) 1,667 Business and 833 Math

C) 1,667 of each

D) 833 Business and 1,667 Math

how many units would have to be sold to break even 636500

The following budgeted income statement was prepared by Fullton Corporation:

Sales (100 units at $100 a unit)

 

$10,000

Cost of goods sold:

 

 

Direct labor (variable)

$1,500

 

Direct materials

1,400

 

Variable factory overhead

1,000

 

Fixed factory overhead

500

4,400

Gross margin

 

5,600

Selling expenses:

 

 

Variable

600

 

Fixed

1,000

 

Administrative expenses:

 

 

Variable

500

 

Fixed

1,000

3,100

Net operating income

 

$ 2,500

How many units would have to be sold to break even?

A) 50

B) 58

C) 68

D) 75

cash flow analysis cash flows from operating activities are 635956

Cash payments for interest:

($12)

Retirement of common stock:

($32)

Cash payments to merchandise suppliers:

($85)

Purchase of land:

($8)

Sale of equipment:

$30

Payments of dividends:

($37)

Cash payment for salaries:

($35)

Cash collection from customers:

$260

Purchase of equipment:

($40)

Cash Flow Analysis Cash flows from operating activities are

a. $91

b. $128

c. $140

d. $175

cash flow analysis cash flows from investing activities are 635957

Cash payments for interest:

($12)

Retirement of common stock:

($32)

Cash payments to merchandise suppliers:

($85)

Purchase of land:

($8)

Sale of equipment:

$30

Payments of dividends:

($37)

Cash payment for salaries:

($35)

Cash collection from customers:

$260

Purchase of equipment:

($40)

Cash Flow Analysis Cash flows from investing activities are

a. $(67)

b. $(48)

c. $(18)

d. $(10)

cash flow analysis cash flows from financing activities are 635958

Cash payments for interest:

($12)

Retirement of common stock:

($32)

Cash payments to merchandise suppliers:

($85)

Purchase of land:

($8)

Sale of equipment:

$30

Payments of dividends:

($37)

Cash payment for salaries:

($35)

Cash collection from customers:

$260

Purchase of equipment:

($40)

Cash Flow Analysis Cash flows from financing activities are

a. $(81)

b. $(69)

c. $(49)

d. $(37)

how do you interpret this amount does it mean that starbucks has 2 2 billion in cash 635964

Retained Earnings Take a look at the balance sheet for Starbucks. On it, retained earnings are about $2.2 billion. How do you interpret this amount? Does it mean that Starbucks has $2.2 billion in cash available to spend?

Price Ratios Peninsular Research has a client who has inquired about the valuation method best suited for comparison of companies in an industry that has the following characteristics:

Principal competitors within the industry are located in the United States, France, Japan, and Brazil.

The industry is currently operating at a cyclical low, with many firms reporting losses. The industry is subject to rapid technological change.

John Jones, CFA, recommends that the client consider the price earnings ratio, price book value ratio, and price sales ratio. Determine which one of the three valuation ratios is most appropriate for comparing companies in this industry. Support your answer with two reasons that make that ratio superior to either of the other two ratios.

what are retained earnings for the year 635965

Income Statements Given the following information for Smashville, Inc., construct an income statement for the year:

Cost of goods sold:

$149,000

Investment income:

$1,900

Net sales:

$294,000

Operating expense:

$62,000

Interest expense:

$6,200

Dividends:

$4,300

Tax rate:

35%

What are retained earnings for the year?

debt and equity are not no dividends are paid next year rsquo s sales are projected 635968

Calculating EFN The most recent financial statements for Bradley, Inc., are shown here (assuming no income taxes):

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Sales

$4,800

Assets

$14,200

Debt

$9,900

Costs

3,180

Equity

4,300

Net income

$1,620

Total

$14,200

Total

$14,200

Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Debt and equity are not. No dividends are paid. Next year’s sales are projected to be $5,616. What is the external financing needed?

cash flow statement given the following information for hetrich inc calculate the op 635970

Cash Flow Statement Given the following information for Hetrich, Inc., calculate the operating cash flow, investment cash flow, financing cash flow, and net cash flow:

Net income:

$140

Depreciation:

$49

Issuance of new stock:

$14

Repurchase of debt:

$18

Sale of property:

$19

Purchase of equipment:

$62

Dividend payments:

$9

Interest payments:

$26

a dividend of 1 050 was paid and martin wishes to maintain a constant payout ratio n 635971

EFN The most recent financial statements for Martin, Inc., are shown here:

Income Statement

Balance Sheet

Sales

$27,500

Assets

$105,000

Debt

$43,000

Costs

19,450

Equity

62,000

Taxable income

$8,050

Total

$105,000

Total

$105,000

Taxes (34%)

2,737

Net income

$5,313

Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Debt and equity are not. A dividend of $1,050 was paid, and Martin wishes to maintain a constant payout ratio. Next year’s sales are projected to be $31,000. What is the external financing needed?

what will be the price of the stock on the ex dividend date if the dividend is decla 636206

The Mann Company belongs to a risk class for which the appropriate discount rate is 10 percent. Mann currently has 100,000 outstanding shares selling at $100 each. The firm is contemplating the declaration of a $5 dividend at the end of the fiscal year that just began. Answer the following questions based on the Miller and Modigliani model, which is discussed in the text.

a. What will be the price of the stock on the ex dividend date if the dividend is declared?

b. What will be the price of the stock at the end of the year if the dividend is not declared?

c. If Mann makes $2 million of new investments at the beginning of the period, earns net income of $1 million, and pays the dividend at the end of the year, how many shares of new stock must the firm issue to meet its funding needs?

d. Is it realistic to use the MM model in the real world to value stock? Why or why not?

what is the ex dividend price of novis s stock if the board follows its current poli 636209

The net income of Novis Corporation, which has 10,000 outstanding shares and a 100 percent payout policy, is $32,000. The expected value of the firm one year hence is $1,545,600. The appropriate discount rate for Novis is 12 percent.

a. What is the current value of the firm?

b. What is the ex dividend price of Novis’s stock if the board follows its current policy?

c. At the dividend declaration meeting, several board members claimed that the dividend is too meager and is probably depressing Novis’s price. They proposed that Novis sell enough new shares to finance a $4.25 dividend.

i. Comment on the claim that the low dividend is depressing the stock price. Support your argument with calculations.

ii. If the proposal is adopted, at what price will the new shares sell and how many will be sold?

should the cash be paid today or in three years which of the two options generates t 636211

Taxes, Issuances Costs, and Dividends

National Business Machine Co. (NBM) has $2 million of extra cash. NBM has two choices to make use of this cash. One alternative is to invest the cash in financial assets. The resulted investment income will be paid out as a special dividend at the end of three years. In this case, the firm can invest in Treasury bills yielding 7 percent, or an 11 percent preferred stock. Only 30 percent of the dividends from investing in preferred stock would be subject to corporate taxes. Another alternative is to pay out the cash as dividends and let the shareholders invest on their own in Treasury bills with the same yield. The corporate tax rate is 35 percent, and the individual tax rate is 31 percent. Should the cash be paid today or in three years? Which of the two options generates the highest after tax income for the shareholders?

do the results of elton and gruber s study imply that firms will maximize shareholde 636213

In their 1970 paper on dividends and taxes, Elton and Gruber reported that the exdividend– date drop in a stock’s price as a percentage of the dividend should equal the ratio of 1 minus the ordinary income tax rate to 1 minus the capital gains rate; that is,

Pe – pb/D =1 To/1 Tc

where

Pe _ The ex dividend stock price

Pb _ The stock price before it trades ex dividend

D _ The amount of the dividend

To _ The tax rate on ordinary income

Tc _ The effective tax rate on capital gains

Note: As we pointed out in the text, effective tax rate of capital gains is less than the actual tax rate, because their realization may be postponed. Indeed, because investors could postpone their realizations indefinitely, the effective rate could be zero.

a. If To = Tc = 0, how much will the stock’s price fall?

b. If To ≠ 0 and Tc = 0, how much will it fall?

c. Explain the results you found in (a) and (b).

d. Do the results of Elton and Gruber’s study imply that firms will maximize shareholder wealth by not paying dividends?

suppose the only investment choice is stock that yields 12 percent what personal tax 636214

After completing its capital spending for the year, Carlson Manufacturing has $1,000 extra cash. Carlson’s managers must choose between investing the cash in Treasury bonds that yield 8 percent or paying the cash out to investors who would invest in the bonds themselves.

a. If the corporate tax rate is 35 percent, what tax rate on ordinary income would make the investors equally willing to receive the dividend and to let Carlson invest the money?

b. Is the answer to part (a) reasonable? Why or why not?

c. Suppose the only investment choice is stock that yields 12 percent. What personal tax rate will make the stockholders indifferent to the outcome of Carlson’s dividend decision?

d. Is this a compelling argument for a low dividend payout ratio? Why or why not?

the bonds were sold at par what is their yield to maturity 636218

Suppose the Du Pont Company currently has outstanding series 4.50, nonconvertible preferred stock that pays an annual dividend of $4.50. Du Pont has also issued 11 percent bonds that will mature in 10 years. The stock and bonds have about the same risk.

a. The current price of the 4.50 preferred stock is 50 1⁄2. What is its dividend yield?

b. The bonds were sold at par. What is their yield to maturity?

c. As a financial consultant, you want to know the after tax yields for each of these investments. The corporate tax rate is 34 percent and the personal tax rate is 28 percent. Compute the after tax yields on Du Pont’s preferred stock and its bonds for each of the following groups:

i. General Motors’s tax exempt pension.

ii. General Motors Corporation.

d. Which group do you believe owns the most Du Pont stock?

she is willing to buy and sell in order to maximize her after tax returns and she ha 636220

1. Your aunt is in a high tax bracket and would like to minimize the tax burden of her investment portfolio. She is willing to buy and sell in order to maximize her after tax returns and she has asked for your advice. What would you suggest she do?

A Resolution of Real World Factors?

2. In the May 4, 1981, issue of Fortune, an article entitled “Fresh Evidence That Dividends Don’t Matter” stated, “All told, 115 companies of the 500 [largest industrial corporations] raised their payout every year during the period [1970–1989]. Investors in this . . . group would have fared somewhat better than investors in the 500 as a whole: the median total [annual compound] return of the 115 was 10.7% during the decade versus 9.4% for the 500.” Is this evidence that investors prefer dividends to capital gains? Why or why not?

the term of the lease is five years mercer leasing corp is in the 35 percent tax bra 636228

Super Sonics Entertainment is considering borrowing money at 11 percent and purchasing a machine that costs $350,000. The machine will be depreciated over five years by the straight line method and will be worthless in five years. Super Sonics can lease the machine with the year end payments of $94,200. The corporate tax rate is 35 percent. Should Super Sonics buy or lease?

2. Maxwell, Inc., is entering negotiations for the lease of equipment that has a $200,000 purchase price. Maxwell’s effective tax rate is zero. Maxwell will be negotiating the lease with Mercer Leasing Corp. The term of the lease is five years. Mercer Leasing Corp. is in the 35 percent tax bracket. There are no transaction costs to the lease. Each firm can borrow at 10 percent. What is the negotiating range of the lease?

high electricity costs have made farmer corporation s chicken plucking machine econo 636231

High electricity costs have made Farmer Corporation’s chicken plucking machine economically worthless. There are only two machines available to replace it. The International Plucking Machine (IPM) model is available only on a lease basis. The annual, end of year payments are $2,100 for five years. This machine will save Farmer $6,000 per year through reductions in electricity costs in each of the five years. As an alternative, Farmer can purchase a more energy efficient machine from Basic Machine Corporation (BMC) for $15,000. This machine will save $9,000 per year in electricity costs. A local bank has offered to finance the machine with a $15,000 loan. The interest rate on the loan will be 10 percent on the remaining balance and five annual principal payments of $3,000. Farmer has a target debt to asset ratio of 67 percent. Farmer is in the 34 percent tax bracket. After five years, both machines are worthless. Only straight line depreciation is allowed for chicken plucking machines. The savings that Farmer will enjoy are known with certainty, because Farmer has a long term chicken purchase agreement with State Food Products, Inc., and a four year backlog of orders.

a. Should Farmer lease the IPM machine or purchase the more efficient BMC machine?

b. Does your answer depend on the form of financing for direct purchase?

c. How much debt is displaced by this lease?

what is the annual lease payment that will make wolfson indifferent to whether it le 636233

Wolfson Corporation has decided to purchase a new machine that costs $3 million. The machine will be worthless after three years. Only straight line method is allowed by the IRS for this type of machine. Wolfson is in the 35 percent tax bracket. The Sur Bank has offered Wolfson a three year loan for $3 million. The repayment schedule is three yearly principal repayments of $1 million and an interest charge of 12 percent on the outstanding balance of the loan at the beginning of each year. Twelve percent is the marketwide rate of interest. Both principal repayments and interest are due at the end of each year.

Cal Leasing Corporation offers to lease the same machine to Wolfson. Lease payments of $1.2 million per year are due at the end of each of the three years of the lease.

a. Should Wolfson lease the machine or buy it with bank financing?

b. What is the annual lease payment that will make Wolfson indifferent to whether it leases the machine or purchases it?

match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided 636383

Match the appropriate letter for the key term or concept to each definition provided (items 1–10). Note that not all key terms and concepts will be used.

a. Accounting

p. Generally accepted accounting principles

b. Entity

q. Internal auditing

c. Financial accounting

r. Securities and Exchange Commission

d. Bookkeeping

s. Financial Accounting Foundation

e. Certified Public Accountant

t. Financial Accounting Standards Board

f. Managerial accounting

u. Statements of Financial Accounting Standards

g. Cost accounting

v. Cost Accounting Standards Board

h. Certified Management Accountant

w. Governmental Accounting Standards Board

i. Auditing

x. Accrual accounting

j. Public accounting

y. Integrity

k. Certified Internal Auditor

z. Objectivity

l. Generally accepted auditing standards

m. Cash flows

n. Controller

o. Independence

a. Accounting

1. The process of identifying, measuring, and communicating economic information about an organization for the purpose of making decisions or informed judgments.

2. Accounting that recognizes revenues and expenses as they occur, even though cash receipts from revenues and cash disbursements related to expenses may occur before or after the event that causes revenue or expense recognition.

3. The process of examining the financial statements of an entity by an independent third party with the objective of expressing an opinion about the fairness of the presentation of the entity’s financial position, results of operations, changes in financial position, and cash flows.

4. Procedures that are used to keep track of an entity’s financial transactions and to accumulate the results of its operations.

5. Pronouncements of the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) that constitute generally accepted accounting principles.

6. Accounting that is concerned with the use of economic and financial information to plan and control the activities of an entity and to support the management decision making process.

7. An organization, individual, or group of organizations or individuals for which accounting services are performed.

8. A unit of the federal government that is responsible for establishing regulations and ensuring that full disclosure is made to investors about large companies and their securities traded in interstate commerce.

9. Pronouncements of the Financial Accounting Standards Board and its predecessors that constitute appropriate accounting for various business transactions (principles used for reporting financial position and results of operations to investors and creditors).

10. The personal characteristic of honesty, including being forthright in dealings and communications with others.

the contribution margin reveals a positive outcome of 80 000 while the gross margin 635753

Dude Skis wants to create an entirely new line of skis that can be used separately to ski uphill, and then lock together into a single monoski for downhill use. It is called the Chump Ski. The company projects incremental revenues from the new line of skis of $1,000,000, as well as incremental labor costs of $200,000, incremental material costs of $400,000, overhead that is directly traceable to the new product of $120,000, and a general manufacturing overhead allocation of $80,000. The existing production equipment can accommodate the new product with no changes. The calculation of the margin on the Chump Ski line is:

Contribution Margin Calculation

Gross Margin Calculation

Revenue

$800,000

$800,000

Expenses Materials

400,000

400,000

Labor

200,000

200,000

Traceable overhead

120,000

120,000

General overhead

80,000

Total expenses

720,000

800,000

Margin

$80,000

$0

Margin percentage

10%

0%

The contribution margin reveals a positive outcome of $80,000, while the gross margin calculation (which includes the general overhead allocation) shows no profit at all. If management only saw the gross margin calculation, it might elect to avoid rolling out the Chump Ski line, whereas the contribution margin might be sufficiently positive to encourage an alternative course of action.

dude skis plans to acquire an automated graphics lamination machine which it will us 635754

Dude Skis plans to acquire an automated graphics lamination machine, which it will use to laminate graphics onto its high end skis. It plans to eliminate three direct labor positions and add one maintenance technician as a result of this change. The lamination machine costs $100,000 and will be depreciated over five years. The fully burdened cost of all three direct labor positions is $90,000, while the fully burdened cost of the new maintenance technician is $55,000. Dude’s cost accountant constructs the following table to summarize the situation:

Direct cost additions

Annual machine depreciation

+$20,000

Maintenance technician

+55,000

Direct cost deductions

Direct labor positions

90,000

Net change in direct costs

$15,000

The table reveals that Dude should install the machine, since there will be a net decline in direct costs. Additional factors to consider might be any history of machine breakdowns that could lead to the rehire of the laid off workers, as well as the risk that the machine’s manufacturer will go out of business and can therefore no longer support the machine. These are qualita tive risk factors.

dude skis closely tracks the direct cost of its skis and does so by comparing actual 635755

Dude Skis closely tracks the direct cost of its skis, and does so by comparing actual variable costs per unit to budgeted costs. The following report shows its direct cost analysis for January production of its low cost line of children’s introductory skis. Actual unit production = 2,703 ski pairs

Variable Cost Item

Actual Cost per Unit

Budgeted Cost per Unit

Variance per Unit

Wood core

$42.50

$41.75

$0.75

Fiberglas wrap

38.84

37.52

1.32

Edging

4.11

4.03

0.08

Tip and tail caps

0.39

0.42

+0.03

Lamination

4.72

4.73

+0.01

Totals

$90.56

$88.45

$2.11

The report does not include direct labor, since Dude’s management does not feel that labor costs vary sufficiently with production volumes to warrant being included in the report.

in the table there is no customer service cost at all for stuffy skis since no custo 635756

Dude Skis sells to Stuffy Skis, which is a high end retailer of the most expensive all mountain skis, as well as Warehouse Sports, which retails the lowest cost skis through many outlets to beginner skiers. The skis that Dude sells to Stuffy have thehighest margins, and Stuffy requires little administrative support. Warehouse buys in massive volume, but only buys low margin items, and returns 20% of its purchases under various pretexts in order to clear out its inventory at the end of the season. Dude’s management wants to know how much it earns from each customer, and whether it should drop either one. Dude’s cost accountant constructs the following table:

Stuffy Customer

Warehouse Customer

Revenue

$520,000

$2,780,000

Direct costs Materials

210,000

1,390,000

Direct labor

100,000

550,000

Customer service cost

0

130,000

Sales returns cost

0

600,000

Total direct costs

310,000

2,670,000

Contribution margin ($)

$210,000

$110,000

Contribution margin (%)

40%

4%

In the table, there is no customer service cost at all for Stuffy Skis, since no customer service positions would be eliminated if Dude were to drop Stuffy as a customer. On the other hand, there are four customer service employees assigned to the Warehouse Sports account who would be laid off if Dude were to drop that account.

The analysis reveals that Stuffy Skis produces far more contribution margin than Warehouse Sports, despite much lower revenues. However, this does not mean that Dude should eliminate Warehouse as a customer, since it still produces $110,000 of contribution margin. If Dude has a considerable amount of overhead to cover, it may be quite necessary to continue dealing with Warehouse Sports in order to retain the associated amount of contribution margin.

however expanding by yet another 10 000 units may be a bad idea since the company mu 635757

Dude Skis is conducting its annual budgeting process, and the cost accountant is called upon to create a profit volume table that shows the amount of profit before taxes that Dude is likely to earn at different unit volume sales levels. The company currently produces 50,000 pairs of skis per year, and this figure is unlikely to decline. He learns that the company can produce an additional 10,000 pairs of skis without incurring any additional overhead costs. However, if the company expands production by an additional 20,000 pairs, it will incur an additional $750,000 in annual overhead expenses, and will likelyalso have to reduce its prices by 10% in order to achieve that volume level. Based on this information, he constructs the following table:

Number of Skis Sold

Number of ski pairs

50,000

60,000

70,000

Direct cost per pair of skis

$210

$210

$210

Net sales price per pair sold

380

380

342

Total revenue

19,000,000

22,800,000

23,940,000

Total direct cost

10,500,000

12,600,000

14,700,000

Total period cost

8,000,000

8,000,000

8,750,000

Profit

$500,000

2,200,000

$490,000

Profit %

3%

10%

2%

The analysis reveals that Dude should certainly make every effort to increase its sales by an additional 10,000 units, since this will result in a significant improvement in its profitability. However, expanding by yet another 10,000 units may be a bad idea, since the company must accept lower per unit prices as well as more overhead. In fact, the additional growth by 20,000 units, when coupled with an increased need for working capital and reduced profitability, may put the company in serious operating difficulties.

however the accounts receivable investment is assumed to increase since the company 635758

To continue with the preceding example, the management of Dude Skis is concerned about the working capital impact of expanding the business by 20,000 pairs of skis, and so it asks the cost accountant for a revised analysis that includes projected working capital costs for the baseline scenario of 50,000 units, and for the highest volume scenario of 70,000 units. The following table presents this information:

Number of Skis Sold

Number of ski pairs

50,000

70,000

Total revenue

$19,000,000

$23,940,000

Profit

500,000

490,000

Working capital components

+ Accounts receivable

+$1,600,000

+$2,400,000

+ Inventory

+3,200,000

+4,000,000

Accounts payable

1,100,000

1,300,000

Total working capital

$3,700,000

$5,100,000

The working capital assumptions in the table are that the same proportions of inventory and accounts payable will carry forward from the 50,000 unit activity level to the 70,000 unit activity level. However, the accounts receivable investment is assumed to increase, since the company will be making many of the incremental sales to a new group of retailers who are assumed to pay slower than the current group of retailers.

The working capital analysis reveals that Dude Skis would have to invest an extra $1,400,000 in its business in order to grow to a 70,000 unit level, while earning a somewhat lower profit. Clearly, the company should avoid this expansion, though the 60,000 unit sales level noted in the preceding example has a much better payoff, and should be considered.

dude skis currently has a small plastic injection molding operation in house from wh 635759

Dude Skis currently has a small plastic injection molding operation in house, from which it molds the tip and tail guards for its skis. A local plastic injection molding firm visits Dude Skis and offers to produce these items for $0.41 per set. Manage ment asks the cost accountant to determine whether this will result in improved profits for the company, using the assumption that the company would sell its injection molding machine if the supplier’s offer is accepted.

According to Dude’s cost records, the cost of a set of tip and tail guards is $0.56, which is comprised of the following items:

Cost Items

Direct Costs

Overhead

Resin

$0.25

Color

0.02

Scrap

0.01

Injection molder depreciation

0.03

Injection molder maintenance

0.02

Injection molding labor

0.05

Injection molding labor benefits

0.01

Manufacturing overhead

$0.12

Administrative overhead

0.5

Total

$0.39

$0.17

In the preceding table, the injection molder depreciation cost of $0.03 per unit would not have been included if the company had chosen to keep the machine. However, since it plans to sell the machine if it accepts the supplier’s offer, the depreciation is directly related to the decision, and so is a direct cost.

The costs comprising the overhead allocations will not decline if the company outsources this component, so the overhead is not a direct cost.

The table reveals that the direct costs associated with the analysis are lower than the supplier’s offered price, so the company should reject the outsourcing option and continue to produce the tip and tail guards in house. This decision is also reasonable from a risk management perspective, since Dude Skis would otherwise be permanently eliminating its capability to produce the part in house, which could potentially leave it at the mercy of any price increases later imposed by the supplier.

the total revenue from the proposed deal is 1 000 000 and dude rsquo s direct cost i 635760

Dude Skis has received an inquiry from a Japanese ski manufacturer that wants to outsource a production run of 5,000 skis. The total revenue from the proposed deal is $1,000,000 and Dude’s direct cost is projected to be $800,000, which is based on the $700,000 of materials and $100,000 of labor required to manufacture the skis. Initially, it therefore appears that Dude can earn $200,000 on the deal.

However, Dude’s production equipment is fully utilized during its single shift of operation, so this order will require employing a second shift that is paid a 10% shift differential, as well as an on site supervisor and maintenance technician. There will also be an assumed 10% scrap rate caused by having a less well trained work force on that shift. These additional costs are:

Cost Item

Amount

Overtime

$10,000

Scrap

70,000

Supervisor

65,000

Maintenance technician

45,000

Total

$190,000

Given that these additional costs leave a paltry $10,000 profit, Dude should either reject the inquiry or negotiate a higher price. The increased costs caused by the production being outside of Dude’s normal operating range caused the deal (as proposed) to fail.

dude skis is considering an expansion of is prototype skiing platform for disabled s 635762

Dude Skis is considering an expansion of is prototype skiing platform for disabled skiers. It constructed 100 units as a pilot project, and sold them easily at a price of $2,000 and a direct cost of $750 each. Initial forecasts indicate that Dude could sell 5,000 units per year. Thus, the initial analysis indicates that Dude could earn a contribution margin of $6,250,000 on this new opportunity.

The trouble is that the direct costing analysis is based on the costs incurred during a pilot project. Launching a fully equipped and properly managed product line will introduce an additional $1,000,000 per year of depreciation costs, as well as $4,000,000 of overhead costs that are directly related to the product. Consequently, the new product will be more likely to earn $1,250,000 per year than the $6,250,000 that was initially indicated.

doing so will require an investment in new machinery that will add 50 000 of depreci 635765

Lowry Locomotion produces toy cars. Its engineering manager is considering installing an automated packaging machine on one production line located in its Chicago facility that makes toy fire trucks. Doing so will require an investment in new machinery that will add $50,000 of depreciation to overhead, and will eliminate $1.50 per unit of direct labor. The company currently allocates overhead based on the amount of direct labor consumed.

After the installation is complete, the total amount of overhead has increased from $450,000 to $500,000, while the total amount of direct labor consumed by a toy fire truck has declined from $6.00 to $4.50. The total direct labor used throughout the Chicago facility has declined from $400,000 to $350,000. The calculation of its overhead allo cation before and after the installation of automated equipment is:

Overhead Per Dollar of Direct Labor Calculation

Before automation

$450,000 overhead / $400,000 labor = $1.13 per $ of direct labor

After automation

$500,000 overhead / $350,000 labor = $1.43 per $ of direct labor

Before automation, the toy fire truck consumed $6.00 of direct labor, so the amount of overhead assigned to each truck was $6.78 ($6.00 direct labor x $1.13 overhead allocation). After automation, the toy fire truck consumes $4.50 of direct labor, so the amount of overhead assigned to each truck declines to $6.44 ($4.50 direct labor x $1.43 overhead allocation). Consequently, the method of overhead allocation drives down the full cost of the fire truck.

After automation, the entire Chicago facility still uses $350,000 of direct labor, of which $250,000 is used on anoth er production line that manufactures toy racing cars. Prior to the automation, the racing car line had a total overhead allocation of $282,500 ($250,000 direct labor x $1.13 overhead allocation). Following automation, the racing car line still uses the same amount of labor, but its overhead allocation has increased to $357,500 ($250,000 direct labor x $1.43 overhead allocation).

Thus, the overhead allocation to the fire truck has declined, because its allocation base has declined, while the addition al overhead has now shifted to the racing car product, simply because its allocation base did not decline. The shift in al location between the two product lines is so extreme that the racing car line is now absorbing an additional $75,000 of overhead, even though the total amount of overhead only increased by $50,000; this is because the racing car line has proportionally more of the allocation base than it did before the automation project was completed.

lowry locomotion rsquo s cost accountant has not installed an abc system before and 635766

Lowry Locomotion’s cost accountant has not installed an ABC system before, and is overcome with zeal to create a highly detailed system with many cost pools and associated activity drivers. His first iteration of the implementation plan calls for data collection in the following areas:

Purchasing. Track the number of purchase orders issued, reminder contacts made to suppliers, and supplier visits.

Manufacturing. Track the number of machine minutes per batch, the number of machine setups, and the amount of time spent on rework.

Engineering. Track the time spent on production line layouts, engineering change orders, and research and devel opment.

Marketing. Track the time spent on designing new ad campaigns, the number of ad placements, and the time spent on target costing projects.

In short, the cost accountant wants to track everything about everyone. The best estimate of the cost of tracking the time usage of the 300 affected employees is one hour per week, at an average cost per hour of $30. The total data collection cost is therefore $468,000 (300 employees x $30/hour x 52 weeks). After learning of the projected data entry cost, the president prevails upon the cost accountant to begin with a pilot project that only encompasses the purchase order activity in the purchasing department. Since the purchasing department already tracks the number of purchase orders created, there is no additional data entry cost at all.

the company experiences a wide range of customer support issues with each customer w 635768

Lowry Locomotion’s Chicago facility has several thousand customers, most of which are retail stores and distributors. The company experiences a wide range of customer support issues with each customer, with some demanding rapid restocking intervals, cooperative marketing reimbursements, and early payment discounts. After conducting an ABC analysis that is focused on the cost of customers, Lowry arrives at the following results:

Customer Levels

Number of Customers

Profits Earned

Cumulative Profits

Revenue Earned

Cumulative Revenue

Top 10%

197

$800,000

$800,000

$3,200,000

$3,200,000

Next 40%

507

400,000

1,200,000

2,600,000

5,800,000

Next 40%

483

200,000

1,400,000

4,000,000

9,800,000

Low 10%

204

150,000

1,250,000

1,500,000

11,300,000

The analysis shows that Lowry should drop the 204 customers in its lowest 10th percentile, since it is losing money on them, even though it will give up $1,500,000 of revenues by doing so. This will also allow Lowry to spend more time focusing on the customers in its highest percentile, who are generating one half of the company’s profits. Also, eliminating the bottom percentile of customers will create additional production capacity, which Lowry may be able to use to bring in more profitable business.

sales through the internet are at full retail price but comprise only a small propor 635769

Lowry Locomotive’s Memphis facility has three distribution channels, which are Internet sales, distributors, and catalog sales. Sales through the Internet are at full retail price, but comprise only a small proportion of total sales. Distributors buy in large quantities, but also receive a 35% discount from the retail price. The catalog sales are at full retail price and have large sales volume, but the cost of creating and mailing the catalogs has increased recently. The marketing manager commissions an ABC study to examine the full cost of each channel. The results are shown in the following table:

Revenue

Variable Costs

Contribution Margin

Overhead Allocation

Net Profit

Catalog

$1,500,000

$900,000

$600,000

$575,000

$25,000

Distributors

3,250,000

2,600,000

650,000

365,000

285,000

Internet

250,000

150,000

100,000

60,000

40,000

Totals

$5,000,000

$3,475,000

$1,350,000

$1,000,000

$350,000

The analysis reveals that the overhead allocated to the catalog channel is so large that its net profitability has declined to near zero. In fact, the Internet channel absorbs so much less overhead that it now generates more profit than the catalog channel, despite having six times less revenue.

however costs have not declined at all upon further investigation lowry rsquo s mana 635771

Lowry Locomotion conducts a targeted ABC analysis of its customer service function, and concludes that it costs $10 every time a customer calls with a complaint. The cost pool is comprised of the cost of 10 customer service representatives, as well as the cost of the facility in which they are located, depreciation on their cubicles, and a fixed monthly charge for their 10 telephone lines. The entire annual cost of this cost pool is $425,000.

Lowry receives 42,500 calls per year. Management elects to reduce the cost of customer service by reducing a variety of issues about which customers are calling. After three months, the company has reduced the number of calls by 3,800, or 9 percent of the total number of calls. However, costs have not declined at all. Upon further investigation, Lowry’s manage ment realizes that it has to reduce costs by 10 percent to eliminate one customer service employee, along with the cost of the phone line associated with that position. The cost of cubicle depreciation will not decline, since it is not practical to eliminate a single cubicle. Further, the cost of facility rent will not be eliminated under any circumstances, since the company has committed to a five year lease.

Lowry eliminates another 450 customer calls, which drops the total number of calls by 10 percent, and is able to lay off one worker and eliminate one phone line. Management now realizes that it only reduces overhead costs when it reduces customer calls in increments of 4,250 calls.

margin calculations use the following income statement for paul bunyan lumber co to 635943

Margin Calculations Use the following income statement for Paul Bunyan Lumber Co. to calculate gross and operating margins.

Paul Bunyan Lumber 2008 Income Statement

Net sales

$8,000

Cost of goods sold

6,400

Gross profit

$1,600

Operating expenses

400

Operating income

$1,200

Other income

80

Net interest expense

120

Pretax income

$1,160

Income tax

464

Net income

$696

Earnings per share

$3.48

Recent share price

$76.56

return calculations use the following balance sheet for paul bunyan lumber co along 635944

Return Calculations Use the following balance sheet for Paul Bunyan Lumber Co. along with the income statement in the previous question to calculate return on assets and return on equity.

Paul Bunyan Lumber 2008 Balance Sheet

Cash and cash equivalents

$400

Operating assets

400

Property, plant, and equipment

3,160

Other assets

216

Total assets

$4,176

Current liabilities

$720

Long term debt

612

Other liabilities

60

Total liabilities

$1,392

Paid in capital

$600

Retained earnings

2,184

Total shareholder equity

$2,784

Total liabilities and equity

$4,176

based on the information above what was white co rsquo s net amount of property plan 635946

Balance Sheet Assets White Company assets as of December 31, 2007:

Cash and cash equivalents

$150

Operating assets

$1,190

Property, plant, and equipment

$1,460

Total assets

$2,800

White Co. experienced the following events in 2008:

Old equipment that cost $120 and that was fully depreciated was scrapped Depreciation expense was $125

Cash payments for new equipment were $200

Based on the information above, what was White Co.’s net amount of property, plant, and equipment at the end of 2008?

a. $1,415

b. $1,535

c. $1,655

d. $1,660

cash flow analysis operating cash flow is 635952

Net income:

$16

Depreciation/amortization:

$4

Repurchase of outstanding common stock:

$10

Issuance of new debt:

$18

Sale of property:

$12

Purchase of equipment:

$14

Dividend payments:

$4

Cash Flow Analysis Operating cash flow is

a. $20

b. $16

c. $12

d. $30

cash flow analysis investing cash flow is 635953

Net income:

$16

Depreciation/amortization:

$4

Repurchase of outstanding common stock:

$10

Issuance of new debt:

$18

Sale of property:

$12

Purchase of equipment:

$14

Dividend payments:

$4

Cash Flow Analysis Investing cash flow is

a. $2

b. $(2)

c. $12

d. $(12)

cash flow analysis financing cash flow is 635954

Net income:

$16

Depreciation/amortization:

$4

Repurchase of outstanding common stock:

$10

Issuance of new debt:

$18

Sale of property:

$12

Purchase of equipment:

$14

Dividend payments:

$4

Cash Flow Analysis Financing cash flow is

a. $8

b. $(8)

c. $4

d. $(4)

the production manager of colossal furniture mr mammoth will receive a bonus if the 635720

The production manager of Colossal Furniture, Mr. Mammoth, will receive a bonus if the company records a profit of $10,000 in November. The company uses a hybrid accounting system for its production of high chairs for oversized infants. Mr. Mammoth has control over the percentage of completion for units in process in the process costing portion of the cost accounting system.

The actual percentage of completion for units in process is 42%, but Mr. Mammoth calculates that if he authorizes a change to 45% completion, this will cause a higher allocation of costs to work in process, and thereby increases profits just enough to earn him the bonus.

The cost accounting manager is not aware of the bonus situation, and does not complain about what appears to be a minor increase in the percentage of completion. Mr. Mammoth receives his bonus.

the internal audit staff of colossal furniture recommends to senior management that 635721

The internal audit staff of Colossal Furniture recommends to senior management that the percentage of completion used in its process costing calculation be fixed at 50%, thereby eliminating the type of manipulation described in the preceding example.

In December, the production manager (still Mr. Mammoth, despite his earlier manipulations) can earn yet another bonus if the company records a profit of $20,000. Near the end of the month, it appears that the company will be $5,000 short of its profit goal. To meet his target, Mr. Mammoth releases a large amount of work into the production area on December 31. No work is actually performed on any of these new projects, but because they are now categorized as work in process, the cost accountant must apply the standard percentage of completion to them.

The cost accountant allocates $5,000 of conversion costs to the new work in process items, which shifts these costs into the balance sheet as assets, thereby reducing the cost of goods sold by $5,000. Mr. Mammoth again earns his bonus.

used when there are modifications beyond a common processing point 635723

1. A hybrid costing system is not:

a. An operation costing system

b. Used when there are modifications beyond a common processing point

c. Used in a pure process costing environment

d. An amalgam of process and job costing systems

2. Process costing treats an entire production process as:

a. A single job

b. A large number of separate jobs

c. A single work center

d. A large number of work centers

3. The largest problem with process costing is:

a. Assigning costs to products in an efficient manner

b. Assigning costs where individual products cannot be differentiated

c. Using an estimated percentage of completion

d. Assigning costs to identical products

california chardonnay corporation operates several wineries that press their own gra 635724

California Chardonnay Corporation operates several wineries that press their own grapes. During this process, there is a split off point that produces an abundant amount of grape seed oil. The company may then sell the grape seed oil to various cooking oil manufacturers, or it may engage in several straining operations to further refine the grape seed oil into a more pure form that it can then sell to cosmetics manufacturers as the primary ingredient in skin moisturizers; alternatively, the company can then add a stabilizer to the purified oil and sell it to a shaving cream manufacturer as a face shaving lubricant.

California Chardonnay has two split off points – one where the grape seed oil is separated, and another where the purified oil is split off for sale as a skin moisturizer ingredient.

each spoiled carton consumes plastic resin having a cost of 0 25 henderson rsquo s c 635729

Henderson Industrial manufactures plastic cartons for local dairies. The historical amount of spoilage that it experiences is 1% of all production. Each spoiled carton consumes plastic resin having a cost of $0.25. Henderson’s cost accountant includes the cost of this resin in the carton bill of materials. The line items in the bill of materials are:

Line Item

Cost

Resin

$0.2500

Plastic cap

0.0200

Label

0.0150

Spoilage

0.0025

Total cost

$0.2875

The spoilage line item in the bill of materials is calculated as:

1% Probability of occurrence x $0.25 cost per unit

Henderson then multiplies the total cost in the bill of materials by the number of units produced in the period to calculate its cost of goods sold, thereby incorporating the cost of spoilage into its cost of goods.

to continue with the preceding example henderson industrial decides to stop recordin 635730

To continue with the preceding example, Henderson Industrial decides to stop recording normal spoilage in its bills of material, and instead records the actual cost of spoilage in a manufacturing overhead cost pool. It calculates this cost by adding up the number of spoiled cartons and multiplying by the component cost of each one. In May, the calculation is:

1,500 spoiled cartons x $0.25/unit resin cost = $375

Henderson’s cost accountant includes this cost in the manufacturing overhead cost pool, which is comprised of the following costs in May:

Manufacturing Overhead Line Item

Amount

Manufacturing supervisor salaries

$140,000

Building rent

50,000

Utilities

15,000

Spoilage

375

Total

$205,375

During May, Henderson manufactured 10,000,000 cartons. The amount of the overhead cost pool allocated to each carton is:

$205,375 / 10,000,000 cartons = $0.021 per carton

to continue with the preceding example quest clothiers sells a group of garments tha 635732

To continue with the preceding example, Quest Clothiers sells a group of garments that were subject to abnormal spoilage, in the amount of $2,000. Quest rarely experiences abnormal spoilage, and so prefers to account for the sale as a one time event, electing to net it against the cost of spoilage with the following entry:

Debit

Credit

Cash

2000

Abnormal spoilage expense

2000

micron metallic runs a large metal stamping machine that creates parts for washing m 635734

Micron Metallic runs a large metal stamping machine that creates parts for washing machines. In the June reporting period, it recorded $80,000 of scrap from its stamping operations. Since this amount usually represents about 5% of Micron’s cost of goods sold, which is a material amount, the controller always records scrap in a separate account. At the end of each month, a scrap hauler takes away the scrap metal and pays Micron based on the weight of the metal removed. The June payment from the scrap hauler is $800, which the controller records with the following entry:

Debit

Credit

Cash

800

Scrap expense

800

however it would soon go out of business if it were to do so for an extended period 635737

Snyder Corporation manufactures small, compact global positioning satellites. All of the personnel involved in their production are so highly qualified that the company will retain them even if production levels decline. The product requires a great deal of research and development expenditures, as well as prolonged quality testing. The cost breakdown for a satellite is:

Variable Costs

Overhead Costs

Components

$125,000

Assembly staff

$400,000

Quality control staff

150,000

Research staff

200,000

Building overhead

75,000

Manufacturing supervision

50,000

Total

$125,000

$875,000

The totally variable cost of a single satellite is only $125,000, so Snyder could theoretically make money by pricing its satellites in short term pricing situations for any amount over $125,000. However, it would soon go out of business if it were to do so for an extended period of time, since the company must also pay for a significant amount of overhead costs. IfSnyder hopes to be in business for any length of time, it will need to use the long term cost per satellite of $1 million as the minimum threshold for setting prices (not including a profit margin).

however it requires substantial downtime for cleaning so the paint shop is really on 635738

Horton Corporation currently has four products that it is processing through its paint shop, which is its bottleneck operation. The paint shop is available for use 24 hours a day, which is 1,440 minutes per day. However, it requires substantial downtime for cleaning, so the paint shop is really only available for 1,200 minutes per day. The following production schedule shows the jobs that are scheduled to run through the paint shop during the next month, in descending order by throughput per minute.

Product Description

Throughput per Minute of Bottleneck

Required Bottleneck Usage

Scheduled Production in Units

Bottleneck Usage (minutes)

Throughput per Product

Three tone widget

$36

3

150

450

$16,200

Two tone widget

25

2

125

250

6,250

Black widget

18

1

200

200

3,600

Blue widget

5

1

300

300

1,500

Total

775

1,200

$27,550

The table shows that the paint shop bottleneck is fully utilized, and that the minimum amount of throughput per minute scheduled through it is three hundred minutes of time to paint blue widgets, at $5 of throughput per minute.

from a profit maximization perspective the sales manager should give priority to sel 635740

1. What is considered an acceptable method for allocating overhead?

a. The number of units of the basis of allocation is very small

b. The number of units of the basis of allocation is very large

c. There should be as many cost pools as possible

d. You should alter the allocation method every month

2. What costs should not be considered when setting a long term price?

a. Variable costs

b. Allocated manufacturing overhead

c. Salesperson commissions

d. A fair profit margin

3. From a profit maximization perspective, the sales manager should give priority to selling products:

a. That the company is selling at a discount

b. That have a large amount of throughput

c. That have a large gross margin

d. That will become obsolete soon

skips conducts a marketing survey to decide upon the features it needs to include in 635741

SkiPS is a maker of global positioning systems (GPS) for skiers, which they use to log how many vertical feet they ski each day. SkiPS conducts a marketing survey to decide upon the features it needs to include in its next generation of GPS device, and finds that skiers want a device they can strap to their arm or leg, and which does not require recharging during a multi day vacation.

The survey indicates that skiers are willing to pay no more than $150 for the device, while the first review of costs indicates that it will cost $160 to manufacture. At a mandated gross margin percentage of 40%, this means that the device must attain a target cost of $90 ($150 price x (1 – 40% gross margin). Thus, the design team must reduce costs from $160 to $90.

The team decides that the GPS unit requires no display screen at all, since users can plug the device into a computer to download information. This eliminates the LCD display and one computer chip. It also prolongs the battery life, since the unit no longer has to provide power to the display. The team also finds that a new microprocessor requires less power; given these reduced power requirements, the team can now use a smaller battery.

Finally, the team finds that the high impact plastic case is over engineered, and can withstand a hard impact with a much thinner shell. After the team incorporates all of these changes, it has reached the $90 cost target. SkiPS can now market a new device at a price point that allows it to earn a generous gross profit.

milagro conducts market research and concludes that the product cannot sell for more 635742

Milagro Corporation is developing a new espresso machine that only works with its specially developed strain of coffee bean. Milagro conducts market research and concludes that the product cannot sell for more than $200. At the company’s required gross margin of 40%, this means that the target cost of the product is $120. Management sets a maximum design duration of six months, with milestone reviews at one month intervals. The results of the month end milestone reviews are:

Review Date

Cost Goal

Actual Cost Estimate

Actual Cost Variance from Goal

Allowance Variance From Cost Goal

Jan. 31

$120

$150

25%

30%

Feb. 28

120

143

19%

20%

Mar. 31

120

138

15%

15%

Apr. 30

120

134

12%

10%

May 31

120

Cancelled

5%

June 30

120

Cancelled

0%

As the table reveals, the Milagro project team was able to stay ahead of the cost target at the end of the first two months, but then was barely able to meet the allowable variance in the third month, and finally fell behind in the fourth month. Manage ment then cancelled the project, saving itself the cost of continuing the project team for several more months when it was becoming obvious that the team would not be able to achieve the target cost.

since the total cost of the treadmill is projected to be 500 this difference represe 635743

Active Exercise Machines is designing a new treadmill for the home exercise market, and is having trouble pricing the laminated rubber conveyor belt. Since Active is creating a treadmill in a non standard length, the conveyor belt supplier will incur a setup cost, and must spread this cost over the projected number of treadmills to be produced. Since the setup cost is significant, the cost per unit will decline dramatically if Active orders more conveyor belts. The cost is $95 per unit if Active only orders 5,000 belts, and drops to $50 if Active orders 10,000 belts. Since the total cost of the treadmill is projected to be $500, this difference represents 9% of the total cost, which is significant enough to bring to the attention of management. Consequently, the cost accountant presents management with two projected costs for the treadmill – one at a unit volume of 5,000, and another at a unit volume of 10,000.

which activities are elements of value engineering 635745

1. Which activities are elements of value engineering?

a. Reducing durability

b. Reducing product features

c. Reducing the number of parts

d. All of the above

2. Why is there a milestone review in target costing?

a. To review the expenses incurred by the target costing team

b. To see if product prices have changed since the project began

c. To examine changes in product technology

d. To compare the designed cost of a product to its target cost

3. The role of a cost accountant on a target costing team does not include:

a. Compiling the cost of the product

b. Evaluating the performance of the team

c. Cost variance analysis

d. Obtaining cost information from suppliers

entwhistle electric makes compact batteries for a variety of mobile applications it 635746

Entwhistle Electric makes compact batteries for a variety of mobile applications. It was recently purchased by Razor Holdings, which also owns Green Lawn Care, maker of low emission lawn mowers. The reason for Razor’s purchase of Entwhistle was to give Green an assured supply of batteries for Green’s new line of all electric lawn mowers. Razor’s corporate planning staff mandates that Entwhistle set a transfer price for batteries shipped to Green that equals its cost, and also requires that Entwhistle fulfill all of Green’s needs before it can sell to any other customers. Green’s orders are highly seasonal, so Entwhistle finds that it cannot fulfill orders from its other customers at all during the high point of Green’s production season. Also, because the transfer price is set at cost, Entwhistle’s management finds that it no longer has a reason to drive down its costs, and so its production efficiencies stagnate.

After a year, Razor’s corporate staff realizes that Entwhistle has lost 80% of its previous customer base, and is now essential ly relying upon its sales to Green to stay operational. Entwhistle’s profit margin has vanished, since it can only sell at cost, and its original management team, faced with a contracting business, have all left to work for competitors.

entwhistle electric creates five tons per year of black plastic shavings as part of 635747

Entwhistle Electric creates five tons per year of black plastic shavings as part of its production of battery casings. Since there is no market for black plastic scrap, the company has traditionally thrown it into the trash. The annual trash haulage and environmental disposal fees associated with this scrap are about $1,000.

Entwhistle’s fellow corporate subsidiary, Green Lawn Care, learns of the black plastic scrap situation, and offers to buy it from Entwhistle for a token $10 a ton, as well as haul it away for free. Green can melt down this scrap and use it in the black plastic trim on its electric lawn mowers.

Entwhistle agrees to the deal, not only because of the minor $50 in annual revenues, but also because of the eliminated disposal fees and the mitigated risk of having any environmental issues related to the scrap.

razor holdings adopts a transfer pricing policy under which each of its subsidiaries 635748

Razor Holdings adopts a transfer pricing policy under which each of its subsidiaries can add a 30% margin to the additional costs transferred to buying subsidiaries. In the following scenario, its Lead Supply subsidiary sends lead components to Entwhistle Electric, which incorporates the lead into its batteries. Entwhistle sends the batteries to Green Lawn Care, which includes the batteries in its electric lawn shears.

Lead Supply

Entwhistle Electric

Green Lawn Care

Transferred cost

$0

$5.85

13.98

Additional cost

4.50

6.25

15.00

30% markup

1.35

1.88

4.50

Transfer price

$5.85

$13.98

$33.48

Unfortunately, the market price for electric lawn shears is $30, so the Green Lawn Care subsidiary will only earn a profit of $1.02, or 3%, on each sale. However, the company as a whole will earn a profit of $4.25 ($1.35 for Lead Supply + $1.88 for Entwhistle + $1.02 for Green), or 14%.

Thus, Green Lawn Care likely questions why it is bothering to sell electric lawn shears, while corporate management is somewhat more pleased with the overall result.

the management of dude skis wants to know how much it will cost to increase producti 635752

The management of Dude Skis wants to know how much it will cost to increase production of its Drag Knuckle Skis from 5,000 units to 8,000 units, so that it can sell the additional 3,000 skis for a wholesale price (in aggregate) of $900,000. The most obvious direct cost is the cost of the wood core and graphite laminate used in the skis, at a cost of $150 per pair of skis. In addition, the company will require three additional staff whose labor cost will be $25 per pair of skis. Finally, the company must lease a lamination machine for $30,000, which it can then return to the lessor after the production run is complete.

For the purposes of this specific production increase decision, then, the associated direct costs are:

Incremental revenue

$900,000

Cost of materials ($150 x 3,000 units)

450,000

Cost of labor ($25 x 3,000 units)

75,000

Cost of lamination machine

30,000

Total of all direct costs

555,000

Contribution margin

$355,000

the company s break even in unit sales is closest to 635681

A manufacturer of tiling grout has supplied the following data:

Kilograms produced and sold

300,000

Sales revenue

$1,950,000

Variable manufacturing expense

$960,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

$266,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

$360,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

$232,000

Net operating income

$132,000

The company”s break-even in unit sales is closest to:

A) 43,774

B) 237,143

C) 76,615

D) 80,606

the company s contribution margin ratio is closest to 635682

A manufacturer of tiling grout has supplied the following data:

Kilograms produced and sold

300,000

Sales revenue

$1,950,000

Variable manufacturing expense

$960,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

$266,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

$360,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

$232,000

Net operating income

$132,000

The company”s contribution margin ratio is closest to:

A) 67.7%

B) 74.2%

C) 32.3%

D) 25.8%

the contribution margin ratio is closest to 635686

Kerensky Corporation, a wholesale company, has provided the following data:

Sales per period

1,000 units

Selling price .

$35 per unit

Variable production cost

$15 per unit

Selling expenses

$5,000 plus 5% of selling price

Administrative expenses

$3,000 plus 10% of selling price

The contribution margin ratio is closest to:

A) 57%

B) 58%

C) 42%

D) 62%

the margin of safety percentage is closest to 635687

Kerensky Corporation, a wholesale company, has provided the following data:

Sales per period

1,000 units

Selling price .

$35 per unit

Variable production cost

$15 per unit

Selling expenses

$5,000 plus 5% of selling price

Administrative expenses

$3,000 plus 10% of selling price

The margin of safety percentage is closest to:

A) 46%

B) 60%

C) 42%

D) 62%

he number of units needed to achieve a target net operating income of 20 000 is clos 635688

Kerensky Corporation, a wholesale company, has provided the following data:

Sales per period

1,000 units

Selling price .

$35 per unit

Variable production cost

$15 per unit

Selling expenses

$5,000 plus 5% of selling price

Administrative expenses

$3,000 plus 10% of selling price

The number of units needed to achieve a target net operating income of $20,000 is closest to:

A) 1,404 units

B) 542 units

C) 1,898 units

D) 1,361 units

business 1 000 units math 500 units 635689

Mark Corporation produces two models of calculators. The Business model sells for $60, and

the Math model sells for $40. The variable expenses are given below:

 

Business

Math

 

Model

Model

Variable production costs per unit

$15

$16

Variable selling and administrative expenses per unit

$9

$6

The fixed expenses are $75,000 per month. The expected monthly sales of each model are:

Business, 1,000 units; Math, 500 units.

The contribution margin ratio for the Business model is:

A) 40 percent

B) 75 percent

C) 85 percent

D) 60 percent

however the fixed overhead cost is related to the cost of the entire facility in whi 635690

Kelvin Corporation’s president asks the cost accountant to create an analysis of whether the company should drop its oldest product line, which is a series of mercury-based glass thermometers that are primarily sold into the elementary school market for chemistry classes for an average price of $5.25 each. The cost accountant investigates and finds the following costs on a per-unit basis:

Cost Item

Total Cost

Relevant Cost

Direct materials

$2.25

$2.25

Direct labor

0.75

0.75

Variable overhead

1.00

1.00

Fixed overhead

1.50

Total

$5.50

$4.00

The company intends to shut down the entire production line for these glass thermometers, so the variable overhead element of the cost will be eliminated if the product line is stopped. However, the fixed overhead cost is related to the cost of the entire facility in which the company operates, and these costs will not go away if the company drops the product line. Thus, though the total cost of a thermometer is $5.50, the cost relevant to this product elimination decision is $4.00. The $4.00 cost is less than the price being charged to customers, so the company will fare better if it retains the product line and uses its gross margins to help pay for fixed overhead.

this example contains several journal entries used to account for transactions in a 635697

This example contains several journal entries used to account for transactions in a perpetual inventory system. Mulligan Imports records a purchase of $1,000 of golf clubs that are stored in inventory:

Debit

Credit

Inventory

1,000

Accounts payable

1,000

Mulligan records $250 of inbound freight cost associated with the delivery of golf clubs:

Debit

Credit

Inventory

250

Accounts payable

250

Mulligan records the sale of golf clubs from inventory for $2,000, for which the associated inventory cost is $1,200:

Debit

Credit

Accounts receivable

2,000

Revenue

2,000

Cost of goods sold

1,200

Inventory

1,200

Mulligan records a downward inventory adjustment of $500, caused by inventory theft, and detected during a cycle count:

Debit

Credit

Inventory shrinkage expense

500

Inventory

500

mulligan imports decides to use the fifo method for the month of january during that 635699

Mulligan Imports decides to use the FIFO method for the month of January. During that month, it records the following transactions:

Quantity Change

Actual Unit Cost

Actual Total Cost

Beginning inventory (Layer 1)

+100

$210

$21,000

Sale

-75

Purchase (Layer 2)

+150

280

42,000

Sale

-100

Purchase (Layer 3)

+50

300

15,000

Ending inventory

=125

The cost of goods sold in units is calculated as:

100 Beginning inventory + 200 Purchased – 125 Ending inventory = 175 Units

Mulligan’s cost accountant uses the information in the preceding table to calculate the cost of goods sold for January, as well as the cost of the inventory balance as of the end of January.

Units

Units Cost

Total Cost

Cost of goods sold

FIFO layer 1

100

$210

$21,000

FIFO layer 2

75

280

21,000

Total cost of goods sold

175

$42,000

Ending inventory

FIFO layer 2

75

280

$21,000

FIFO layer 3

50

300

15,000

Total ending inventory

125

$36,000

Thus, the first FIFO layer, which was the beginning inventory layer, is completely used up during the month, as well as half of Layer 2, leaving half of Layer 2 and all of Layer 3 to be the sole components of the ending inventory.

Note that the $42,000 cost of goods sold and $36,000 ending inventory equals the $78,000 combined total of beginning inventory and purchases during the month.

mulligan imports decides to use the lifo method for the month of march the following 635700

Mulligan Imports decides to use the LIFO method for the month of March. The following table shows the various purchasing transactions for the company’s Golf Elite clubs. The quantity purchased on March 1 actually reflects the inventory beginning balance.

Date Purchased

Quantity Purchased

Cost per Unit

Units Sold

Cost of Layer 1

Cost of Layer 2

Total Cost

1-Mar

150

$210

95

(55 x $210)

$11,550

7-Mar

100

235

110

(45 x $210)

9,450

11-Mar

200

250

180

(45 x $210)

20 x $250)

14,450

17-Mar

125

240

125

(45 x $210)

20 x $250)

14,450

25-Mar

80

260

120

(25 x $210)

5,250

The following bullet points describe the transactions noted in the preceding table:

March 1. Mulligan has a beginning inventory balance of 150 units, and sells 95 of these units between March 1 and March 7. This leaves one inventory layer of 55 units at a cost of $210 each.

March 7. Mulligan buys 100 additional units on March 7, and sells 110 units between March 7 and March 11. Under LIFO, we assume that the latest purchase was sold first, so there is still just one inventory layer, which has now been reduced to 45 units.

March 11. Mulligan buys 200 additional units on March 11, and sells 180 units between March 11 and March 17, which creates a new inventory layer that is comprised of 20 units at a cost of $250. This new layer appears in the ta-ble in the “Cost of Layer #2” column.

March 17. Mulligan buys 125 additional units on March 17, and sells 125 units between March 17 and March 25, so there is no change in the inventory layers.

March 25. Mulligan buys 80 additional units on March 25, and sells 120 units between March 25 and the end of the month. Sales exceed purchases during this period, so the second inventory layer is eliminated, as well as part of the first layer. The result is an ending inventory balance of $5,250, which is derived from 25 units of ending inventory, multiplied by the $210 cost in the first layer that existed at the beginning of the month.

mulligan imports sells golf clubs for an average of 200 and which cost it 140 this i 635702

Mulligan Imports sells golf clubs for an average of $200, and which cost it $140. This is a cost-to-retail percentage of 70%. Mulligan’s beginning inventory has a cost of $1,000,000, it paid $1,800,000 for purchases during the month, and it had sales of $2,400,000. The calculation of its ending inventory is:

Beginning inventory

$1,000,000

(at cost)

Purchases

1,800,000

(at cost)

Goods available for sale

= 2,800,000

Sales

-1,680,000

(Sales of $2,400,000 x 70%)

Ending inventory

= $1,120,000

mulligan imports has a small golf shaft production line which manufactures a titaniu 635704

Mulligan Imports has a small golf shaft production line, which manufactures a titanium shaft and an aluminum shaft. Considerable machining is required for both shafts, so Mulligan concludes that it should allocate overhead to these products based on the total hours of machine time used. In May, production of the titanium shaft requires 5,400 hours of machine time, while the aluminum shaft needs 2,600 hours. Thus, 67.5% of the overhead cost pool is allocated to the titanium shafts and 32.5% to the aluminum shafts.

In May, Mulligan accumulates $100,000 of costs in its overhead cost pool, and allocates it between the two product lines with the following journal entry:

Debit

Credit

Finished goods – Titanium shafts

67,500

Finished goods – Aluminum shafts

32,500

Overhead cost pool

100,000

This entry clears out the balance in the overhead cost pool, readying it to accumulate overhead costs in the next reporting period.

mulligan imports resells five major brands of golf clubs which are noted in the foll 635706

Mulligan Imports resells five major brands of golf clubs, which are noted in the following table. At the end of its reporting year, Mulligan calculates the lower of its cost or net realizable value in the following table:

Product Line

Quantity on Hand

Unit Cost

Inventory at Cost

Market Per Unit

Lower of Cost or Market

Free Swing

1,000

$190

$190,000

$230

$190,000

Golf Elite

750

140

105,000

170

105,000

Hi-Flight

200

135

27,000

120

24,000

Iridescent

1,200

280

336,000

160

192,000

Titanium

800

200

160,000

215

160,000

Based on the table, the market value is lower than cost on the Hi-Flight and Iridescent product lines. Consequently, Mulligan recognizes a loss on the Hi-Flight product line of $3,000 ($27,000 – $24,000), as well as a loss of $144,000 ($336,000 – $192,000) on the Iridescent product line.

twill machinery orders 10 000 of sheet metal which arrives and is stored in the ware 635712

Twill Machinery orders $10,000 of sheet metal, which arrives and is stored in the warehouse. Twill records this transaction with the following entry:

Debit

Credit

Raw materials inventory

10,000

Accounts payable

10,000

Twill’s production scheduling staff creates job number 1200, which is designated to accumulate the costs associated with a laying press for an antique book bindery. The production scheduling staff authorizes the issuance of a pick list to the warehouse, which is used to pick items from stock for the construction of job 1200. The pick list includes the following items:

Item

Cost

Sheet metal

$1,500

Hardboard platen

450

Press bed

280

Adjustment wheel

150

Total cost

$2,380

Twill uses the following entry to record the transfer of raw materials to work in process for job 1200. Note that only a portion of the sheet metal is moved to work in process; the rest of the purchased amount remains in the warehouse, to be used on some other job.

Debit

Credit

Work in process (Job 1200)

23,80

Raw materials inventory

23,80

During production of the laying press, Twill experiences $300 of abnormal scrap, which it charges directly to the cost of goods sold (not to Job 1200), on the grounds that it must recognize the expense at once. The entry is:

Debit

Credit

Cost of goods sold

300

Work in process (Job 1200)

300

At the end of the month, $5,000 of normal scrap costs have accumulated in the waste overhead cost pool, which accumulates the costs of normal scrap and spoilage (see the Waste Accounting chapter). The cost accountant determines that 10% of this amount, or $500, should be allocated to Job 1200. The entry is:

Debit

Credit

Work in process (Job 1200)

500

Waste cost pool

500

Twill completes work on the laying press and shifts all related material costs to the finished goods inventory account. The entry is:

Debit

Credit

Finished goods (Job 1200)

2580

Work in process (Job 1200)

2580

Please note that these entries do not yet include labor costs or an allocation for manufacturing overhead; these topics are addressed in the following sections.

this is a continuation of the preceding example where twill machinery is building a 635713

This is a continuation of the preceding example, where Twill Machinery is building a laying press for an antique book bindery. Twill pays its employees at the end of each month, and records the following payroll entry for its production department:

Debit

Credit

Work in process (Job 1200)

8,000

Work in process (Job 1201)

16,000

2580

Work in process (Job 1202)

41,000

Credit

Overhead cost pool

35,000

Wages payable

100,000

At the end of the month, Twill allocates the indirect labor in the overhead cost pool to the various open jobs. Of the $35,000 of labor in the overhead cost pool, Twill allocates $4,000 to Job 1200 with the following entry:

Debit

Credit

Work in process (Job 1200)

4000

Overhead cost pool

4000

Twill completes work on the laying press and shifts all related labor costs to the finished goods inventory account. The entry is:

Debit

Credit

Finished goods (Job 1200)

12000

Work in process (Job 1200)

12000

This final entry comes from the $8,000 of direct labor that was initially charged against Job 1200, and the $4,000 of indirect labor that was allocated to it.

this is a continuation of the preceding example where twill machinery is building a 635714

This is a continuation of the preceding example, where Twill Machinery is building a laying press for an antique book bindery. During the most recent reporting period, Twill incurred the following costs, all of which it records in an overhead cost pool:

Expense Type

Amount

Production facility rent

$60,000

Equipment repair costs

15,000

Building repair costs

9,000

Production supplies

3,000

Total

$87,000

Twill allocates overhead costs to jobs based on their use of production equipment. Job 1200 accounted for 12% of total equipment usage during the month, so Twill allocates 12% of the $87,000 in the cost pool to Job 1200 with the following entry:

Debit

Credit

Work in process (Job 1200)

10440

Overhead cost pool

10440

Twill completes work on the laying press and shifts all related overhead costs to the finished goods inventory account. The entry is:

Debit

Credit

Finished goods (Job 1200)

10440

Work in process (Job 1200)

10440

the manufacturing facility usually experiences 2 000 hours of machine usage per mont 635716

The manufacturing facility usually experiences 2,000 hours of machine usage per month, so Twill adopts a standard overhead allocation rate of $40 per hour of machine usage, which it derives as follows:

$80,000 Average monthly overhead / 2,000 Hours of machine usage = $40/hour allocation rate

During the most recent month, Job 1200 incurred $10,440 of actual overhead costs (see the preceding example). In that month, it used 240 hours of machine time, which at a standard application rate of $40/hour, results in an overhead allocation of $9,600. Thus, the use of a standard overhead rate that is based on an historical average amount of costs incurred results in an $840 reduction in the amount of overhead charged to Job 1200.

In Month 3, the standard $40/hour rate is charged to 2,000 of machine time used, for a total allocation of $80,000. This leaves $7,000 of actual overhead costs remaining in the overhead cost pool (since $87,000 of actual overhead costs were incurred in Month 3). Rather than go through the effort of allocating this residual to any accounts or jobs, the cost accountant elects to charge it directly to the cost of goods sold with the following entry:

Debit

Credit

Cost of goods sold

7000

Overhead cost pool

7000

The net effect of this adjustment is that Twill records $7,000 more expense in the current month than might otherwise have been the case. If it had instead elected to use the allocation of actual overhead costs, the costs would have remained in the inventory account as an asset until the jobs were billed to customers.

allocating the variance to the inventory and cost of goods sold accounts 635718

1. You should not dispose of the difference between standard and actual overhead costs by:

a. Charging it to the cost of goods sold

b. Retaining it in an overhead cost pool for the next reporting period

c. Charging it to jobs

d. Allocating the variance to the inventory and cost of goods sold accounts

2. You should close a job record promptly in order to:

a. Keep from charging additional expenses to it

b. Encourage its use for fraudulent reporting

c. Prevent overhead from being charged to it

d. Both a. and c.

3. Direct labor may be fraudulently recorded in overhead in order to:

a. Defer its recognition as an expense

b. Accelerate its recognition as an expense

c. Record it as a liability

d. Record it as an equity line item

puller corporation uses process costing to calculate the cost of its ubiquitous plas 635719

Puller Corporation uses process costing to calculate the cost of its ubiquitous plastic door knobs, which are identical in all respects, and cost $0.25 each. Puller stores its plastic door knobs in an unfinished state and waits for customer orders before applying additional finishing operations.

The final finishing operation can involve either a chrome lamination operation, a spray on mahogany finish, or rolling in a tumbler that simulates distressed furniture. Each of these operations results in a different cost. The cost of additional finishing in chrome is $0.15, the mahogany finish is $0.05, and the tumbler operation is $0.12. Thus, the additional costs are signifi cantly different from each other, and will be completed in small batches, depending upon the size of customer orders.

Based on the variety of possible outcomes and the smaller size of production runs for finishing operations, Puller elects to keep its process costing system for the initial creation of plastic door knobs, but to switch to a job costing system to calculate finishing costs.

the company s margin of safety in units is closest to 635672

A company that makes organic fertilizer has supplied the following data:

Bags produced and sold

240,000

Sales revenue

$1,896,000

Variable manufacturing expense

$804,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

$520,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

$180,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

$270,000

Net operating income.

$122,000

The company”s margin of safety in units is closest to:

A) 140,000

B) 202,238

C) 125,714

D) 32,105

the variable expense per unit is 635675

The following data was provided by Truxton Corporation:

Sales

10,000 units

Selling price

$30 per unit

Contribution margin ratio

30%

Margin of safety percentage

40%

The variable expense per unit is:

A) $21

B) $9

C) $12

D) $18

the break even level in sales dollars is 635676

The following data was provided by Truxton Corporation:

Sales

10,000 units

Selling price

$30 per unit

Contribution margin ratio

30%

Margin of safety percentage

40%

The break-even level in sales dollars is:

A) $180,000

B) $90,000

C) $210,000

D) $54,000

net operating income at sales of 10 000 units is 635677

The following data was provided by Truxton Corporation:

Sales

10,000 units

Selling price

$30 per unit

Contribution margin ratio

30%

Margin of safety percentage

40%

Net operating income at sales of 10,000 units is:

A) $0

B) $36,000

C) $90,000

D) $300,000

the company s break even in unit sales is closest to 635678

A manufacturer of cedar shingles has supplied the following data:

Bundles of cedar shakes produced and sold

280,000

Sales revenue

$2,072,000

Variable manufacturing expense

$1,134,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

$436,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

$238,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

$164,000

Net operating income

$100,000

The company”s break-even in unit sales is closest to:

A) 130,149

B) 81,081

C) 25,038

D) 240,000

the company s contribution margin ratio is closest to 635679

A manufacturer of cedar shingles has supplied the following data:

Bundles of cedar shakes produced and sold

280,000

Sales revenue

$2,072,000

Variable manufacturing expense

$1,134,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

$436,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

$238,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

$164,000

Net operating income

$100,000

The company”s contribution margin ratio is closest to:

A) 66.2%

B) 73.0%

C) 27.0%

D) 33.8%

the company s degree of operating leverage is closest to 635680

A manufacturer of cedar shingles has supplied the following data:

Bundles of cedar shakes produced and sold

280,000

Sales revenue

$2,072,000

Variable manufacturing expense

$1,134,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

$436,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

$238,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

$164,000

Net operating income

$100,000

The company”s degree of operating leverage is closest to:

A) 2.80

B) 7.00

C) 2.29

D) 20.72

sunnripe expects to have a total of 57 600 in fixed expenses next year what is sunnr 635649

Sunnripe Company manufactures and sells two types of beach towels, standard and deluxe.  Sunnripe expects the following operating results next year for each type of towel:

 

Standard

Deluxe

Sales

$450,000

$50,000

Variable expenses (total)

$360,000

$20,000

Sunnripe expects to have a total of $57,600 in fixed expenses next year. What is Sunnripe”s break-even point next year in sales dollars?

A) $72,000

B) $144,000

C) $192,000

D) $240,000

an advertising agency claims that an aggressive advertising campaign would enable th 635651

Birney Company has prepared the following budget data:

Sales

150,000 units

Selling price

$25 per unit

Variable expenses

$15 per unit

Fixed manufacturing expenses

$800,000

Fixed selling and admin. expenses

$700,000

An advertising agency claims that an aggressive advertising campaign would enable the company to increase its unit sales by 20%. What is the maximum amount that the company can pay for advertising and obtain a net operating income of $200,000?

A) $100,000

B) $200,000

C) $300,000

D) $550,000

if the company increases its unit sales volume by 5 without increasing its fixed exp 635656

A cement manufacturer has supplied the following data:

Tons of cement produced and sold

220,000

Sales revenue

$924,000

Variable manufacturing expense

$297,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

$280,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

$165,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

$82,000

Net operating income

$100,000

If the company increases its unit sales volume by 5% without increasing its fixed expenses, then total net operating income should be closest to:

A) $5,000

B) $123,100

C) $105,000

D) $102,500

what is the company s unit contribution margin 635657

A tile manufacturer has supplied the following data:

Boxes of tiles produced and sold

580,000

Sales revenue

$2,842,000

Variable manufacturing expense

1,653,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

784,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

145,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

128,000

Net operating income

$132,000

What is the company”s unit contribution margin?

A) $0.23

B) $4.90

C) $3.10

D) $1.80

the company s contribution margin ratio is closest to 635658

A tile manufacturer has supplied the following data:

Boxes of tiles produced and sold

580,000

Sales revenue

$2,842,000

Variable manufacturing expense

1,653,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

784,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

145,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

128,000

Net operating income

$132,000

The company”s contribution margin ratio is closest to:

A) 29.4%

B) 4.7%

C) 63.3%

D) 36.7%

if the company increases its unit sales volume by 5 without increasing its fixed exp 635659

A tile manufacturer has supplied the following data:

Boxes of tiles produced and sold

580,000

Sales revenue

$2,842,000

Variable manufacturing expense

1,653,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

784,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

145,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

128,000

Net operating income

$132,000

If the company increases its unit sales volume by 5% without increasing its fixed expenses, then total net operating income should be closest to:

A) $6,600

B) $184,200

C) $134,422

D) $138,600

the unit contribution margin is 635660

Drake Company”s income statement for the most recent year appears below:

Sales (26,000 units)

$650,000

Less: Variable expenses

442,000

Contribution margin

208,000

Less: Fixed expenses

234,000

Net operating loss

$ (26,000)

The unit contribution margin is:

A) $17.00

B) $8.00

C) $1.00

D) $9.00

the break even point in sales dollars is 635661

Drake Company”s income statement for the most recent year appears below:

Sales (26,000 units)

$650,000

Less: Variable expenses

442,000

Contribution margin

208,000

Less: Fixed expenses

234,000

Net operating loss

$ (26,000)

The break-even point in sales dollars is:

A) $731,250

B) $676,000

C) $675,000

D) $720,000

if the company desires a net operating income of 20 000 the number of units needed t 635662

Drake Company”s income statement for the most recent year appears below:

Sales (26,000 units)

$650,000

Less: Variable expenses

442,000

Contribution margin

208,000

Less: Fixed expenses

234,000

Net operating loss

$ (26,000)

If the company desires a net operating income of $20,000, the number of units needed to be sold is:

A) 28,500

B) 31,000

C) 31,750

D) 26,500

the sales manager is convinced that a 60 000 expenditure on advertising will increas 635663

Drake Company”s income statement for the most recent year appears below:

Sales (26,000 units)

$650,000

Less: Variable expenses

442,000

Contribution margin

208,000

Less: Fixed expenses

234,000

Net operating loss

$ (26,000)

The sales manager is convinced that a $60,000 expenditure on advertising will increase unit sales by fifty percent without any other increase in fixed expenses. If the sales manager is correct, the company”s net operating income would increase by:

A) $44,000

B) $34,000

C) $30,000

D) $49,000

the company s unit contribution margin is closest to 635670

A manufacturer of premium wire strippers has supplied the following data:

Units produced and sold

560,000

Sales revenue

$4,704,000

Variable manufacturing expense

2,436,000

Fixed manufacturing expense

1,200,000

Variable selling and administrative expense

616,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

272,000

Net operating income

$180,000

The company”s unit contribution margin is closest to:

A) $2.95

B) $5.45

C) $7.30

D) $4.05

the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the m 635077

Normand Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning

the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

 

Units in beginning work in process inventory

400

Materials costs

700

Conversion costs

$8,700

Percentage complete with respect to materials

$3,700

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

70%

Units started into production during the month

10%

Units transferred to the next department during the month

6,400

Materials costs added during the month .

5,600

Conversion costs added during the month

$92,200

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,500

Percentage complete with respect to materials

80%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

25%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:

A) $45.66

B) $52.86

C) $47.94

D) $48.14

the cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing dep 635079

Ozdemir Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

 

Units in beginning work in process inventory

200

Materials costs

$1,800

Conversion costs

$600

Percentage complete with respect to materials

55%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

10%

Units started into production during the month

5,000

Units transferred to the next department during the month

4,500

Materials costs added during the month .

$74,800

Conversion costs added during the month

$128,800

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

700

Percentage complete with respect to materials

85%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

70%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you co puted. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $16.36

B) $14.38

C) $16.62

D) $15.01

the equivalent units for material for the month are 635080

The information below was obtained from the records of Bapst Company for the month of May. The company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system.

   

Labor and Overhead

 

Units

Percent Complete

Work in process inventory, May 1

3,000

30%

 

Started into production

20,000

   

Work in process inventory, May 31

4,000

40%

 

All materials are added at the beginning of the manufacturing process.

The equivalent units for material for the month are:

A) 21,600 units

B) 22,500 units

C) 16,000 units

D) 20,000 units

all materials are added at the beginning of the manufacturing process 635081

The information below was obtained from the records of  Bapst Company for the month of May. The company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system.

   

Labor and Overhead

 

Units

Percent Complete

Work in process inventory, May 1

3,000

30%

 

Started into production

20,000

   

Work in process inventory, May 31

4,000

40%

 

All materials are added at the beginning of the manufacturing process.

The equivalent units for labor and overhead for the month are:

A) 17,600 units

B) 18,500 units

C) 19,700 units

D) 21,600 units

the equivalent units with respect to the molding department s costs transferred from 635082

Marlan Manufacturing produces a product that passes through two processing departments. The units from the Molding Department are completed in the Assembly Department. The activity in the Assembly Department for the current month is presented below. Marlan uses the FIFO method in its process costing system.

Units in beginning work in process inventory (materials 0%

 

complete; conversion 25% complete)

8,000

Units transferred in from the Molding Department during the

 

month

42,000

Units completed and transferred to finished goods

38,000

Units in ending work in process inventory (materials 0%

 

complete; conversion 40% complete)

12,000

The equivalent units (with respect to the Molding Department”s costs) transferred from

the Molding Department to the Assembly during the month were:

A) 30,000 units

B) 38,000 units

C) 40,800 units

D) 42,000 units

the equivalent units for materials for the assembly department during the month 635083

Marlan Manufacturing produces a product that passes through two processing departments. The units from the Molding Department are completed in the Assembly Department. The activity in the Assembly Department for the current month is presented below. Marlan uses the FIFO method in its process costing system.

Units in beginning work in process inventory (materials 0%

 

complete; conversion 25% complete)

8,000

Units transferred in from the Molding Department during the

 

month

42,000

Units completed and transferred to finished goods

38,000

Units in ending work in process inventory (materials 0%

 

complete; conversion 40% complete)

12,000

The equivalent units for materials for the Assembly Department during the month

were:

A) 30,000 units

B) 38,000 units

C) 40,800 units

D) 42,000 units

prepare a production report for the department using the weighted average method 635084

Anchor Inc. uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for  a recent month.

Work in process, beginning:

 

Units in process

800

Stage of completion with respect to materials

60%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion……….

10%

Costs in the beginning inventory:

 

Materials cost …………………………………………………..

$1,296

Conversion cost ………………………………………………..

$2,416

Units started into production during the month

16,000

Units completed and transferred out …………………………

16,500

Costs added to production during the month:

 

Materials cost ……………………………………………………..

$47,076

Conversion cost …………………………………………………..

$497,213

Work in process, ending:

 

Units in process

300

Stage of completion with respect to materials

60%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion

70%

Required:

Prepare a production report for the department using the weighted-average method.

prepare a production report for the department using the weighted average method 635085

Ayres Inc. uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for a recent month.

Work in process, beginning:

 

Units in process

300

Stage of completion with respect to materials

60%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion

60%

Costs in the beginning inventory:

 

Materials cost

$1,314

Conversion cost

$6,102

Units started into production during the month

22,000

Units completed and transferred out

21,800

Costs added to production during the month:

 

Materials cost

$164,436

Conversion cost

$728,058

Work in process, ending:

 

Units in process

500

Stage of completion with respect to materials

60%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion

10%

Required:

Prepare a production report for the department using the weighted-average method.

determine the cost per equivalent unit for materials and conversion costs 635086

Bae Inc. uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for a recent month.

Work in process, beginning:

 

Units in process

100

Stage of completion with respect to materials

70%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion

90%

Costs in the beginning inventory:

 

Materials cost

$182

Conversion cost

$3,429

Units started into production during the month

10,000

Units completed and transferred out

9,700

Costs added to production during the month:

 

Materials cost

$27,986

Conversion cost

$373,815

Work in process, ending:

 

Units in process

400

Stage of completion with respect to materials

90%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion

70%

Required:

Using the weighted-average method:

a. Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.

b. Determine the cost per equivalent unit for materials and conversion costs.

c. Determine the cost of units transferred out of the department during the month.

d. Determine the cost of ending work in process inventory in the department.

using the weighted average method determine the equivalent units of production for 635089

Callet Inc. uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The

following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for

a recent month.

Work in process, beginning:

 

Units in process

500

Stage of completion with respect to materials

90%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion

70%

Units started into production during the month

23,000

Work in process, ending:

 

Units in process

400

Stage of completion with respect to materials

80%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion

90%

Required:

Using the weighted-average method, determine the equivalent units of production for

materials and conversion costs by compiling the “Quantity Schedule and Equivalent

Units” portion of the production report.

prepare a production report for the department using the fifo method 635090

Dachuna Inc. uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The following data concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for a recent month.

Work in process, beginning:

 

Units in process

500

Stage of completion with respect to materials

60%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion……………

70%

Costs in the beginning inventory:

 

Materials cost

$1,020

Conversion cost

$8,925

Units started into production during the month

10,000

Units completed and transferred out

9,600

Costs added to production during the month:

 

Materials cost

$31,488

Conversion cost

$259,548

Work in process, ending:

 

Units in process

900

Stage of completion with respect to materials

60%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion

90%

Required:

Prepare a production report for the department using the FIFO method.

determine the cost of ending work in process inventory in the department 635093

Edwards Inc. uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The following data  concern the operations of the company”s first processing department for a recent month.

Work in process, beginning:

 

Units in process

100

Stage of completion with respect to materials

50%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion……………

90%

Costs in the beginning inventory:

 

Materials cost

$260

Conversion cost

$3,366

Units started into production during the month

20,000

Units completed and transferred out

19,800

Costs added to production during the month:

 

Materials cost

$99,650

Conversion cost

$745,329

Work in process, ending:

 

Units in process

300

Stage of completion with respect to materials

60%

Stage of completion with respect to conversion

20%

Required:

Using the FIFO method:

a. Determine the equivalent units of production for materials and conversion costs.

b. Determine the cost per equivalent unit for materials and conversion costs.

c. Determine the cost of units transferred out of the department during the month.

d. Determine the cost of ending work in process inventory in the department.

the following data have been collected for four different cost items 635109

The following data have been collected for four different cost items.

 

Cost at 100

Cost at 140

Cost Item

units

units

W

$8,000

$10,560

X

$5,000

$5,000

Y

$6,500

$9,100

Z

$6,700

$8,580

Which of the following classifications of these cost items by cost behavior is correct?

 

Cost W

Cost X

Cost Y

Cost Z

A)

variable

fixed

mixed

variable

B)

mixed

fixed

variable

mixed

C)

variable

fixed

variable

variable

D)

mixed

fixed

mixed

mixed

to estimate what the profit will be at various levels of activity a manager can sim 635620

1. To estimate what the profit will be at various levels of activity, a manager can simply take the number of units to be sold over the break-even point and multiply that number by the unit contribution margin.

2. Incremental analysis is generally the simplest and most direct approach to decision  making.

3. To facilitate decision-making, fixed expenses should be expressed on a per-unit basis.

4. One assumption in CVP analysis is that inventories do not change.

5. On a CVP graph for a profitable company, the total expense line will be steeper than the total revenue line.

6. If sales volume increases, and all other factors remain unchanged, the contribution  margin ratio will decrease.

7. The break-even point for a capital intensive, automated company will tend to be higher than for a less capital intensive company while the margin of safety will tend to be lower.

8. An increase in the number of units sold will decrease a company”s break-even point.

9. Assuming that the unit contribution margin is positive, a 10% decrease in selling price will increase the break-even point in terms of unit sales more than will a 10% increase in the variable expense.

10. The break-even point is the point where total contribution margin equals total variable expenses.

11. The break-even point can usually be determined by simply adding together all of the expenses from the income statement.

12. Two companies with the same margin of safety in dollars will also have the same total  contribution margin.

13. If a company has high operating leverage, then profits will be very sensitive to changes in sales.

14. Operating leverage will decrease as the company”s margin of safety increases.

15. The overall contribution margin ratio for a company producing three products may be obtained by adding the contribution margin ratios for the three products and dividing the total by three.

sales at zinc are expected to be 600 000 next year assuming no change in cost struct 635638

The following information relates to Zinc Corporation for last year:

Sales

$500,000

Net operating income

$25,000

Degree of operating leverage

5

Sales at Zinc are expected to be $600,000 next year. Assuming no change in cost structure, this means that net operating income for next year should be:

A) $30,000

B) $45,000

C) $50,000

D) $125,000

barnes actual sales during november were 180 000 games what should the actual net op 635640

Barnes Corporation expected to sell 150,000 games during the month of November. The following budgeted data are based on that level of sales:

Revenue (150,000 games)

$2,400,000

Variable expenses

1,425,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead expenses

250,000

Fixed selling & administrative expenses

500,000

Net operating income

225,000

Barnes” actual sales during November were 180,000 games. What should the actual net operating income during November have been?

A) $450,000

B) $270,000

C) $420,000

D) $510,000

given these data the contribution margin ratio for the company as a whole would be 635648

Darth Company sells three products. Sales and contribution margin ratios for the three products follow:

 

Product

 

X

Y

Z

Sales in dollars

$20,000

$40,000

$100,000

contribution margin ratio

45%

40%

15%

Given these data, the contribution margin ratio for the company as a whole would be:

A) 25%

B) 75%

C) 33.3%

D) it is impossible to determine from the given data

the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the m 635052

Joos Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

600

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$7,300

Materials costs .

$2,300

Conversion costs

50%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

10%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

9,400

Units started into production during the month

8,600

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$196,300

Materials costs added during the month .

$315,800

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,400

Percentage complete with respect to materials

70%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

40%

The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:

A) $31.81

B) $34.73

C) $34.48

D) $36.47

all materials are added at the beginning of the process in the staining department t 635053

Harward Company”s Staining department recorded the following activity in June:

 

 

Labor and

 

Number of

Overhead Percent

 

Units

Completed

Work in process inventory, June 1

8,000

35%

Started into production during June

50,000

 

Work in process inventory, June 30

12,000

55%

All materials are added at the beginning of the process in the Staining Department. The equivalent units for labor and overhead for June, using the FIFO method, were:

A) 46,000 units

B) 49,800 units

C) 43,200 units

D) 52,600 units

all materials are added at the beginning of the process in the staining department t 635054

Harward Company”s Staining department recorded the following activity in June:

 

 

Labor and

 

Number of

Overhead Percent

 

Units

Completed

Work in process inventory, June 1

8,000

35%

Started into production during June

50,000

 

Work in process inventory, June 30

12,000

55%

All materials are added at the beginning of the process in the Staining Department. The equivalent units for labor and overhead for June, using the weighted-average method, were:

A) 52,600 units

B) 62,000 units

C) 50,000 units

D) 46,000 units

the equivalent units for materials for june using the fifo method were 635055

Harward Company”s Staining department recorded the following activity in June:

 

 

Labor and

 

Number of

Overhead Percent

 

Units

Completed

Work in process inventory, June 1

8,000

35%

Started into production during June

50,000

 

Work in process inventory, June 30

12,000

55%

All materials are added at the beginning of the process in the Staining Department.

The equivalent units for materials for June, using the FIFO method, were:

A) 46,000 units

B) 42,000 units

C) 58,000 units

D) 50,000 units

all materials are added at the beginning of the process in the staining department t 635056

Harward Company”s Staining department recorded the following activity in June:

 

 

Labor and

 

Number of

Overhead Percent

 

Units

Completed

Work in process inventory, June 1

8,000

35%

Started into production during June

50,000

 

Work in process inventory, June 30

12,000

55%

All materials are added at the beginning of the process in the Staining Department. The equivalent units for materials for June, using the weighted-average method, were:

A) 58,000 units

B) 52,600 units

C) 46,000 units

D) 60,000 units

the equivalent units for labor and overhead for march using the weighted average met 635057

Activity in Saggers Company”s Assembly Department for the month of March follows:

 

 

Percent Complete

 

 

 

Labor &

 

Units

Materials

Overhead

Work in process inventory, March 1

6,000

60%

45%

Started into production during March

65,000

 

 

Work in process inventory, March 31

4,000

35%

 

20%

 

The equivalent units for labor and overhead for March, using the weighted-average method, are:

A) 69,600 units

B) 67,800 units

C) 71,000 units

D) 69,000 units

the equivalent units for materials for march using the weighted average method are 635058

Activity in Saggers Company”s Assembly Department for the month of March follows:

 

 

Percent Complete

 

 

 

Labor &

 

Units

Materials

Overhead

Work in process inventory, March 1

6,000

60%

45%

Started into production during March

65,000

 

 

Work in process inventory, March 31

4,000

35%

 

20%

 

The equivalent units for materials for March, using the weighted-average method, are:

A) 69,000 units

B) 65,000 units

C) 68,400 units

D) 67,000 units

the equivalent units for labor and overhead for march using the fifo method are 635059

Activity in Saggers Company”s Assembly Department for the month of March follows:

 

 

Percent Complete

 

 

 

Labor &

 

Units

Materials

Overhead

Work in process inventory, March 1

6,000

60%

45%

Started into production during March

65,000

 

 

Work in process inventory, March 31

4,000

35%

 

20%

 

The equivalent units for labor and overhead for March, using the FIFO method, are:

A) 63,100 units

B) 65,000 units

C) 62,500 units

D) 65,100 units

the equivalent units for materials for march using the fifo method are 635060

Activity in Saggers Company”s Assembly Department for the month of March follows:

 

 

Percent Complete

 

 

 

Labor &

 

Units

Materials

Overhead

Work in process inventory, March 1

6,000

60%

45%

Started into production during March

65,000

 

 

Work in process inventory, March 31

4,000

35%

 

20%

 

The equivalent units for materials for March, using the FIFO method, are:

A) 64,800 units

B) 59,800 units

C) 66,000 units

D) 67,200 units

using the fifo method the equivalent units for direct materials for november are 635061

Levitt Company uses a process costing system. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Levitt”s production quantity schedule for November is reproduced below.

 

Units

Work-in-process on November 1 (conversion 60% complete)

1,000

Units started during November

5,000

Total units to account for

6,000

Units completed and transferred out from beginning inventory

1,000

Units started and completed during November

3,000

Work-in-process on November 30 (conversion 20% complete)

2,000

Total units accounted for

6,000

Using the FIFO method, the equivalent units for direct materials for November are:

A) 5,000 units

B) 6,000 units

C) 4,400 units

D) 3,800 units

using the fifo method the equivalent units for conversion costs for november are 635062

Levitt Company uses a process costing system. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Levitt”s production quantity schedule for November is reproduced below.

 

Units

Work-in-process on November 1 (conversion 60% complete)

1,000

Units started during November

5,000

Total units to account for

6,000

Units completed and transferred out from beginning inventory

1,000

Units started and completed during November

3,000

Work-in-process on November 30 (conversion 20% complete)

2,000

Total units accounted for

6,000

Using the FIFO method, the equivalent units for conversion costs for November are:

A) 3,400 units

B) 3,800 units

C) 4,000 units

D) 4,400 units

using the weighted average method the equivalent units for direct materials for nove 635063

Levitt Company uses a process costing system. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Levitt”s production quantity schedule for November is reproduced below.

 

Units

Work-in-process on November 1 (conversion 60% complete)

1,000

Units started during November

5,000

Total units to account for

6,000

Units completed and transferred out from beginning inventory

1,000

Units started and completed during November

3,000

Work-in-process on November 30 (conversion 20% complete)

2,000

Total units accounted for

6,000

Using the weighted-average method, the equivalent units for direct materials for November are:

A) 3,400 units

B) 4,400 units

C) 5,000 units

D) 6,000 units

how many units were started and completed during the month in the first processing d 635065

Qu Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

 

Units in beginning work in process inventory

900

Materials costs

$9,800

Conversion costs

$9,200

Percentage complete with respect to materials

55%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

30%

Units started into production during the month

8,400

Materials costs added during the month

$130,400

Conversion costs added during the month .

$220,600

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

2,200

Percentage complete with respect to materials

65%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

25%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

How many units were started AND completed during the month in the first processing department?

A) 8,400

B) 7,100

C) 6,200

D) 9,300

the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the m 635066

Qu Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

 

Units in beginning work in process inventory

900

Materials costs

$9,800

Conversion costs

$9,200

Percentage complete with respect to materials

55%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

30%

Units started into production during the month

8,400

Materials costs added during the month

$130,400

Conversion costs added during the month .

$220,600

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

2,200

Percentage complete with respect to materials

65%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

25%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:

A) $29.89

B) $34.07

C) $31.07

D) $31.38

the cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing dep 635069

Mullins Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

 

Units in beginning work in process inventory

700

Materials costs

$11,500

Conversion costs

$22,200

Percentage complete with respect to materials

75%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

65%

Units started into production during the month

8,600

Materials costs added during the month

7,800

Conversion costs added during the month .

$159,300

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,500

Percentage complete with respect to materials

65%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

50%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $20.42

B) $21.90

C) $19.31

D) $17.13

the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the m 635070

Mullins Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

 

Units in beginning work in process inventory

700

Materials costs

$11,500

Conversion costs

$22,200

Percentage complete with respect to materials

75%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

65%

Units started into production during the month

8,600

Materials costs added during the month

7,800

Conversion costs added during the month .

$159,300

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,500

Percentage complete with respect to materials

65%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

50%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month

is closest to:

A) $48.79

B) $45.20

C) $44.68

D) $43.05

the cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department 635071

Mullins Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

 

Units in beginning work in process inventory

700

Materials costs

$11,500

Conversion costs

$22,200

Percentage complete with respect to materials

75%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

65%

Units started into production during the month

8,600

Materials costs added during the month

7,800

Conversion costs added during the month .

$159,300

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,500

Percentage complete with respect to materials

65%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

50%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.  The cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department is  closest to:

A) $62.36

B) $76.27

C) $66.10

D) $58.23

the total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processi 635072

Mullins Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

 

Units in beginning work in process inventory

700

Materials costs

$11,500

Conversion costs

$22,200

Percentage complete with respect to materials

75%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

65%

Units started into production during the month

8,600

Materials costs added during the month

7,800

Conversion costs added during the month .

$159,300

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,500

Percentage complete with respect to materials

65%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

50%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to:

A) $490,382

B) $579,948

C) $507,800

D) $541,500

the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the m 635074

Puri Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning the

first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

 

Units in beginning work in process inventory

400

Materials costs

$4,800

Conversion costs

$3,300

Percentage complete with respect to materials

85%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

45%

Units started into production during the month

5,800

Units transferred to the next department during the month

5,100

Materials costs added during the month .

$69,500

Conversion costs added during the month

$82,300

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,100

Percentage complete with respect to materials

55%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

45%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:

A) $15.20

B) $18.33

C) $15.96

D) $16.14

what are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing de 635076

Normand Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Data concerning

the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

 

Units in beginning work in process inventory

400

Materials costs

700

Conversion costs

$8,700

Percentage complete with respect to materials

$3,700

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

70%

Units started into production during the month

10%

Units transferred to the next department during the month

6,400

Materials costs added during the month .

5,600

Conversion costs added during the month

$92,200

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,500

Percentage complete with respect to materials

80%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

25%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

What are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department?

A) 4,900

B) 1,200

C) 6,310

D) 7,100

what number of units of raw material should crisper plan to purchase 634588

Crisper, Inc. plans to sell 80,000 bags of potato chips in June, and each of these bags requires five potatoes. Pertinent data includes:

Bags of potato chips

Potatoes

Actual June 1 inventory

15,000 bags

27,000 potatoes

Desired June 30 inventory

18,000 bags

23,000 potatoes

What number of units of raw material should Crisper plan to purchase?

  1. 381,000
  2. 389,000
  3. 411,000
  4. 419,000

national sued f amp b to be allowed to attach 30 000 worth of cars as part of fil rs 634593

Fil and Breed are 50% partners in F&B Cars, a used-car dealership. F&B maintains an average used-car inventory worth $150,000. On January 5, National Bank obtained a $30,000 judgment against Fil and Fil’s child on a loan that Fil had cosigned and on which Fil’s child had defaulted. National sued F&B to be allowed to attach $30,000 worth of cars as part of Fil’s interest in F&B’s inventory. Will National prevail in it suit?

  1. No, because the judgment was not against the partnership.
  2. No, because attachment of the cars would dissolve the partnership by operation of law.
  3. Yes, because National had a valid judgment against Fil.
  4. Yes, because Fil’s interest in the partnership inventory is an asset owned by Fil.

the following table presents the long term liabilities and stockholders equity of in 634714

The following table presents the long-term liabilities and stockholders’ equity of Information Control Corp of one year ago.

Long-term debt

$50,000,000

Preferred stock

30,000,000

Common stock

100,000,000

Retained earnings

20,000,000

During the past year, Information Control issued $10 million of new common stock. The firm generated $5 million of net income and paid $3 million of dividends. Construct today’s balance sheet reflecting the changes that occurred at Information Control Corp. during the year. The Income Statement

the flying lion corporation reported the following data on the income statement of o 634716

The Flying Lion Corporation reported the following data on the income statement of one of its divisions. Flying Lion Corporation has other profitable divisions.

20X2

20X1

Net sales

$800,000

$500,000

Cost of goods sold

560,000

320,000

Operating expenses

75,000

56,000

Depreciation

300,000

200,000

Tax rate (%)

30

30

a. Prepare an income statement for each year.

b. Determine the operating cash flow during each year.

the stancil corporation provided the following current information 634718

The Stancil Corporation provided the following current information.

Proceeds from short-term borrowing

$6,000

Proceeds from long-term borrowing

20,000

Proceeds from the sale of common stock

1,000

Purchases of fixed assets

1,000

Purchases of inventories

4,000

Payment of dividends

22,000

Determine the cash flow for the Stancil Corporation.

ritter corporation s accountants prepared the following financial statements for yea 634719

Ritter Corporation’s accountants prepared the following financial statements for year-end 20X2.

RITTER CORPORATION

Income Statement 20X2

Revenue

$400

Expenses

250

Depreciation

50

Net income

$100

Dividends

$ 50

RITTER CORPORATION

Balance Sheets December 31

Asset

20X2

20X1

Current assets

$150

$100

Net fixed assets

200

100

Total assets

$350

$200

Liabilities and Equity

Current liabilities

$ 75

$ 50

Long-term debt

75

0

Stockholder’s equity

200

150

Total liabilities and equity

$350

$200

a. Determine the change in net working capital in 20X2.

b. Determine the cash flow during the year 20X2.

how much cash will the firm receive next year from its investment 634722

Corporate Investment Decision Making

1. a. Briefly explain why from the shareholders’ perspective it is desirable for corporations to maximize NPV.

b. What assumptions are necessary for this argument to be correct?

2. Consider a one-year world with perfect capital markets in which the interest rate is 10 percent. Suppose a firm has $12 million in cash. The firm invests $7 million today, and $5 million is paid to shareholders. The NPV of the firm’s investment is $3 million. All shareholders are identical.

a. How much cash will the firm receive next year from its investment?

b. Suppose shareholders plan to spend $10 million today.

(i) How can they do this?

(ii) How much money will they have available to spend next year if they follow your plan?

what are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first proces 635034

Domingo Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,500

50%

Conversion costs

$1,700

20%

A total of 6,800 units were started and 6,100 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$158,700

Conversion costs

$120,400

The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 75% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?

A) 7,200

B) 6,925

C) 6,100

D) 825

what are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing de 635036

Haffner Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

500

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$7,800

Materials costs .

$9,100

Conversion costs

85%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

55%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

7,000

Units started into production during the month

6,100

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$102,700

Materials costs added during the month .

$184,400

Conversion costs added during the month .

500

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,400

Percentage complete with respect to materials

60%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

50%

What are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department?

A) 840

B) 6,940

C) 7,500

D) 6,100

what are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first proces 635037

Haffner Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

500

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$7,800

Materials costs .

$9,100

Conversion costs

85%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

55%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

7,000

Units started into production during the month

6,100

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$102,700

Materials costs added during the month .

$184,400

Conversion costs added during the month .

500

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,400

Percentage complete with respect to materials

60%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

50%

What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?

A) 6,100

B) 700

C) 6,800

D) 7,500

the cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing dep 635038

Haffner Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

500

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$7,800

Materials costs .

$9,100

Conversion costs

85%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

55%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

7,000

Units started into production during the month

6,100

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$102,700

Materials costs added during the month .

$184,400

Conversion costs added during the month .

500

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,400

Percentage complete with respect to materials

60%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

50%

The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $15.92

B) $14.80

C) $13.69

D) $14.73

the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the m 635039

Haffner Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

500

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$7,800

Materials costs .

$9,100

Conversion costs

85%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

55%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

7,000

Units started into production during the month

6,100

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$102,700

Materials costs added during the month .

$184,400

Conversion costs added during the month .

500

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,400

Percentage complete with respect to materials

60%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

50%

The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:

A) $28.46

B) $25.80

C) $29.88

D) $27.12

the cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department 635040

Haffner Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

500

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$7,800

Materials costs .

$9,100

Conversion costs

85%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

55%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

7,000

Units started into production during the month

6,100

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$102,700

Materials costs added during the month .

$184,400

Conversion costs added during the month .

500

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,400

Percentage complete with respect to materials

60%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

50%

The cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $40.53

B) $47.04

C) $44.38

D) $49.84

the total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processi 635043

Kurtulus Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

600

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$7,000

Materials costs .

$2,300

Conversion costs

55%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

25%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

6,500

Units started into production during the month

5,700

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$110,100

Materials costs added during the month .

$83,200

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,400

Percentage complete with respect to materials

70%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

55%

The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to:

A) $202,600

B) $193,300

C) $175,247

D) $218,290

what are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing 635045

Lucas Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

900

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$9,600

Materials costs .

$7,700

Conversion costs

60%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

45%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

8,100

Units started into production during the month

6,900

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$115,800

Materials costs added during the month .

$120,500

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

2,100

Percentage complete with respect to materials

75%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

20%

What are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing

department?

A) 9,000

B) 1,575

C) 6,900

D) 8,475

the cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department 635047

Lucas Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

900

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$9,600

Materials costs .

$7,700

Conversion costs

60%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

45%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

8,100

Units started into production during the month

6,900

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$115,800

Materials costs added during the month .

$120,500

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

2,100

Percentage complete with respect to materials

75%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

20%

The cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $28.18

B) $36.75

C) $32.31

D) $34.25

what are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first proces 635049

Inacio Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

800

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$12,900

Materials costs .

$5,000

Conversion costs

75%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

20%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

9,500

Units started into production during the month

8,400

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$172,000

Materials costs added during the month .

$240,200

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,900

Percentage complete with respect to materials

90%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

30%

What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?

A) 8,400

B) 8,970

C) 570

D) 10,300

the cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing dep 635050

Inacio Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

800

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$12,900

Materials costs .

$5,000

Conversion costs

75%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

20%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

9,500

Units started into production during the month

8,400

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$172,000

Materials costs added during the month .

$240,200

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,900

Percentage complete with respect to materials

90%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

30%

The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $17.01

B) $17.95

C) $16.70

D) $18.29

the cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing dep 635051

Joos Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:

600

Units in beginning work in process inventory

$7,300

Materials costs .

$2,300

Conversion costs

50%

Percentage complete with respect to materials

10%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

9,400

Units started into production during the month

8,600

Units transferred to the next department during the month

$196,300

Materials costs added during the month .

$315,800

Ending work in process inventory:

 

Units in ending work in process inventory

1,400

Percentage complete with respect to materials

70%

Percentage complete with respect to conversion

40%

The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $19.63

B) $21.25

C) $20.36

D) $20.49

the cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing dep 634494

Esty Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,800

50%

Conversion costs

$6,500

30%

A total of 7,700 units were started and 6,600 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$85,300

Conversion costs

$168,000

The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 10% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $10.76

B) $10.04

C) $10.72

D) $11.49

the total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processi 634496

The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$12,700

85%

Conversion costs

$10,900

30%

A total of 9,800 units were started and 8,800 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$175,600

Conversion costs

$420,900

The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to:

A) $620,100

B) $646,832

C) $542,106

D) $596,500

the cost of ending work in process inventory in the first processing department acco 634497

The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$12,700

85%

Conversion costs

$10,900

30%

A total of 9,800 units were started and 8,800 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$175,600

Conversion costs

$420,900

The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

The cost of ending work in process inventory in the first processing department according to the company”s cost system is closest to:

A) $77,994

B) $73,308

C) $104,725

D) $89,016

what are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing de 634499

Gunes Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$10,600

65%

Conversion costs

$12,800

30%

A total of 8,500 units were started and 7,400 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$142,100

Conversion costs

$359,500

The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

What are the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department?

A) 7,400

B) 9,300

C) 8,350

D) 950

what are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first proces 634500

Gunes Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$10,600

65%

Conversion costs

$12,800

30%

A total of 8,500 units were started and 7,400 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$142,100

Conversion costs

$359,500

The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?

A) 9,300

B) 8,065

C) 7,400

D) 665

the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the m 634502

Gunes Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$10,600

65%

Conversion costs

$12,800

30%

A total of 8,500 units were started and 7,400 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$142,100

Conversion costs

$359,500

The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:

A) $40.03

B) $46.16

C) $44.58

D) $48.47

the cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department 634503

Gunes Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$10,600

65%

Conversion costs

$12,800

30%

A total of 8,500 units were started and 7,400 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$142,100

Conversion costs

$359,500

The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

The cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $64.45

B) $56.45

C) $68.32

D) $70.95

the cost of ending work in process inventory in the first processing department acco 634505

Gunes Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$10,600

65%

Conversion costs

$12,800

30%

A total of 8,500 units were started and 7,400 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$142,100

Conversion costs

$359,500

The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

The cost of ending work in process inventory in the first processing department according to the company”s cost system is closest to:

A) $61,227

B) $48,071

C) $42,859

D) $122,453

how many units are in ending work in process inventory in the first processing depar 634506

Domingo Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,500

50%

Conversion costs

$1,700

20%

A total of 6,800 units were started and 6,100 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$158,700

Conversion costs

$120,400

The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 75% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.

How many units are in ending work in process inventory in the first processing department at the end of the month?

A) 700

B) 900

C) 6,400

D) 1,100

the deferred income tax liability is not related to an asset for financial accountin 634507

Bake Co.’s trial balance included the following at December 31, 2003:

Accounts payable

$ 80,000

Bonds payable, due 2004

300,000

Discount on bonds payable

15,000

Deferred income tax liability

25,000

The deferred income tax liability is not related to an asset for financial accounting purposes and is expected to reverse in 2004. What amount should be included in the current liability section of Bake’s December 31, 2003 balance sheet?

  1. $365,000
  2. $390,000
  3. $395,000
  4. $420,000

what amount would main show as deferred rent expense at december 31 2003 634514

Main, a pharmaceutical company, leased office space from Ash. Main took possession and began to use the building on July 1, 2000. Rent was due the first day of each month. Monthly lease payments escalated over the 5-year period of the lease as follows:

Period

Lease payment

July 1, 2000 – September 30, 2000

$0 – rent abatement during move-in, construction

October, 1, 2000 – June 30, 2001

17,500

July 1, 2001 – June 30, 2002

19,000

July 1, 2002 – June 30, 2003

20,500

July 1, 2003 – June 30, 2004

23,000

July 1, 2004 – June 30, 2005

24,500

What amount would Main show as deferred rent expense at December 31, 2003?

  1. $50,658
  2. $52,580
  3. $68,575
  4. $71,550

what is the receivables turnover ratio as of december 31 year 2 634518

The controller of Peabody, Inc. has been asked to present an analysis of accounts receivable collections at the upcoming staff meeting. The following information is used:

12/31, year 2

12/31, year 1

Accounts receivable

$100,000

$130,000

Allowance, doubtful accounts

(20,000)

(40,000)

Sales

400,000

200,000

Cost of goods sold

350,000

170,000

What is the receivables turnover ratio as of December 31, year 2?

  1. 5.0
  2. 4.7
  3. 3.5
  4. 0.6

the sales contract stated that the entertainment system was being sold ldquo as is r 634533

Thorn purchased a used entertainment system from Sound Corp. The sales contract stated that the entertainment system was being sold “as is.” Under the Sales Article of the UCC, which of the following statements is(are) correct regarding the seller’s warranty of title and against infringement?

  1. I. Including the term “as is” in the sales contract is adequate communication that the seller is conveying the entertainment system without warranty of title and against infringement.
  2. II. The seller’s warranty of title and against infringement may be disclaimed at any time after the contract is formed.
    1. a. I only.
    2. b. II only.
    3. c. Both I and II.
    4. d. Neither I nor II.

jet immediately filed the financing statement on july 1 roe filed for bankruptcy und 634549

On April 1, Roe borrowed $100,000 from Jet to pay Roe’s business expenses. On June 15, Roe gave Jet a signed security agreement and financing statement covering Roe’s inventory. Jet immediately filed the financing statement. On July 1, Roe filed for bankruptcy. Under the federal Bankruptcy Code, can Roe’s trustee in bankruptcy set aside Jet’s security interest in Roe’s inventory?

  1. Yes, because a security agreement may only cover goods actually purchased with the borrowed funds.
  2. Yes, because Roe giving the security interest to Jet created a voidable preference.
  3. No, because the security interest was perfected before Roe filed for bankruptcy.
  4. No, because the loan proceeds were used for Roe’s business.

the company inventory policy is to have finished product inventory equal to 20 of th 634572

Card Bicycle Co. has prepared production and raw materials budgets for next year. At the end of this year, the finished product inventory is expected to include 2,000 bicycles, and raw material inventory is expected to include 3,000 bicycle tires. Each finished bicycle requires two tires. The marketing department provided the following data from the sales budget for the first quarter:

January

February

March

Expected bicycle sales (units)

12,000

16,000

18,000

The company inventory policy is to have finished product inventory equal to 20% of the following month’s sales requirements, and raw material equal to 10% of the following month’s production requirements. In the January budget for raw materials, how many tires are expected to be purchased?

  1. 24,200
  2. 26,120
  3. 26,600
  4. 26,680

the partnership agreement specifies that flanigan will receive a 50 share of profits 634583

Berry, Drake, and Flanigan are partners in a general partnership. The partners made capital contributions as follows: Berry, $150,000; Drake, $100,000; and Flanigan, $50,000. Drake made a loan of $50,000 to the partnership. The partnership agreement specifies that Flanigan will receive a 50% share of profits, and Drake and Berry each will receive a 25% share of profits. Under the Revised Uniform Partnership Act and in the absence of any partnership agreement to the contrary, which of the following statements is correct regarding the sharing of losses?

  1. The partners will share equally in any partnership losses.
  2. The partners will share in losses on a pro rata basis according to the capital contributions.
  3. The partners will share in losses on a pro rata basis according to the capital contributions and loans made to the partnership.
  4. The partners will share in losses according to the allocation of profits specified in the partnership agreement.

what would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month on the 634460

Iyer Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Forming Department, started the month with 14,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 20% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $3,360. An additional 92,000 units were started into production during the month and 95,000 units were completed and transferred to the next processing department. There were 11,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Forming Department that were 10% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $92,367 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month on the Forming Department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $1.004

B) $0.990

C) $1.200

D) $0.903

what would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for march on the cut 634461

Qimper Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Cutting Department for the month of March appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

6,600

70%

Transferred in from the prior department during March

54,000

 

Completed and transferred to the next department

 

 

March

58,600

 

Ending work in process inventory

2,000

40%

According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $38,069 at the beginning of March. Additional conversion costs of $444,047 were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for March on the Cutting Department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $7.956

B) $8.223

C) $8.106

D) $8.240

what would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for march on the cut 634462

Quis Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data

 for the Cutting Department for the month of March appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

9,600

70%

Transferred in from the prior department during March

47,000

 

Completed and transferred to the next department

 

 

March

49,600

 

Ending work in process inventory

7,000

90%

According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $26,880 at the beginning of March. Additional conversion costs of $190,130 were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for March on the Cutting Department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $3.866

B) $3.834

C) $4.045

D) $4.000

walden company has a process costing system and uses the fifo method all materials a 634464

Walden Company has a process costing system and uses the FIFO method. All materials are introduced at the beginning of the process in Department One. The following information is available for the month of January for Department One:

 

Units

Work in process, January 1 (conversion 40% complete)

500

Started in January

2,000

Transferred to Department Two during January

2,100

Work in process, January 31 (conversion 25% complete)

400

What are the equivalent units for the month of January?

 

Materials

Conversion Cost

A)

2,500

2,200

B)

2,500

1,900

C)

2,000

2,200

D)

2,000

2,000

what were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the grinding department for t 634468

Gabel Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The Grinding Department started the month with 10,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. An additional 85,000 units were transferred in from the prior department during the month to begin processing in the Grinding Department. During the month 81,000 units were completed in the Grinding Department and transferred to the next processing department. There were 14,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Grinding Department that were 90% complete with respect to conversion costs. What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Grinding Department for the month?

A) 86,600

B) 93,600

C) 81,000

D) 89,000

what were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the brazing department for 634471

Oreilley Company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Brazing Department for the month of November appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

5,300

30%

Transferred in from the prior department during

 

 

November

30,000

 

 

Completed and transferred to the next department

 

 

during November

32,500

 

Ending work in process inventory .

2,800

70%

What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Brazing Department for

November?

A) 34,460

B) 32,500

C) 27,500

D) 32,870

how much conversion cost would be assigned to the units completed and transferred ou 634474

Tanner Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Curing Department for the month of March appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

8,200

80%

Transferred in from the prior department during March

52,000

 

Completed and transferred to the next department

 

 

during March

54,200

 

Ending work in process inventory .

6,000

50%

According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $7,872 at the beginning of March. The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for March was $1.10. How much conversion cost would be assigned to the units completed and transferred out of the department during March?

A) $52,404

B) $59,620

C) $60,276

D) $57,200

how much conversion cost would be assigned to the units completed and transferred ou 634475

Tanguy Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Curing Department for the month of March appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

2,500

70%

Transferred in from the prior department during March

44,000

 

Completed and transferred to the next department

 

 

during March

38,500

 

Ending work in process inventory .

8,000

10%

According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $7,350 at the beginning of March. The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for March was $4.10. How much conversion cost would be assigned to the units completed and transferred out of the department during March?

A) $150,675

B) $180,400

C) $158,025

D) $157,850

what are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first proces 634476

Annenbaum Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,700

65%

Conversion costs

$6,800

45%

 A total of 6,500 units were started and 5,900 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$125,500

Conversion costs

$207,000

The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?

A) 6,250

B) 5,900

C) 350

D) 6,900

the ending inventory was 50 complete with respect to materials and 35 complete with 634477

Annenbaum Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,700

65%

Conversion costs

$6,800

45%

A total of 6,500 units were started and 5,900 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$125,500

Conversion costs

$207,000

The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $19.01

B) $19.61

C) $20.50

D) $18.19

the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the m 634478

Annenbaum Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,700

65%

Conversion costs

$6,800

45%

A total of 6,500 units were started and 5,900 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$125,500

Conversion costs

$207,000

The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:

A) $30.99

B) $35.92

C) $33.12

D) $34.21

 

the ending inventory was 50 complete with respect to materials and 35 complete with 634479

Annenbaum Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,700

65%

Conversion costs

$6,800

45%

A total of 6,500 units were started and 5,900 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$125,500

Conversion costs

$207,000

The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.The cost per equivalent whole unit for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $58.47

B) $50.00

C) $57.99

D) $54.71

the ending inventory was 50 complete with respect to materials and 35 complete with 634480

Annenbaum Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 400 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,700

65%

Conversion costs

$6,800

45%

A total of 6,500 units were started and 5,900 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$125,500

Conversion costs

$207,000

The ending inventory was 50% complete with respect to materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to:

A) $332,500

B) $345,000

C) $322,777

D) $377,485

how many units are in ending work in process inventory in the first processing depar 634482

Bistrol Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$15,700

75%

Conversion costs

$7,700

20%

A total of 8,400 units were started and 7,500 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$186,300

Conversion costs

$329,800

The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases,  select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. How many units are in ending work in process inventory in the first processing department at the end of the month?

A) 7,600

B) 900

C) 1,700

D) 900

the cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing dep 634484

Bistrol Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$15,700

75%

Conversion costs

$7,700

20%

A total of 8,400 units were started and 7,500 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$186,300

Conversion costs

$329,800

The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases,  select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places.  The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

A) $21.44

B) $21.96

C) $20.25

D) $23.25

the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the m 634485

Bistrol Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$15,700

75%

Conversion costs

$7,700

20%

A total of 8,400 units were started and 7,500 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$186,300

Conversion costs

$329,800

The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the first department for the month is closest to:

A) $41.59

B) $38.71

C) $39.61

D) $36.68

 

 

the total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processi 634487

Bistrol Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$15,700

75%

Conversion costs

$7,700

20%

A total of 8,400 units were started and 7,500 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$186,300

Conversion costs

$329,800

The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to:

A) $516,100

B) $471,435

C) $539,500

D) $578,294

how many units are in ending work in process inventory in the first processing depar 634489

Carpenter Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 600 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,200

60%

Conversion costs

$8,500

55%

A total of 7,800 units were started and 7,100 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$95,000

Conversion costs

$169,200

The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. How many units are in ending work in process inventory in the first processing department at the end of the month?

A) 1,300

B) 900

C) 7,200

D) 700

what are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first proces 634490

Carpenter Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 600 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,200

60%

Conversion costs

$8,500

55%

A total of 7,800 units were started and 7,100 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$95,000

Conversion costs

$169,200

The ending inventory was 85% complete with respect to materials and 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?

A) 910

B) 8,010

C) 7,100

D) 8,400

what are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first proces 634493

Esty Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 800 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

 

 

Percent

 

Cost

Complete

Materials costs

$5,800

50%

Conversion costs

$6,500

30%

A total of 7,700 units were started and 6,600 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Materials costs

$85,300

Conversion costs

$168,000

The ending inventory was 70% complete with respect to materials and 10% complete with respect to conversion costs. Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least three decimal places. What are the equivalent units for conversion costs for the month in the first processing department?

A) 6,790

B) 8,500

C) 6,600

D) 190

which of the following journal entries would be used to record direct labor costs in 634416

Which of the following journal entries would be used to record direct labor costs in a company having two processing departments (Department A and Department B)?

A) Work in Process

XXX

Salaries and Wages Payable

XXX

B) Salaries and Wages Expense

XXX

Salaries and Wages Payable

XXX

C) Work in Process-Department A

XXX

Work in Process-Department B

XXX

Salaries and Wages Payable

XXX

D) Salaries and Wages Payable

XXX

Work in Process

XXX

darvin company uses the weighted average method in its process costing system the fi 634426

Darvin Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Welding Department, started the month with 20,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 10% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $7,000. An additional 63,000 units were started into production during the month. There were 10,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Welding Department that were 10% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $237,600 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $3.255

B) $3.771

C) $3.500

D) $3.305

dedra company uses the weighted average method in its process costing system the fir 634428

Dedra Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Welding Department, started the month with 10,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 50% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $37,500. An additional 98,000 units were started into production during the= month. There were 17,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Welding Department that were 80% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $727,080 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $6.322

B) $7.419

C) $7.500

D) $7.310

according to the company s records the conversion cost in beginning work in process 634429

Luster Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Operating data for the first processing department for the month of June appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

13,000

40%

Started into production during June

98,000

 

Ending work in process inventory

11,000

30%

 

According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $39,364 at the beginning of June. Additional conversion costs of $721,035 were incurred in the department during the month. What was the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $6.615

B) $7.358

C) $7.361

D) $7.570

according to the company s records the conversion cost in beginning work in process 634430

Lumdal Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Operating data for the first processing department for the month of June appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

10,000

90%

Started into production during June

75,000

 

Ending work in process inventory

17,000

40%

According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $77,490 at the beginning of June. Additional conversion costs of $552,062 were incurred in the department during the month. What was the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $8.610

B) $7.361

C) $6.001

D) $8.416

what were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the painting department for 634433

Jinker Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Painting Department for the month of April appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

6,700

50%

Transferred in from the prior department during April

57,800

 

Ending work in process inventory

7,600

60%

 

What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Painting Department for

April?

A) 56,900

B) 61,460

C) 62,360

D) 58,700

what were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the painting department for 634434

Jumil Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Painting Department for the month of April appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

4,700

40%

Transferred in from the prior department during April

56,600

 

Ending work in process inventory

6,300

60%

What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Painting Department for

April?

A) 58,200

B) 60,380

C) 58,780

D) 55,000

what would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month 634436

Hall Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Welding Department, started the month with 18,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $64,800. An additional 84,000 units were started into production during the month and 78,000 units were completed in the Welding Department and transferred to the next processing department. There were 24,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Welding Department that were 30% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $431,520 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $5.825

B) $3.996

C) $5.137

D) $6.000

what was the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for january in the moldin 634437

Pajona Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Molding Department is the second department in its production process. The data below summarize the department”s operations in January.

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

7,400

60%

Transferred in from the prior department during

 

 

January

66,000

 

Completed and transferred to the next department

 

 

during January

69,700

 

Ending work in process inventory

3,700

70%

The accounting records indicate that the conversion cost that had been assigned to beginning work in process inventory was $31,302 and a total of $497,341 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during January. What was the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for January in the Molding Department? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $7.535

B) $7.050

C) $7.313

D) $7.135

 

what were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the assembly department for t 634440

Faivre Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Assembly Department started the month with 13,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 20% complete with respect to conversion costs. An additional 55,000 units were transferred in from the prior department during the month to begin processing in the Assembly Department. During the month 67,000 units were completed in the Assembly Department and transferred to the next processing department. There were 1,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Assembly Department that were 50% complete with respect to conversion costs. What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Assembly Department for the month?

A) 43,000

B) 64,900

C) 67,000

D) 67,500

what were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the lubricating department fo 634441

Nabeth Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Lubricating Department for the month of October appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

7,700

80%

Transferred in from the prior department during

 

 

October

48,800

 

Completed and transferred to the next department

 

 

during October

55,400

 

Ending work in process inventory

1,100

90%

What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Lubricating Department for October?

A) 56,390

B) 42,200

C) 55,400

D) 49,790

the fitting department s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent un 634443

Sadanand Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Fitting Department is the second department in its production process. The data below summarize the department”s operations in March.

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory .

1,100

40%

Transferred in from the prior department during

 

 

March

46,000

 

Ending work in process inventory

4,600

30%

 

The Fitting Department”s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost for March was $9.24. How much conversion cost was assigned to the units transferred out of the Fitting Department during March?

A) $388,634.40

B) $425,040.00

C) $435,204.00

D) $392,700.00

the fitting department s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent un 634444

Sadron Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Fitting Department is the second department in its production process. The data below summarize the department”s operations in March.

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory .

6,200

20%

Transferred in from the prior department during

 

 

March

45,000

 

Ending work in process inventory

3,200

60%

The Fitting Department”s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost for March was $7.42.  How much conversion cost was assigned to the units transferred out of the Fitting Department during March?

A) $356,160.00

B) $379,904.00

C) $333,900.00

D) $346,959.20

the molding department s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent un 634448

Rameau Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Molding Department is the second department in its production process. The data below summarize the department”s operations in January.

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory .

5,600

60%

Transferred in from the prior department during

 

 

January

47,000

 

Completed and transferred to the next department

 

 

during January

50,300

 

Ending work in process inventory

2,300

40%

 

The Molding Department”s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost for January was $5.29. How much conversion cost was assigned to the ending work in process inventory in the Molding Department for January?

A) $7,300.20

B) $12,167.00

C) $11,849.60

D) $4,866.80

how much conversion cost was assigned to the ending work in process inventory in the 634449

Ramos Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The Molding Department is the second department in its production process. The data below summarize the department”s operations in January.

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory .

2,800

40%

Transferred in from the prior department during

 

 

January

45,000

 

Completed and transferred to the next department

 

 

during January

46,700

 

Ending work in process inventory

1,100

20%

The Molding Department”s production report indicates that the cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost for January was $1.12. How much conversion cost was assigned to the ending work in process inventory in the Molding Department for January?

A) $985.60

B) $1,881.60

C) $1,232.00

D) $246.40

what would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month on the 634450

Ebart Company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Welding Department, started the month with 14,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $20,580. An additional 53,000 units were started into production during the month. There were 17,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Welding Department that were 20% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $80,660 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month on the department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $1.522

B) $2.100

C) $1.850

D) $1.511

 

what would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for september on the 634453

Maher Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Casting Department for the month of September appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory .

14,000

10%

Transferred in from the prior department during

 

 

September .

97,000

 

Ending work in process inventory

22,000

70%

According to the company”s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $8,960 at the beginning of September. Additional conversion costs of $671,560 were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for September on the Casting Department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $6.520

B) $6.923

C) $6.400

D) $6.131

what were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the enameling department for 634457

Kalra Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. Operating data for the Enameling Department for the month of May appear below:

 

 

Percentage

 

Units

complete

Beginning work in process inventory

7,200

20%

Transferred in from the prior department during May ….

70,100

 

Ending work in process inventory

2,600

80%

What were the equivalent units for conversion costs in the Enameling Department for May?

A) 65,500

B) 76,780

C) 74,700

D) 75,340

the cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost is closest to 634458

Overhill Company uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. In the Cutting Department in June, units were 80% complete with respect to conversion in the beginning work in process inventory and 25% complete with respect to conversion in the ending work in process inventory. Other data for the department for June follow:

 

 

Conversion

 

Units

Cost

Beginning work in process inventory

20,000

$40,000

Units started into production, and costs incurred during

 

 

the month .

 

 

Units completed and transferred out .

150,000

$186,000

Beginning work in process inventory

130,000

 

The cost per equivalent unit for conversion cost is closest to:

A) $1.48

B) $1.50

C) $1.16

D) $1.82

what would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month on the 634459

Inacio Corporation uses the FIFO method in its process costing system. The first processing department, the Forming Department, started the month with 22,000 units in its beginning work in process inventory that were 70% complete with respect to conversion costs. The conversion cost in this beginning work in process inventory was $38,500. An additional 71,000 units were started into production during the month and 72,000 units were completed and transferred to the next processing department. There were 21,000 units in the ending work in process inventory of the Forming Department that were 40% complete with respect to conversion costs. A total of $148,850 in conversion costs were incurred in the department during the month. What would be the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month on the Forming Department”s production report? (Round off to three decimal places.)

A) $2.500

B) $2.015

C) $2.096

D) $2.290

 

manager number two expects the project to provide cash inflows of 5 000 at the end o 634154

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

The financial management team of a company is assessing an investment proposal involving a $100,000 outlay today. Manager number one expects the project to provide cash inflows of $20,000 at the end of each year for six years. She considers the project to be of low risk, requiring only a 10% rate of return. Manager number two expects the project to provide cash inflows of $5,000 at the end of the first year, followed by $23,000 at the end of each year in years two through six. He considers the project to be of medium risk, requiring a 14% rate of return. Manager number three expects the project to be of high risk, providing one large cash inflow of $135,000 at the end of the sixth year. She proposes a 15% rate of return for the project.

Additional information

Number of years

Discount rate (percent)

Present value of $1 due at the end of n periods (PVIF)

Present value of an annuity of $1 per period for n periods (PVIFA)

1

10

.9091

.9091

1

14

.8772

.8772

1

15

.8696

.8696

5

10

.6209

3.7908

5

14

.5194

3.4331

5

15

.4972

3.3522

6

10

.5645

4.3553

6

14

.4556

3.8887

6

15

.4323

3.7845

According to the net present value criterion, which of the following is true?

  1. Manager one will recommend that the project be accepted.
  2. Manger two will recommend that the project be accepted.
  3. All three managers will recommend acceptance of the project.
  4. All three managers will recommend rejection of the project.

Which manager will assess the project as having the shortest payback period?

  1. Manager one.
  2. Manager two.
  3. Manager three.
  4. All three managers will agree on the payback period.

simm records losses that result from applying the lower of cost or market rule at de 634161

Simm Co. has determined its December 31 inventory on a FIFO basis to be $400,000. Information pertaining to that inventory follows:

Estimated selling price

$403,000

Estimated cost of disposal

20,000

Normal profit margin

60,000

Current replacement cost

360,000

Simm records losses that result from applying the lower of cost or market rule. At December 31, what should be the amount of Simm’s inventory?

  1. $400,000
  2. $388,000
  3. $360,000
  4. $328,000

which of the following cash transfers results in a misstatement of cash at december 634185

Which of the following cash transfers results in a misstatement of cash at December 31, 2001?

Bank Transfer Schedule

Disbursement date

Receipt date

Transfers

Per books

Per bank

Per books

Per bank

a.

12/31/01

01/05/02

12/31/01

01/04/02

b.

01/04/02

01/11/02

01/04/02

01/04/02

c.

12/31/01

01/04/02

12/31/01

12/31/01

d.

01/04/02

01/05/02

12/31/01

01/04/02

which of the following describes how the objective of a review of financial statemen 634186

Which of the following describes how the objective of a review of financial statements differs from the objective of a compilation engagement?

  1. The primary objective of a review engagement is to test the completeness of the financial statements prepared, but a compilation tests for reasonableness.
  2. The primary objective of a review engagement is to provide positive assurance that the financial statements are fairly presented, but a compilation provides no such assurance.
  3. In a review engagement, accountants provide limited assurance, but a compilation expresses no assurance.
  4. In a review engagement, accountants provide reasonable or positive assurance that the financial statements are fairly presented, but a compilation provides limited assurance.

an auditor determines that the entity is presenting certain supplementary financial 634191

An auditor determines that the entity is presenting certain supplementary financial disclosures of pension information that are requires by the GASB. Under these circumstances, the auditor should

  1. Add an explanatory paragraph to the auditor’s report that refers to the required supplementary information.
  2. State that this audit is not being performed in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards.
  3. Document in the working papers that the required supplementary information is presented, but should not apply any procedures to the information.
  4. Compare the required supplementary information for consistency with the audited financial statements.

Comfort letters ordinarily are

Addressed to the client’s

Signed by the client’s

a.

Audit committee

Independent auditor

b.

Underwriter of securities

Senior management

c.

Audit committee

Senior management

d.

Underwriter of securities

Independent auditor

which of the following statements is correct regarding the auditor rsquo s considera 634226

Which of the following statements is correct regarding the auditor’s consideration of the possibility of illegal acts by clients?

  1. The auditor has a responsibility to plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance that no illegal acts have been committed by clients.
  2. The auditor’s training, experience, and understanding of the client should be used to provide a basis for the determination as to whether illegal acts have occurred.
  3. If specific information concerning an illegal act comes to the auditor’s attention, the auditor should apply audit procedures specifically directed to ascertaining whether an illegal act has occurred.
  4. If an illegal act has occurred, the auditor should express a qualified opinion or an adverse opinion on the financial statements taken as a whole.

a material overstatement in ending inventory was discovered after the year end finan 634227

A material overstatement in ending inventory was discovered after the year-end financial statements of a company were issued to the public. What effect did this error have on the year-end financial statements?

Current assets

Gross profit

a.

Understated

Overstated

b.

Overstated

Overstated

c.

Understated

Understated

d.

Overstated

Understated

what amount should paper report as net cash provided by operating activities in its 634234

Paper Co. had net income of $70,000 during the year. Dividend payment was $10,000. The following information is available:

Mortgage repayment

$20,000

Available-for-sale securities purchased

10,000

increase

Bonds payable—issued

50,000

increase

Inventory

40,000

increase

Accounts payable

30,000

decrease

What amount should Paper report as net cash provided by operating activities in its statement of cash flows for the year?

  1. $0
  2. $10,000
  3. $20,000
  4. $30,000

what is the remaining amount available for use by the county 634242

A county’s balances in the general fund included the following:

Appropriations

$435,000

Encumbrances

18,000

Expenditures

164,000

Vouchers payable

23,000

What is the remaining amount available for use by the county?

  1. $230,000
  2. $248,000
  3. $253,000
  4. $271,000

the lease term begins on january 1 year 1 and ends on december 31 year 2 the lease a 634249

On January 1, year 1, Frost Co. entered into a two-year lease agreement with Ananz Co. to lease 10 new computers. The lease term begins on January 1, year 1 and ends on December 31, year 2. The lease agreement requires Frost to pay Ananz two annual lease payments of $8,000. The present value of the minimum lease payments is $13,000. Which of the following circumstances would require Frost to classify and account for the arrangement as a capital lease?

  1. The economic life of the computers is three years.
  2. The fair value of the computers on January 1, year 1, is $14,000.
  3. Frost Co. does not have the option of purchasing the computers at the end of the lease term.
  4. Ownership of the computers remains with Ananz Co. throughout the lease term and after the lease ends.

on february 1 2003 paxton was informed by its financial advisor that the lender is n 634254

On December 1, 2002, Paxton Co. had a note payable due on August 1, 2003. On January 20, 2003, Paxton signed a financing agreement to borrow the balance of the note payable from a lending institution to refinance the note. The agreement does not expire within one year, and no violation of any provision in the financing agreement exists. On February 1, 2003, Paxton was informed by its financial advisor that the lender is not expected to be financially capable of honoring the agreement. Paxton’s financial statements were issued on March 31, 2003. How should Paxton classify the note on its balance sheet at December 31, 2002?

  1. As a current liability because the financing agreement was signed after the balance sheet date.
  2. As a current liability because the lender is not expected to be financially capable of honoring the agreement.
  3. As a long-term liability because the agreement does not expire within one year.
  4. As a long-term liability because no violation of any provision in the financing agreement exists.

twelve vehicles were delivered as scheduled and payments of 264 000 were made upon d 634255

Carlson City’s fiscal year ends December 31. On August 1, the city issued a purchase order for new vehicles to be delivered at the rate of two per month beginning October 15. Twelve vehicles were delivered as scheduled and payments of $264,000 were made upon delivery. If these were the only transactions made by the city, which of the following balances would appear on the balance sheet as of December 31?

a.

Encumbrances

$132,000

Reserve for encumbrances

132,000

b.

Fund balance

$132,000

Reserve for encumbrances

132,000

c.

Reserve for encumbrances

$264,000

Fund balance

264,000

d.

Encumbrances

$264,000

Reserve for encumbrances

264,000

what is the weighted average number of shares ceil should use to calculate its basic 634258

The following information pertains to Ceil Co., a company whose common stock trades in a public market:

Shares outstanding at 1/1

100,000

Stock dividend at 3/31

24,000

Stock issuance at 6/30

5,000

What is the weighted-average number of shares Ceil should use to calculate its basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31?

  1. 120,500
  2. 123,000
  3. 126,500
  4. 129,000

prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured in good form 634405

• Raw materials were purchased, $459,000.

• Raw materials were requisitioned for use in production, $465,000 ($431,000 direct and $34,000 indirect).

• The following employee costs were incurred: direct labor, $296,000; indirect labor, $63,000; and administrative salaries, $157,000.

• Selling costs, $134,000.

• Factory utility costs, $14,000.

• Depreciation for the year was $119,000 of which $114,000 is related to factory operations and $5,000 is related to selling and administrative activities.

• Manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs. The actual level of activity for the year was 47,000 machine-hours.

• Sales for the year totaled $1,287,000

Required:

a. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured in good form.

b. Was the overhead under- or overapplied? By how much?

c. Prepare an income statement for the year in good form. The company closes any under- or overapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold.

compute the cost of goods sold for the past year 634407

Hacken Company has a job-order costing system. The company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost. The information below has been taken from the cost records of Hacken Company for the past year:

Direct materials used in production

$1,250

Total manufacturing costs charged to production during the year

 

(includes direct materials, direct labor, and applied factory

 

overhead)

$6,050

Manufacturing overhead applied

$2,800

Selling and administrative expenses

$1,000

Inventories:

 

Direct materials, January 1

$130

Direct materials, December 31

$80

Work in process, January 1

$250

Work in process, December 31

$400

Finished goods, January 1

$300

Finished goods, December 31

$200

Required:

a. Compute the cost of direct materials purchased during the year.

b. Compute the predetermined overhead rate that was used during the past year.

c. Compute the Cost of Goods Manufactured for the past year.

d. Compute the Cost of Goods Sold for the past year.

prepare journal entries to record the information above 634409

The Commonwealth Company uses a job-order cost system and applies manufacturing overhead cost to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate based on the cost of materials used in production. At the beginning of the year, the following estimates were made as a basis for computing the predetermined overhead rate: manufacturing overhead cost, $186,000; direct materials cost, $155,000. The following transactions took place during the year (all purchases and services were acquired on account):

a. Raw materials purchased, $96,000.

b. Raw materials requisitioned for use in production (all direct materials), $88,000.

c. Utility bills incurred in the factory, $17,000.

d. Costs for salaries and wages incurred as follows:

Direct labor

$174,000

Indirect labor

$70,000

Selling and administrative salaries

$124,000

e. Maintenance costs incurred in the factory, $12,000.

f. Advertising costs incurred, $98,000.

g. Depreciation recorded for the year, $75,000 (75% relates to factory assets and the remainder relates to selling and administrative assets).

h. Rental cost incurred on buildings, $80,000 (80% of the space is occupied by the factory, and 20% is occupied by sales and administration).

i. Miscellaneous selling and administrative costs incurred, $12,000.

j. Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to jobs.

k. Cost of goods manufactured for the year, $480,000.

l. Sales for the year (all on account) totaled $900,000. These goods cost $550,000 to manufacture

Required:

Prepare journal entries to record the information above.

prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year 634410

The following cost data relate to the manufacturing activities of the Kanaba Company last year:

Manufacturing overhead costs:

Property taxes

$1,500

Utilities, factory

2,500

Indirect labor

5,000

Depreciation, factory

12,000

Insurance, factory

3,000

Total

$24,000

Other costs incurred:

Purchases of direct materials

$16,000

Direct labor cost

$20,000

Inventories:

Direct materials, January 1

$4,000

Direct materials, December 31

$3,500

Work in process, January 1

$3,000

Work in process, December 31

$3,750

The company uses a predetermined overhead rate to apply manufacturing overhead cost to production. The rate last year was $5.00 per machine-hour; a total of 5,000 machine-hours were recorded for the year.

Required:

a. Compute the amount of under- or overapplied overhead cost for the year.

b. Prepare a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured for the year.

applied overhead was 30 of total manufacturing costs the work in process inventory a 633982

Farber Corporation uses a job-order cost system. The information below is from the financial records of the company for last year:

Total manufacturing costs

$2,500,000

Cost of goods manufactured

$2,425,000

Predetermined overhead rate

80% of direct labor cost

Applied overhead was 30% of total manufacturing costs. The Work in Process inventory at January 1 was 75% of the Work in Process inventory at December 31. The Work in Process inventory at December 31 was:

A) $300,000

B) $225,000

C) $100,000

D) $75,000

the cost of goods manufactured was 633988

The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Farwest Company during the year:

Raw Materials

   

Beg Bal

4,700

10,000

 
 

$6,900

   

Finished Goods

   

Beg Bal

$1,900

22,900

 
 

$26,300

   

Work in Process

   

Beg Bal

$4,600

26,300

 
 

$7,400

   
 

$8,000

   
 

$6,800

   

Manufacturing Overhead

 
 

$2,600

6,800

 
 

$3,000

   
 

1,900

   

Wages & Salaries Payable

 
 

12,300

1,400

Beg Bal

   

11,000

 

Cost of Goods Sold

   
 

22,900

   

The Cost of Goods Manufactured was:

A) $22,900

B) $26,300

C) $6,400

D) $49,200

the direct labor cost was 633989

The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Farwest Company during the year:

Raw Materials

   

Beg Bal

4,700

10,000

 
 

$6,900

   

Finished Goods

   

Beg Bal

$1,900

22,900

 
 

$26,300

   

Work in Process

   

Beg Bal

$4,600

26,300

 
 

$7,400

   
 

$8,000

   
 

$6,800

   

Manufacturing Overhead

 
 

$2,600

6,800

 
 

$3,000

   
 

1,900

   

Wages & Salaries Payable

 
 

12,300

1,400

Beg Bal

   

11,000

 

Cost of Goods Sold

   
 

22,900

   

The direct labor cost was:

A) $8,000

B) $12,300

C) $12,600

D) $11,000

the direct materials cost was 633990

The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Farwest Company during the year:

Raw Materials

   

Beg Bal

4,700

10,000

 
 

$6,900

   

Finished Goods

   

Beg Bal

$1,900

22,900

 
 

$26,300

   

Work in Process

   

Beg Bal

$4,600

26,300

 
 

$7,400

   
 

$8,000

   
 

$6,800

   

Manufacturing Overhead

 
 

$2,600

6,800

 
 

$3,000

   
 

1,900

   

Wages & Salaries Payable

 
 

12,300

1,400

Beg Bal

   

11,000

 

Cost of Goods Sold

   
 

22,900

   

The direct materials cost was:

A) $8,000

B) $10,000

C) $7,400

D) $4,600

regarding the attempted resort to the privileged communication rule in seeking to av 634074

The CPA firm of Knox & Knox has been subpoenaed to testify and produce its correspondence and working papers in connection with a lawsuit brought against Johnson, one of its clients. Regarding the attempted resort to the privileged communication rule in seeking to avoid admission of such evidence in the lawsuit, which of the following is correct?

  1. Federal law recognizes such a privilege if the accountant is a Certified Public Accountant.
  2. The privilege is available regarding the working papers since the accountant is deemed to own them.
  3. The privilege is as widely available as the attorney-client privilege.
  4. In the absence of a specific statutory provision, the law does not recognize the existence of the privileged communication rule between an accountant and his client.

the partnership of maxim amp rose cpas has been engaged by their largest client a li 634076

The partnership of Maxim & Rose, CPAs, has been engaged by their largest client, a limited partnership, to examine the financial statements in connection with the offering of 2,000 limited-partnership interests to the public at $5,000 per subscription. Under these circumstances, which of the following is true?

  1. Maxim & Rose may disclaim any liability under the Federal Securities Acts by an unambiguous, boldfaced disclaimer of liability on its audit report.
  2. Under the Securities Act of 1933, Maxim & Rose has responsibility only for the financial statements as of the close of the fiscal year in question.
  3. The dollar amount in question is sufficiently small so as to provide an exemption from the Securities Act of 1933.
  4. The Securities Act of 1933 requires a registration despite the fact that the client is not selling stock or another traditional “security.”

a nonnegotiable note since it states that it is secured by a conditional sales contr 634079

Your client has in its possession the following instrument:

$700.000

Provo, Utah

May 1, 2002

Thirty days after date I promise to pay to the order of

Cash

Seven hundred

Dollars

at

Boise, Idaho

Value received with interest at the rate of 10% per annum.

This instrument is secured by a conditional sales contract.

No. 20

Due June 1, 2002

Len Bowie

This instrument is

  1. A negotiable time draft.
  2. A nonnegotiable note since it states that it is secured by a conditional sales contract.
  3. Not negotiable until June 1, 2002.
  4. A negotiable bearer note.

the speculation proved to be highly successful and the land is now worth substantial 634082

Marcross and two business associates own real property as tenants in common that they have invested in as a speculation. The speculation proved to be highly successful, and the land is now worth substantially more than their investment. Which of the following is a correct legal incident of ownership of the property?

  1. Upon the death of any of the other tenants, the deceased’s interest passes to the survivor(s) unless there is a will.
  2. Each of the cotenants owns an undivided interest in the whole.
  3. A cotenant cannot sell his interest in the property without the consent of the other tenants.
  4. Upon the death of a cotenant, his estate is entitled to the amount of the original investment, but not the appreciation.

what amount of fire loss were the hoyts entitled to deduct as an itemized deduction 634088

This item is based on the following selected 2007 information pertaining to Sam and Ann Hoyt, who filed a joint federal income tax return for the calendar year 2007. The Hoyts had adjusted gross income of $34,000 and itemized their deductions for 2007. Among the Hoyts’ cash expenditures during 2007 were the following:

$2,500 repairs in connection with 2007 fire damage to the Hoyt residence. This property has a basis of $50,000. Fair market value was $60,000 before the fire and $55,000 after the fire. Insurance on the property had lapsed in 2006 for nonpayment of premium.

$800 appraisal fee to determine amount of fire loss.

What amount of fire loss were the Hoyts entitled to deduct as an itemized deduction on their 2007 return?

  1. $5,000
  2. $2,500
  3. $1,600
  4. $1,500

the executor of wald rsquo s estate did not elect the alternate valuation date 634096

Following are the fair market values of Wald’s assets at the date of death:

Personal effects and jewelry

$650,000

Land bought by Wald with Wald’s funds five years prior to death and held with Wald’s sister as joint tenants with right of survivorship

1,900,000

The executor of Wald’s estate did not elect the alternate valuation date. The amount includible as Wald’s gross estate in the Federal estate tax return is

  1. $ 650,000
  2. $1,600,000
  3. $1,900,000
  4. $2,550,000

they fail to agree on how they will share any losses at the end of the first year of 634099

Able, Bray, and Carry form a general partnership to produce and sell widgets. Able is a CPA, Bray has an MBA, and Carry has few skills. In their partnership agreement, they decide to split any profits they have in the following respective proportions: 45%, 45%, and 10%. They fail to agree on how they will share any losses. At the end of the first year of operations they have a large loss. Assuming each of the partners has sufficient assets to cover the loss of their partnership, how will they split the losses between Able, Bray, and Carry, respectively?

  1. 45%, 45%, and 10%.
  2. Equally.
  3. It cannot be determined yet until they agree upon a loss-sharing plan.
  4. A court of law will have to decide upon the way they will each share the loss.

total production costs of prior periods for a company are listed below assume that t 634108

Total production costs of prior periods for a company are listed below. Assume that the same cost behavior patterns can be extended linearly over the range of 3,000 to 35,000 units and that the cost driver for each cost is the number of units produced.

Production in units per month

3,000

9,000

16,000

35,000

Cost X

$23,700

$52,680

$86,490

$178,260

Cost Y

47,280

141,840

252,160

551,600

What is the average cost per unit at a production level of 8,000 units for cost X?

  1. $5.98
  2. $5.85
  3. $7.90
  4. $4.83

the following are selected data for lenley manufacturing company for the year ended 634110

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

The following are selected data for Lenley Manufacturing Company for the year ended 20X1.

Sales

$30,000,000

Average invested capital (total assets)

10,000,000

Total fixed assets

6,000,000

Net income

3,000,000

Net cash flow

5,000,000

Imputed interest rate

10%

Which of the following measures the return on investments for Lenley Manufacturing Company for the year?

  1. 2%
  2. 8%
  3. 10%
  4. 30%

Which of the following measures residual income for Lenley Manufacturing Company for the year?

  1. $1,000,000
  2. $2,000,000
  3. $3,000,000
  4. $6,000,000

three technicians will be added to the customer maintenance operations in the coming 634112

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

The operating results in summarized form for a retail computer store for 2003 are

Revenue:

Hardware sales

$4,800,000

Software sales

2,000,000

Maintenance contracts

1,200,00

Total revenue

$8,000,000

Costs and expenses

Cost of hardware sales

$3,360,000

Cost of software sales

1,200,000

Marketing expenses

600,000

Customer maintenance costs

640,000

Administrative expenses

1,120,000

Total costs and expenses

$6,920,000

Operating income

$1,080,000

The computer store is in the process of formulating its operating budget for 2004 and has made the following assumptions:

  • The selling prices of hardware are expected to increase 10% but there will be no selling price increases for software and maintenance contracts.
  • Hardware unit sales are expected to increase 5% with a corresponding 5% growth in the number of maintenance contracts; growth in unit software sales is estimated at 8%.
  • The cost of hardware and software is expected to increase 4%.
  • Marketing expenses will be increased 5% in the coming year.
  • Three technicians will be added to the customer maintenance operations in the coming year, increasing the customer maintenance costs by $120,000.
  • Administrative costs will be held at the same level.

The retail computer store’s budgeted total revenue for 2004 would be

  1. $8,804,000
  2. $8,460,000
  3. $8,904,000
  4. $8,964,000

The retail computer store’s budgeted total costs and expenses for the coming year would be

  1. $7,252,400
  2. $7,526,960
  3. $7,558,960
  4. $7,893,872

the power and maintenance departments of a manufacturing company are service departm 634125

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

The power and maintenance departments of a manufacturing company are service departments that provide support to each other as well as to the organization’s two production departments, plating and assembly. The manufacturing company employs separate departmental manufacturing overhead rates for the two production departments requiring the allocation of the service department costs to the two manufacturing departments. Square footage of area served is used to allocate the maintenance department costs while percentage of power usage is used to allocate the power department costs. Department costs and operation data are as follows:

Service Departments

Production Departments

Costs:

Power

Maintenance

Plating

Assembly

Labor

$60,000

$180,000

Overhead

1,440,000

540,000

Total costs

$1,500,000

$720,000

Operating Data:

Square feet

6,000

1,500

6,000

24,000

Percent of Usage:

Long-run capacity

5%

60%

35%

Expected actual use

4%

70%

26%

The allocation method that would provide this manufacturer with the theoretically best allocation of service department costs would be

  1. A dual-rate allocation method allocating variable cost on expected actual usage and fixed costs on long-run capacity usage.
  2. The step-down allocation method.
  3. The direct allocation method.
  4. The reciprocal (or linear algebra) allocation method.

Without prejudice to your answer in 11, assume that the manufacturing company employs the step-down allocation method to allocate service department costs. If it allocates the cost of the maintenance department first, then the amount of the maintenance department’s costs that are directly allocated to the plating department would be

  1. $144,000
  2. $120,000
  3. $115,200
  4. $ 90,000

what is lopinsky rsquo s debt to equity ratio 634128

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

The following information is available for Lopinsky, Inc.:

Balance Sheet

Current assets

$

500,000

Property, plant, & equipment

4,000,000

Total assets

$

4,500,000

Current liabilities

$

30,000

Long-term debt

2,500,000

Common stock

200,000

Retained earnings

1,770,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$

4,500,000

Cost of debt before tax

7%

Cost of equity

12%

Tax rate

25%

What is Lopinsky’s weighted-average cost of capital?

  1. 9.50%
  2. 8.75%
  3. 8.22%
  4. 6.10%

What is Lopinsky’s debt-to-equity ratio?

  1. 1.28
  2. 0.56
  3. 1.20
  4. 2.10

the organization believes that it will increase the float on its operating disbursem 634129

An organization has an opportunity to establish a zero balance account system using four different regional banks. The total amount of the maintenance and transfer fees is estimated to be $8,000 per annum. The organization believes that it will increase the float on its operating disbursements by an average of two days, and its cost of short-term funds is 4%. Assuming the organization estimates its average daily operating disbursements to be $80,000, what decision should the organization make regarding this opportunity?

  1. Do not open the zero balance accounts due to the additional cost of $8,000.
  2. Do not open the zero balance accounts due to an excess of costs over benefits of $1,600.
  3. Open the zero balance accounts due to an estimated savings of $1,200.
  4. Open the zero balance accounts due to an estimated savings of $6,200.

a consultant recommends that a company hold funds for the following two reasons 634133

A consultant recommends that a company hold funds for the following two reasons.

Reason 1: Cash needs can fluctuate substantially throughout the year.

Reason 2: Opportunities for buying at a discount may appear during the year.

The cash balances used to address the reasons given above are correctly classified as

Reason 1

Reason 2

a.

Speculative balances

Speculative balances

b.

Speculative balances

Precautionary balances

c.

Precautionary balances

Speculative balances

d.

Precautionary balances

Precautionary balances

assuming that the company sells 80 000 units what is the maximum that can be paid fo 634144

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

Total Cost

Unit Cost

Sales (40,000 units)

$1,000,000

$25

Raw materials

160,000

4

Direct labor

280,000

7

Factory overhead:

Variable

80,000

2

Fixed

360,000

Selling and general expenses:

Variable

120,000

3

Fixed

225,000

How many units does the company need to produce and sell to make a before-tax profit of 10% of sales?

  1. 65,000 units.
  2. 36,562 units.
  3. 90,000 units.
  4. 29,250 units.

Assuming that the company sells 80,000 units, what is the maximum that can be paid for an advertising campaign while still breaking even?

  1. $ 135,000
  2. $1,015,000
  3. $ 535,000
  4. $ 695,000

the standard direct labor cost to produce one pound of output for a company is prese 634151

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

The standard direct labor cost to produce one pound of output for a company is presented below. Related data regarding the planned and actual production activities for the current month for the company are also given below.

NOTE: DLH = Direct Labor Hours.

Direct Labor Standard:

.4 DLH @ $12.00 per DLH = $4.80

Planned production

15,000 pounds

Actual production

15,500 pounds

Actual direct labor costs (6,250 DLH)

$75,250

The company’s direct labor rate variance for the current month would be

  1. $10 unfavorable.
  2. $240 unfavorable.
  3. $248 unfavorable.
  4. $250 unfavorable.

The company’s direct labor efficiency variance for the current month would be

  1. $600 unfavorable.
  2. $602 unfavorable.
  3. $2,400 unfavorable.
  4. $3,000 unfavorable.

the cost of goods manufactured for the year was 633943

The accounting records of Omar Company contained the following information for last year:

 

Beginning

Ending

Direct materials inventory

$9,000

$7,000

Work in process inventory

$17,000

$31,000

Finished goods inventory

$10,000

$15,000

Manufacturing costs incurred

Direct materials used

$72,000

 

Overhead applied

$24,000

 

Direct labor cost (10,000 hours)

$80,000

 

Depreciation

$10,000

 

Rent

$12,000

 

Taxes

$8,000

 

Cost of goods sold

$157,000*

Selling and administrative costs incurred

Advertising

$35,000

 

Rent

$20,000

 

Clerical

$25,000

 

The cost of goods manufactured for the year was:

A) $190,000

B) $162,000

C) $168,000

D) $135,000

the estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine hours were made at the be 633948

Acton Corporation, which applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours, has provided the following data for its most recent year of operations.

Estimated manufacturing overhead

$139,080

Estimated machine-hours

3,800

Actual manufacturing overhead

$137,000

Actual machine-hours

3,780

The estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine-hours were made at the beginning of the year for the purpose of computing the company”s predetermined overhead rate for the year.

the estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine hours were made at the be 633949

Acton Corporation, which applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours, has provided the following data for its most recent year of operations.

Estimated manufacturing overhead

$139,080

Estimated machine-hours

3,800

Actual manufacturing overhead

$137,000

Actual machine-hours

3,780

The estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine-hours were made at the beginning of the year for the purpose of computing the company”s predetermined overhead rate for the year. The predetermined overhead rate is closest to:

A) $36.60

B) $36.41

C) $36.24

D) $36.05

the estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine hours were made at the be 633950

Acton Corporation, which applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours, has provided the following data for its most recent year of operations.

Estimated manufacturing overhead

$139,080

Estimated machine-hours

3,800

Actual manufacturing overhead

$137,000

Actual machine-hours

3,780

The estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine-hours were made at the beginning of the year for the purpose of computing the company”s predetermined overhead rate for the year. The applied manufacturing overhead for the year is closest to:

A) $136,269

B) $138,348

C) $136,987

D) $137,630

the estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine hours were made at the be 633951

Acton Corporation, which applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours, has provided the following data for its most recent year of operations.

Estimated manufacturing overhead

$139,080

Estimated machine-hours

3,800

Actual manufacturing overhead

$137,000

Actual machine-hours

3,780

The estimates of the manufacturing overhead and of machine-hours were made at the beginning of the year for the purpose of computing the company”s predetermined overhead rate for the year.

The overhead for the year was:

A) $732 underapplied

B) $1,348 underapplied

C) $732 overapplied

D) $1,348 overapplied

work in process inventory on may 30 contains 7 540 of direct labor cost raw material 633958

Dapper Company had only one job in process on May 1. The job had been charged with $3,400 of direct materials, $4,640 of direct labor, and $9,200 of manufacturing overhead cost. The company assigns overhead cost to jobs using the predetermined overhead rate of $23.00 per direct labor-hour. During May, the activity was recorded:

Raw materials (all direct materials):

Beginning balance

$8,500

Purchased during the month

$42,000

Used in production

$48,500

Labor:

 

Direct labor-hours worked during the month

2,200

Direct labor cost incurred

$25,520

Actual manufacturing overhead costs incurred

$52,800

Inventories:

 

Raw materials, May 30

?

Work in process, May 30

$32,190

Work in process inventory on May 30 contains $7,540 of direct labor cost. Raw materials consist solely of items that are classified as direct materials. The balance in the raw materials inventory account on May 30 was:

A) $33,500

B) $2,000

C) $40,000

D) $6,500

work in process inventory on may 30 contains 7 540 of direct labor cost raw material 633959

Dapper Company had only one job in process on May 1. The job had been charged with $3,400 of direct materials, $4,640 of direct labor, and $9,200 of manufacturing overhead cost. The company assigns overhead cost to jobs using the predetermined overhead rate of $23.00 per direct labor-hour. During May, the activity was recorded:

Raw materials (all direct materials):

Beginning balance

$8,500

Purchased during the month

$42,000

Used in production

$48,500

Labor:

 

Direct labor-hours worked during the month

2,200

Direct labor cost incurred

$25,520

Actual manufacturing overhead costs incurred

$52,800

Inventories:

 

Raw materials, May 30

?

Work in process, May 30

$32,190

Work in process inventory on May 30 contains $7,540 of direct labor cost. Raw materials consist solely of items that are classified as direct materials. The cost of goods manufactured for May was:

A) $109,670

B) $124,620

C) $143,300

D) $126,820

work in process inventory on may 30 contains 7 540 of direct labor cost raw material 633960

Dapper Company had only one job in process on May 1. The job had been charged with $3,400 of direct materials, $4,640 of direct labor, and $9,200 of manufacturing overhead cost. The company assigns overhead cost to jobs using the predetermined overhead rate of $23.00 per direct labor-hour. During May, the activity was recorded:

Raw materials (all direct materials):

Beginning balance

$8,500

Purchased during the month

$42,000

Used in production

$48,500

Labor:

 

Direct labor-hours worked during the month

2,200

Direct labor cost incurred

$25,520

Actual manufacturing overhead costs incurred

$52,800

Inventories:

 

Raw materials, May 30

?

Work in process, May 30

$32,190

Work in process inventory on May 30 contains $7,540 of direct labor cost. Raw materials consist solely of items that are classified as direct materials. The entry to dispose of the under- or overapplied overhead cost for the month would include a:

A) debit of $2,200 to Manufacturing Overhead

B) debit of $14,950 to Manufacturing Overhead

C) credit of $14,950 to Manufacturing Overhead

D) credit of $2,200 to Manufacturing Overhead

which had been charged with 4 000 in direct materials and on which 300 hours of dire 633961

The direct labor rate in Brent Company is $9.00 per hour, and manufacturing overhead is applied to products using a predetermined overhead rate of $6.00 per direct labor hour. During May, the company purchased $60,000 in raw materials (all direct materials) and worked 3,200 direct labor hours. The Raw Materials inventory (all direct materials) decreased by $3,000 between the beginning and end of May. The Work in Process inventory on May 1 consisted of one job which had been charged with $4,000 in direct materials and on which 300 hours of direct labor time had been worked. There was no Work in Process inventory on May 31. The balance in the Work in Process inventory account on May 1 was:

A) $0

B) $6,700

C) $4,500

D) $8,500

the direct labor rate in brent company is 9 00 per hour and manufacturing overhead i 633962

The direct labor rate in Brent Company is $9.00 per hour, and manufacturing overhead is applied to products using a predetermined overhead rate of $6.00 per direct labor hour. During May, the company purchased $60,000 in raw materials (all direct materials) and worked 3,200 direct labor hours. The Raw Materials inventory (all direct materials) decreased by $3,000 between the beginning and end of May. The Work in Process inventory on May 1 consisted of one job which had been charged with $4,000 in direct materials and on which 300 hours of direct labor time had been worked. There was no Work in Process inventory on May 31. The debit to Work in Process for the cost of direct materials used during May was:

A) $63,000

B) $61,000

C) $57,000

D) $67,000

the debit to work in process for direct labor cost during may was 633963

The direct labor rate in Brent Company is $9.00 per hour, and manufacturing overhead is applied to products using a predetermined overhead rate of $6.00 per direct labor hour. During May, the company purchased $60,000 in raw materials (all direct materials) and worked 3,200 direct labor hours. The Raw Materials inventory (all direct materials) decreased by $3,000 between the beginning and end of May. The Work in Process inventory on May 1 consisted of one job which had been charged with $4,000 in direct materials and on which 300 hours of direct labor time had been worked. There was no Work in Process inventory on May 31.

The debit to Work in Process for direct labor cost during May was:

A) $21,000

B) $26,100

C) $28,800

D) $31,500

the direct labor cost was 633970

The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Western Company during the year:

Raw Material

   

Beg Bal

3,000

8,000

 
 

$5,000

   
 

7,000

   

Finished Goods

   

Beg Bal

9,000

20,000

 
 

25,000

   

Work in Process

   

Beg Bal

6,000

25,000

 
 

6,500

   
 

9,000

   
 

7,000

   

Wages & Salaries Payable

 
 

10,000

2,000

Beg Bal

   

12,000

 

Manufacturing Overhead

 
 

1,500

7,000

 
 

2,000

   
 

750

   
 

3,000

   

Cost of Goods Sold

   
 

20,000

   

The direct labor cost was:

A) $9,000

B) $12,000

C) $10,000

D) $14,000

the direct materials cost was 633971

The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Western Company during the year:

Raw Material

   

Beg Bal

3,000

8,000

 
 

$5,000

   
 

7,000

   

Finished Goods

   

Beg Bal

9,000

20,000

 
 

25,000

   

Work in Process

   

Beg Bal

6,000

25,000

 
 

6,500

   
 

9,000

   
 

7,000

   

Wages & Salaries Payable

 
 

10,000

2,000

Beg Bal

   

12,000

 

Manufacturing Overhead

 
 

1,500

7,000

 
 

2,000

   
 

750

   
 

3,000

   

Cost of Goods Sold

   
 

20,000

   

The direct materials cost was:

A) $8,000

B) $6,500

C) $9,000

D) $6,000

the manufacturing overhead was 633973

The following partially completed T-accounts summarize transactions for Western Company during the year:

Raw Material

   

Beg Bal

3,000

8,000

 
 

$5,000

   
 

7,000

   

Finished Goods

   

Beg Bal

9,000

20,000

 
 

25,000

   

Work in Process

   

Beg Bal

6,000

25,000

 
 

6,500

   
 

9,000

   
 

7,000

   

Wages & Salaries Payable

 
 

10,000

2,000

Beg Bal

   

12,000

 

Manufacturing Overhead

 
 

1,500

7,000

 
 

2,000

   
 

750

   
 

3,000

   

Cost of Goods Sold

   
 

20,000

   

The manufacturing overhead was:

A) $250 overapplied

B) $750 underapplied

C) $250 underapplied

D) $750 overapplied

kapanga applies manufacturing overhead at a rate of 150 of direct labor cost during 633974

Kapanga Manufacturing Company uses a job-order costing system and started the month of October with a zero balance in its work in process and finished goods inventory accounts. During October, Kapanga worked on three jobs and incurred the following direct costs on those jobs:

 

Job B18

Job B19

Job C11

Direct materials

$12,000

$25,000

$18,000

Direct labor

$8,000

$10,000

$5,000

Kapanga applies manufacturing overhead at a rate of 150% of direct labor cost. During October, Kapanga completed Jobs B18 and B19 and sold Job B19. What is Kapanga”s cost of goods manufactured for October?

A) $ 50,000

B) $ 55,000

C) $ 78,000

D) $ 82,000

kapanga applies manufacturing overhead at a rate of 150 of direct labor cost during 633975

Kapanga Manufacturing Company uses a job-order costing system and started the month of October with a zero balance in its work in process and finished goods inventory accounts. During October, Kapanga worked on three jobs and incurred the following direct costs on those jobs:

 

Job B18

Job B19

Job C11

Direct materials

$12,000

$25,000

$18,000

Direct labor

$8,000

$10,000

$5,000

Kapanga applies manufacturing overhead at a rate of 150% of direct labor cost. During October, Kapanga completed Jobs B18 and B19 and sold Job B19. What is Kapanga”s work in process inventory balance at the end of October?

A) $23,000

B) $30,500

C) $32,000

D) $43,000

the amount of direct materials cost in the may 31 work in process inventory account 633977

Dillon Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate of 75% of direct labor cost. Any under or overapplied overhead cost is closed out to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of the month. During May, the following transactions were recorded by the company:

Raw materials (all direct materials):

Purchased during the month

$38,000

Used in production

$35,000

Labor:

 

Direct labor hours worked during the month

3,150

Direct labor cost incurred

$30,000

Manufacturing overhead cost incurred (total)

$24,500

Inventories:

Raw materials (all direct), May 31

$8,000

Work in process, May 1

$9,000

Work in process, May 31

$12,000

The amount of direct materials cost in the May 31 Work in Process inventory account

was:

A) $7,600

B) $2,000

C) $6,300

D) $4,300

the cost of goods manufactured for may was 633979

Dillon Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs using a predetermined overhead rate of 75% of direct labor cost. Any under or overapplied overhead cost is closed out to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of the month. During May, the following transactions were recorded by the company:

Raw materials (all direct materials):

Purchased during the month

$38,000

Used in production

$35,000

Labor:

 

Direct labor hours worked during the month

3,150

Direct labor cost incurred

$30,000

Manufacturing overhead cost incurred (total)

$24,500

Inventories:

Raw materials (all direct), May 31

$8,000

Work in process, May 1

$9,000

Work in process, May 31

$12,000

The Cost of Goods Manufactured for May was:

A) $84,500

B) $95,000

C) $75,500

D) $81,500

applied overhead was 30 of total manufacturing costs the work in process inventory a 633980

Farber Corporation uses a job-order cost system. The information below is from the financial records of the company for last year:

Total manufacturing costs

$2,500,000

Cost of goods manufactured

$2,425,000

Predetermined overhead rate

80% of direct labor cost

Applied overhead was 30% of total manufacturing costs. The Work in Process inventory at January 1 was 75% of the Work in Process inventory at December 31. Farber Company”s total direct labor cost was:

A) $750,000

B) $600,000

C) $900,000

D) $937,500

applied overhead was 30 of total manufacturing costs the work in process inventory a 633981

Farber Corporation uses a job-order cost system. The information below is from the financial records of the company for last year:

Total manufacturing costs

$2,500,000

Cost of goods manufactured

$2,425,000

Predetermined overhead rate

80% of direct labor cost

Applied overhead was 30% of total manufacturing costs. The Work in Process inventory at January 1 was 75% of the Work in Process inventory at December 31. Total cost of direct material used by Farber Company was:

A) $750,000

B) $812,500

C) $850,000

D) $1,150,000

prepare a quality cost report in good form with separate sections for prevention cos 633892

Gagnon Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Maintenance of test equipment

$18,000

Test and inspection of incoming materials

$73,000

Systems development

$29,000

Product recalls

$91,000

Quality training

$25,000

Disposal of defective products

$55,000

Supervision of testing and inspection activities

$24,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$58,000

Net cost of scrap

$23,000

Required:

Prepare a Quality Cost Report in good form with separate sections for prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, and external failure costs.

prepare a quality cost report in good form with separate sections for prevention cos 633895

Harvold Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Test and inspection of incoming materials

$71,000

Supplies used in testing and inspection

$51,000

Re-entering data because of keying errors

$60,000

Statistical process control activities

$82,000

Technical support provided to suppliers

$91,000

Disposal of defective products

$60,000

Lost sales due to poor quality

$87,000

Net cost of scrap

$85,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$70,000

Required:

Prepare a Quality Cost Report in good form with separate sections for prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, and external failure costs.

prepare a quality cost report in good form with separate sections for prevention cos 633896

Hartlie Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Lost sales due to poor quality

$11,000

Rework labor and overhead

$75,000

Statistical process control activities

$26,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$16,000

Re-entering data because of keying errors

$86,000

Debugging software errors

$55,000

Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting

$48,000

Supervision of testing and inspection activities

$12,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$75,000

Required:

Prepare a Quality Cost Report in good form with separate sections for prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, and external failure costs.

prepare a quality cost report in good form with separate sections for prevention cos 633897

Hartness Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Depreciation of test equipment

$75,000

Rework labor and overhead

$11,000

Quality circles

$46,000

Quality training

$94,000

Test and inspection of incoming materials

$64,000

Product recalls

$71,000

Net cost of scrap

$12,000

Re-entering data because of keying errors

$52,000

Cost of field servicing and handling complaints

$25,000

Required:

Prepare a Quality Cost Report in good form with separate sections for prevention costs, appraisal costs, internal failure costs, and external failure costs.

when raw materials are purchased they are recorded as an expense 633898

Process costing is used in those situations where many different products or services are produced each period to customer specifications.

The basic approach in job-order costing is to accumulate costs in a particular operation or department for an entire period (month, quarter, year) and then to divide this total by the number of units produced during the period.

If a company uses predetermined overhead rates, actual manufacturing overhead costs of a period will be recorded in the Manufacturing Overhead account, but they will not be recorded on the job cost sheets for the period. In a job-order cost system, indirect labor is assigned to a job by using the labor time ticket as a source document.

The formula for computing the predetermined overhead rate is: Estimated total units in base ÷ Estimated total manufacturing costs

The fact that one department may be labor intensive while another department is machine intensive may explain in part the existence of multiple predetermined overhead rates in larger companies.

If a company closes any under- or overapplied overhead to the Cost of Goods Sold account, then Cost of Goods Sold will be credited if manufacturing overhead is overapplied for the period.

The following entry would be used to record the transfer of material from the storeroom to production if 80% of the material was direct material and 20% was indirect material:

Work in Process

40,000

Manufacturing Overhead

10,000

Raw Material

50,000

If a job is not completed at the end of the year, then no manufacturing overhead cost should be applied to that job.

When raw materials are purchased, they are recorded as an expense.

In a job-order cost system, depreciation on factory equipment should be charged directly to the Work in Process account.

The entire difference between the actual manufacturing overhead cost for a period and the applied manufacturing overhead cost is typically closed to the Work In Process account.

If the actual manufacturing overhead costs for a period exceed the manufacturing overhead costs applied, then overhead would be considered to be overapplied.

When the predetermined overhead rate is based on the level of activity at capacity, the overhead underapplied may be called the Cost of Unused Capacity and treated as a period expense.

The absorption cost approach is so named because it provides for the absorption of all manufacturing costs, fixed and variable, into units of product.

the operations of kalispell company resulted in overapplied overhead for the month j 633903

The operations of Kalispell Company resulted in overapplied overhead for the month just completed. Which of the following journal entries can be correct if Kalispell allocates under- or overapplied overhead among accounts?

A) Cost of Goods Sold

XXX

Manufacturing Overhead

XXX

B) Manufacturing Overhead

XXX

Cost of Goods Sold

XXX

C) Work in Process

XXX

Finished Goods

XXX

Cost of Goods Sold

XXX

Manufacturing Overhead

XXX

D) Manufacturing Overhead

XXX

Work in Process

XXX

Finished Goods

XXX

Cost of Goods Sold

XXX

which of the following entries would record correctly the monthly salaries earned by 633904

Which of the following entries would record correctly the monthly salaries earned by the top management of a manufacturing company?

A) Manufacturing Overhead

XXX

Salaries and Wages Payable

XXX

B) Salaries Expense

XXX

Salaries and Wages Payable

XXX

C) Work in Process

XXX

Salaries and Wages Payable

XXX

D) Salaries and Wages Payable

XXX

Salaries Expense

XXX

the total manufacturing costs associated with job 123 should be 633915

Blackwood Co. uses a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost to apply manufacturing overhead to jobs. The predetermined overhead rates for the year are 200% for Department A and 50% for Department B. Job 123, started and completed during the year, was charged with the following costs:

 

Dept. A

Dept. B

Direct materials

$25,000

$5,000

Direct labor

?

$30,000

Manufacturing overhead

$40,000

?

The total manufacturing costs associated with Job 123 should be:

A) $135,000

B) $180,000

C) $195,000

D) $240,000

during the month fisher company s work in process inventory account was credited for 633916

Fisher Company uses a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost to apply manufacturing overhead to jobs. The following information about Fisher Company”s Work in Process inventory account has been provided for the month of May:

May 1 balance

$26,000

Debits during May:

 

Direct Materials

$40,000

Direct Labor

$50,000

Manufacturing Overhead

$37,500

During the month, Fisher Company”s Work in Process inventory account was credited for $120,500, which represented the Cost of Goods Manufactured for the month. Only one job remained in process on May 31; this job had been charged with $9,600 of applied overhead cost. The amount of direct materials cost in the unfinished job would be:

A) $10,600

B) $16,700

C) $12,800

D) $23,400

an additional 100 of labor was needed in november to complete this job for this job 633929

Juanita Corporation uses a job-order cost system and applies overhead on the basis of direct labor cost. At the end of October, Juanita had one job still in process. The job cost sheet for this job contained the following information:

Direct materials

$480

Direct labor

$150

Manufacturing overhead applied

$600

An additional $100 of labor was needed in November to complete this job. For this job, how much should Juanita have transferred to finished goods inventory in November when it was completed?

A) $1,330

B) $500

C) $1,230

D) $1,730

it is estimated that 10 000 direct labor hours will be worked during the year the pr 633930

Wall Company uses a predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor hours to apply manufacturing overhead to jobs. The company”s estimated costs for the next year are:

Direct materials

$3,000

Direct labor

$20,000

Depreciation on factory equipment

$6,000

Rent on factory

$12,000

Sales salaries

$29,000

Factory utilities

$15,000

Indirect labor

$6,000

It is estimated that 10,000 direct labor hours will be worked during the year. The predetermined overhead rate will be:

A) $3.90

B) $5.90

C) $6.80

D) $9.10

the company closes out the balance in the manufacturing overhead to cost of goods so 633931

The following information relates to Spock Manufacturing Company:

Total estimated manufacturing overhead at beginning of year

$620,000

Total manufacturing overhead applied to production during

 

the year

$625,000

Total manufacturing overhead incurred during the year

$618,000

The company closes out the balance in the Manufacturing Overhead to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of the year. In the journal entry to close out the balance, the company would:

A) debit cost of goods sold for $2,000

B) credit cost of goods sold for $2,000

C) credit cost of goods sold for $7,000

D) debit cost of goods sold for $7,000

what is the direct labor cost assigned to this job 633933

Serenje Manufacturing Company produces nameplates and uses a job-order cost system. The following amounts relate to nameplate production for the month of June:

Work in process inventory, June 1

$620

Cost of materials directly assigned to production during June

$1,800

Cost of labor directly assigned to production during June

$1,200

Cost of nameplates completed during June

$4,300

Serenje applies overhead at a predetermined overhead rate of 60% of direct material cost. At the end of June, only one job was in Work in Process inventory. This job had been charged with $150 of direct material cost. What is the direct labor cost assigned to this job?

A) $100

B) $160

C) $225

D) $530

the under or overapplied overhead for the year was 633934

Dukes Company used a predetermined overhead rate this year of $2 per direct labor hour, based on an estimate of 20,000 direct labor hours to be worked during the year. Actual costs and activity during the year were:

Actual manufacturing overhead cost incurred

$38,000

Actual direct labor hours worked

18,500

The under- or overapplied overhead for the year was:

A) $1,000 underapplied

B) $1,000 overapplied

C) $3,000 underapplied

D) $3,000 overapplied

if all entries had been made correctly during the year the manufacturing overhead ac 633937

In reviewing the accounting records at year-end, Garff Company”s accountant has determined that the following items and amounts were debited to the Manufacturing Overhead account during the year:

Factory supervisor’s salary

$8,000

Sales commissions

$7,000

Vacation pay for the materials storeroom clerk

$2,000

Including the items listed above, the debits to the Manufacturing Overhead account totaled $245,000 for the year. Credits to the account totaled $240,000 for the year. Based on this information, if all entries had been made correctly during the year the Manufacturing Overhead account would have been:

A) overapplied by $4,000

B) overapplied by $12,000

C) underapplied by $5,000

D) overapplied by $2,000

the cost of direct materials used would be 633938

Compute the October cost of direct materials used if raw material purchases for the month were $30,000 and the inventories were as follows:

Beginning Ending

Direct materials

$7,000

$4,000

Work in Process

$6,000

$7,500

Finished goods

$10,000

$12,000

The cost of direct materials used would be:

A) $31,500

B) $29,500

C) $27,000

D) $33,000

the total costs added to work in process during the year were 633941

The accounting records of Omar Company contained the following information for last year:

 

Beginning

Ending

Direct materials inventory

$9,000

$7,000

Work in process inventory

$17,000

$31,000

Finished goods inventory

$10,000

$15,000

Manufacturing costs incurred

Direct materials used

$72,000

 

Overhead applied

$24,000

 

Direct labor cost (10,000 hours)

$80,000

 

Depreciation

$10,000

 

Rent

$12,000

 

Taxes

$8,000

 

Cost of goods sold

$157,000*

Selling and administrative costs incurred

Advertising

$35,000

 

Rent

$20,000

 

Clerical

$25,000

 

The total costs added to Work in Process during the year were:

A) $206,000

B) $162,000

C) $176,000

D) $182,000

if omar company applies overhead to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours and job 633942

The accounting records of Omar Company contained the following information for last year:

 

Beginning

Ending

Direct materials inventory

$9,000

$7,000

Work in process inventory

$17,000

$31,000

Finished goods inventory

$10,000

$15,000

Manufacturing costs incurred

Direct materials used

$72,000

 

Overhead applied

$24,000

 

Direct labor cost (10,000 hours)

$80,000

 

Depreciation

$10,000

 

Rent

$12,000

 

Taxes

$8,000

 

Cost of goods sold

$157,000*

Selling and administrative costs incurred

Advertising

$35,000

 

Rent

$20,000

 

Clerical

$25,000

 

If Omar Company applies overhead to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours and Job 3 took 120 hours, how much overhead should be applied to that job?

A) $960

B) $360

C) $528

D) $288

marrell is employed on the assembly line of a manufacturing company where she assemb 633862

Marrell is employed on the assembly line of a manufacturing company where she assembles a component part for one of the company”s products. She is paid $16 per hour for regular time and time and a half for all work in excess of 40 hours per week. Marrell works 45 hours during a week in which there was no idle time. The allocation of Marrell”s wages for the week as between direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead cost would be:

 

Direct Labor

Manufacturing

 

$760

Overhead

A)

$720

$0

B)

$640

$40

C)

$610

$80

D)

Direct Labor

$40

the allocation of marrell s wages for the week between the direct labor cost and man 633864

Marrell is employed on the assembly line of a manufacturing company where she assembles a component part for one of the company”s products. She is paid $16 per hour for regular time and time and a half for all work in excess of 40 hours per week. Marrell”s employer offers fringe benefits that cost the company $4 for each hour of employee time (either regular or overtime). During a given week, Marrell works 48 hours but is idle for 3 hours due to material shortages. The company treats all fringe benefits as part of manufacturing overhead. The allocation of Marrell”s wages for the week between the direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead would be:

 

 

Manufacturing

 

Direct Labor

Overhead

A)

$960

$64

B)

$768

$256

C)

$720

$304

D)

$640

$320

the allocation of marrell s wages for the week between direct labor cost and manufac 633865

Marrell is employed on the assembly line of a manufacturing company where she assembles a component part for one of the company”s products. She is paid $16 per hour for regular time and time and a half for all work in excess of 40 hours per week.  Marrell”s employer offers fringe benefits that cost the company $4 for each hour of employee time (either regular or overtime). During a given week, Marrell works 48 hours but is idle for 3 hours due to material shortages. The company treats all fringe benefits relating to direct labor as added direct labor cost. The allocation of Marrell”s wages for the week between direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead would be:

 

 

Manufacturing

 

Direct Labor

Overhead

A)

$832

$128

B)

$900

$124

C)

$912

$112

D)

$960

$64

what would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report 633866

Eakle Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Supervision of testing and inspection activities

$29,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$12,000

Net cost of scrap

$53,000

Test and inspection of incoming materials

$23,000

Technical support provided to suppliers

$71,000

Disposal of defective products

$94,000

Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting

$47,000

Liability arising from defective products

$75,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$22,000

What would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $118,000

B) $93,000

C) $76,000

D) $59,000

what would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report 633867

Eakle Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Supervision of testing and inspection activities

$29,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$12,000

Net cost of scrap

$53,000

Test and inspection of incoming materials

$23,000

Technical support provided to suppliers

$71,000

Disposal of defective products

$94,000

Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting

$47,000

Liability arising from defective products

$75,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$22,000

What would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $45,000

B) $52,000

C) $74,000

D) $76,000

what would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report 633869

Eakle Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Supervision of testing and inspection activities

$29,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$12,000

Net cost of scrap

$53,000

Test and inspection of incoming materials

$23,000

Technical support provided to suppliers

$71,000

Disposal of defective products

$94,000

Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting

$47,000

Liability arising from defective products

$75,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$22,000

What would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $426,000

B) $234,000

C) $106,000

D) $87,000

what would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report 633870

Ealsy Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Maintenance of test equipment

$95,000

Cost of field servicing and handling complaints

$17,000

Statistical process control activities

$77,000

Net cost of scrap .

$62,000

Downtime caused by quality problems .

$23,000

Technical support provided to suppliers

$93,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$81,000

Supplies used in testing and inspection

$33,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$24,000

What would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $172,000

B) $170,000

C) $174,000

D) $94,000

what would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report 633871

Ealsy Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Maintenance of test equipment

$95,000

Cost of field servicing and handling complaints

$17,000

Statistical process control activities

$77,000

Net cost of scrap .

$62,000

Downtime caused by quality problems .

$23,000

Technical support provided to suppliers

$93,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$81,000

Supplies used in testing and inspection

$33,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$24,000

What would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $114,000

B) $95,000

C) $128,000

D) $209,000

what would be the total internal failure cost appearing on the quality cost report 633872

Ealsy Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Maintenance of test equipment

$95,000

Cost of field servicing and handling complaints

$17,000

Statistical process control activities

$77,000

Net cost of scrap .

$62,000

Downtime caused by quality problems .

$23,000

Technical support provided to suppliers

$93,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$81,000

Supplies used in testing and inspection

$33,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$24,000

What would be the total internal failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $85,000

B) $143,000

C) $40,000

D) $86,000

what would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report 633875

Eames Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Technical support provided to suppliers

$20,000

Test and inspection of in-process goods

$67,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$68,000

Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting

$46,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$97,000

Debugging software errors

$22,000

Downtime caused by quality problems

$95,000

Returns arising from quality problems

$12,000

Supervision of testing and inspection activities.

$24,000

What would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $163,000

B) $135,000

C) $159,000

D) $92,000

what would be the total internal failure cost appearing on the quality cost report 633876

Eames Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Technical support provided to suppliers

$20,000

Test and inspection of in-process goods

$67,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$68,000

Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting

$46,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$97,000

Debugging software errors

$22,000

Downtime caused by quality problems

$95,000

Returns arising from quality problems

$12,000

Supervision of testing and inspection activities.

$24,000

What would be the total internal failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $162,000

B) $34,000

C) $117,000

D) $192,000

what would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report 633877

Eames Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Technical support provided to suppliers

$20,000

Test and inspection of in-process goods

$67,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$68,000

Quality data gathering, analysis, and reporting

$46,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$97,000

Debugging software errors

$22,000

Downtime caused by quality problems

$95,000

Returns arising from quality problems

$12,000

Supervision of testing and inspection activities.

$24,000

What would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $226,000

B) $451,000

C) $109,000

D) $34,000

what would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report 633878

Factoria Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Disposal of defective products

$41,000

Statistical process control activities

$29,000

Test and inspection of in-process goods

$65,000

Net cost of spoilage

$23,000

Test and inspection of incoming materials

$22,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$14,000

Downtime caused by quality problems

$56,000

Quality training

$42,000

Product recalls

$32,000

What would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $71,000

B) $51,000

C) $107,000

D) $43,000

what would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report 633879

Factoria Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Disposal of defective products

$41,000

Statistical process control activities

$29,000

Test and inspection of in-process goods

$65,000

Net cost of spoilage

$23,000

Test and inspection of incoming materials

$22,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$14,000

Downtime caused by quality problems

$56,000

Quality training

$42,000

Product recalls

$32,000

What would be the total appraisal cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $63,000

B) $87,000

C) $88,000

D) $158,000

what would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report 633881

Factoria Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Disposal of defective products

$41,000

Statistical process control activities

$29,000

Test and inspection of in-process goods

$65,000

Net cost of spoilage

$23,000

Test and inspection of incoming materials

$22,000

Warranty repairs and replacements

$14,000

Downtime caused by quality problems

$56,000

Quality training

$42,000

Product recalls

$32,000

What would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $88,000

B) $166,000

C) $324,000

D) $46,000

what would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report 633882

Fadden Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Statistical process control activities

$97,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$87,000

Supplies used in testing and inspection

$48,000

Re-entering data because of keying errors

$12,000

Debugging software errors

73,000

Quality circles

$84,000

Net cost of spoilage

$85,000

Returns arising from quality problems

$28,000

Cost of field servicing and handling complaints

$65,000

What would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $184,000

B) $125,000

C) $132,000

D) $181,000

what would be the total internal failure cost appearing on the quality cost report 633884

Fadden Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Statistical process control activities

$97,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$87,000

Supplies used in testing and inspection

$48,000

Re-entering data because of keying errors

$12,000

Debugging software errors

73,000

Quality circles

$84,000

Net cost of spoilage

$85,000

Returns arising from quality problems

$28,000

Cost of field servicing and handling complaints

$65,000

What would be the total internal failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $150,000

B) $170,000

C) $101,000

D) $133,000

what would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report 633886

Fado Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Net cost of scrap

$18,000

Quality circles

$84,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$32,000

Returns arising from quality problems

$59,000

Systems development

$45,000

Supplies used in testing and inspection

$68,000

Product recalls

$34,000

Disposal of defective products

$62,000

Debugging software errors

$56,000

What would be the total prevention cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $129,000

B) $116,000

C) $143,000

D) $113,000

what would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report 633889

Fado Company”s quality cost report is to be based on the following data:

Net cost of scrap

$18,000

Quality circles

$84,000

Depreciation of test equipment

$32,000

Returns arising from quality problems

$59,000

Systems development

$45,000

Supplies used in testing and inspection

$68,000

Product recalls

$34,000

Disposal of defective products

$62,000

Debugging software errors

$56,000

What would be the total external failure cost appearing on the quality cost report?

A) $458,000

B) $96,000

C) $93,000

D) $229,000

prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured in good form 633890

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Larder Corporation for the just completed year.

Sales

$950

Purchases of raw materials

$170

Direct labor

$210

Manufacturing overhead

$200

Administrative expenses

$180

Selling expenses

$140

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$70

Raw materials inventory, ending

$80

Work in process inventory, beginning

$30

Work in process inventory, ending

$20

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$100

Finished goods inventory, ending

$70

Required:

a. Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured in good form.

b. Compute the Cost of Goods Sold.

c. Using data from your Answers above as needed, prepare an Income Statement in good form

kent a wholesale distributor of cameras entered into a contract with williams willia 633770

Kent, a wholesale distributor of cameras, entered into a contract with Williams. Williams agreed to purchase 100 cameras with certain optional attachments. The contract was made on March 1, 2007, for delivery by March 15, 2007; terms: 2/10, net 30. Kent shipped the cameras on March 6, and they were delivered on March 10. The shipment did not conform to the contract, in that one of the attachments was not included. Williams immediately notified Kent that he was rejecting the goods. For maximum legal advantage Kent’s most appropriate action is to

  1. Bring an action for the price less an allowance for the missing attachment.
  2. Notify Williams promptly of his intention to cure the defect and make a conforming delivery by March 15.
  3. Terminate his contract with Williams and recover for breach of contract.
  4. Sue Williams for specific performance.

wilmont sold the land to marsh the deed to marsh recited that wilmont sold the land 633772

Wilmont owned a tract of waterfront property on Big Lake. During Wilmont’s ownership of the land, several frame bungalows were placed on the land by tenants who rented the land from Wilmont. In addition to paying rent, the tenants paid for the maintenance and insurance of the bungalows, repaired, altered and sold them, without permission or hindrance from Wilmont. The bungalows rested on surface cinderblock and were not bolted to the ground. The buildings could be removed without injury to either the buildings or the land. Wilmont sold the land to Marsh. The deed to Marsh recited that Wilmont sold the land, with buildings thereon, “subject to the rights of tenants, if any, …” When the tenants attempted to remove the bungalows, Marsh claimed ownership of them. In deciding who owns the bungalows, which of the following is least significant?

  1. The leasehold agreement itself, to the extent it manifested the intent of the parties.
  2. The mode and degree of annexation of the buildings to the land.
  3. The degree to which removal would cause injury to the buildings or the land.
  4. The fact that the deed included a general clause relating to the buildings.

what amount should lanier utilize as state and local income taxes in calculating ite 633775

Frank Lanier is a resident of a state that imposes a tax on income. The following information pertaining to Lanier’s state income taxes is available:

Taxes withheld in 2007

$3,500

Refund received in 2007 of 2006 tax

400

Deficiency assessed and paid in 2007 for 2005:

Tax

600

Interest

100

What amount should Lanier utilize as state and local income taxes in calculating itemized deductions for his 2007 federal tax return?

  1. $3,500
  2. $3,700
  3. $4,100
  4. $4,200

what is the maximum amount spencer can claim as a deduction for charitable contribut 633778

Spencer, who itemizes deductions, had adjusted gross income of $60,000 in 2007. The following additional information is available for 2007:

Cash contribution to church

$4,000

Purchase of art object at church bazaar (with a fair market value of $800 on the date of purchase)

1,200

Donation of used clothing to Salvation Army (fair value evidenced by receipt received)

600

What is the maximum amount Spencer can claim as a deduction for charitable contributions in 2007?

  1. $5,400
  2. $5,200
  3. $5,000
  4. $4,400

what amount of foreign tax credit may wald claim for 2007 633779

The following information pertains to Wald Corp.’s operations for the year ended December 31, 2007:

Worldwide taxable income

$300,000

US source taxable income

180,000

US income tax before foreign tax credit

96,000

Foreign nonbusiness-related interest earned

30,000

Foreign income taxes paid on nonbusiness-related interest earned

12,000

Other foreign source taxable income

90,000

Foreign income taxes paid on other foreign source taxable income

27,000

What amount of foreign tax credit may Wald claim for 2007?

  1. $28,800
  2. $36,600
  3. $38,400
  4. $39,000

the partnership of hager mazer amp slagle had the following cash basis balance sheet 633782

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following data:

The partnership of Hager, Mazer & Slagle had the following cash-basis balance sheet at December 31, 2006:

Adjusted basis per books

Fair market value

Assets

Cash

$51,000

$ 51,000

Accounts receivable

210,000

Totals

$51,000

$261,000

Liabilities and Capital

Note payable

$30,000

$ 30,000

Capital accounts:

Hager

7,000

77,000

Mazer

7,000

77,000

Slagle

7,000

77,000

Totals

$51,000

$261,000

Slagle, an equal partner, sold his partnership interest to Burns, an outsider, for $77,000 cash on January 1, 2007. In addition, Burns assumed Slagle’s share of partnership liabilities.

What was the total amount realized by Slagle on the sale of his partnership interest?

  1. $67,000
  2. $70,000
  3. $77,000
  4. $87,000

How much ordinary income should Slagle report in his 2007 income tax return on the sale of his partnership interest?

  1. $0
  2. $10,000
  3. $70,000
  4. $77,000

what was eastern rsquo s 2007 alternative minimum taxable income before the adjusted 633783

Eastern Corp., a calendar-year corporation, was formed in 2006. On January 2, 2007, it placed five-year property in service. The property was depreciated under the general MACRS system. Eastern did not elect to use the straight-line method. The following information pertains to Eastern:

Eastern’s 2007 taxable income

$300,000

Adjustment for the accelerated depreciation taken on 2007 five-year property

1,000

2007 tax-exempt interest from specified private activity bonds issued in 2003

5,000

What was Eastern’s 2007 alternative minimum taxable income before the adjusted current earnings (ACE) adjustment?

  1. $306,000
  2. $305,000
  3. $304,000
  4. $301,000

bank corp owns 80 of shore corp rsquo s outstanding capital stock shore rsquo s capi 633784

Bank Corp. owns 80% of Shore Corp.’s outstanding capital stock. Shore’s capital stock consists of 50,000 shares of common stock issued and outstanding. Shore’s 2007 net income was $140,000. During 2007, Shore declared and paid dividends of $60,000. In conformity with generally accepted accounting principles, Bank recorded the following entries in 2007:

Debit

Credit

Investment in Shore Corp. common stock

$112,000

Equity in earnings of subsidiary

$112,000

Cash

48,000

Investment in Shore Corp. common stock

48,000

In its 2007 consolidated tax return, Bank should report dividend revenue of

  1. $48,000
  2. $14,400
  3. $ 9,600
  4. $0

the cost of goods manufactured finished for the year in thousands of dollars was 633843

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsen Corporation for the just completed year.

Sales

$930

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$70

Raw materials inventory, ending

$40

Purchases of raw materials

$190

Direct labor

$150

Manufacturing overhead

$210

Administrative expenses

$90

Selling expenses

$120

Work in process inventory, beginning

$80

Work in process inventory, ending

$70

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$90

Finished goods inventory, ending

$140

Manufacturing overhead

$210

Administrative expenses

$90

Selling expenses

$120

Work in process inventory, beginning

$80

Work in process inventory, ending

$70

 The cost of goods manufactured (finished) for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:

A) $590

B) $650

C) $660

D) $570

the cost of goods sold for the year in thousands of dollars was 633844

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsen Corporation for the just completed year.

Sales

$930

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$70

Raw materials inventory, ending

$40

Purchases of raw materials

$190

Direct labor

$150

Manufacturing overhead

$210

Administrative expenses

$90

Selling expenses

$120

Work in process inventory, beginning

$80

Work in process inventory, ending

$70

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$90

Finished goods inventory, ending

$140

Manufacturing overhead

$210

Administrative expenses

$90

Selling expenses

$120

Work in process inventory, beginning

$80

Work in process inventory, ending

$70

The cost of goods sold for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:

A) $680

B) $540

C) $640

D) $730

the cost of the raw materials used in production during the year in thousands of 633846

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsten Corporation for the just completed year.

Sales

$990

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$70

Raw materials inventory, ending

$30

Purchases of raw materials

$100

Direct labor

$200

Manufacturing overhead

$160

Administrative expenses

$180

Selling expenses

$150

Work in process inventory, beginning

$40

Work in process inventory, ending

$70

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$150

Finished goods inventory, ending

$130

The cost of the raw materials used in production during the year (in thousands of

dollars) was:

A) $130

B) $170

C) $140

D) $60

the cost of goods manufactured finished for the year in thousands of dollars was 633847

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsten Corporation for the just completed year.

Sales

$990

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$70

Raw materials inventory, ending

$30

Purchases of raw materials

$100

Direct labor

$200

Manufacturing overhead

$160

Administrative expenses

$180

Selling expenses

$150

Work in process inventory, beginning

$40

Work in process inventory, ending

$70

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$150

Finished goods inventory, ending

$130

The cost of goods manufactured (finished) for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:

A) $530

B) $540

C) $470

D) $570

the cost of goods sold for the year in thousands of dollars was 633848

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsten Corporation for the just completed year.

Sales

$990

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$70

Raw materials inventory, ending

$30

Purchases of raw materials

$100

Direct labor

$200

Manufacturing overhead

$160

Administrative expenses

$180

Selling expenses

$150

Work in process inventory, beginning

$40

Work in process inventory, ending

$70

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$150

Finished goods inventory, ending

$130

The cost of goods sold for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:

A) $490

B) $450

C) $620

D) $600

the net operating income for the year in thousands of dollars was 633849

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsten Corporation for the just completed year.

Sales

$990

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$70

Raw materials inventory, ending

$30

Purchases of raw materials

$100

Direct labor

$200

Manufacturing overhead

$160

Administrative expenses

$180

Selling expenses

$150

Work in process inventory, beginning

$40

Work in process inventory, ending

$70

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$150

Finished goods inventory, ending

$130

The net operating income for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:

A) $170

B) $140

C) $500

D) $200

the cost of the raw materials used in production during the year in thousands of dol 633850

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karstone Corporation for the just completed year.

ales

$880

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$20

Raw materials inventory, ending

$30

Purchases of raw materials

$150

Direct labor

$180

Manufacturing overhead

$230

Administrative expenses

$100

Selling expenses .

$130

Work in process inventory, beginning

$80

Work in process inventory, ending

$30

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$120

Finished goods inventory, ending

$100

The cost of the raw materials used in production during the year (in thousands of dollars) was:

A) $180

B) $140

C) $160

D) $170

the cost of goods manufactured finished for the year in thousands of dollars was 633851

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karstone Corporation for the just completed year.

ales

$880

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$20

Raw materials inventory, ending

$30

Purchases of raw materials

$150

Direct labor

$180

Manufacturing overhead

$230

Administrative expenses

$100

Selling expenses .

$130

Work in process inventory, beginning

$80

Work in process inventory, ending

$30

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$120

Finished goods inventory, ending

$100

The cost of goods manufactured (finished) for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:

A) $580

B) $600

C) $500

D) $630

the cost of goods sold for the year in thousands of dollars was 633852

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karstone Corporation for the just completed year.

ales

$880

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$20

Raw materials inventory, ending

$30

Purchases of raw materials

$150

Direct labor

$180

Manufacturing overhead

$230

Administrative expenses

$100

Selling expenses .

$130

Work in process inventory, beginning

$80

Work in process inventory, ending

$30

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$120

Finished goods inventory, ending

$100

The cost of goods sold for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:

A) $620

B) $580

C) $720

D) $700

the net operating income for the year in thousands of dollars was 633853

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karstone Corporation for the just completed year.

ales

$880

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$20

Raw materials inventory, ending

$30

Purchases of raw materials

$150

Direct labor

$180

Manufacturing overhead

$230

Administrative expenses

$100

Selling expenses .

$130

Work in process inventory, beginning

$80

Work in process inventory, ending

$30

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$120

Finished goods inventory, ending

$100

The net operating income for the year (in thousands of dollars) was:

A) $260

B) $30

C) $90

D) ($30)

if the company purchased 18 000 of raw materials during march what was the cost of r 633854

The manufacturing operations of QC Company had the following inventory balances for the month of March:

Inventories

March 1

March 31

Raw materials

$10,000

$12,000

Work in process

$6,000

$7,000

Finished goods

$30,000

$22,000

 

 

 

The manufacturing operations of QC Company had the following inventory balances for the month of March:

Inventories

March 1

March 31

Raw materials

$10,000

$12,000

Work in process

$6,000

$7,000

Finished goods

$30,000

$22,000

If the company purchased $18,000 of raw materials during March, what was the cost of raw materials used in production?

A) $16,000

B) $20,000

C) $41,000

D) $19,000

if the company purchased 20 000 of raw materials during march what was the cost of r 633858

The manufacturing operations of Jones Company had the following inventory balances for the month of March:

Inventories

March 1

March 31

Raw materials

$12,000

$14,000

Work in process

$8,000

$9,000

Finished goods

$32,000

$25,000

If the company purchased $20,000 of raw materials during March, what was the cost of raw materials used in production?

A) $24,000

B) $22,000

C) $32,000

D) $18,000

mike reed a partner in post co received the following distribution from post if this 633754

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following data:

Mike Reed, a partner in Post Co., received the following distribution from Post:

Post’s basis

Fair market value

Cash

$11,000

$11,000

Land

5,000

12,500

Before this distribution, Reed’s basis in Post was $25,000.

If this distribution were nonliquidating, Reed’s recognized gain or loss on the distribution would be

  1. $11,000 gain.
  2. $ 9,000 loss.
  3. $ 1,500 loss.
  4. $0.

If this distribution were in complete liquidation of Reed’s interest in Post, Reed’s basis for the land would be

  1. $14,000
  2. $12,500
  3. $ 5,000
  4. $ 1,500

kopel had no reason to believe that the information was incorrect kopel did not requ 633759

Kopel was engaged to prepare Raff’s 2006 federal income tax return. During the tax preparation interview, Raff told Kopel that he paid $3,000 in property taxes in 2006. Actually, Raff’s property taxes amounted to only $600. Based on Raff’s word, Kopel deducted the $3,000 on Raff’s return, resulting in an understatement of Raff’s tax liability. Kopel had no reason to believe that the information was incorrect. Kopel did not request underlying documentation and was reasonably satisfied by Raff’s representation that Raff had adequate records to support the deduction. Which of the following statements is correct?

  1. To avoid the preparer penalty for willful under-statement of tax liability, Kopel was obligated to examine the underlying documentation for the deduction.
  2. To avoid the preparer penalty for willful under-statement of tax liability, Kopel would be required to obtain Raff’s representation in writing.
  3. Kopel is not subject to the preparer penalty for willful understatement of tax liability because the deduction that was claimed was more than 25% of the actual amount that should have been deducted.
  4. Kopel is not subject to the preparer penalty for willful understatement of tax liability because Kopel was justified in relying on Raff’s representation.

harris sues seeking either specific performance or damages for breach of contract du 633767

Duval Manufacturing Industries, Inc. orally engaged Harris as one of its district sales managers for an eighteen-month period commencing April 1, 2007. Harris commenced work on that date and performed his duties in a highly competent manner for several months. On October 1, 2007, the company gave Harris a notice of termination as of November 1, 2007, citing a downturn in the market for its products. Harris sues seeking either specific performance or damages for breach of contract. Duval pleads the Statute of Frauds and/or a justified dismissal due to the economic situation. What is the probable outcome of the lawsuit?

  1. Harris will prevail because he has partially performed under the terms of the contract.
  2. Harris will lose because his termination was caused by economic factors beyond Duval’s control.
  3. Harris will lose because such a contract must be in writing and signed by a proper agent of Duval.
  4. Harris will prevail because the Statute of Frauds does not apply to contracts such as his.

according to gasb 34 basic financial statements mdash and management rsquo s discuss 633705

According to GASB 34, Basic Financial Statements—and Management’s Discussion and Analysis—for State and Local Governments, certain budgetary schedules are required supplementary information. What is the minimum budgetary information required to be reported in those schedules?

  1. A schedule of unfavorable variances at the functional level.
  2. A schedule showing the final appropriations budget and actual expenditures on a budgetary basis.
  3. A schedule showing the original budget, the final appropriations budget, and actual inflows, out-flows, and balances on a budgetary basis.
  4. A schedule showing the proposed budget, the approved budget, the final amended budget, actual inflows and outflows on a budgetary basis, and variances between budget and actual.

the motor pool internal service fund provides service to the general fund department 633706

Nox City reported a $25,000 net increase in the fund balances for total governmental funds. Nox also reported an increase in net assets for the following funds:

Motor pool internal service fund

$ 9,000

Water enterprise fund

12,000

Employee pension fund

7,000

The motor pool internal service fund provides service to the general fund departments. What amount should Nox report as the change in net assets for governmental activities?

  1. $25,000
  2. $34,000
  3. $41,000
  4. $46,000

the director believes that the term ldquo operating profit rdquo and the practice of 633707

Forkin Manor, a nongovernmental not-for-profit organization, is interested in having its financial statements reformatted using terminology that is more readily associated with for-profit entities. The director believes that the term “operating profit” and the practice of segregating recurring and nonrecurring items more accurately depict the organization’s activities. Under what condition will Forkin be allowed to use “operating profit” and to segregate its recurring items from it nonrecurring items in its statement of activities?

  1. The organization reports the change in unrestricted net assets for the period.
  2. A parenthetical disclosure in the notes implies that the not-for-profit organization is seeking for-profit entity status.
  3. Forkin receives special authorization from the Internal Revenue Service that this wording is appropriate.
  4. At a minimum, the organizations reports the change in permanently restricted net assets for the period.

lee corporation rsquo s checkbook balance on december 31 2006 was 4 000 in addition 633714

Lee Corporation’s checkbook balance on December 31, 2006, was $4,000. In addition, Lee held the following items in its safe on December 31:

Check payable to Lee Corporation, dated January 2, 2007, not included in December 31 checkbook balance

$1,000

Check payable to Lee Corporation, deposited December 20, and included in December 31 checkbook balance, but returned by bank on December 30, stamped “NSF.” The check was redeposited January 2, 2007, and cleared January 7

200

Postage stamps received from mail order customers

75

Check drawn on Lee Corporation’s account, payable to a vendor, dated and recorded December 31, but not mailed until January 15, 2007

500

The proper amount to be shown as Cash on Lee’s balance sheet at December 31, 2006, is

  1. $3,800
  2. $4,000
  3. $4,300
  4. $4,875

assuming a corporate income tax rate of 40 what should curtis record as its current 633715

The books of Curtis Company for the year ended December 31, 2006, showed income of $360,000 before provision for income tax. In computing the taxable income for federal income tax purposes, the following differences were taken into account:

Depreciation deducted for tax purposes in excess of depreciation recorded on the books

$16,000

Royalty income reported for tax purposes in excess of royalty income recognized on the books

12,000

Assuming a corporate income tax rate of 40%, what should Curtis record as its current federal income tax liability at December 31, 2006?

  1. $137,600
  2. $142,400
  3. $144,000
  4. $145,600

the lease is for a four year period expiring january 1 2010 and provides for annual 633719

Kay Company, a lessor of office machines, purchased a new machine for $600,000 on January 1, 2006, which was leased the same day to Lee. The machine will be depreciated $55,000 per year. The lease is for a four-year period expiring January 1, 2010, and provides for annual rental payments of $100,000 beginning January 1, 2006. Additionally, Lee paid $64,000 to Kay as a lease bonus. In its 2006 income statement, what amount of revenue and expense should Kay report on this leased asset?

Revenue

Expense

a.

$100,000

$0

b.

$116,000

$0

c.

$116,000

$55,000

d.

$164,000

$55,000

during the course of your examination of the financial statements of h co a new clie 633721

During the course of your examination of the financial statements of H Co., a new client, for the year ended December 31, 2006, you discover the following:

  • Inventory at January 1, 2006, had been overstated by $3,000.
  • Inventory at December 31, 2006, was understated by $5,000.
  • An insurance policy covering three years had been purchased on January 2, 2005, for $1,500. The entire amount was charged as an expense in 2005.

During 2006 the company received a $1,000 cash advance from a customer for merchandise to be manufactured and shipped during 2007. The $1,000 had been credited to sales revenues. The company’s gross profit on sales is 50%.

Net income reported on the 2006 income statement (before reflecting any adjustments for the above items) is $20,000.

The proper net income for 2006 is

  1. $26,500
  2. $23,500
  3. $16,500
  4. $20,500

greg corp reported revenue of 1 250 000 in its accrual basis income statement for th 633724

Greg Corp. reported revenue of $1,250,000 in its accrual-basis income statement for the year ended June 30, 2006. Additional information was as follows:

Accounts receivable June 30, 2005

$400,000

Accounts receivable June 30, 2006

530,000

Uncollectible accounts written off during the fiscal year

15,000

Under the cash basis, Greg should report revenue of

  1. $ 835,000
  2. $ 850,000
  3. $1,105,000
  4. $1,135,000

the 2004 depreciation expense for the vehicle using the sum of the years rsquo digit 633731

Questions 1 and 2 are based on the following information. Patterson Company has the following information on one of its vehicles purchased on January 1, 2002:

Vehicle cost

$50,000

Useful life, years, estimated

5

Useful life, miles, estimated

100,000

Salvage value, estimated

$10,000

Actual miles driven, 2002

30,000

2003

20,000

2004

15,000

2005

25,000

2006

12,000

No estimates were changed during the life of the asset.

The 2004 depreciation expense for the vehicle using the sum-of-the-years’ digits (SYD) method was

  1. $ 6,000
  2. $ 8,000
  3. $10,000
  4. $13,333

The fiscal 2003 year-end accumulated depreciation balance, using the double-declining balance method was

  1. $12,000
  2. $16,000
  3. $25,600
  4. $32,000

burrow amp co cpas have provided annual audit and tax compliance services to mare co 633733

Burrow & Co., CPAs, have provided annual audit and tax compliance services to Mare Corp. for several years. Mare has been unable to pay Burrow in full for services Burrow rendered nineteen months ago. Burrow is ready to begin fieldwork for the current year’s audit. Under the ethical standards of the profession, which of the following arrangements will permit Burrow to begin the fieldwork on Mare’s audit?

  1. Mare sets up a two-year payment plan with Burrow to settle the unpaid fee balance.
  2. Mare commits to pay the past due fee in full before the audit report is issued.
  3. Mare gives Burrow an eighteen-month note payable for the full amount of the past due fees before Burrow begins the audit.
  4. Mare engages another firm to perform the fieldwork, and Burrow is limited to reviewing the workpapers and issuing the audit report.

when his activities were discovered apex paid watson the full amount in accordance w 633736

The Apex Surety Company wrote a general fidelity bond covering defalcations by the employees of Watson, Inc. Thereafter, Grand, an employee of Watson, embezzled $18,900 of company funds. When his activities were discovered, Apex paid Watson the full amount in accordance with the terms of the fidelity bond, and then sought recovery against Watson’s auditors, Kane & Dobbs, CPAs. Which of the following would be Kane & Dobbs’ best defense?

  1. Apex is not in privity of contract.
  2. The shortages were the result of clever forgeries and collusive fraud that would not be detected by an examination made in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards.
  3. Kane & Dobbs were not guilty either of gross negligence or fraud.
  4. Kane & Dobbs were not aware of the Apex-Watson surety relationship.

davidson gave mathews a check for 900 and thereafter mathews turned in both the chec 633738

Mathews is an agent for Sears with the express authority to solicit orders from customers in a geographic area assigned by Sears. Mathews has no authority to grant discounts or to collect payment on orders solicited. Mathews secured an order from Davidson for $1,000 less a 10% discount if Davidson makes immediate payment. Davidson had previously done business with Sears through Mathews but this was the first time that a discount-payment offer had been made. Davidson gave Mathews a check for $900 and, thereafter, Mathews turned in both the check and the order to Sears. The order clearly indicated that a 10% discount had been given by Mathews. Sears shipped the order and cashed the check. Later, Sears attempted to collect $100 as the balance owed on the order from Davidson. Which of the following is correct?

  1. Sears can collect the $100 from Davidson because Mathews contracted outside the scope of his express or implied authority.
  2. Sears cannot collect the $100 from Davidson because Mathews, as an agent with express authority to solicit orders, had implied authority to give discounts and collect.
  3. Sears cannot collect the $100 from Davidson as Sears has ratified the discount granted and made to Mathews.
  4. Sears cannot collect the $100 from Davidson because, although Mathews had no express or implied authority to grant a discount and collect, Mathews had apparent authority to do so.

the first pension check was received on june 15 2006 during his years of employment 633747

Richard Brown, who retired on May 31, 2006, receives a monthly pension benefit of $700 payable for life. His life expectancy at the date of retirement is ten years. The first pension check was received on June 15, 2006. During his years of employment, Brown contributed $12,000 to the cost of his company’s pension plan. How much of the pension amounts received may Brown exclude from taxable income for the years 2006, 2007, and 2008?

2006

2007

2008

a.

$0

$0

$0

b.

$

4,900

$4,900

$4,900

c.

$

700

$1,200

$1,200

d.

$

4,900

$8,400

$8,400

smith an individual calendar year taxpayer purchased 100 shares of core co common st 633752

Smith, an individual calendar-year taxpayer, purchased 100 shares of Core Co. common stock for $15,000 on November 15, 2006, and an additional 100 shares for $13,000 on December 30, 2006. On January 3, 2007, Smith sold the shares purchased on November 15, 2006, for $13,000. What amount of loss from the sale of Core’s stock is deductible on Smith’s 2006 and 2007 income tax returns?

2006

2007

a.

$0

$0

b.

$0

$2,000

c.

$1,000

$1,000

d.

$2,000

$0

morgan cpa is the principal auditor for a multinational corporation another cpa has 633597

Morgan, CPA, is the principal auditor for a multinational corporation. Another CPA has audited and reported on the financial statements of a significant subsidiary of the corporation. Morgan is satisfied with the independence and professional reputation of the other auditor, as well as the quality of the other auditor’s examination. With respect to Morgan’s report on the consolidated financial statements, taken as a whole, Morgan

  1. Must not refer to the audit of the other auditor.
  2. Must refer to the audit of the other auditor.
  3. May refer to the audit of the other auditor.
  4. May refer to the audit of the other auditor, in which case Morgan must include in the auditor’s report on the consolidated financial statements a qualified opinion with respect to the examination of the other auditor.

kane cpa concludes that there is substantial doubt about lima co rsquo s ability to 633632

Kane, CPA, concludes that there is substantial doubt about Lima Co.’s ability to continue as a going concern for a reasonable period of time. If Lima’s financial statements adequately disclose its financial difficulties, Kane’s auditor’s report is required to include an explanatory paragraph that specifically uses the phrase(s)

“Possible discontinuance of operations”

“Reasonable period of time, not to exceed 1 year”

a.

Yes

Yes

b.

Yes

No

c.

No

Yes

d.

No

No

the december 31 2006 balance sheet of ratio inc is presented below these are the onl 633659

Items 1 through 3 are based on the following information:

The December 31, 2006 balance sheet of Ratio, Inc. is presented below. These are the only accounts in Ratio’s balance sheet. Amounts indicated by a question mark (?) can be calculated from the additional information given.

Assets

Cash

$ 25,000

Accounts receivable (trade)

?

Inventory

?

Property, plant and equipment (net)

294,000

$432,000

Liabilities and stockholders’ equity

Accounts payable (trade)

?

Income taxes payable (current)

25,000

Long-term debt

100,000

Common stock

300,000

Retained earnings

?

?

Additional information

Current ratio (at year-end)

1.5 to 1

Total liabilities divided by total stockholders’ equity

.8

Inventory turnover based on sales and ending inventory

15 times

Inventory turnover based on cost of goods sold and ending inventory

10.5 times

Gross margin for 2006

$315,000

What was Ratio’s December 31, 2006 balance in the inventory account?

  1. $ 21,000
  2. $ 30,000
  3. $ 70,000
  4. $135,000

What was Ratio’s December 31, 2006 balance in trade accounts payable?

  1. $ 67,000
  2. $ 92,000
  3. $182,000
  4. $207,000

What was Ratio’s December 31, 2006 balance in retained earnings?

  1. $ 60,000 deficit.
  2. $ 60,000
  3. $132,000 deficit.
  4. $132,000

during 2006 richmond made deposit and progress payments totaling 1 500 000 under the 633663

On January 1, 2006, Richmond, Inc. signed a fixed-price contract to have Builder Associates construct a major plant facility at a cost of $4,000,000. It was estimated that it would take three years to complete the project. Also on January 1, 2006, to finance the construction cost, Richmond borrowed $4,000,000 payable in 10 annual installments of $400,000 plus interest at the rate of 11%. During 2006 Richmond made deposit and progress payments totaling $1,500,000 under the contract; the average amount of accumulated expenditures was $650,000 for the year. The excess borrowed funds were invested in short-term securities, from which Richmond realized investment income of $250,000. What amount should Richmond report as capitalized interest at December 31, 2006?

  1. $ 71,500
  2. $165,000
  3. $190,000
  4. $440,000

according to sfas 131 disclosures about segments of an enterprise and related inform 633672

According to SFAS 131, Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information, an industry segment is a reportable segment if it is significant to the enterprise as a whole. An industry segment is considered significant when any of the following conditions are met except when the

  1. Segment revenue is 10% or more of the combined revenue of all of the company’s segments.
  2. Segment identifiable assets are 10% or more of the combined identifiable assets of all segments.
  3. Segment identifiable liabilities are 10% or more of the combined identifiable liabilities of all segments.
  4. Absolute value of a segment’s operating profit or operating loss is 10% or more of the combined operating profit of all segments that did not incur an operating loss.

on december 30 2005 future incorporated paid 2 000 000 for land at december 31 2006 633685

On December 30, 2005, Future, Incorporated paid $2,000,000 for land. At December 31, 2006, the current value of the land was $2,200,000. In January 2007, the land was sold for $2,250,000. Ignoring income taxes, by what amount should stockholders’ equity be increased for 2006 and 2007 as a result of the above facts in current value financial statements?

2006

2007

a.

$0

$ 50,000

b.

$0

$250,000

c.

$200,000

$0

d.

$200,000

$ 50,000

tapscott inc is indebted to bush finance company under a 600 000 10 five year note d 633688

Tapscott, Inc., is indebted to Bush Finance Company under a $600,000, 10%, five-year note dated January 1, 2004. Interest, payable annually on December 31, was paid on the December 31, 2004 and 2005 due dates. However, during 2005 Tapscott experienced severe financial difficulties and is likely to default on the note and interest unless some concessions are made. On December 31, 2006, Tapscott and Bush signed an agreement restructuring the debt as follows:

Interest for 2006 was reduced to $30,000 payable March 31, 2007.

Interest payments each year were reduced to $40,000 per year for 2007 and 2008.

The principal amount was reduced to $400,000.

What is the amount of gain that Tapscott should report on the debt restructure in its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2006?

  1. $120,000
  2. $150,000
  3. $200,000
  4. $230,000

on january 15 2007 the entire 400 000 balance of the 16 note was refinanced by issua 633689

Included in Kerr Corporation’s liability account balances at December 31, 2006, were the following:

14% note payable issued October 1, 2006, maturing September 30, 2007

$250,000

16% note payable issued April 1, 2004, payable in 6 equal annual installments of $100,000 beginning April 1, 2005

400,000

Kerr’s December 31, 2006 financial statements were issued on March 31, 2007. On January 15, 2007, the entire $400,000 balance of the 16% note was refinanced by issuance of a long-term obligation payable in a lump sum. In addition, on March 10, 2007, Kerr consummated a noncancelable agreement with the lender to refinance the 14%, $250,000 note on a long-term basis, on readily determinable terms that have not yet been implemented. Both parties are financially capable of honoring the agreement, and there have been no violations of the agreement’s provisions. On the December 31, 2006 balance sheet, the amount of the notes payable that Kerr should classify as short-term obligations is

  1. $0
  2. $100,000
  3. $250,000
  4. $350,000

in its december 31 2006 balance sheet what amount should west report as its liabilit 633691

West Company determined that it has an obligation relating to employees’ rights to receive compensation for future absences attributable to employees’ services already rendered. The obligation relates to rights that vest, and payment of the compensation is probable. The amounts of West’s obligations as of December 31, 2006, are reasonably estimated as follows:

Vacation pay

$110,000

Sick pay

80,000

In its December 31, 2006 balance sheet, what amount should West report as its liability for compensated absences?

  1. $0
  2. $ 80,000
  3. $110,000
  4. $190,000

what amount should ashwood report as accounts payable on its december 31 2006 balanc 633692

The balance in Ashwood Company’s accounts payable account at December 31, 2006, was $900,000 before any necessary year-end adjustment relating to the following:

  • Goods were in transit from a vendor to Ashwood on December 31, 2006. The invoice cost was $50,000, and the goods were shipped FOB shipping point on December 29, 2006. The goods were received on January 4, 2007.
  • Goods shipped FOB shipping point on December 20, 2006, from a vendor to Ashwood were lost in transit. The invoice cost was $25,000. On January 5, 2007, Ashwood filed a $25,000 claim against the common carrier.
  • Goods shipped FOB destination on December 21, 2006, from a vendor to Ashwood were received on January 6, 2007. The invoice cost was $15,000.

What amount should Ashwood report as accounts payable on its December 31, 2006 balance sheet?

  1. $925,000
  2. $940,000
  3. $950,000
  4. $975,000

jackson company finished goods inventory beginning 40 000 finished goods inventory e 632515

JACKSON COMPANY

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$40,000

Finished goods inventory, ending

$20,000

Administrative expenses

$100,000

Total Manufacturing overhead:

$105,000

Purchases of raw materials

$125,000

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$15,000

Raw materials inventory, ending

$18,000

Direct labor

$80,000

Work in process inventory, beginning

$28,000

Work in process inventory, ending

$25,000

Sales

$550,000

Selling expenses

$70,000

Problem 1:

Jackson Company reports the following information for the year ended December 31, 2013:

What were the following amounts for 2013?

1. Cost of direct materials moved into production?

2. Cost of Goods Manufactured

3. Cost of goods sold?

4. Net Income?

Attachments:

partnership 632526

  • Partnership Formation to Dissolution

Timothy is a 35 percent partner in the Total Partnership, a calendar-year-end entity. Timothy has an outside basis in his interest in Total of $198,000, which includes his share of the $45,000 of partnership liabilities. On December 31, Total makes a proportionate distribution of the following assets to Timothy:

Basis FMV
Cash $50,000 $50,000
Inventory 65,000 75,000
Land 50,000 65,000
Totals $165,000 $180,000
  1. For an operating distribution, outline the tax consequences (amount and character of recognized gain or loss, basis in distributed assets) of the distribution to Timothy.
  2. For a liquidating distribution, outline the tax consequences (amount and character of recognized gain or loss, basis in distributed assets) of the distribution to Timothy.
  3. Discuss the similarities and differences between the tax consequences of the operating distribution and the tax consequences of the liquidation distribution.

Provide your reference in APA-FORMAT if any.

Document Preview:

Partnership Formation to Dissolution Timothy is a 35 percent partner in the Total Partnership, a calendar-year-end entity. Timothy has an outside basis in his interest in Total of $198,000, which includes his share of the $45,000 of partnership liabilities. On December 31, Total makes a proportionate distribution of the following assets to Timothy:  ?    Basis? FMV??Cash?$50,000?$50,000??Inventory?65,000?75,000??Land?50,000?65,000??Totals?$165,000?$180,000??For an operating distribution, outline the tax consequences (amount and character of recognized gain or loss, basis in distributed assets) of the distribution to Timothy. For a liquidating distribution, outline the tax consequences (amount and character of recognized gain or loss, basis in distributed assets) of the distribution to Timothy. Discuss the similarities and differences between the tax consequences of the operating distribution and the tax consequences of the liquidation distribution.  Provide your reference in APA-FORMAT if any.

Attachments:

the rowdy fun is a limited partnership and was formed on june 1 2005 632527

• PART II – Tax Return #2, Partnership Return (Form 1065, only Page 1 and Schedule K required). You may use the tax software found at http://accountants.intuit.com/tax/proseries/

Background

The Rowdy Fun is a limited partnership and was formed on June 1, 2005, by Thomas Kyle, its general partner, and two other limited partners when they each contributed an equal amount of cash to start the new enterprise. Rowdy Fun is an outdoor equipment retailer focused on selling outdoor activities gear. Thomas has a 33.33% profits and capital interest and the limited partners hold the remaining 66.66% of the profits and capital interests. Their profits and capital interests have remained unchanged since the partnership was formed. Thomas is actively involved in managing the business while the limited partners are simply investors.

• Rowdy Fun is located at 8955 Golden Drive, Sunnydale, AZ 34592.

• The employer identification number for Rowdy Fun is 47-8593563.

• Rowdy Fun uses the accrual method of accounting and has a calendar year end.

• Thomas’ address is 853 Crystal Drive, Sunnydale, AZ 34592.

Additional Information

• Rowdy Fun has total assets of $1,900,000 and total liabilities of $550,000 at the beginning of the year and total assets of $2,300,00 and total liabilities of $725,000 at the end of the year.

• Partnership liabilities consist of accounts payable, and Thomas, as general partner, is legally responsible for paying these liabilities if the partnership does not.

• Five years ago, Rowdy Fun purchased an original outdoor statue with the intent for display in the store. In 2013, the statue was sold. The $15,000 recognized gain from the sale is reflected in the income statement.

• For tax purposes, Rowdy Fun has consistently elected under Section 179 to expense any furniture or fixtures purchased every year since it was formed. There is no tax basis in any of its depreciable assets. This year, Rowdy Fun expensed $23,000 of signs and display cases for tax purposes.

• On November 20th, Rowdy Fun distributed $90,000 ($30,000 per partner) to the partners.

• Miscellaneous expenses include a $1200 fine for violating a local ordinance.

• Rowdy Fun maintains its books using generally accepted accounting principles.

Financial Statements

Rowdy Fun

Income Statement

For year ended December 31, 2013

Sales 975,000

Sales returns and allowances (25,000)

Cost of goods sold (300,000)

Gross profit from operations 650,000

Other Income:

Interest from Money Market 3,500

Gain for sale of statue 15,000

Gross income 668,500

Expenses:

Employee wages (125,000)

Interest on accounts payable (2,000)

Payroll and property taxes (45,000)

Supplies (26,000)

Rent on retail building (20,000)

Depreciation on furniture and fixtures (15,400)

Advertising (4,000)

Guaranteed payments to Thomas Kyle (40,000)

Utilities (16,000)

Accounting and legal services (5,000)

Meals and entertainment (500)

Charitable Contributions (375)

Miscellaneous expense (425)

Total expenses (299,700)

Net Income for Books 368,800

Attachments:

take a position on the fairness of the current estate tax laws and recommend changes 632529

Take a position on the fairness of the current estate tax laws and recommend changes you would propose to the law to make estate taxes fairer and/or a rationale for eliminating gift taxes. From your research, offer support for your rationale. Provide your Reference in APA-Formats

Use the Internet to find a website that shows an example or application correlation or regression in the area of your interest or in your profession. Discuss how correlation or regression was used, summarize your finding, and share it with us. Provide your reference in APA-Format.

Document Preview:

Take a position on the fairness of the current estate tax laws and recommend changes you would propose to the law to make estate taxes fairer and/or a rationale for eliminating gift taxes. From your research, offer support for your rationale. Provide your Reference in APA-Formats Use the Internet to find a website that shows an example or application correlation or regression in the area of your interest or in your profession. Discuss how correlation or regression was used, summarize your finding, and share it with us. Provide your reference in APA-Format.

Attachments:

uxmaiz corporation had only one job in process during may job x32z and had no finish 632643

Uxmaiz Corporation had only one job in process during May—Job X32Z—and had no finished goods inventory on May 1. Job X32Z was started in April and finished during May. Data concerning that job appear below:

Beginning balance $ 5,000
Charged to the job during May
Direct materials $ 8,000
Direct labor $ 2,000
Manufacturing overhead applied $ 4,000
Units completed 100
Units in process at the end of May 0
Units sold during May 40

In May, overhead was overapplied by $300. The company adjusts its cost of goods sold every month for the amount of the overhead that was underapplied or overapplied.

Required:

Using the indirect method, determine the cost of goods sold for May.

the effect of transactions on the accounting equation 632682

Exercise 3-2 Source Documents Matched with Transactions Following are a list of sourcc documents and a list of transactions. Indicate by letter next to each transaction the source document that would serve as evidence for the recording of the transaction. Source Documents a. Purchase invoice 1. Stock certificates b. Sales invoice g. Monthly statement from utility company c. Cash register tape h. No standard source document would nor-d. Time cards malty be available. c. Promissory note

Exercise 3-3 The Effect of Transactions on the Accounting Equation For each of the following transactions, indicate whether it increases (I), decreases (Di, or has no effect (NE) on the total dollar amount of each of the elements of the accounting equation. Transactions Assets Liabilities — Stockholders’ Equity

Example: Common stock is issued in exchange for cash. I NE 1. Equipment is purchased for cash. 2. Services are provided to customers on account. 3. Services are provided to customers in exchange for cash. 4. An account payable is paid off. 5. Cash is collected on an account receivable. 6. Buildings are purchased in exchange for a three-year note payable. 7. Advertising bill for the month is paid. 8. Dividends are paid to stockholders. 9. Land is acquired by issuing shares of stock to the owner of the land.

LO3 EXAMPLE 3-1

Exercise 3-4 Types of Transactions There arc three elements to the accounting equation: assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. Although other possibilities exist, five types of transactions arc described here. For each of these five types, write descriptions of two transactions that illustrate the type of transaction.

Type of Transaction Assets Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity 1. Increase Increase 2. Increase Increase 3. Decrease Decrease 4. Decrease Decrease 5. Increase Decrease

Transactions

1. Utilities expense for the month is recorded. 2. A cash settlement is received from a pending lawsuit. 3. Owners contribute cash to start a new corporation. 4. The biweekly payroll is paid. 5. Services arc provided in exchange for cash. 6. Equipment is acquired on a 30-day open account. 7. Service is provided to a customer. 8. A building is acquired by signing an agreement to repay a stated amount plus interest in six months.

acc 561 week 4 assignment acme manufacturing 632787

Acme Manufacturing Company of Portland, Oregon has a Research & Development department that currently provides services to in-house manufacturing departments. Other manufacuturers have expressed interested in using Acme’s R&D department for special projects. Management has decided to conduct an activity-based costing system in order to determine charges for both outside and in-house users of the department’s services.

R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs:
Market Analysis 10,50,000
Product Design 23,50,000
Product Development 36,00,000
Prototype Testing 14,00,000
Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities are:
Activities Cost Drivers Total Estimated Drivers
Market Analysis Hours of analysis 1500 hours
Product Design Number of designs 2500 designs
Product Development Number of products 90 products
Prototype Testing Number of tests 500 tests

which one of the following is an example of a deferred revenue 632833

Mid-term Exam Summer 2014

1. United Airlines is an example of a: a. producer. b. supplier. c. retailer. d. service provider.

2. The three forms of business entities are: a. Government, cooperatives, and philanthropic organizations. b. Financing, investing, and operating c. Sole proprietorships, partnerships, and corporations. d. Wholesaler, manufacturer, and retailer. 3. Which of the following statements would be true if you own stock in a company? a. You are an owner of the retained earnings and capital stock of the company. b. You have a claim to the assets of the business. c. You have the right to receive interest on an annual basis. d. You have the right to a portion of the company’s revenues each accounting period. 4. Which one of the following business decisions will least likely require financial information? a. The Gulf Coast Bank is reviewing the loan application from Tuo’s Restaurant. b. Tuo’s Restaurant is attempting to sell its stock to the public. c. The labor union representing Flaggler’s Fitness Spa employees is negotiating a pay raise as part of a new labor agreement. d. Tuo’s Restaurant management is deciding whether to wash its catering vans today or tomorrow. 5. Which financial statement would you analyze to determine if a company distributed any of its profits to its shareholders? a. Balance Sheet b. Statement of Retained Earnings c. Income Statement d. Statement of Public Accounting 6. Macon Enterprises purchased land for 42,000,000 in 2001. In 2015, an independent appraiser assessed the value at 53,400,000. What amount should appear on the financial statements in 2015 with respect to the land? a. 52,000,000 b. 51,400,000 c. 53,400,000 d. Whatever amount the company believes is the best indicator of the true value of the land.

Mid-term Exam Summer 2014

Sawaddee Enterprises began the year with total assets of 4450,000 and total liabilities of 4230,000.1f Sawaddee’s total assets increased by 580,000 and its total liabilities increased by $57,000 during the year, what is the amount of Sawaddee’s owners’ equity at the end of the year? a. 4197,000 b. $543,000 c. 5243,000 d. $220,000

8. Which of the following statements best describes the term “revenues”? a. Revenues represent an outflow of assets resulting from the sale of goods or services. b. Revenues represent assets received from the sale of products or services. c. Revenues represent assets used or consumed in the sale of products or services. d. Revenues represent the dollar amount of bonds sold to the public. 9. Which one of the following is not one of the three activities included in the definition of accounting? a. Communicating b. Identifying c. Measuring d. Operating

10. Harbor City Corporation’s end-of-year balance sheet consisted of the following amounts:

Cash 4 15,000 Accounts receivable 4 50,000 Property, plant, and equipment 70,000 Long-term debt 40,000 Capital stock 100,003 Accounts payable 20,000 Retained earnings ? Inventory 35,000

What is Harbor City’s retained earnings balance at the end of the current year? a. 410,000 b. 4110,000 c. 4160,003 d. 4170,000 11. Vhat is the primary objective of financial reporting? a. To help investors make credit decisions. b. To help management assess cash flows. c. To protect users from fraudulent financial information. d. To provide useful information for decision making

12. Relevant information can be quantitative or qualitative. In deciding whether to go to college part-tune or full-time, which of the following is a qualitative factor for a student? a. The cost of tuition b. The opportunity to make friends c. The price of football tickets d. “Good Student” discounts on auto insurance rates. 13. Button Transportation purchases many pieces of office furniture with an individual cost below $200 each. Button chooses to account for these expenditures as expenses when acquired rather than reporting them as property, plant, and equipment on its balance sheet. The company’s accountant and independent CPA agree that no accounting principle has been violated. What accounting justification allows Button to expense the furniture? a. Conservatism b. Matching c. Materiality d. Verifiability 14. The qualitative characteristics of accounting data include: a. assets reported on the balance sheet. b. all accounting information. c. cash flows. d. reliability. 15. Information that is material means that an error or alternative method of handling a transaction: a. would possibly affect the judgment of someone relying on the financial statements. b. would not affect the decisions of users. c. might cause a company to understate its earnings for the accounting period. d. could increase the profitability of a company.

Gointher & Sons, Inc.

Guinther & Sons, Inc. a retailer of men’s clothing, earned a net profit of $77,000 for 2014. The balance sheet for Guinther & Sons includes the following items:

Cash 529,000 Accounts receivable $39,000 Inventory 79,000 Prepaid insurance 3,000 Land 90,000 Accounts payable 21,000 Taxes payable 29,000 Capital stock 50,000 Retained earnings 97,000 Long-term notes payable 43,000 _ 16. Read the information for Guinther & Sons. Calculate the total amount of current assets for Guinther & Sons. a. $100,000 b. 5147,000 c. $150,000 d. $249,000

erm .xam Summer 2014

___ 17. Read the information for Guinther & Sons, Inc. Calculate the current ratio for Guinther & Sons. a. 2.58 to I b. 2.75 to 1 c. 3.00 to I d. 2.00 to 1

18. Read the information for Guinther & Sons, Inc. The average current ratio for stores such as Guinther & Sons is 2.4 to 1. What does this comparison tell you about its liquidity? a. It is more liquid than its competitors b. It has more long-term assets than its competitors c. Since a rule of thumb for current ratios is 2 to 1, neither Guinther & Sons, Inc. nor its competitors is liquid. d. Guinther & Sons, Inc. is more profitable than its competitors. 19. What are the two subtotals that distinguish the multi-step income statement from the single-step income statement? a. Income before taxes and income taxes b. Total operating revenues and total operating expenses c. Income from operations and income before taxes d. Total revenues and total expenses 20. Under current accounting principles, how is net income on the income statement measured? a. Net change in owners’ equity during the period. b. Excess of revenues over expenses during the period. c. Net change in the cash balance during the period. d. Excess of revenues over expenses less any dividends paid during the period. 21. Which of the following would be a case where an event as a transaction is not supported by a source document? a. a purchase of inventory on credit b. a cash sale c. the financial consequences of a fire loss d. recording payroll 22. The purchase of office equipment on credit has what effect on the accounting equation? a. Assets decrease and stockholders’ equity decreases b. Liabilities increase and stockholders’ equity decreases c. Assets increase and liabilities increase d. Assets decrease and liabilities decrease

Mid-term Exam Summer 201

– 23. During May, Aniston, Inc. purchased office supplies for cash. The supplies will be used in lime. What effect does this purchase transaction have on the accounting equation? a. Assets increase and stockholders’ equity decreases. b. Assets increase and liabilities increase. c. Assets decrease and liabilities decrease. d. There is no effect on the accounting equation as one asset account increases while another asset account decreases. – 24. Services are provided for customers who are sent bills for the amount they owe. For this transaction, identify the effect on the accounting equation. a. Assets increase and liabilities increase. b. Assets increase and stockholders’ equity increases. c. Liabilities increase and stockholders’ equity decreases. d. Liabilities decrease and assets decrease.

– 25. Owners of Tri-States Industries, Ralph and Maureen, are sent a dividend check from the company. For this transaction, what is the effect on the accounting equation for Tri-States Industries? a. Assets decrease and stockholders’ equity decreases. b. Assets increase and stockholders’ equity increases. c. Liabilities increase and stockholders’ equity decreases. d. Liabilities increase and stockholders’ equity decreases. 26. Which of the following transactions does not affect the total assets of Horizon Sailing Corp.? a. A bill is received for the telephone service used by Horizon Sailing during the past month. b. Dividends are paid by Horizon Sailing. c. Customers are billed for sales made on credit by Horizon Sailing. d. A new computer is purchased on credit by Horizon Sailing. 27. Louisiana Enterprises received payment from its customers for previous sales on credit. What was the impact on its working capital? a. Increase in working capital b. Decrease in working capital c. No effect on working capital d. Unable to determine 28. Your bookkeeper is off for the day and you are tying to figure out the last entry she recorded in the journal. Unfortunately, she only recorded part of the transaction as a decrease of $4,400 in the Accounts Payable account. It is possible that this partial entry could correspond to: a. a purchase of equipment costing 54,400 on credit. b. a payment of 54.400 to a supplier to settle a balance due. c. a $4,400 sale to a customer. d. a 54,400 issuance of the company’s capital stock.

tlid-term Exam Summer 2014 29. Which of the following statements regarding the activities of Forman Corp. is true? a. Revenues decrease Forman’s stockholders’ equity. b. Expenses increase Forman’s stockholders equity. c. Expenses decrease Forman’s stockholders’ equity. d. None of these answer choices is correct. 30. One effect on the accounting equation when a firm borrows money is: a. Stockholders’ equity decreases. b. Assets increase. c. Liabilities decrease. d. Assets decrease. 31. Which of the following is the attribute used to measure many assets that arc recognized on a balance sheet, because it is more objective and verifiable? a. Market value b. Historical cost c. Liquidation value d. Current replacement cost 32. Country Club Center sells season memberships for $200 each. During January 0E2015, 60 season memberships were sold. As of March 31, 2015, only $3,000 of season membership fees had been collected from customers. The season runs for 4 months starting May 15, 2015. Which one of the following is an amount reported on the financial statements for the period ending March 31, 2015? a. Unearned membership revenue of $3,000 b. Unearned membership revenue of 59,000 c. Accounts receivable of 53,000 d. Membership revenue of 59,000 33. Fox Auto sold merchandise to a customer for $3,000 on credit on March 10. The customer paid Fox Auto the amount due on March 31. Under the accrual basis of accounting, which of the following statements is true? a. Fox Auto will recognize the revenue on March 31. b. The March 10th transaction increases revenue, but has no effect on assets because cash has not been received. c. Revenue is recognized after the cost of the merchandise sold has been paid by Fox Auto. d. The March 31st transaction has no effect on total assets under the accrual basis.

___ 34. Cumberland City Consultants started business on January to use in the business. At the end of the month, 1, 2015, and immediately purchased $1,000 of supplies hand. What amounts should appear on the financial statements for January, re, m20ailns5? unpaid and 20% are still on 25 percent of the supplies Statement of Cash Flows

Th1.19.mlsnat me I a. ($1,000) b. ($1,000) c. ($800) d. ($800)

($1,000) ($750) ($25) ($750)

35. Which of the following concepts is important to accrual accounting? a. Time period, because accrual accounting divides earnings into time periods b. Monetary unit, because inflation is a big factor in the environment c. Cash basis, because if cash is not received, revenue is not accrued d. Entity concept, because personal transactions must be separated from business transactions 36. As a general rule, revenue is recognized at the point of sale. Which one of the following situations illustrates this rule? a. Products are sold to customers on credit with payment due in 30 days b. Employees are paid wages the week after the wages are earned c. Products are purchased for resale purposes d. Interest is collected from amounts loaned to employees 37. On January 1, 2015, Davin Avenue Associates, Inc. purchased a copier for $6,000 cash and decided to depreciate it over 5 years. What amounts associated with the copier will appear on Davin’s financial statements for the year ending December 31, 2015? Income Statement Statement of Cash Flows a. ($1,200) ($6,000) b. ($1,200) SO c. ($6,000) SO d. SO ($1,200) 38. Which one of the following is not a recognized method of recognizing assets as expenses in a particular accounting period? a. Customers’ account balances in accounts receivable are assigned to expense in the period in which each customer pays b. Prepaid insurance is assigned to expense as the insurance expires c. A building is depreciated and its cost is assigned to the current and future accounting periods in which the building is expected to be used d. Merchandise inventory is assigned to cost of goods sold in the period the goods are sold

Mid-term Exam Summer 2914

39. Which one of the following is an example of a deferred revenue? a. Sales are made to customers on credit b. Interest has been earned by a bank deposit, but it has not been recorded c. Cash is received prior to providing the services to customers d. Cash sales are made to customers

40. Adjustments are necessary only if a. The cash basis of accounting is used for all accounting periods b. Cash receipts and payments occur before or after the point in time when revenues and expenses should be recognized under the accrual basis of accounting c. Management reports its adjustments on the statement of cash flows d. The company reports revenue in the same period cash is collected

Attachments:

question 3 the trial balance of hair we are a beauty supplies store is shown below t 632856

Question 3

The Trial Balance of “Hair We Are” a beauty supplies store is shown below.

Trial Balance

as at June 30, 20X7

ACCOUNT NAME

$

$

Sales

425,000

Inventory @ July 1, 20X6

45,000

Purchases

190,000

Wages & Salaries

87,500

Telephone

14,500

Water Rates

10,800

Electricity

20,600

Discount Allowed / Discount Received

3,900

6,600

Sales Return / Purchases Return

9,000

12,300

Rental Income

72,000

Land

80,000

Buildings

130,000

Fixtures & Fittings

50,000

Provision for Depreciation @ July 1, 20X6:

Buildings

26,000

Fixtures & Fittings

9,500

Carriage Inwards

3,400

Carriage Outwards

2,900

Cash

3,700

Bank

16,250

Accounts Receivable / Accounts Payable

127,600

49,200

Short-term Loans

125,600

Drawings

7,400

Capital

________

76,350

TOTAL

$802,550

$802,550

The following information concerning the operation of “Hair We Are” is also available:

§ Closing inventory on June 30, 20X7 was $52,000.

§ Wages of $12,000 was owed at June 30, 20X7.

§ Electricity of $3,000 was prepaid at June 30, 20X7.

§ The business had the following depreciation policy:

Land: 0%

Buildings: 2.5% per year of the cost of the asset.

Fixtures and fittings: 8% per year of the net book value of the asset.

Required:

  1. Prepare the Income Statement of “Hair We Are” for the year ended June 30, 20X7 (7 marks)
  2. Prepare the Balance Sheet as at June 30,20X7. (6 marks)
  3. Discuss the purpose of presenting the final accounts in a business. (3 marks)
  4. Discuss the accounting relevance of the accrual and matching principles. ( 3 marks)

Question 3 The Trial Balance of “Hair We Are” a beauty supplies store is shown below. Trial Balance as at June 30, 20X7 ACCOUNT NAME $ $ Sales 425,000 Inventory @ July 1,

all work needs to be done under that question excel file consolidated worksheet is u 633085

All work needs to be done under that Question excel file. Consolidated worksheet is under the tab “Spreadsheet”, Need show the process and complete the consolidated worksheet just like the Example file. Please pay attention to the instruction.

Document Preview:

10 15 20 20 20 15 100 2555500 1120000 3675500 64400 64400 33000 33000 2652900 1120000 3772900 1730000 690500 2420500 654500 251000 905500 72000 72000 0 0 2384500 1013500 3398000 268400 106500 374900 636333 139500 775833 268400 106500 374900 100000 60000 160000 804733 186000 990733 119500 132000 251500 342000 125000 467000 362000 201000 563000 40500 517000 557500 150000 150000 477733 477733 825000 241000 1066000 -207000 -53000 -260000 0 294000 294000 2403733 1163000 3566733 295000 32000 327000 304000 19000 323000 600000 600000 -24000 -24000 1000000 300000 1300000 0 50000 50000 804733 186000 990733 0 2403733 1163000 0 0 3566733 0 0 0 0 Template 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 Sales Equity in sub earnings Total revenues Cost of goods sold Expenses Total expenses Net income RETAINED EARNINGS STATEMENT Retained Earnings 1/1 Dividends declared Retained Earnings 12/31 BALANCE SHEET Cash Inventory Total assets Accounts payable Common stock Retained earnings Total liabilities and equity INCOME STATEMENT P CO. S CO. CONS.TOT. Paid in capital Other current assets DR. CR. ELIMINATIONS Noncontrolling interest in sub Accounts receivable Land Investment in S Property and equipment Accumulated depreciation Other liabilities MFG formula Interest income-bonds Interest expense-bonds Investment in S bonds Bonds payable Discount on bonds payable Loss on bonds extinguishment Paul Company acquired 100% of the outstanding common stock of On the acquisition date, Saul Company had retained earnings in the amount of $60,000, and the fair value of its recorded assets and liabilities was equal to their book value. The excess of cost over the fair value of the recorded net assets was attributed to an unrecorded manufacturing formula held by Saul Company, which original cost of $100,000 and accumulated depreciation of $50,000) to Saul Company for…

using the excel file you are to prepare the income statement statement of stockholde 633097

Using the Excel file, you are to prepare the income statement, statement of stockholders’ equity, statement of cash flows, balance sheet; all in proper form You have the option of preparing a statement of comprehensive income or to incorporate that into the statement of stockholders’ equity.

Document Preview:

123112 adj tb 123111 bs Cash Investments Accounts Receivable Allowance for Doubtful Accts Inventory Land Building Equipment Accumulated Depreciation Accounts Payable Common stock Retained Earnings Treasury stock Cash Dividends Stock Dividends Sales Sales Returns & Allowances Dividend Revenue Cost of Goods Sold Salaries Expense Interest Expense Depreciation Expense DR CR Allowance for Doubtful Accounts Total Assets Investment in Timberside Corporation Gain on Sale of Pink Panther Warranty Expense Loss on sale of equipment Investment in Mickey Mouse Bonds Notes Payable Investment in Mickey Mouse Bonds Retained earnings net of treasury stock of $75,000 Interest Revenue Patent Patent Amortization Investments Prepaid Rent Rent Expense Investment Income Discount on Investment in Bonds Asset retirement obligation Accretion Expense Bad Debt Expense Est. Warranty Liab. Interest Payable Equipment under Capital Lease Lease Obligation Accumulated Amortization Lease Amortization Expense Fair Value Adjustment Discount on Investment in MM Bonds Equipment under Lease Accumulated Amortization Lease Warranty Liability Asset Retirement Obligation Other Comprehensive Income Treasury Stock Gain on sale of patent Unadjusted Adjusted Adjusted Trial Balance OCI-Unrealized Loss on AFS 217410.00 450000.00 380000.00 19000.00 0.00 510000.00 807000.00 800000.00 773504.00 391050.00 40000.00 906000.00 300000.00 420000.00 400000.00 370000.00 3644872.00 170000.00 60000.00 40000.00 1881799.00 150000.00 1541.00 1270000.00 304000.00 35120.00 160350.00 150000.00 9000.00 20000.00 12000.00 24930.00 0.00 5000.00 5000.00 5000.00 83000.00 6008.00 39904.00 2259.00 34000.00 6000.00 8000.00 67006.00 37686.00 22288.00 7429.00 7523078.00 7523078.00 Dillard Balance…

Attachments:

tootsie roll 633254

Answer the following questions.

What is the par or stated value per share of Tootsie Roll’s common stock? (Round answer to 4 decimal places, e.g. 1.2531.)

Par or stated value per share $

What percentage of Tootsie Roll’s authorized common stock was issued at December 31, 2011? (Round to 0 decimal places, e.g. 17%)

Percentage of common stock issued %

How many shares of common stock were outstanding at December 31, 2010, and at December 31, 2011? (Enter the answers in thousands.)

2011 2010
Number of shares outstanding

Calculate the payout ratio, earnings per share, and return on common stockholders’ equity for 2011. (Round earnings per share to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.12 and all other answers to 1 decimal places, e.g. 12.5%.)

Payout ratio %
Earnings per share $
Return on common stockholders’ equity %

p3 9 adjusting and closing presented below is the trial balance of the crestwood gol 633259

P3-9 (Adjusting and Closing)Presented below is the trial balance of the Crestwood Golf Club, Inc. as of December 31. The books are closed annually on December 31.

Instructions

(a)Enter the balances in ledger accounts. Allow five lines for each account.

(b)From the trial balance and the information given below, prepare annual adjusting entries and post to the ledger accounts. (Omit explanations.)

(1)The buildings have an estimated life of 30 years with no salvage value (straight-line method).

(2)The equipment is depreciated at 10% per year.

(3)Insurance expired during the year $3,500.

(4)The rent revenue represents the amount received for 11 months for dining facilities. The December rent has not yet been received.

(5)It is estimated that 12% of the accounts receivable will be uncollectible.

(6)Salaries and wages earned but not paid by December 31, $3,600.

(7)Dues received in advance from members $8,900.

(c)Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(d)Prepare closing entries and post.

the production department of priston company has submitted the following forecast of 633304

The production department of Priston Company has submitted the following forecast of units to be produced by quarter for the upcoming fiscal year.

In addition, the beginning raw materials inventory for the 1st Quarter is budgeted to be 3,600 pounds and the beginning accounts payable for the 1st Quarter is budgeted to be $11,775.

Each unit requires three pounds of raw material that costs $2.50 per pound. Management desires to end each quarter with a raw materials inventory equal to 20% of the following quarter’s production needs. The desired ending inventory for the 4th Quarter is 3,700 pounds. Management plans to pay for 70% of raw material purchases in the quarter acquired and 30% in the following quarter. Each unit requires 0.50 direct labor-hours and direct labor-hour workers are paid $12 per hour.

Required:

  1. Prepare the company’s direct materials budget and schedule of expected cash disbursements for purchases of materials for the upcoming fiscal year.
  2. Prepare the company’s direct labor budget for the upcoming fiscal year, assuming that the direct labor workforce is adjusted each quarter to match the number of hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced.

two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and inco 633347

Two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for two proprietorships for the year 2014, Garba’s Goods and Zahra Enterprises.

Determine the missing amounts.

Garba’s
Goods
Zahra
Enterprises
Beginning of year:
Total assets $110,000 $129,000
Total liabilities 85,000 $ (c)
Total owner’s equity $ (a) 80,000
End of year:
Total assets 160,000 180,000
Total liabilities 120,000 50,000
Total owner’s equity 40,000 130,000
Changes during year in owner’s equity:
Additional investment $ (b) 25,000
Drawings 29,000 $ (d)
Total revenues 215,000 100,000
Total expenses 175,000 60,000

Two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for two proprietorships for the year 2014, Garba’s Goods and Zahra Enterprises. Determine the mis

you have just been appointed to the board of mega bank you notice that the asset and 633364

(a) You have just been appointed to the board of Mega Bank. You notice that the asset and

liability management (ALM) policy and framework have not been updated for a number of

years.

(i) Explain the process you would go through to ensure this update occurs to your

satisfaction. (6 marks)

(ii) Given recent events (e.g. the global financial crisis), what areas do you think must be

addressed in the ALM policy and framework? Justify your response, including three (3)

examples. (5 marks)

(b) Discuss whether this process and the areas identified in part (a)(ii) would be different for a

domestic commercial/retail bank compared to a global investment bank.

Document Preview:

Assignment Asset and Liability Management (FIN215) Total marks: 100 Your assignment should be loaded into LearningSpace by 11.30 pm AEST/AEDT on the due date. CHECKLIST ? The question section of the assignment has seven (7) pages. ? I have completed my assignment in the Assignment Answer Template downloaded from LearningSpace. ? I have completed my assignment using Word. ? I have completed my assignment using Arial, Times New Roman or Verdana fonts. ? I have added my Personal ID to the header of my assignment. ? Each question of my assignment is within the word limit guidelines for that question as per the Assignment Guide in LearningSpace. ? I have entered the word count for my assignment in the Assignment Answer Template. ? My assignment file size is no larger than 2 MB. ? If tables were required, they are visible as text, not as links or images. ? I have not altered the page numbers in the header or removed the marking grid from the footer. ? I have submitted my assignment as per the instructions in LearningSpace.Instructions to students • This assignment covers Topics 1 to 6 and accounts for 50% of your final grade. • There are five (5) questions in this assignment. You should answer all questions. • The ‘Assignment Guide’ in LearningSpace contains information about format and presentation, word limits, citations and referencing, collusion, plagiarism and other policies, useful resources, submitting your assignment and accessing your results. • Full workings must be shown for all calculations. Show all calculations in the text of your assignment and NOT attached as an appendix. Appendices to assignments will not be read. • The overall word limit for the assignment is 3500 words. Marks will only be awarded for answers up to the word limit (plus 10%) for each question. Any material written after this will not be counted towards your mark for that question. Headings, quotes and references within the body of the answer are…

balance sheet and income statement data indicate the following bonds payable 10 issu 633381

Balance sheet and income statement data indicate the following:

Bonds payable, 10% (issued 1988 due 2012) $1,000,000
Preferred 5% stock, $100 par (no change during year) 300,000
Common stock, $50 par (no change during year) 2,000,000
Income before income tax for year 350,000
Income tax for year 80,000
Common dividends paid 50,000
Preferred dividends paid 15,000

Based on the data presented above, what is the number of times bond interest charges were earned (round to one decimal point)?

classify each cost listed below as either a product cost or a period cost for purpos 633451

Suppose that you have been gi-.en a summer job at Fairwings Avionics, a company that manufactures sophisticated radar sets for commercial aircraft. The company, which is privately owned, has approached a bank for a loan to help finance its tremendous growth. The bank requires financial statements before approving such a loan. Required: Classify each cost listed below as either a product cost or a period cost for purposes of preparing the financial statements for the bank

Document Preview:

2. __ …. ” . Suppose that you nave been gi-.en a summer job at Fairwings Avionics, a company that manufactures sophisticated radar sets for commercial aircraft. The company, which is privately owned, has approached a bank for a loan to help finance its tremendous growth. The bank requires financial statements before approving such a loan. Required: Classify each cost listed below as either a product cost or a period cost for purposes of preparing the financial statements for the bank. Costs Product/Period 1. The cost of the memory chips used in a radar set. 2. Factory heating costs. 3. Factory equipment maintenance costs. 4. Training costs for new administrative employees. 5. The cost of the solder that is used in assembling the radar sets. 6. The trawl costs of the company’s salespersons. 7. Wages and salaries of factory security personnel. 8. The cost of air-conditioning executive offices. 9. Wages and salaries in the department that handles billing customers. 10. Depreciation on the equipment in the fitness room used by factory workers. 11. Telephone expenses incurred by factory management. 12. The costs of shipping completed radar sets to customers. 13. The wages of the workers who assemble the radar sets. 14. The president’s salary. 15. Health insurance premiums for factory personnel.3. -. Koffee Express operates a number of espresso coffee stands in busy suburban malls. The fixed weekly expense of a coffee stand is $1,500 and the variable cost per cup of coffee served is $0.48. Required: 1. Fill in the following table with your estimates of total costs and averaqe cost per cup of coffee at the indicated levels of activity for a coffee stand. (Round the “Average cost per cup of coffee served” to 3 decimal places.) Cups of Coffee Served in a Week 1,400 1,500 1,600 Fixed cost Variable cost Total cost Averaqe cost per cup of coffee served 2. Does the average cost per cup of coffee served increase, decrease, or remain the same as the number of cups of coffee…

Attachments:

a difference of opinion concerning accounting and auditing matters relative to a par 633588

A difference of opinion concerning accounting and auditing matters relative to a particular phase of the audit arises between an assistant auditor and the auditor responsible for the engagement. After appropriate consultation, the assistant auditor asks to be disassociated from the resolution of the matter. The working papers would probably be

  1. Silent on the matter since it is an internal matter of the auditing firm.
  2. Expanded to note that the assistant auditor is completely disassociated from responsibility for the auditor’s opinion.
  3. Expanded to document the additional work required, since all disagreements of this type will require expanded substantive testing.
  4. Expanded to document the assistant auditor’s position, and how the difference of opinion was resolved.

the amount of beginning work in process inventory is 631745

The following information is taken from the records of DW Company for last year:

Direct materials

$8,000

Direct labor

$3,000

Manufacturing overhead

$11,000

Ending work in process inventory

$5,000

Cost of goods manufactured

$19,000

The amount of beginning work in process inventory is:

A) $24,000

B) $2,000

C) $22,000

D) $3,000

the cost of goods manufactured was 631747

Using the following data for March, calculate the cost of goods manufactured:

Direct materials

$29,000

Direct labor

$19,000

Manufacturing overhead

$27,000

Beginning work in process inventory

$11,000

Ending work in process inventory

$12,000

Direct materials

$29,000

The cost of goods manufactured was:

A) $74,000

B) $86,000

C) $76,000

D) $75,000

jacobs is employed as a machinist for an aircraft manufacturer she is paid 15 per ho 631748

Jacobs is employed as a machinist for an aircraft manufacturer. She is paid $15 per hour for regular time and time and a half for all work in excess of 40 hours per week. During the past week, Jacobs was idle for two hours due to machine breakdowns and was idle four hours due to materials shortages. Jacobs worked 40 hours last week with no overtime. The allocation of Jacobs” wages for the past week between direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead cost would be:

 

Direct

Manufacturing

 

Labor

Overhead

A)

$600

$0

B)

$570

$30

C)

$540

$60

D)

$510

$90

johnson is employed on the assembly line of a manufacturing company where he assembl 631749

Johnson is employed on the assembly line of a manufacturing company where he assembles a component part for one of the company”s products. He is paid $14 per hour for regular time and time and a half for all work in excess of 40 hours per week. During the past week, Johnson worked a total of 50 hours and had no idle time. The allocation of Johnson”s wages for the past week between direct labor cost and manufacturing overhead cost would be:

 

 

Manufacturing

 

Direct Labor

Overhead

A)

$770

$0

B)

$700

$70

C)

$560

$210

D)

$560

$0

the cost of the raw materials used in production during the year in thousands of 631752

The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karsen Corporation for the just completed year.

Sales

$930

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$70

Raw materials inventory, ending

$40

Purchases of raw materials

$190

Direct labor

$150

Manufacturing overhead

$210

Administrative expenses

$90

Selling expenses

$120

Work in process inventory, beginning

$80

Work in process inventory, ending

$70

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$90

Finished goods inventory, ending

$140

Manufacturing overhead

$210

Administrative expenses

$90

Selling expenses

$120

Work in process inventory, beginning

$80

Work in process inventory, ending

$70

The cost of the raw materials used in production during the year (in thousands of

dollars) was:

A) $230

B) $220

C) $160

D) $260

fit corporation s return on net operating assets rnoa is 10 and its tax rate is 40 631856

FIT Corporation”s return on net operating assets (RNOA) is 10% and its tax rate is 40%. Its net operating assets ($4 million) are financed entirely by common shareholders” equity. Management is considering its options to finance an expansion costing $2 million. It expects return on net operating assets to remain unchanged. There are two alternatives to finance the expansion:

1. Issue $1 million bonds with 12% coupon, and $1 million common stock.

2. Issue $2 million bonds with 12% coupon.

Required:

a. Determine net operating income after tax (NOPAT) and net income for each alternative.

b. Compute return on common shareholders” equity for each alternative (use ending equity).

c. Calculate the assets-to-equity ratio for each alternative.

d. Compute return on net operating assets and explain how the level of leverage interacts with it in helping determine which alternative management should pursue.

danaher financial report analysis 631861

All calculations need to be derived from the ‘Danaher 2013 Annual Report.pdf’. Also need very detailed explanation on the answers to help me understand and grasp the topic for future applications.

Document Preview:

t po l nnu Au A R l R peo t arhne 441583 Cov cs6.indd 20 3/19/14 11:15 AM Da 2013 A A Re R nnt po l nnu Au A R l R peo t arhne 441583 Cov cs6.indd 20 3/19/14 11:15 AM Da 2013 A A Re R nnTABLE OF CONTENTS Danaher Overview 1-6 Letter to the Shareholders 7-11 2013 Form 10-K 12-116 Supplemental Financial Information 117-118 Directors and Executive Oc ffi ers 119 Shareholder Information 120 DANAHER FINANCIAL OPERATING HIGHLIGHTS (dollars in millions, except per share data and number of associates) 2013 2012 * Sales $ 19,118 $ 18,260 * Operating Profit $ 3,275 $ 3,165 * Net Earnings $ 2,695 $ 2,299 * Net Earnings Per Share (diluted) $ 3.80 $ 3.23 * Operating Cash Flow $ 3,585 $ 3,502 * Capital Expenditures $ 552 $ 458 * Free Cash Flow (Operating Cash Flow less Capital Expenditures) $ 3,033 $ 3,044 Number of Associates 66,000 63,000 Total Assets $ 34,672 $ 32,941 Total Debt (Long-Term Debt ($3,437) plus Notes Payable and Current Portion of Long-Term Debt ($62)) $ 3,499 $ 5,343 Stockholders’ Equity $ 22,451 $ 19,084 Total Capitalization (Total Debt plus Stockholders’ Equity) $ 25,950 $ 24,427 * from continuing operations 1

problem 2 1 joe smith cpa completed the following transactions in the month of june 631910

Problem 2-1

Joe Smith CPA completed the following transactions in the month of June .

1Joe Smith, the owner, invested $ 130,000 cash, office equipment with a value of $ 2,300,and $ 5,400 of computer equipment to launch the business.

2Purchased land worth $ 85,000 for an office by paying $ 30,000 cash and signing a long-term note payable for $ 55,000.

4Purchased a portable building with $90,000 cash and moved it onto the land acquired on June 2.

4Completed and delivered a set of financial statements for a client and collected $ 12,000 cash.

6Paid $ 4,800 cash for the premium on a two-year insurance policy.

8Completed audit services for $ 31,000 on credit.
10Purchased $ 2,200 of additional computer equipment by paying $ 440 cash

and signing a long-term note payable for $ 1,760.
15Completed $ 25,000 of accounting services for a client. This amount is to be

received in 30 days.
20Purchased $ 2,850 of additional office equipment on credit.
20Received a bill for rent of equipment that was used on the June 8 audit.

The $ 400 rent cost must be paid within 30 days.
21Collected $ 12,500 cash in partial payment from the client described in

transaction on June 15.
22Paid $ 4,200 cash wages to an office assistant.
23Paid $ 2,850 cash to settle the account payable created in transaction on

June 20 .
24Paid $ 300 cash for minor repairs to its computer equipment.
30Paid $ 4,200 cash wages to an office assistant.
30Joe Smith withdrew $ 10,000 cash for personal use.
30Paid $ 1,750 cash for advertisements in the local newspaper during June .

Required

1.Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use account titles listed in part 2).

the income statement for 2014 and comparative balance sheets of daniel divers for 20 631943

The income statement for 2014 and comparative balance sheets of Daniel Divers for 2013 and 2014 appear below. Dividends totaling $51,200 were paid during the year. Equipment costing $21,500 with a book value of $4,700 was sold for $11,300 cash during the year.

December 31
Assets 2014 2013
Cash $56,800 $58,300
Accounts receivable 14,500 12,200
Merchandise inventories 22,600 30,000
Equipment 112,000 98,700
Accumulated depreciation (35,600 ) (28,400 )
Total assets $170,300 $170,800
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable $31,500 $34,700
Income taxes payable 8,900 7,400
Long-term notes payable 46,700 52,300
Common stock, $0.50 par 37,600 32,100
Retained earnings 45,600 44,300
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $170,300 $170,800

Sales $389,000
Cost of goods sold 178,000
Depreciation expense 24,000
Interest expense 2,700
Other expenses 109,700
Gain on sale of equipment 6,600
Income taxes expense 28,700
Net income $52,500

Prepare the operating activities section of the 2014 statement of cash flows using the indirect method.
(Show amounts that decrease cash flow with either a – sign e.g. -15,000 or in parenthesis e.g. (15,000).)

what lease assets and lease liabilities does abercrombie report on its balance sheet 632054

What lease assets and lease liabilities does Abercrombie report on its balance sheet? How do we know? b. What effect does the lease classification have on A&F’s balance sheet? Over the life of the lease, what effect does this classification have on the company’s net income? c. Using a 6% discount rate and rounding the remaining lease life to the nearest whole year, estimate the assets and liabilities that A&F fails to report as a result of its off-balance-sheet lease financing. d. What adjustments would we consider to A&F’s income statement corresponding to the adjustments we would make to its balance sheet in part c? e. Indicate the direction (increase or decrease) of the effect that capitalizing these leases would have on the following financial items and ratios for A&F: return on equity (ROE), net operating profit ~ after tax (NOPAT), net operating assets (NOA), net operating profit margin (NO PM) , net operating ~ ?et turnover (NOAT), and measures of financial leverage

Document Preview:

Module 10 I Reporting and Analyzing Off-Balance-Sheet Financing 10-40 vro:C::y~nI:~~ting andCapitalizingOperatingL”””, , The Abercrombie & Fitch lO-K report contains the following footnote relating to leasing activities. Abercrombie & Fitch This is the only information it discloses relating to its leasing activity. (ANFJ .At January 29, 2011, the Company was committed to noncancelable leases with remaining terms of one to 17 years. A summary of operating lease commitments under noncancelable leases follows (thousands): Fiscal 2011 . $ 331,151 Fiscal 2012 . 319,982 Fiscal 2013 . 303,531 Fiscal 2014 . 285,337 Fiscal 2015 . 262,586 Thereafter . 1,110,598 Required a. What lease assets and lease liabilities does Abercrombie report on its balance sheet? How do we know? b. What effect does the lease classification have on A&F’s balance sheet? Over the life of the lease, what effect does this classification have on the company’s net income? c. Using a 6% discount rate and rounding the remaining lease life to the nearest whole year, estimate the assets and liabilities that A&F fails to report as a result of its off-balance-sheet lease financing. d. What adjustments would we consider to A&F’s income statement corresponding to the adjustments we would make to its balance sheet in part c? e. Indicate the direction (increase or decrease) of the effect that capitalizing these leases would have on the following financial items and ratios for A&F: return on equity (ROE), net operating profit ~ after tax (NOPAT), net operating assets (NOA), net operating profit margin (NOPM) ,net operating ~ ?et turnover (NOAT), and measures of financial leverage.

Attachments:

foundations of accounting iaccounting projectwritten by karen pitsch david s enterta 632116

Foundations of Accounting I Accounting Project Written by: Karen Pitsch David’s Entertainment is a merchandising business. Their account balances as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows: 110 Cash $ 73,920 112 Accounts Receivable 34,250 113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 11,000 115 Merchandise Inventory 123,900 116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750 117 Store Supplies 2,850 123 Store Equipment 100,800 124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160 210 Accounts Payable 21,450 211 Salaries Payable 0 218 Interest Payable 0 220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 15,000 310 D. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 73,260 311 D. Williams, Drawing 50,000 312 Income Summary 0 410 Sales 853,445 411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,020 412 Sales Discounts 13,200 510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575 520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400 521 Advertising Expense 18,000 522 Depreciation Expense 0 523 Store Supplies Expense 0 529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800 530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500 531 Rent Expense 18,600 532 Insurance Expense 0 533 Bad Debt Expense 0 539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650 550 Interest Expense 1,100 David’s Entertainment uses the perpetual inventory system and the First-in, First-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the First-in, First-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt. The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily). David’s Entertainment sells four types of television entertainment units. The sale prices of each are: TV A: $3,500 TV B: $5,250 TV C: $6,125 PS D: $9,000 During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed: Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $2,600. 3. Purchased three TV C units on account from Prince Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $11,100. 4. Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation changes on purchase of December 3, $400. (NOTE: Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.) 6. Sold four TV A and four TV B on account to Albert Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 10. Sold two projector systems for cash. 11. Purchased store supplies on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, $580. 13. Issued check to Prince Co. number 2634 for the full amount due, less discount allowed. 14. Issued credit memo for one TV A unit returned on sale of December 6. 15. Issued check number 2635 for advertising expense for last half of December, $1,500. 16. Received cash from Albert Co. for the full amount due (less return of December 14 and discount). 19. Issued check number 2636 to buy two TV C units, $7,600. 19. Issued check number 2637 for $6,100 to Joseph Co. on account. 20. Sold five TV C units on account to Cameron Co., invoice number 892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 20. For the convenience of the customer, issued check number 2638 for shipping charges on sale of December 20, $700. 21. Received $12,250 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount. 21. Purchased three projector systems on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $15,600. 24. Received notification that Marie Co. has been granted bankruptcy with no amount of recovery. We are to write-off her amount due. (Note: See page 402 for entry required.) 25. Issued a debit memo for return of $5,200 because of a damaged projection system purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller. 26. Issued check number 2639 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $600. (Customer was going to return goods until an allowance was arranged.) 27. Issued check number 2640 for sales salaries of $1,750 and office salaries of $950. 28. Purchased store equipment on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, FOB destination, $1,200. 29. Issued check number 2641 for store supplies, $470. 30. Sold four TV C units on account to Randall Co., invoice number 893, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 30. Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation paid on December 20. (Round calculations to the nearest dollar.) 30. Issued check number 2642 for purchase of December 21, less return of December 25 and discount. 30. Issued a debit memo for $300 of the purchase returned from December 28. Instructions: 1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account (General Ledger). Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (x) in the Post Reference column. 2. Journalize the transactions in a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, or general journal as illustrated in chapter 7. Also post to the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary ledgers and Inventory Control Sheet as needed. 3. Total each column on the special journals and prove the journal. 4. Post the totals of the account named columns and individually post the “other” columns as well to the General Ledger. 5. Prepare the Schedule of Accounts Receivable and the Schedule of Accounts Payable (their total amount must equal the amount in their controlling general ledger account). 6. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet. 7. Complete the worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the following adjustment data: a. Merchandise inventory on December 31 $90,800 b. Insurance expired during the year 1,250 c. Store supplies on hand on December 31 975 d. Depreciation for the current year needs to be calculated. The business uses the Straight-line method, the store equipment has a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value. (NOTE: the purchase and return will not be included as the dates of the transactions were after the 15th of the month). e. Accrued salaries on December 31: Sales salaries $1,400 Office salaries 760 2,160 f. The note payable terms are at 8%, payment is not being made until Jan. 3, 2013. Interest must be recognized for one month. g. Net realizable value of Accounts Receivable is determined to be $27,950. 8. Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a classified balance sheet in good form. (Recommend review of “Current Liabilities” on pages 166 & 167 and “Current Maturities of Long-term Debt” on page 480.) 9. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. 10. Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both balance columns opposite the closing entry. 11. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

the owner of a business reviews the income statement prepared by you and asks 632156

The owner of a business reviews the income statement prepared by you and asks, “Why do you report a profit of only $30,000 when cash collections of $100,000 were received and cash payments for the period totalled only $50,000 for expenses?” How would you respond to the owner’s question?

Document Preview:

GB518 | Assignment 4 Income Statement and Changes in Owner’s Equity Total marks?60 marks??Weight?10%??Due date?Wednesday of Week 6 (25th June 2014) by 5 PM?? PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS The portal will close at 5 PM AEST – Students in Adelaide and Brisbane please note to adjust for the time difference accordingly). This assignment must be completed individually. Submission: The assignment must be submitted electronically through the student portal – use the link under “Assessments” to submit your assignment. This assignment consists of 5 questions and you are required to answer all of the questions. Please use this word document to complete the assignment and upload it on the portal. Please make sure you follow the guidelines noted in your subject outline especially those relating to presentation of written work, late policy and academic integrity. Question 1 (10 marks | Word limit: 300) The owner of a business reviews the income statement prepared by you and asks, “Why do you report a profit of only $30,000 when cash collections of $100,000 were received and cash payments for the period totalled only $50,000 for expenses?” How would you respond to the owner’s question? Accrued income 50,000 to save owner paying tax n ?? Question 2 (10 marks | Word limit: 300) On 31 March, Padbury Publishers received a subscription of $240 for the supply of twelve monthly magazines, beginning in April. At the end of the reporting period, 30 June, the accountant suggested that the owner make an adjusting entry to defer the revenue on nine issues until the next financial year. The owner of the business was reluctant to do so, claiming that he had already received the subscriptions in cash and could see no reason for the delay in recognising the revenue. Do you agree with the owner or the accountant? Respond to the owner, explaining the accountant’s position. Ignore GST. ? $240divide 12 =20 for month, magazines…

Attachments:

campbell manufacturing intends to start business on january 1 2 632181

Campbell Manufacturing intends to start business on January 1, 2011. Production plans for the first four months of operations are as follows:

January ………….20,000 units

February …………50,000 units

March ……………70,000 units

April ………………70,000 units

Each unit requires 2 pounds of material. The firm would like to end each month with enough raw material to cover 25 percent of the following month’s production needs. Raw material costs $7 per pound. Management pays for 40 percent of purchases in the month of purchase and receives a 10 percent discount for these payments. The remaining purchases are paid in the following month, with no discount available.

a. Prepare a purchases budget for the first quarter of 2011 in units, in total, and in dollars.

b. Determine the budgeted payments for purchases of raw materials for each of the first three months of operations and for the quarter in total.

c. Where in the budgeted financial statements do the purchase discounts appear?

Document Preview:

Inoca private limited produces two products ranges: the standard range and special range. During the July, 300 standard windows and 50 specialized windows were manufactured and indirect production costs of $73000 were incurred. An analysis of indirect costs reveals the following activities. Activity Cost Driver Total Cost Material Handling Number of requisitions $25000 Machine Setups Number of set ups $27000 Quality inspections Number of inspections $21000 The cost driver volume for each product was as follows. Cost driver Specialized Standard Total Number of requisitions 400 600 1000 Number of setups 150 300 450 Number of inspections 200 400 600 Indirect activity cost rate for each activity. Allocate the indirect manufacturing overhead costs for July to the products using activity cost rates calculated in (a) above Write a memo to the managing director of Inoca private limited explaining the benefits of activity based costing Volume-based cost drivers are no longer appropriate in today’s business environment”. Discuss. TASK 2: Managerial Planning Leeway Maldives (Pvt) Ltd has the capacity to manufacture 50,000 units annually of its only product. The following information is available. Selling price ? $26 per unit ??Variable manufacturing costs ?$12 per unit ??Fixed manufacturing costs ?$180,000 annually ??Fixed selling and administrative costs ? $120,000 annually ??Variable selling and administrative costs ? $ 4 per unit ?? Calculate the number of units that need to be sold annually to break even. 3 How many units would need to be sold to earn a target annual profit of $120,000? In an attempt to achieve better results in the marketplace, management has been looking at changing the reward systems for making, distribution and sales personnel. This would result in an increase in variable selling and administrative costs by $2 per unit, and would reduce fixed selling and administrative costs by…

Attachments:

inoca private limited produces two products ranges the standard range and special ra 632182

Inoca private limited produces two products ranges: the standard range and special range. During the July, 300 standard windows and 50 specialized windows were manufactured and indirect production costs of $73000 were incurred. An analysis of indirect costs reveals the following activities.

Activity Cost Driver Total Cost

Material Handling Number of requisitions $25000

Machine Setups Number of set ups $27000

Quality inspections Number of inspections $21000

The cost driver volume for each product was as follows.

Cost driver Specialized Standard Total

Number of requisitions 400 600 1000

Number of setups 150 300 450

Number of inspections 200 400 600

a. Indirect activity cost rate for each activity.

b. Allocate the indirect manufacturing overhead costs for July to the products using activity cost rates calculated in (a) above

c. Write a memo to the managing director of Inoca private limited explaining the benefits of activity based costing

d. Volume-based cost drivers are no longer appropriate in today’s business environment”. Discuss.

TASK 2: Managerial Planning

Leeway Maldives (Pvt) Ltd has the capacity to manufacture 50,000 units annually of its only product. The following information is available.

Selling price

$26 per unit

Variable manufacturing costs

$12 per unit

Fixed manufacturing costs

$180,000 annually

Fixed selling and administrative costs

$120,000 annually

Variable selling and administrative costs

$ 4 per unit

a. Calculate the number of units that need to be sold annually to break even. 3

b. How many units would need to be sold to earn a target annual profit of $120,000?

c. In an attempt to achieve better results in the marketplace, management has been looking at changing the reward systems for making, distribution and sales personnel. This would result in an increase in variable selling and administrative costs by $2 per unit, and would reduce fixed selling and administrative costs by $50000.

(i) Calculate the number of units required to break even if management implemented the changes

(ii) Would you suggest management pursues the changes? Explain.

TASK 3: Short-term Decision Making

XYZ Company produces plunge pools. Currently, the company uses internally manufactured pumps to power water jets. XYZ Company has found that 40 per cent of the pumps have failed within their 12-month warranty period, causing huge warranty costs. Because of the company’s inability to manufacture high-quality pumps, management is considering buying pumps from a reputable supplier who will also bear any related warranty costs. XYZ company’s unit cost of manufacturing pumps is $83.75 per unit, including $17.25 of allocated fixed overhead (primarily depreciation of equipment). Also, the company has spent an average of $22 (labor and parts) repairing each pump returned. XYZ Company can purchase each pump for $92.50. During 2013, XYZ Company plans to sell 12,800 plunge pools (each pool requires one pump).

XYZ company’s unit cost of manufacturing pumps is $83.75 per unit, including $17.25 of allocated fixed overhead (primarily depreciation of equipment). Also, the company has spent an average of $22 (labor and parts) repairing each pump returned. XYZ Company can purchase each pump for $92.50. During 2013, XYZ Company plans to sell 12,800 plunge pools (each pool requires one pump).

Required

a. Determine whether XYZ Company should make or buy the pumps, and the amount of cost savings arising from the best alternative. [8 marks]

b. What qualitative factors should be considered in the outsourcing decision? [7 marks]

e. “Fixed costs are always irrelevant in decision making.” Discuss. [5 marks]

TASK 4: Budgetary Control Systems

Madihaa Company Pte Ltd intends to start business on the first of January. Production plans for the first four months are as follows:

January

20,000 units

February

50,000 units

March

70,000 units

April

70,000 units

Each unit requires 2 kilograms of material. The company would like to end each month with enough raw material inventories on hand to cover 25 per cent of the following month’s production needs. The material costs $7 per kilogram. Management anticipates being able to pay for 40 per cent of its purchases in the month of purchase. They will receive a 10 per cent discount for these early payments. They anticipate having to defer payment to the next month on 60 per cent of their purchases. No discount will be taken on these late payments. The business starts with no inventories on 1 January.

Required

a.Determine the budgeted payments for purchases of materials for each of the first three months of operations. [8 marks]

b.Madihaa Company Pte Ltd is preparing a master budget for the coming year. At present senior management are reviewing the inventory policies. Which budgets, would policies concerning the level of inventories be affected and why?

c. Discuss the potential issues arising for an entity if it takes a budgetary approach in which budgetary data are imposed on business unit managers by the CEO. Contrast this with an approach whereby the budgetary data is developed in a more participatory environment.

TASK 5: Decentralization and Performance Evaluation

Zam Gems Maldives (Pvt) Ltd manufactures jewelry for three different markets. The business has grown from a backyard hobby for the owners to quite a large manufacturing concern. The company is structured into three distinct divisions aligned with each market, as shown.

Children’s jewellery Adult jewellery Crystals & homewares

Sales $4,720,000 $2,480,000 $6,300,000

Variable costs 33% 38% 50%

Fixed costs $1,960,000 $1,800,000 $1,700,000

Divisional assets $5,000,000 $4,000,000 $12,000,000

Common costs for the year totaled $500,000 and were allocated based on sales.

The management of Zam Gems Maldives (Pvt) Ltd has come across a further investment opportunity. It does not want to develop a separate division, so one of the existing divisions would need to take responsibility for the new investment opportunity. Management estimates that the new investment opportunity would require an investment of $2500000 to deliver sales of $2000000 with variable costs estimated at $625000 and fixed costs at $1000000.

Required

a. At present, divisional performance is evaluated based on ROI. If this is the case, which division would want to take over the new investment opportunity? [5 marks]

b. If the company changed its performance evaluation criteria to encompass residual income based on a charge for capital of 14 per cent, which division would want to take over the new investment opportunity? [5 marks]

c. Why is there a need to measure organizational performance? [5 marks]

d. Discuss the appropriateness of the use of ROI, RI, and EVA as performance measures. [5 marks]

Attachments:

construct harry s cash budget for the 3 months april may and june and t 632203

Construct Harry’s cash budget for the 3 months April. May, and June and the total for the 2nd quarter. Fixed overhead expenses requiring the use of cash may be grouped together as a single line item called “fixed overhead”. Variable overhead items may be grouped together as a single line item called “variable overhear. Show any necessary calculations. (7 points) Construct Harry’s contribution margin format budgeted income statement for the 3 months April. May. and June and the total for the 2nd quarter. Fixed overhead expenses may be grouped together as fixed overhead. Variable overhead expenses may be grouped together as variable overhead. Remember to include interest on any borrowings. Show any necessary calculations. (6 points) Explain why Harry is facing a cash flow problem in May even though his business is profitable. (2 points) During April Harry actually produced and sold 175.000 widgets. Actual sales revenues were $4.342.000. Actual costs were as detailed in the table below. Complete the table by constructing a flexible budget and performance report including variances for April based on 175,000 widgets. Your performance report should be similar to the performance report shown in exhibit 10.7 of page 559 except your report includes detailed cost production cost line items. Use the template provided below for your answer. (8 points) Write a brief report explaining the most important reasons why Harry’s profits were different from the amount projected in the master budget. (2 points)

Document Preview:

ACCT2332 BUDGETING PROJECT REQUIRED: Read the case and answer the questions below using the workspaces provided. To receive credit you must show your calculations and write your answers in the spaces provided. Please handwrite your answers. th Hand your project before class on or before June 27 . YOUR NAME ________________________________________________

Attachments:

walters company is considering producing 120 000 pounds of paperclips and 140 000 po 632228

Walters Company is considering producing 120,000 pounds of paperclips and 140,000 pounds of staples each month from their current production of grade A and grade B wiring. The following are the expenditures to date:

Jan. 1 $100,000 Bulk steel purchase

Jan. 2 – Feb. 15 $150,000 Cost to melt steel

Feb. 16 – Mar. 31 $200,000 Cost to mold steel into wires, polish wires and

wrap around large bolts

April 1 $3.00/pound market price for grade A wire

$4.00/pound market price for grade B wire

Grade A wire requires $450,000 of monthly variable costs to process into staples, which can be sold in the market on 5/1/XX for $7.00 per pound. Grade B wire requires $600,000 of monthly variable costs to process into paperclips, which can be sold in the market on 5/1/XX for $8.00 per pound.

Required:

1) Should Walters Company sell their products in the marketplace on April 1st or on May 1st?

What recommendation would you make to Walters Company?

2) What is the incremental monthly revenue (loss) for staples and paperclips?

3) How should the $450,000 of joint costs be accounted for in the further processing decision?

prepare dan cornulting s cash budget how much cash will davis borrow 632371

This problem continues Davis consulting. Inc. situation from Problem I’21-63 of (lupin 21 Azume Davis Consuhing brg.us January with $29000 rah. Management foreaso that ash moans from cm& t ILUOtTben a be 549,000 in January and 551.500 in Febtuary. Projected cash paymnits include equipment purdsasa (517.000 in Jarman, and WAX) in February) and brogan) adminidrative apeman (5G000 ach mooch). I hvia bank requires a $20,000 minimum balance in the bras checking ac-count. At the end of any month when the account balance falls below 520000. the hank automatically extends credit to the firm in multiples of 55.000. Days borrows as little as possible and pan back loam each month in 51.000 increments. plus 5% interest on the entire unpaid principal. the Gen payment 4x-curs one month alter the loan.

Requiremaits I. Prepare Dan Cornulting’s cash budget for January and February 2013. 2. How much cash will Davis borrow in February if cash receipts from customers that month total S21,500 instead cif 551.500?

Attachments:

lindon company uses 4 500 units of part x each year as a component in the assembly 632425

) Lindon Company uses 4,500 units of Part X each year as a component in the assembly of one of its products. The company is presently producing Part X internally at a total cost of $69,000 as follows:

Direct materials

$16,000

Direct labor

18,000

Variable manufacturing overhead

10,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead

25,000

Total costs

$69,000

An outside supplier has offered to provide Part X at a price of $11 per unit. If Lindon stops producing the part internally, one third of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.

Required: Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting the outside supplier’s offer.

exercise 12 33 segmented income statement tv cable company countywide cable service 632508

?Exercise 12–33Segmented Income Statement; TVCable Company

Countywide Cable Services, Inc. is organized with three segments: Metro, Suburban, and Outlying.

Data for these segments for the year just ended follow.

Metro Suburban Outlying

Service revenue ………………………………………….$1,000,000 $800,000 400,000

Variable expenses …………………………………. 200,000 150,000 100,000

Controllable fixed expenses …………………………… 400,000 320,000 150,000

Fixed expenses controllable by others ……………… 230,000 200,000 90,000

In addition to the expenses listed above, the company has $95,000 of common fixed expenses.

Income-tax expense for the year is $145,000.

Required:

1. Prepare a segmented income statement for Countywide Cable Services, Inc. Use the contribution format.

?Exercise 13–27Calculate Weighted-Average Cost of Capital for EVA

Golden Gate Construction Associates, a real estate developer andbuilding contractorin San Francisco, has two sources of long-term capital: debt and equity. The cost to Golden Gate of issuing debt is the after-tax cost of the interest paymentson the debt, taking intoaccountthe fact that the interest payments are tax deductible. The cost of Golden Gate’s equity capital is the investment opportunity rate of Golden Gate’s investors, that is, the rate they could earn on investments of similar risk to that of investing in Golden Gate Construction Associates. The interest rate on Golden Gate’s $60 million of long-term debt is 10 percent, and the company’s tax rate is 40 percent. The cost of Golden Gate’s equity capital is 15 percent. Moreover, the market value (and book value) of Golden Gate’s equity is $90 million.

Required:Calculate Golden Gate Construction Associates’ weighted-average cost of capital.

?Exercise 13–28Economic Value Added (EVA); Continuation of Preceding Exercise

Refer to the data in the preceding exercise for Golden Gate Construction Associates. The company has two divisions: the real estate division and the construction division. The divisions’ total assets, current liabilities, and before-tax operating income for the most recent year are as follows:

Division Total Assets Current Before-Tax

Liabilities Operating Income

Real estate …… $100,000,000 $6,000,000 $20,000,000

Construction …… 60,000,000 4,000,000 18,000,000

Required:Calculate the economic value added (EVA) for each of Golden Gate Construction Associates’ divisions. (You will need to use the weighted-average cost of capital, which was computed in the preceding exercise.)

?Exercise 13–29ROI; Residual Income

Wyalusing Industries has manufactured prefabricated houses for over 20 years. The houses are constructed in sections to be assembled on customers’ lots. Wyalusing expanded into the precut housing market when it acquired Fairmont Company, one of its suppliers. In this market, various types of lumber are precut into the appropriate lengths, banded into packages, and shipped to customers’ lots for assembly.

Wyalusing designated the Fairmont Division as an investment center. Wyalusing uses return on investment (ROI) as a performance measure with investment defined as average productive assets. Management bonuses are based in part on ROI. All investments are expected to earn a minimum return of 15 percent before income taxes. Fairmont’s ROI has ranged from 19.3 to 22.1 percent since it was acquired. Fairmont had an investment opportunity in 20×1 that had an estimated ROI of 18 percent. Fairmont’s management decided against the investment because it believed the investment would decrease the division’s overall ROI. The 20×1 income statement for Fairmont Division follows. The division’s productive assets were $12,600,000 at the end of 20×1, a 5 percent increase over the balance at the beginning of the year.

FAIRMONT DIVISION

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 20×1

(in thousands)

Sales revenue ………………………………………………………………………………………………….$24,000

Cost of goods sold ……………………………………………………………………………………………..15,800

Gross margin ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..$8,200

Operating expenses:

Administrative ………………………………………………………………………………………………………2,140

Selling …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………3,6005,740

Income from operations before income taxes …………………………………………………………….$ 2,460

Required:

1.Calculate the following performance measures for 20×1 for the Fairmont Division.

a.Return on investment (ROI).

b.Residual income.

2.Would the management of Fairmont Division have been more likely to accept the investment

opportunity it had in 20×1 if residual income were used as a performance measure instead of ROI?

Explain your answer.

the following were among gage co rsquo s 2005 costs 630986

The following were among Gage Co.’s 2005 costs:

Normal spoilage

$

5,000

Freight out

10,000

Excess of actual manufacturing costs over standard costs

20,000

Standard manufacturing costs

100,000

Actual prime manufacturing costs

80,000

Gage’s 2005 actual manufacturing overhead was

  1. $ 40,000
  2. $ 45,000
  3. $ 55,000
  4. $120,000

baby frames inc evaluates manufacturing overhead in its factory by using variance an 630987

Baby Frames, Inc. evaluates manufacturing overhead in its factory by using variance analysis. The following information applies to the month of May:

Actual

Budgeted

Number of frames manufactured

19,000

20,000

Variable overhead costs

$4,100

$2 per direct labor hour

Fixed overhead costs

$22,000

$20,000

Direct labor hours

2,100

0.1 hour per frame

What is the fixed overhead spending variance?

  1. $1,000 favorable.
  2. $1,000 unfavorable.
  3. $2,000 favorable.
  4. $2,000 unfavorable.

the following information pertains to roe co rsquo s 2005 manufacturing operations 630990

The following information pertains to Roe Co.’s 2005 manufacturing operations:

Standard direct manufacturing labor hours per unit

2

Actual direct manufacturing labor hours

10,500

Number of units produced

5,000

Standard variable overhead per standard direct manufacturing labor hour

$3

Actual variable overhead

$28,000

Roe’s 2005 unfavorable variable overhead efficiency variance was

  1. $0
  2. $1,500
  3. $2,000
  4. $3,500

activity is expressed in machine hours with point v indicating the standard hours re 630992

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following:

The diagram below depicts a factory overhead flexible budget line DB and standard overhead application line OA. Activity is expressed in machine hours with Point V indicating the standard hours required for the actual output in September 2005. Point S indicates the actual machine hours (inputs) and actual costs in September 2005.

Are the following overhead variances favorable or unfavorable?

Volume (capacity) variance

Efficiency variance

a.

Favorable

Favorable

b.

Favorable

Unfavorable

c.

Unfavorable

Favorable

d.

Unfavorable

Unfavorable

The budgeted total variable overhead cost for C machine hours is

  1. AB
  2. BC
  3. AC minus DO
  4. BC minus DO

assuming that ajax division desires to maximize its gross margin should ajax take on 630999

Ajax Division of Carlyle Corporation produces electric motors, 20% of which are sold to Bradley Division of Carlyle and the remainder to outside customers. Carlyle treats its divisions as profit centers and allows division managers to choose their sources of sale and supply. Corporate policy requires that all interdivisional sales and purchases be recorded at variable cost as a transfer price. Ajax Division’s estimated sales and standard cost data for the year ending December 31, 2005, based on the full capacity of 100,000 units, are as follows:

Bradley

Outsiders

Sales

$ 900,000

$ 8,000,000

Variable costs

(900,000)

(3,600,000)

Fixed costs

(300,000)

(1,200,000)

Gross margin

$(300,000)

$3,200,000

Unit sales

20,000

80,000

Ajax has an opportunity to sell the above 20,000 units to an outside customer at a price of $75 per unit during 2005 on a continuing basis. Bradley can purchase its requirements from an outside supplier at a price of $85 per unit.

Assuming that Ajax Division desires to maximize its gross margin, should Ajax take on the new customer and drop its sales to Bradley for 2005, and why?

  1. No, because the gross margin of the corporation as a whole would decrease by $200,000.
  2. Yes, because Ajax Division’s gross margin would increase by $300,000.
  3. Yes, because Ajax Division’s gross margin would increase by $600,000.
  4. No, because Bradley Division’s gross margin would decrease by $800,000.

fixed costs of goods sold are allocated to each segment based on the number of emplo 631006

Following are the operating results of the two segments of Parklin Corporation

Segment A

Segment B

Total

Sales

$

10,000

$

15,000

$

25,000

Variable cost of goods sold

4,000

8,500

12,500

Fixed cost of goods sold

1,500

2,500

4,000

Gross margin

4,500

4,000

8,500

Variable selling and administrative

2,000

3,000

5,000

Fixed selling and administrative

1,500

1,500

3,000

Operating income (loss)

$

1,000

$

(500)

$

500

Fixed costs of goods sold are allocated to each segment based on the number of employees. Fixed selling and administrative expenses are allocated equally. If Segment B is eliminated, $1,500 of fixed costs of goods sold would be eliminated. Assuming Segment B is closed, the effect on operating income would be

  1. An increase of $500.
  2. An increase of $2,000.
  3. A decrease of $2,000.
  4. A decrease of $2,500.

although financial and managerial accounting differ in many ways they are similar in 631649

Although financial and managerial accounting differ in many ways, they are similar in that both rely on the same underlying financial data.

Managerial accounting is a branch of financial accounting and serves essentially the same purposes as financial accounting.

Managerial accounting places greater emphasis on the future than financial accounting, which is primarily concerned with the past.

Managerial accounting is not needed in a non-profit or governmental organization.

When carrying out their planning activities, managers select a course of action and specify how the action will be implemented.

When carrying out their planning activities, managers obtain feedback to ensure that the plan is actually carried out and is appropriately modified as circumstances change.

The controller occupies a line position in an organization.

Decentralization means the delegation of decision-making authority throughout an organization by allowing managers at various operating levels to make key decisions relating to their own area of responsibility.

A firm”s organization chart will normally show both the formal and informal lines of reporting and communication.

The Chief Financial Officer of an organization is responsible for ensuring that line operations run smoothly.

Traditionally, companies have maintained large amounts of raw materials, work in process, and finished goods inventories to act as buffers so that operations can proceed smoothly even if there are unanticipated disruptions.

Process Reengineering is generally considered to be a more radical approach to improvement than Total Quality Management.

Process Reengineering emphasizes a team approach involving front-line workers, whereas Total Quality Management is usually implemented using outside specialists and is imposed from above.

If ethical standards were not generally followed, one of the results would probably be fewer goods and services available in the marketplace.

The Standards of Ethical Conduct for Management Accountants promulgated by the Institute of Management Accountants specifically state that management accountants” sole ethical responsibility is to not break any laws.

manufacturing overhead is an indirect cost with respect to units of product 631675

Manufacturing overhead is an indirect cost with respect to units of product.

Depreciation on office equipment would not be included in the cost of goods manufactured.

Rent on a factory building used in the production process would be classified as a period cost and as a fixed cost.

Period costs are found only in manufacturing companies, not in merchandising companies.

Depreciation on equipment a company uses in its selling and administrative activities would be classified as a product cost.

If the finished goods inventory increases between the beginning and the end of a period, then the cost of goods manufactured is smaller than the cost of goods sold.

The cost of goods manufactured is calculated by adding the amount of work in process at the end of the year to the cost of raw materials used, direct labor worked, and manufacturing overhead incurred for the year and then subtracting work in process at the beginning of the year.

A publisher that sells its books through agents who are paid a constant percentage commission on each book sold would classify the commissions as a fixed cost.

Variable costs per unit are affected by changes in activity.

A cost is either direct or indirect. The classification will not change if the cost object changes.

The amount that a manufacturing company could earn by renting unused portions of its warehouse is an example of an opportunity cost.

Labor fringe benefits may be charged to direct labor or manufacturing overhead while overtime premiums paid usually are considered a part of manufacturing overhead.

The cost of idle time should be charged as direct labor of the job that is in process when the breakdown occurs.

Internal failure costs result from identification of defects during the appraisal process.

Such costs may include scrap, rejected products, rework, and downtime.

ISO 9000 certification is relatively easy to achieve because little documentation on quality control procedures is needed.

which of the above best describes the behavior of costs a and b 631691

Cost A

 

Number of Units Produced

 

Unit Cost

 

Total Cost

 

 

1

?

$10

 

10

?

$100

 

100

?

$1,000

 

1,000

?

$10,000

Cost B

 

 

 

 

1

$5,000

?

 

10

$500

?

 

100

$50

?

 

1,000

$5

?

Which of the above best describes the behavior of Costs A and B?

A) Cost A is fixed, Cost B is variable.

B) Cost A is variable, Cost B is fixed.

C) Both Cost A and Cost B are variable.

D) Both Cost A and Cost B are fixed.

the controller of the recently organized crandall company is considering the two met 631699

The controller of the recently organized Crandall Company is considering the two methods listed below for accounting for labor fringe benefits. Which of the two methods is considered acceptable? Method A: Treat all labor fringe benefits as indirect labor by adding them in total to manufacturing overhead. Method B: Treat labor fringe benefits that relate to direct labor as additional direct labor cost and fringe benefits relating to indirect labor as part of manufacturing overhead.

A) Only Method A is acceptable.

B) Only Method B is acceptable.

C) Both Method A and Method B are acceptable.

D) Neither Method A nor Method B is acceptable; labor fringe benefits should be treated as period expenses and should be charged off as incurred.

on the basis of this report which one of the following statements is most likely 631717

Adolphson Corporation has provided the following summary of its quality cost report for the last two years:

Summary of Quality Cost Report (in thousands)

 

 

 

This Year

Last Year

% Change

Prevention costs

$ 300

$ 200

+50

Appraisal costs

315

210

+50

Internal failure costs

114

190

-40

External failure costs

621

1,200

-48

Total quality costs

$1,350

$1,800

-25

On the basis of this report, which one of the following statements is most likely

correct?

A) An increase in prevention and appraisal costs resulted in fewer defects, and

therefore, resulted in a decrease in internal and external failure costs.

B) A decrease in internal and external failure costs resulted in less need for

prevention and appraisal costs.

C) Quality costs such as scrap and rework decreased by 48%.

D) Quality costs such as returns and repairs under warranty decreased by 40%.

conversion costs during the month totaled 631718

The following costs were incurred in January:

Direct materials

$33,000

Direct labor

$28,000

Manufacturing overhead

$69,000

Selling expenses

$16,000

Administrative expenses

$21,000

Conversion costs during the month totaled:

A) $97,000

B) $167,000

C) $102,000

D) $61,000

what is the amount of direct labor included in this list 631736

Fab Co. manufactures textiles. Fab”s manufacturing costs last year included the

following salaries and wages:

Loom operators

$120,000

Factory foremen

$45,000

Machinery repairmen

$30,000

What is the amount of direct labor included in this list?

A) $195,000

B) $165,000

C) $150,000

D) $120,000

 

 

 

 

a traditional costing system would allocate setup costs on the basis of dmlh an abc 630928

Hoger Corporation accumulated the following cost information for its two products, A and B:

A

B

Total

Production volume

2,000

1,000

Total direct man. labor hrs.

5,000

20,000

25,000

Setup cost per batch

$ 1,000

$2,000

Batch size

100

50

Total setup costs incurred

$20,000

$40,000

$60,000

DMLH per unit

2

1

A traditional costing system would allocate setup costs on the basis of DMLH. An ABC system would trace costs by spreading the costs per batch over the units in a batch. What is the setup cost per unit of product A under each costing system?

Traditional

ABC

a.

$4.80

$10.00

b.

$2.40

$10.00

c.

$40.00

$200.00

d.

$4.80

$20.00

if lane uses the net realizable value method for allocating joint cost how much of t 630929

Lane Co. produces main products Kul and Wu. The process also yields by-product Zef. Net realizable value of by-product Zef is subtracted from joint production cost of Kul and Wu. The following information pertains to production in July 2005 at a joint cost of $54,000:

Product

Units produced

Market value

Additional cost after split-off

Kul

1,000

$40,000

$

0

Wu

1,500

35,000

0

Zef

500

7,000

3,000

If Lane uses the net realizable value method for allocating joint cost, how much of the joint cost should be allocated to product Kul?

  1. $18,800
  2. $20,000
  3. $26,667
  4. $27,342

mig co which began operations in 2005 produces gasoline and a gasoline by product th 630931

Mig Co., which began operations in 2005, produces gasoline and a gasoline by-product. The following information is available pertaining to 2005 sales and production:

Total production costs to split-off point

$120,000

Gasoline sales

270,000

By-product sales

30,000

Gasoline inventory, 12/31/05

15,000

Additional by-product costs:

Marketing

10,000

Production

15,000

Mig accounts for the by-product at the time of production. What are Mig’s 2005 cost of sales for gasoline and the by-product?

Gasoline

By-product

a.

$105,000

$25,000

b.

$115,000

$0

c.

$108,000

$37,000

d.

$100,000

$0

inventory of moy was recorded at net realizable value when produced in 2004 no units 630932

The following information pertains to a by-product called Moy:

Sales in 2005

5,000 units

Selling price per unit

$6

Selling costs per unit

2

Processing costs

0

Inventory of Moy was recorded at net realizable value when produced in 2004. No units of Moy were produced in 2005. What amount should be recognized as profit on Moy’s 2005 sales?

  1. $0
  2. $10,000
  3. $20,000
  4. $30,000

sago co uses regression analysis to develop a model for predicting overhead costs tw 630937

Sago Co. uses regression analysis to develop a model for predicting overhead costs. Two different cost drivers (machine hours and direct materials weight) are under consideration as the independent variable. Relevant data were run on a computer using one of the standard regression programs, with the following results:

Coefficient

Machine hours

Y Intercept

2,500

B

5.0

R2= .70

Direct materials weight

Y Intercept

4,600

B

2.6

R2= .50

What regression equation should be used?

  1. Y = 2,500 + 5.0X
  2. Y = 2,500 + 3.5X
  3. Y = 4,600 + 2.6X
  4. Y = 4,600 + 1.3X

how much lower would magna rsquo s net income be if it used variable costing instead 630948

In its first year of operations, Magna Manufacturers had the following costs when it produced 100,000 and sold 80,000 units of its only product:

Manufacturing costs

Fixed

$180,000

Variable

160,000

Selling and admin. costs

Fixed

90,000

Variable

40,000

How much lower would Magna’s net income be if it used variable costing instead of full absorption costing?

  1. $36,000
  2. $54,000
  3. $68,000
  4. $94,000

the cost of merchandise averages 40 of its selling price the company rsquo s policy 630956

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

Operational budgets are used by a retail company for planning and controlling its business activities. Data regarding the company’s monthly sales for the last 6 months of the year and its projected collection patterns are shown below.

The cost of merchandise averages 40% of its selling price. The company’s policy is to maintain an inventory equal to 25% of the next month’s forecasted sales. The inventory balance at cost is $80,000 as of June 30.

Forecasted Sales

July

$775,000

August

750,000

September

825,000

October

800,000

November

850,000

December

900,000

Types of Sales

Cash sales

20

%

Credit sales

80

%

Collection Pattern for Credit Sales

In the month of sale

40

%

In the first month following the sale

57

%

Uncollectible

3

%

The budgeted cost of the company’s purchases for the month of August would be

CIA adapted

  1. $302,500
  2. $305,000
  3. $307,500
  4. $318,750

The company’s total cash receipts from sales and collections on account that would be budgeted for the month of September would be

  1. $757,500
  2. $771,000
  3. $793,800
  4. $856,500

rolling wheels purchases bicycle components in the month prior to assembling them in 630960

Rolling Wheels purchases bicycle components in the month prior to assembling them into bicycles. Assembly is scheduled one month prior to budgeted sales. Rolling pays 75% of component costs in the month of purchase and 25% of the costs in the following month. Component cost included in budgeted cost of sales are

April

May

June

July

August

$5,000

$6,000

$7,000

$8,000

$8,000

What is Rolling’s budgeted cash payment for components in May?

  1. $5,750
  2. $6,750
  3. $7,750
  4. $8,000

purchases will be made in twelve equal monthly amounts and paid for in the following 630961

A 2005 cash budget is being prepared for the purchase of Toyi, a merchandise item. Budgeted data are

Cost of goods sold for 2005

$300,000

Accounts payable 1/1/05

20,000

Inventory—1/1/05

30,000

12/31/05

42,000

Purchases will be made in twelve equal monthly amounts and paid for in the following month. What is the 2005 budgeted cash payment for purchases of Toyi?

  1. $295,000
  2. $300,000
  3. $306,000
  4. $312,000

in preparing the annual profit plan for the coming year wilkens company wants to det 630967

Items 1 thru 3 are based on the following information:

In preparing the annual profit plan for the coming year, Wilkens Company wants to determine the cost behavior pattern of the maintenance costs. Wilkens has decided to use linear regression by employing the equation y = a + bx for maintenance costs. The prior year’s data regarding maintenance hours and costs, and the result of the regression analysis are given below.

Average cost per hour

$9.00

a

684.65

b

7.2884

Standard error of a

49.515

Standard error of b

.12126

Standard error of the estimate

34.469

R2

.99724

Hours of activity

Maintenance costs

January

480

$ 4,200

February

320

3,000

March

400

3,600

April

300

2,820

May

500

4,350

June

310

2,960

July

320

3,030

August

520

4,470

September

490

4,260

October

470

4,050

November

350

3,300

December

340

3,160

Sum

4,800

$43,200

Average

400

$ 3,600

In the standard regression equation y = a + bx, the letter b is best described as a(n)

  1. Independent variable.
  2. Dependent variable.
  3. Constant coefficient.
  4. Variable coefficient.

The letter x in the standard regression equation is best described as a(n).

  1. Independent variable.
  2. Dependent variable.
  3. Constant coefficient.
  4. Coefficient of determination.

Based upon the data derived from the regression analysis, 420 maintenance hours in a month would mean the maintenance costs (rounded to the nearest dollar) would be budgeted at

  1. $3,780
  2. $3,600
  3. $3,790
  4. $3,746

lackland ski resort uses multiple regression to predict ski lift revenue for the nex 630968

Items 1 thru 4 are based on the following information:

Lackland Ski Resort uses multiple regression to predict ski lift revenue for the next week based on the forecasted number of dates with temperatures above 10 degrees and predicted number of inches of snow. The following function has been developed:

Sales = 10,902 + (255 × no. of days predicted above 10 degrees) + (300 × no. of inches of snow predicted)

Other information generated from the analysis include

Coefficient of determination (Adjusted r squared)

.6789

Standard error

1,879

F-Statistic

6.279 with a significance of .049

Which variables(s) in this function is(are) the dependent variable(s)?

  1. Predicted number of days above 10 degrees.
  2. Predicted number of inches of snow.
  3. Revenue.
  4. Predicted number of days above 10 degrees and predicted number of inches of snow.

Assume that management predicts the number of days above 10 degrees for the next week to be 6 and the number of inches of snow to be 12. Calculate the predicted amount of revenue for the next week.

  1. $10,902
  2. $11,362
  3. $16,032
  4. $20,547

Which of the following represents an accurate interpretation of the results of Lackland’s regression analysis?

  1. 6.279% of the variation in revenue is explained by the predicted number of days above 10 degrees and the number of inches of snow.
  2. The relationships are not significant.
  3. Predicted number of days above 10 degrees is a more significant variable than number of inches of snow.
  4. 67.89% of the variation in revenue is explained by the predicted number of days above 10 degrees and the number of inches of snow.

Assume that Lackland’s model predicts revenue for a week to be $13,400. Calculate the 95% confidence interval for the amount of revenue for the week. (The 95% confidence interval corresponds to the area representing 2.3436 deviations from the mean.)

  1. $13,400 ± 6,279
  2. $13,400 ± 4,404
  3. $13,400 ± 6,786
  4. $13,400 ± 8,564

which of the following amounts would most likely be subject to the control of the pr 630976

The following is a summarized income statement of Carr Co.’s profit center No. 43 for March 2005:

Contribution margin

$70,000

Period expenses:

Manager’s salary

$20,000

Facility depreciation

8,000

Corporate expense allocation

5,000

33,000

Profit center income

$37,000

Which of the following amounts would most likely be subject to the control of the profit center’s manager?

  1. $70,000
  2. $50,000
  3. $37,000
  4. $33,000

what is the standard direct manufacturing labor cost per unit of product glu 630985

The following direct manufacturing labor information pertains to the manufacture of product Glu:

Time required to make one unit

2 direct labor hours

Number of direct workers

50

Number of productive hours per week, per worker

40

Weekly wages per worker

$500

Workers’ benefits treated as direct manufacturing labor costs

20% of wages

What is the standard direct manufacturing labor cost per unit of product Glu?

  1. $30
  2. $24
  3. $15
  4. $12

what is the amount of the economic value added eva 630874

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

The following information is available for Armstrong Enterprises for 2005:

Net operating profit (income) after taxes

$36,000,000

Depreciation expense

15,000,000

Change in net working capital

10,000,000

Capital expenditures

12,000,000

Invested capital (total assets – current liabilities)

100,000,000

Weighted average cost of capital

10%

What is the amount of the economic value added (EVA)?

  1. $20,000,000
  2. $26,000,000
  3. $15,000,000
  4. $36,000,000

What is the free cash flow for 2005?

  1. $36,000,000
  2. $30,000,000
  3. $29,000,000
  4. $26,000,000

the dawson corporation projects the following for the year 2005 630877

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

The Dawson Corporation projects the following for the year 2005:

Earnings before interest and taxes

$35 million

Interest expense

5 million

Preferred stock dividends

4 million

Common stock dividend payout ratio

30%

Common shares outstanding

2 million

Effective corporate income tax rate

40%

The expected common stock dividend per share for Dawson Corporation for 2005 is

CMA adapted

  1. $2.34
  2. $2.70
  3. $3.90
  4. $2.10

If Dawson Corporation’s common stock is expected to trade at a price/earnings ratio of eight, the market price per share (to the nearest dollar) would be

  1. $125
  2. $ 56
  3. $ 72
  4. $ 68

mckeon rsquo s controller is in the process of reviewing the 2006 budget mckeon comp 630878

Items 1 through 5 are based on the following information:

The data presented below show actual figures for selected accounts of McKeon Company for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2005, and selected budget figures for the 2006 fiscal year. McKeon’s controller is in the process of reviewing the 2006 budget. McKeon Company monitors yield or return ratios using the average financial position of the company. (Round all calculations to three decimal places if necessary.)

5/31/06

5/31/05

Current assets

$210,000

$180,000

Noncurrent assets

275,000

255,000

Current liabilities

78,000

85,000

Long-term debt

75,000

30,000

Common stock ($30 par value)

300,000

300,000

Retained earnings

32,000

20,000

2006 Operations

Sales

$350,000

Cost of goods sold

160,000

Interest expense

3,000

Income taxes (40% rate)

48,000

Dividends declared and paid in 2006

60,000

Administrative expense

67,000

Current Assets

5/31/06

5/31/05

Cash

$ 20,000

$10,000

Accounts receivable

100,000

70,000

Inventory

70,000

80,000

Other

20,000

20,000

McKeon Company’s debt-to-total-asset ratio for 2006 is

  1. 0.352
  2. 0.315
  3. 0.264
  4. 0.237

The 2006 accounts receivable turnover for McKeon company is

  1. 1.882
  2. 3.500
  3. 5.000
  4. 4.118

Using a 365-day year, McKeon’s inventory turnover is

  1. 2.133
  2. 2.281
  3. 1.995
  4. 4.615

McKeon Company’s total asset turnover for 2006 is

  1. 0.805
  2. 0.761
  3. 0.722
  4. 0.348

The 2006 return on assets for McKeon Company is

  1. 0.261
  2. 0.148
  3. 0.157
  4. 0.166

antlers inc produces a single product that sells for 150 per unit the product is pro 630885

Antlers, Inc. produces a single product that sells for $150 per unit. The product is processed through the Cutting and Finishing departments. Additional data for these departments are as follows:

Cutting

Finishing

Annual capacity (36,000 direct labor hours available in each department)

180,000 units

135,000 units

Current production rate (annualized)

108,000 units

108,000 units

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$1,296,000

$1,944,000

Fixed selling and administrative expense

$ 864,000

$1,296,000

Direct materials cost per unit

$ 45

$ 15

The current production rate is the budgeted rate for the entire year. Direct labor employees earn $20 per hour and the company has a “no layoff” policy in effect. What is the amount of the throughput contribution per unit as computed using the theory of constraints?

  1. $90.00
  2. $76.67
  3. $46.67
  4. $26.67

additional information for the month of march 2005 630893

Items 1 through 3 are based on the following information pertaining to Arp Co.’s manufacturing operations:

Inventories

3/1/05

3/31/05

Direct materials

$36,000

$30,000

Work in process

18,000

12,000

Finished goods

54,000

72,000

Additional information for the month of March 2005:

Direct materials purchased

$84,000

Direct manufacturing labor payroll

60,000

Direct manufacturing labor rate per hour

7.50

Factory overhead rate per direct labor hour

10.00

For the month of March 2005, prime cost was

  1. $ 90,000
  2. $120,000
  3. $144,000
  4. $150,000

For the month of March 2005, conversion cost was

  1. $ 90,000
  2. $140,000
  3. $144,000
  4. $170,000

For the month of March 2005, cost of goods manufactured was

  1. $218,000
  2. $224,000
  3. $230,000
  4. $236,000

birk applies overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 80 of direct manufact 630900

Birk Co. uses a job order cost system. The following debits (credit) appeared in Birk’s work in process account for the month of April 2005:

April

Description

Amount

1

Balance

$ 4,000

30

Direct materials

24,000

30

Direct manufacturing labor

16,000

30

Factory overhead

12,800

30

To finished goods

(48,000)

Birk applies overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 80% of direct manufacturing labor costs. Job No. 5, the only job still in process on April 30, 2005, has been charged with direct manufacturing labor of $2,000. What was the amount of direct materials charged to Job No. 5?

  1. $ 3,000
  2. $ 5,200
  3. $ 8,800
  4. $24,000

pick had neither beginning nor ending work in process inventory what was the cost of 630902

Under Pick Co.’s job order costing system manufacturing overhead is applied to work in process using a predetermined annual overhead rate. During January 2005, Pick’s transactions included the following:

Direct materials issued to production

$ 90,000

Indirect materials issued to production

8,000

Manufacturing overhead incurred

125,000

Manufacturing overhead applied

113,000

Direct labor costs

107,000

Pick had neither beginning nor ending work in process inventory. What was the cost of jobs completed in January 2005?

  1. $302,000
  2. $310,000
  3. $322,000
  4. $330,000

in developing a predetermined variable factory overhead application rate for use in 630905

In developing a predetermined variable factory overhead application rate for use in a process costing system, which of the following could be used in the numerator and denominator?

Numerator

Denominator

a.

Actual variable factory overhead

Actual machine hours

b.

Actual variable factory overhead

Estimated machine hours

c.

Estimated variable factory overhead

Actual machine hours

d.

Estimated variable factory overhead

Estimated machine hours

what is the amount of may 2005 support department costs allocated to the school of e 630908

Parat College allocates support department costs to its individual schools using the step method. Information for May 2005 is as follows:

Support departments

Maintenance

Power

Costs incurred

$99,000

$54,000

Service percentages provided to:

Maintenance

10

%

Power

20

%

School of Education

30

%

20

%

School of Technology

50

%

70

%

100

%

100

%

What is the amount of May 2005 support department costs allocated to the School of Education?

  1. $40,500
  2. $42,120
  3. $46,100
  4. $49,125

beginning work in process inventory was 50 complete for direct materials ending work 630909

Kerner Manufacturing uses a process cost system to manufacture laptop computers. The following information summarizes operations relating to laptop computer model #KJK20 during the quarter ending March 31:

Units

Direct Materials

Work in process inventory, January 1

100

$70,000

Started during the quarter

500

Completed during the quarter

400

Work-in-process inventory, March 31

200

Costs added during the quarter

$750,000

Beginning work in process inventory was 50% complete for direct materials. Ending work in process inventory was 75% complete for direct materials. What were the equivalent units of production with regard to materials for March?

  1. 450
  2. 500
  3. 550
  4. 600

using the weighted average method what was forming rsquo s conversion cost transferr 630913

The Forming Department is the first of a two-stage production process. Spoilage is identified when the units have completed the Forming process. Costs of spoiled units are assigned to units completed and transferred to the second department in the period spoilage is identified. The following information concerns Forming’s conversion costs in May 2005:

Units

Conversion costs

Beginning work in process (50% complete)

2,000

$10,000

Units started during May

8,000

75,500

Spoilage—normal

500

Units completed and transferred

7,000

Ending work in process (80% complete)

2,500

Using the weighted-average method, what was Forming’s conversion cost transferred to the second production department?

  1. $59,850
  2. $64,125
  3. $67,500
  4. $71,250

monthly conversion costs are allocated between ending work in process and units comp 630916

A process costing system was used for a department that began operations in January 2005. Approximately the same number of physical units, at the same degree of completion, were in work in process at the end of both January and February. Monthly conversion costs are allocated between ending work in process and units completed. Compared to the FIFO method, would the weighted-average method use the same or a greater number of equivalent units to calculate the monthly allocations?

Equivalent units for weighted-average compared to FIFO

January

February

a.

Same

Same

b.

Greater number

Greater number

c.

Greater number

Same

d.

Same

Greater number

the assembly plant management wants to estimate the magnitude of the total manufactu 630921

An assembly plant accumulates its variable and fixed manufacturing overhead costs in a single cost pool which are then applied to work in process using a single application base. The assembly plant management wants to estimate the magnitude of the total manufacturing overhead costs for different volume levels of the application activity base using a flexible budget formula. If there is an increase in the application activity base that is within the relevant range of activity for the assembly plant, which one of the following relationships regarding variable and fixed costs is correct?

  1. The variable cost per unit is constant, and the total fixed costs decrease.
  2. The variable cost per unit is constant, and the total fixed costs increase.
  3. The variable cost per unit and the total fixed costs remain constant.
  4. The variable cost per unit increases, and the total fixed costs remain constant.

the result was an increase from 8 to 32 per unit per year what were the effects of t 630922

In Belk Co.’s just-in-time production system, costs per setup were reduced from $28 to $2. In the process of reducing inventory levels, Belk found that there were fixed facility and administrative costs that previously had not been included in the carrying cost calculation. The result was an increase from $8 to $32 per unit per year. What were the effects of these changes on Belk’s economic lot size and relevant costs?

Lot size

Relevant costs

a.

Decrease

Increase

b.

Increase

Decrease

c.

Increase

Increase

d.

Decrease

Decrease

pole co is investing in a machine with a three year life the machine is expected to 629758

Pole Co. is investing in a machine with a three-year life. The machine is expected to reduce annual cash operating costs by $30,000 in each of the first two years and by $20,000 in year three. Present values of an annuity of $1 at 14% are

Period 1

0.88

2

1.65

3

2.32

Using a 14% cost of capital, what is the present value of these future savings?

  1. $59,600
  2. $60,800
  3. $62,900
  4. $69,500

which of the following statements is true about the use of net present value npv and 629764

An organization is using capital budgeting techniques to compare two independent projects. It could accept one, both, or neither of the projects. Which of the following statements is true about the use of net present value (NPV) and internal rate of return (IRR) methods for evaluating these two projects?

  1. NPV and IRR criteria will always lead to the same accept or reject decision for two independent projects.
  2. If the first project’s IRR is higher than the organization’s cost or capital, the first project will be accepted but the second project will not.
  3. If the NPV criterion leads to accepting or rejecting the first project, one cannot predict whether the IRR criterion will lead to accepting or rejecting the first project.
  4. If the NPV criterion leads to accepting the first project, the IRR criterion will never lead to accepting the first project.

a firm with an 18 cost of capital is considering the following projects on january 1 629765

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

A firm, with an 18% cost of capital, is considering the following projects (on January 1, 2006):

Jan. 1, 2006, Cash outflow (000’s omitted)

Dec. 31, 2010, Cash inflow (000’s omitted)

Project internal rate of return

Project A

$3,500

$7,400

15%

Project B

4,000

9,950

?

Present Value of $1 Due at End of “N” Periods

N

12%

14%

15%

16%

18%

20%

22%

4

.6355

.5921

.5718

.5523

.5158

.4823

.4230

5

.5674

.5194

.4972

.4761

.4371

.4019

.3411

6

.5066

.4556

.4323

.4104

.3704

.3349

.2751

Using the net present value method, Project A’s net present value is

  1. $ 316,920
  2. $0
  3. $(265,460)
  4. $(316,920)

Project B’s internal rate of return is closest to

  1. 15%
  2. 18%
  3. 20%
  4. 22%

assuming adequate funds are available which of the following project options would y 629770

Bennet Inc. uses the net present value method to evaluate capital projects. Bennet’s required rate of return is 10%. Bennet is considering two mutually exclusive projects for its manufacturing business. Both projects require an initial outlay of $120,000 and are expected to have a useful life of four years. The projected after-tax cash flows associated with these projects are as follows:

Year

Project X

Project Y

1

$40,000

$10,000

2

40,000

20,000

3

40,000

60,000

4

40,000

80,000

Total

$160,000

$170,000

Assuming adequate funds are available, which of the following project options would you recommend that Bennet’s management undertake?

  1. Project X only.
  2. Project Y only.
  3. Projects X and Y.
  4. Neither project.

capital invest inc uses a 12 hurdle rate for all capital expenditures and has done t 629771

Items 1 thru 3 are based on the following information:

Capital Invest Inc. uses a 12% hurdle rate for all capital expenditures and has done the following analysis for four projects for the upcoming year.

Project 1

Project 2

Project 3

Project 4

Initial capital outlay

$200,000

$298,000

$248,000

$272,000

Annual net cash inflows

Year 1

$ 65,000

$100,000

$80,000

$ 95,000

Year 2

70,000

135,000

95,000

125,000

Year 3

80,000

90,000

90,000

90,000

Year 4

40,000

65,000

80,000

60,000

Net present value

(3,798)

4,276

14,064

14,662

Profitability index

98%

101%

106%

105%

Internal rate of return

11%

13%

14%

15%

Which project(s) should Capital Invest Inc. undertake during the upcoming year assuming it has no budget restrictions?

  1. All of the projects.
  2. Projects 1, 2, and 3.
  3. Projects 2, 3, and 4.
  4. Projects 1, 3, and 4.

Which project(s) should Capital Invest Inc. undertake during the upcoming year if it has only $600,000 of funds available?

  1. Projects 1 and 3.
  2. Projects 2, 3, and 4.
  3. Projects 2 and 3.
  4. Projects 3 and 4.

Which project(s) should Capital Invest Inc. undertake during the upcoming year if it has only $300,000 of capital funds available?

  1. Project 1.
  2. Projects 2, 3, and 4.
  3. Projects 3 and 4.
  4. Project 3.

assume that straper industries is considering investing in a project with the follow 629775

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

Assume that Straper Industries is considering investing in a project with the following characteristics:

Initial investment

$500,000

Additional investment in working capital

10,000

Cash flows before income taxes for years 1 through 5

140,000

Yearly tax depreciation

90,000

Terminal value of investment

50,000

Cost of capital

10%

Present value of $1 received after 5 years discounted at 10%

.621

Present value of an ordinary annuity of $1 for 5 years at 10%

3.791

Marginal tax rate

30%

Investment life

5 years

Assume that all cash flows come at the end of the year.

What is the amount of the after-tax cash flows in year 2?

  1. $140,000
  2. $125,000
  3. $ 98,000
  4. $ 70,000

What is the net present value of the investment?

  1. $175,000
  2. $ 58,000
  3. $ 1,135
  4. $ (12,340)

assume that reston corp is considering investing in a project to evaluate the projec 629779

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information: Assume that Reston Corp. is considering investing in a project. To evaluate the project, management has developed the following cash flow projections and related probabilities.

Present value of future cash flows

Probability of occurrence

$200,000

.4

$500,000

.3

$800,000

.3

What is the expected return for the project?

  1. $750,000
  2. $500,000
  3. $470,000
  4. $400,000

Assume that the standard deviation of the returns for the project is $150,000. What is the coefficient of variation for the project?

  1. .2345
  2. .3191
  3. .4256
  4. 1.10

what is the equilibrium to the quantity subgame when k 8 explain why the first mover 630438

Let the inverse demand curve be D(Q) = 56 − 2Q, Q = q1 + q2. Costs for each firm are a constant variable cost of 2, a unit capacity charge of 18, and setup costs of f .

(a) Graph the firstmover’s marginal cost function, given that capacity (k) is equal to 4. Derive the first mover’s marginal revenue function. On the same graph draw the first mover’s marginal revenue function for q2 equal to 6, 15, and 23.

(b) Derive the first mover’s best-response function when its marginal cost is 2 and 20. Graph these best-response functions; then for k = 8 show the first mover’s best-response function. Derive and graph the second mover’s best-response function.

(c) What is the equilibrium to the quantity subgame when k = 8? Explain why the first mover will not install a capacity less than 6 or greater than 12.

(d) For fixed costs of 75, 50, 32, and 15, find the subgame perfect equilibrium. Explain intuitively your results!

(e) For all values of f except 75, what would the subgame perfect equilibrium be if the first mover was capable of selling his capacity after the second mover decides to enter/stay out?

let the inverse demand curve be given by p 60 minus 4q q q1 q2 costs for each firm a 630441

Let the inverse demand curve be given by P = 60 − 4Q, Q = q1 + q2. Costs for each firm are a constant variable cost of 6, a unit capacity charge of 6, and setup costs of f . The incumbent and the entrant play the game of Dixit.

(a) What is the incumbent’s marginal cost function for a given capacity? Derive the incumbent’s marginal revenue function.

(b) For k1 = 5, what is the incumbent’s best-response function? Why? Derive the entrant’s best-response function.

(c) What are the Nash equilibrium quantities in the quantity subgame when k1 = 5? Characterize the equilibrium to the quantity subgame for any k1.

(d) For fixed costs of 25 and 64 find the subgame perfect equilibrium to the game of Dixit.

(e) Why is it that the equilibrium is not the same as if the two firms had just played the simple Cournot game. Explain by showing that one firm would want to deviate from the simple Cournot equilibrium in the quantity subgame. What is the strategic move made by firm 1? Is it important that the costs of capacity be sunk?

(f) Suppose that firm 1 built capacity equal to 7. Its motivation for building this is that 7 is the limit output. Would the entrant be deterred from entry by this limit output? Why?

derive the monopoly output for period a disregarding production in period b 630449

(Requires calculus.) A monopolist faces an inverse demand function P = 10 − Q in each of two periods A and B. Her marginal costs are 5 for period A and 5 − q A for period B. Thus, the monopolist “learns” about production in period A, so that her marginal costs fall in period B. Assume that there is no discounting of second-period income.

(a) Derive the monopoly output for period A, disregarding production in period B.

(b) Now consider the dynamic (two-period) monopoly problem. Derive the monopolist’s profit maximizing quantities in both periods. Does the monopolist’s output in period A stay the  same as in the first part of the question? Explain.

(c) Suppose that in period B the monopolist (incumbent) faces an entrant with unit cost ce = 5.

Write down the first order condition for this two-stage duopoly game. Just by inspection of the first order conditions, can you compare q A 1 in the dynamic monopoly case with the strategic duopoly case? What explains the difference? What kind of equilibrium in terms of top dogs, etc. is this?

consider the following learning by doing two stage model of strategic choice firm 1 630452

Consider the following learning-by-doing two-stage model of strategic choice. Firm 1 is an incumbent in the first period and behaves as a monopolist. In the second period firm 2 enters the market. Firm 1 has a first-period cost function of  1(q11) = 4 q11 (where qi j denotes the output of firm i in period j ), while it has a second-period cost function given by c1(q12) = (4 − 0.5q11)q12.

Firm 2’s second-period cost function is c2(q22) = 4q22. Note that industry demand in period i is given by Pi = 10 − Qi , where second-period total output is Q2 = q12 + q22.

(a) Find firm 1’s optimal, monopolist level of output in the first period (qM 11 ), without taking into account any second-period information. Also calculate its period 1 profits.

(b) Assuming that firm 1 chose q11 = qM 11 in period 1, solve for the Cournot quantity competition outputs of both firms in the second stage. Calculate firm 1’s total undiscounted profits over the two periods.

(c) Show that firm 1 can increase its total profits by altering its first-period level of output qM 11 , from the level derived in (a). [Hint: consider small changes.]

(d) Explain under the taxonomy of accommodation strategies why this is possible.

projects extending beyond five years must earn a higher specified rate of return whi 630842

Polo Co. requires higher rates of return for projects with a life span greater than five years. Projects extending beyond five years must earn a higher specified rate of return. Which of the following capital budgeting techniques can readily accommodate this requirement?

Internal rate of return

Net present value

a.

Yes

No

b.

No

Yes

c.

No

No

d.

Yes

Yes

dough distributors has decided to increase its daily muffin purchases by 100 boxes a 630844

Dough Distributors has decided to increase its daily muffin purchases by 100 boxes. A box of muffins costs $2 and sells for $3 through regular stores. Any boxes not sold through regular stores are sold through Dough’s thrift store for $1. Dough assigns the following probabilities to selling additional boxes:

Additional sales

Probability

60

.6

100

.4

What is the expected value of Dough’s decision to buy 100 additional boxes of muffins?

  1. $28
  2. $40
  3. $52
  4. $68

the following is selected data for the consumer products division of arron corporati 630861

Items 1 through 5 are based on the following information:

The following is selected data for the Consumer Products division of Arron Corporations for 200X:

Sales

$50,000,000

Average invested capital (assets)

20,000,000

Net income

2,000,000

Cost of capital

8%

What is the return on sales (ROS) for the division?

  1. 8%
  2. 4%
  3. 10%
  4. 20%

What is the asset turnover ratio for the division?

  1. .25
  2. 10
  3. 2.5
  4. 8

What is the return on investment (ROI) for the division?

  1. 10%
  2. 8%
  3. 4%
  4. 2%

What is the amount of residual income (RI) for the division?

  1. $2,000,000
  2. $1,600,000
  3. $1,000,000
  4. $ 400,000

What is the amount of interest rate spread for the division?

  1. 8%
  2. 10%
  3. 2%
  4. 20%

what is the return on investment at cara corp 630862

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

The following is available for Cara Corp. for 2003:

Sales

$2,000,000

Average invested capital

500,000

Net income

300,000

Required rate of return

18

%

What is the return on investment at Cara Corp.?

  1. 60%
  2. 33%
  3. 18%
  4. 15%

What is the residual income for Cara Corp.?

  1. $0
  2. $200,000
  3. $210,000
  4. $246,000

what is the amount of economic value added eva for the division 630873

The following information is available for the wholesale products division of Watco:

Net operating profit before interest and taxes

$30,000,000

Depreciation expense

10,000,000

Change in net working capital

5,000,000

Capital expenditures

4,000,000

Invested capital (total assets – current liabilities)

50,000,000

Weighted average cost of capital

10%

Tax rate

40%

What is the amount of economic value added (EVA) for the division?

  1. $30,000,000
  2. $13,000,000
  3. $25,000,000
  4. $ 5,000,000

assuming the organization estimates its average daily operating disbursements to be 629615

An organization has an opportunity to establish a zero balance account system using four different regional banks. The total amount of the maintenance and transfer fees is estimated to be $6,000 per annum. The organization believes that it will increase the float on its operating disbursements by an average of four days, and its cost of short-term funds is 4.5%. Assuming the organization estimates its average daily operating disbursements to be $40,000 what decision should the organization make regarding this opportunity?

  1. Do not establish the zero balance account system because it results in estimated additional net costs of $6,000.
  2. Do not establish the zero balance account system because it results in estimated additional net costs of $1,200.
  3. Establish the zero balance account system because it results in estimated net savings of $1,200.
  4. Establish the zero balance account system because it results in estimated net savings of $7,200.

the following information pertains to material x that is used by sage co 629633

The following information pertains to material X that is used by Sage Co.:

Annual usage in units

20,000

Working days per year

250

Safety stock in units

800

Normal lead time in working days

30

Units of material X will be required evenly throughout the year. The order point is

  1. 800
  2. 1,600
  3. 2,400
  4. 3,200

ethan inc has seasonal demand for its products and management is considering whether 629637

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

Ethan, Inc. has seasonal demand for its products and management is considering whether level production or seasonal production should be implemented. The firms’ short-term interest cost is 8%, and management has developed the following information to make the decision:

Alternative 1 Level production

Alternative 2 Seasonal production

Average inventory

$2,000,000

$1,500,000

Production costs

$6,000,000

$6,050,000

Which alternative should be accepted and how much is saved over the other alternative?

  1. Alternative 1 with $500,000 in savings.
  2. Alternative 2 with $50,000 in savings.
  3. Alternative 2 with $10,000 in savings.
  4. Alternative 1 with $10,000 in savings.

At what rate of short-term interest rate would the two alternatives have the same cost?

  1. 6%
  2. 9%
  3. 10%
  4. 12%

effective september 1 a company initiates seasonal dating as a component of its cred 629641

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

Effective September 1, a company initiates seasonal dating as a component of its credit policy, allowing wholesale customers to make purchases early but not requiring payment until the retail selling season begins. Sales occur as follows:

Date of sale

Quantity sold

September 1

300 units

October 1

100 units

November 1

100 units

December 1

150 units

January 1

50 units

  • Each unit has a selling price of $10, regardless of the date of sale.
  • The terms of sale are 2/10 net 30, January 1 dating.
  • All sales are on credit.
  • All customers take the discount and abide by the terms of the discount policy.
  • All customers take advantage of the new seasonal dating policy.
  • The peak selling season for all customers is mid-November to late December.

For the selling firm, which of the following is not an expected advantage to initiating seasonal dating?

  1. Reduced storage costs.
  2. Reduced credit costs.
  3. Attractive credit terms for customers.
  4. Reduced uncertainty about sales volume.

For sales after the initiation of the seasonal dating policy on September 1, total collections on or before January 11 will be

  1. $0
  2. $6,370
  3. $6,860
  4. $7,000

the sales manager at ryan company feels confident that if the credit policy at ryan 629644

The sales manager at Ryan Company feels confident that if the credit policy at Ryan’s were changed, sales would increase ancd consequently, the company would utilize excess capacity. The two credit proposals being considered are as follows:

Proposal A

Proposal B

Increase in sales

$500,000

$600,000

Contribution margin

20%

20%

Bad debt percentage

5%

5%

Increase in operating profits

$ 75,000

$ 90,000

Desired return on sales

15%

15%

Currently, payment terms are net 30. The proposed payment terms for Proposal A and Proposal B are net 45 and net 90, respectively. An analysis to compare these two proposals for the change in credit policy would include all of the following factors except the

  1. Cost of funds for Ryan.
  2. Current bad debt experience.
  3. Impact on the current customer base of extending terms to only certain customers.
  4. Bank loan covenants on days’ sales outstanding.

assume that williams corp is financed with a heavy reliance on short term debt and s 629649

Assume that Williams Corp is financed with a heavy reliance on short-term debt and short-term rates have increased. How do these facts impact the interest expense, net income, and financial risk for Williams Corp?

Interest expense

Net income

Financial risk

a.

Decreases

Decreases

Decreases

b.

Increases

Decreases

Increase

c.

Decrease

Increases

Increases

d.

Increases

Decreases

Decreases

cyberage outlet a relatively new store is a caf eacute that offers customers the opp 629659

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

CyberAge Outlet, a relatively new store, is a café that offers customers the opportunity to browse the Internet or play computer games at their tables while they drink coffee. The customer pays a fee based on the amount of time spent signed on to the computer. The store also sells books, tee shirts, and computer accessories. CyberAge has been paying all of its bills on the last day of the payment period, thus forfeiting all supplier discounts. Shown below are data on CyberAge’s two major vendors, including average monthly purchases and credit terms.

Vendor

Average monthly purchases

Credit terms

Web Master

$25,000

2/10, net 30

Softidee

50,000

5/10, net 90

Assuming a 360-day year and that CyberAge continues paying on the last day of the credit period, the company’s weighted-average annual interest rate for trade credit (ignoring the effects of compounding) for these two vendors is

  1. 27.0%
  2. 25.2%
  3. 28.0%
  4. 30.2%

Should CyberAge use trade credit and continue paying at the end of the credit period?

  1. Yes, if the cost of alternative short-term financing is less.
  2. Yes, if the firm’s weighted-average cost of capital is equal to its weighted-average cost of trade credit.
  3. No, if the cost of alternative long-term financing is greater.
  4. Yes, if the cost of alternative short-term financing is greater.

dqz telecom is considering a project for the coming year that will cost 50 million d 629678

DQZ Telecom is considering a project for the coming year that will cost $50 million. DQZ plans to use the following combination of debt and equity to finance the investment:

  • Issue $15 million of 20-year bonds at a price of 101, with a coupon rate of 8%, and flotation costs of 2% of par.
  • Use $35 million of funds generated from earnings.

The equity market is expected to earn 12%. US Treasury bonds are currently yielding 5%. The beta coefficient for DQZ is estimated to be .60. DQZ is subject to an effective corporate income tax rate of 40%.

The before-tax cost of DQZ’s planned debt financing, net of flotation costs, in the first year is

  1. 11.80%
  2. 8.08%
  3. 10.00%
  4. 7.92%

watco inc issued 1 000 000 in 8 bonds maturing in ten years and paying interest semi 629682

Items 1 through 3 are based on the following information:

Watco, Inc. issued $1,000,000 in 8% bonds, maturing in ten years and paying interest semiannually. The bonds were issued at face value.

What can you assume about the interest rates at the time the bonds were issued?

  1. The market rate for this bond was about 8%.
  2. The nominal rate of interest was about 8%.
  3. The coupon rate on the bond includes no premium for credit risk.
  4. The risk-free interest rate is about 6%

If the market rate of interest for this type of bond increases to 9%, which of the following is true?

  1. The market value of Watco’s bond will increase.
  2. The market value of Watco’s bond will decrease.
  3. The effect will depend on the change in the LIBOR rate.
  4. The effect cannot be predicted.

Assume that one of Watco’s bonds with $1,000 face is currently selling for $950. What is the current yield on the bond?

  1. 8.00%
  2. 9.00%
  3. 7.56%
  4. 8.42%

what is the degree of financial leverage for rothenberg inc 629686

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

The following information is available for Rothenberg, Inc.:

Balance sheet

Current assets

$

500,000

Property, plant, and equipment

4,000,000

Total assets

$

4,500,000

Current liabilities

$

30,000

Long-term debt

2,500,000

Common stock

200,000

Retained earnings

1,770,000

Total liabilities and

stockholders’ equity

$

4,500,000

Budget income information

100,000 units

105,000 units

Sales

$

3,000,000

$3,150,000

Expenses

(2,800,000)

(2,850,000)

Operating income (EBIT)

$

200,000

$ 300,000

Earnings per share (EPS)

$0.20

$1.20

What is Rothenberg’s degree of operating leverage?

  1. 1/5
  2. 10
  3. 5
  4. 2/3

What is the degree of financial leverage for Rothenberg, Inc.?

  1. 10
  2. 5
  3. 1/6
  4. 1/10

management of russell corporation is considering the following two potential capital 629694

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

Management of Russell Corporation is considering the following two potential capital structures for a newly acquired business.

Alternative 1

Long-term debt, 6% interest

$3,000,000

Common equity

$3,000,000

Cost of common equity, 10%

Marginal tax rate, 15%

Alternative 2

Long-term debt, 7% interest

$5,000,000

Common equity

$1,000,000

Cost of common equity, 12%

Marginal tax rate, 15%

Which of the following statements is not true if management decides to accept Alternative 1?

  1. Alternative 1 is the more conservative capital structure.
  2. Alternative 1 provides the greatest amount of financial leverage.
  3. Net income will be less variable under Alternative 1.
  4. Total interest expense will be less under Alternative 1.

Which of the alternatives has the lowest weighted-average cost of capital and how much is the differential?

  1. Alternative 1 by 1.5%
  2. Alternative 2 by 0.59%
  3. Alternative 1 by 0.167%
  4. The alternatives have equal weighted-average cost of capital.

the long term debt was originally issued at par 1 000 bond and is currently trading 629705

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

Martin Corporation
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
December 31, 2004
(Dollars in millions)

Assets

Current assets

$

75

Plant and equipment

250

Total assets

$

325

Liabilities and shareholders’ equity

Current liabilities

$

46

Long-term debt (12%)

64

Common equity:

Common stock, $1 par

10

Additional paid in capital

100

Retained earnings

105

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$

325

Additional data

  • The long-term debt was originally issued at par ($1,000/bond) and is currently trading at $1,250 per bond.
  • Martin Corporation can now issue debt at 150 basis points over US Treasury bonds.
  • The current risk-free rate (US Treasury bonds) is 7%.
  • Martin’s common stock is currently selling at $32 per share.
  • The expected market return is currently 15%.
  • The beta value for Martin is 1.25.
  • Martin’s effective corporate income tax rate is 40%

Martin Corporation’s current net cost of debt is

  1. 5.5%
  2. 7.0%
  3. 5.1%
  4. 8.5%

Using the Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM), Martin Corporation’s current cost of common equity is

  1. 8.75%
  2. 10.00%
  3. 15.00%
  4. 17.00%

dqz telecom is considering a project for the coming year that will cost 50 million d 629706

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following information:

DQZ Telecom is considering a project for the coming year that will cost $50 million. DQZ plans to use the following combination of debt and equity to finance the investment.

  • Issue $15 million of 20-year bonds at a price of 101, with a coupon rate of 8%, and flotation costs of 2% of par.
  • Use $35 million of funds generated from earnings.

The equity market is expected to earn 12%. US Treasury bonds are currently yielding 5%. The beta coefficient for DQZ is estimated to be .60. DQZ is subject to an effective corporate income tax rate of 40%.

Assume that the after-tax costs of debt is 7% and the cost of equity is 12%. Determine the weighted-average cost of capital.

  1. 10.50%
  2. 8.50%
  3. 9.50%
  4. 6.30%

The Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) computes the expected return on a security by adding the risk-free rate of return to the incremental yield of the expected market return that is adjusted by the company’s beta. Compute DQZ’s expected rate of return.

  1. 9.20%
  2. 12.20%
  3. 7.20%
  4. 12.00%

a new company requires 1 million of financing and is considering two arrangements as 629710

Items 1 through 2 are based on the following information:

A new company requires $1 million of financing and is considering two arrangements as shown in the table below.

Arrangement

Amount of equity raised

Amount of debt financing

Before-tax cost of debt

#1

$700,000

$300,000

8% per annum

#2

$300,000

$700,000

10% per annum

In the first year of operations, the company is expected to have sales revenues of $500,000, cost of sales of $200,000, and general and administrative expenses of $100,000. The tax rate is 30%, and there are no other items on the income statement. All earnings are paid out as dividends at year-end.

If the cost of equity were 12%, then the weighted-average cost of capital under Arrangement #1, to the nearest full percentage point, would be

  1. 8%
  2. 10%
  3. 11%
  4. 12%

Which of the following statements comparing the two financing arrangements is true?

  1. The company will have a higher expected gross margin under Arrangement #1.
  2. The company will have a higher degree of operating leverage under Arrangement #2.
  3. The company will have higher interest expense under Arrangement #1.
  4. The company will have higher expected tax expense under Arrangement #1.

russell inc is evaluating four independent investment proposals the expected returns 629719

Russell Inc. is evaluating four independent investment proposals. The expected returns and standard deviations for each of these proposals are presented below.

Investment proposal

Expected returns

Standard deviation

I

16%

10%

II

14%

10%

III

20%

11%

IV

22%

15%

Which one of the investment proposals has the least relative level of risk?

  1. Investment I.
  2. Investment II.
  3. Investment III.
  4. Investment IV.

if management decided to sell one of the investments which one should be selected 629720

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following:

Natco has the following investment portfolio.

Expected return

Investment

Beta

Investment A

15%

$100,000

1.2

Investment B

10%

$300,000

-0.5

Investment C

8%

$200,000

1.5

Investment D

8%

$100,000

-1.0

What is the expected return of the portfolio?

  1. 10.25%
  2. 9.86%
  3. 12.5%
  4. 11.35%

If management decided to sell one of the investments, which one should be selected?

  1. Investment A.
  2. Investment B.
  3. Investment C.
  4. Investment D.

a us company currently has domestic operations only it is considering an equal size 629724

A US company currently has domestic operations only. It is considering an equal-size investment in either Canada or Britain. The data on expected rate of return and the risk associated with each of these proposed investments are given below.

Proposed investment

Mean return

Standard deviation

British Investment

22%

10%

Canadian Investment

28%

15%

The mean return on the company’s current, domestic only, business is 20% with a standard deviation of 15%. Using the above data and the correlation coefficients, the company calculated the following portfolio risk and return (based on a ratio of 50% US domestic operations and 50% international operations).

Proposed investment

Mean return

Standard deviation

US and Britain

21%

3%

US and Canada

24%

15%

The company plans to select the optimal combination of countries based on risk and return for the domestic and international investments taken together. Because the company is new to the international business environment, it is relatively risk averse. Based on the above data, which one of the following alternatives provides the best risk-adjusted return to the firm?

  1. Undertake the British investment.
  2. Undertake the Canadian investment.
  3. Do not undertake either investment.
  4. Unable to determine based on data given.

waiters and waitresses at the royal casino rsquo s main dining room in las vegas use 629055

Royal Casino

Waiters and waitresses at the Royal Casino’s main dining room in Las Vegas use handheld, radio-frequency devices to take diners’ orders and relay the orders to the kitchen. The data entry devices weigh just a few ounces and open like a wallet to reveal a keypad and a small screen. The devices are connected by radio signal to the dining room’s computer. As diners place their orders, the device prompts the waiter through the order. For instance, if the customer asks for a sirloin steak, the system asks the waiter to choose a key corresponding to the desired degree of doneness (i.e., rare, medium rare, and so forth).

When the customer has completed ordering, the waiter hits a key to indicate that fact. The system prints or displays the incoming order for cooks in the kitchen. When the dining party has finished its meal, the waiter indicates this fact by pressing the appropriate key on the handheld device. The system communicates, over conventional wiring, with a point-of-sale (POS) computer at the cash register station, which prints out a guest check. At this time, the system also records the sales event data on the host computer.

national australia bank recently implemented data mining tools from the sas institut 629057

National Australia Bank recently implemented data mining tools from the SAS Institute to aid particularly in the area of predictive marketing. The tools are used to extract and analyze data in the bank’s Oracle database. Specific applications currently focus on assessing how competitors’ initiatives are affecting the bank’s bottom line. The data mining tools are used to generate market analysis models from historical data recorded in event-level form. The addition of data mining tools is one more step in a strategic set of initiatives focusing on the development of a comprehensive data warehouse. National Australia Bank considers the data warehousing initiatives to be crucial to maintaining an edge in the increasingly competitive financial services marketplace.

national data corporation health information services ndc his has found a way to lev 629058

National Data Corporation/Health Information Services (NDC/HIS) has found a way to leverage its extensive database of pharmaceutical firm data into a new market of information services through the use of data mining tools. A long-time supplier of information to the pharmaceutical industry, NDC/HIS recently released a new subscription service, Intellect Q&A, that provides in-depth information that  subscribers can mine for key data. One happy client is Lowe McAdams Health Care, a Manhattan through NDC/HIS data and developing detailed financial information on the client that the client’s own internal reporting systems had yet to compile. The client was so impressed by Lowe’s depth of knowledge that they signed the contract. NDC/HIS was also thrilled as it created an excellent example for demonstration in selling access to their data warehouse to other potential clients.

fai insurance group also recently implemented a large data warehouse insurance compa 629059

FAI Insurance group also recently implemented a large data warehouse. Insurance companies are broadly recognized to be heavily reliant on demographic data that support assessment of insurance risk. FAI Insurance decided to use its data warehouse to reassess the relationship between historical risk from insurance policies and the pricing structure used by its underwriters. The data analysis capabilities should allow FAI to better serve its customers by more accurately assessing the insurance risk associated with a customer request. Developers of the data warehouse note that the models that can be built through data mining are much larger than those the company could previously develop. Through  the use of neural networks and linear statistics, the analysts comb the data for trends and relationships. Out of 25 users currently on the research system linked to the data warehouse, 12 researchers work almost full-time on mining the data in the system. The strong relationship between the information technology group and the researchers has resulted in what FAI believes to be the most effective data-mining and data-warehousing approach in the industry. advertising agency.  

midwest insurance co is a major property casualty underwriter based in st louis it u 629067

Background Information

Midwest Insurance Co. is a major property/casualty underwriter based in St. Louis. It uses more than 3,000 independent insurance agents to market its products and collect premiums. In the past, agents typically have remitted the premiums to Midwest at a predetermined time each month by mailing the checks to a lockbox site or to a regional office of the insurance company. This method of cash collections has been slow, and accounting for the agents’ payments has been fraught with problems. Therefore, Midwest sought the help of Nationwide Bank (NB) in developing a more automated collection process. NB responded by developing an ACHbased “Customer-Initiated Payment Service (CIPS)” that allows the independent agents to pay Midwest with ACH debits initiated via a toll-free phone call or over the Internet. The next section describes how the CIPS process works; for simplicity, the description is limited to telephone-initiated payments.

panhandle department stores operates at 30 locations in texas and oklahoma the compa 629068

Panhandle Department Stores operates at 30 locations in Texas and Oklahoma. The company’s headquarters are in Oklahoma City. The company accepts cash, national credit cards (VISA and MasterCard), and its own Panhandle charge card (PCC). Procedures for cash receipts are standard at each location. PCC billing and the treasury function are located at headquarters.

Customers present their purchases at a central checkout location at each store. Point-of-sale registers provide immediate updates to quantities on hand in the inventory master data, compile detailed data on sales, and accumulate “proof figures” used in cashing out the drawer at the end of each shift. Each store’s registers are tied to the central computer system in Oklahoma City.

Throughout the shift, clerks process the several forms of sales. At the end of the shift, the next clerk resets the proof totals. The front manager takes a hard copy of the proof totals for the shift completed and the drawer of the clerk whose shift was completed to the cashier, for “proving.” The cashier reconciles the drawer to the totals, prepares a two-part “cash out report” for each clerk on the shift, and updates the “over and short summary” maintained for each clerk. After the work for each shift is complete, these reports are sent to the front manager for review. Meanwhile, the clerk for the next shift has installed his own cash drawer and has begun processing sales. Store deposits are made whenever the cash-on-hand balance reaches $25,000 and at the end of the day. For each deposit, the system prints out a deposit slip; a designated employee makes the trip to the local bank. The employee brings back a receipted deposit slip. Daily, the cashier prepares the national credit card (NCC) settlement sheets in duplicate for each credit company. One copy of the settlement sheet and the supporting charge sales slips are submitted to the appropriate charge company for payment. The PCC slips, a copy of the NCC settlement sheet, a copy of the cash out report, and the day’s deposit slips are sent to Oklahoma City at 5:00 p.m. by courier mail.

In the cash receipts department at Oklahoma City, a sales report is obtained from the process at the end of each day. That report is reconciled to the cash out report and the deposit slips. The PCC slips are reconciled to that line on the cash out report. The PCC slips are then sent to data processing, where data preparation clerks enter the charges into a batch file on the computer. At 9:00 p.m. the batch is used to update the accounts receivable master data.

the cash receipts department reconciles these receipts to the ncc settlement sheets 629069

Panhandle Department Stores (II)

Before starting this case, review the facts in Case B. Reimbursements from the national credit cards are deposited directly in the company’s main Oklahoma City bank, and the bank notifies Panhandle of these receipts. The cash receipts department reconciles these receipts to the NCC settlement sheets that previously had been submitted to the card companies (the settlement sheets had been filed by date until this time). All receipts from the company’s proprietary cards (PCCs) are received in Oklahoma City. The company uses a turnaround document, so it receives a check and a portion of the monthly charge card statement (on which the customer has filled in the amount remitted). The cash receipts clerk examines the check against the amount written on the document and, in a space reserved, enters the amount received on the document so that it can be computer scanned. Checks and turnaround documents are batched. The documents are sent to data processing. The checks are deposited, and the deposit slip is photocopied. Copies of the batch totals and the deposit slips are filed separately by date. A copy of the deposit slip is sent to the treasurer’s office.

The turnaround documents are then scanned. Each evening at 10:00 p.m., customers’ accounts are updated with scanned data, and a cash receipts listing is produced and sent to cash receipts each morning, where it is checked against and filed with the related batch totals. A copy of the cash receipts listing is sent to the treasurer’s office.

down under airlines dua processes over 400 million tickets a year the process of iss 629075

Background Information

Down Under Airlines (DUA) processes over 400 million tickets a year. The process of issuing the tickets is highly automated; a record of each ticket sold is stored in DUA’s database. But when passengers turn in tickets, gate agents stuff the flight coupons into envelopes and ship them to DUA’s Denver headquarters. Because of discrepancies between the original records housed in the ticket database and actual ticket use as reflected by the flight coupons (see the following NOTE), DUA, like other airlines, has to match every coupon against every ticket in the database in order to accurately account for passenger revenues. With the volume of tickets involved, manual matching is a daunting task. Image processing to the rescue! (Note: For example, passengers might use a ticket from one airline to fly with another, or they might use only the A-B leg of an A-B-C flight, and so forth.)

describe the advantages to the airline of this process compare it to both travel age 629077

Airlines have issued paperless tickets for several years now. Recently, they have begun experimenting with allowing travelers to print their own tickets using special bar coding technology located at commercial customer locations. The bar-code ticket system can be used to communicate with business customers’ accounting systems and other internal databases to speed up the billing process. These tickets would be scanned at the airport in the same way as paper tickets or airport generated boarding cards, when the passenger boards the plane.

a. Describe the advantages to the airline of this process. Compare it to both travel-agent-issued paper tickets and to paperless tickets.

b. Describe the advantages to the customer of this process. c. Review Capsule

another approach to digital image processing is to render the source form of a bill 629079

Another approach to digital image processing is to render the source form of a bill as a digital image and to transmit that image to the customer. The utilities industry is one of many industries attempting to make billing processes all digital. Killen & Associates, Inc., estimates that utility companies would save $1.2 billion annually by going to electronic billing and requiring electronic payment. However, Southern California Edison, the first utility company experimenting with electronic billing, has not seen any such savings to date during its pilot implementation. Electronic payment has not been mandatory for customers, and the savings will not come until consumer interest in electronic billing and payment rises. Still, Southern California Edison continues to support the project with the belief that savings will come in the future.

lifeline medical supplies makes a variety of medical supplies such as test tubes the 629087

Lifeline Medical Supplies

Lifeline Medical Supplies makes a variety of medical supplies such as test tubes, thermometers, and disposable surgical garments. Lifeline employs the following procedures for purchases and accounts payable. The supplies manager orders goods and maintains perpetual inventory records. The records include reorder points for all regularly used items. The supplies manager prepares a requisition on a two-part prenumbered form. After signing the requisition, he files one copy by requisition number and sends the other copy to the purchasing department. The production manager also must approve requisitions for items that cost over $100 and are not covered by a blanket order.

Some supplies that are used in large quantities come under “blanket” purchase orders. Blanket orders are based on agreements between Lifeline and different vendors to buy a minimum amount of supplies over a specified period of time at a guaranteed price. Purchase requisitions against these orders do not require the production manager’s approval, as long as the agreed minimum is not surpassed. The purchasing department keeps the blanket orders filed by item name.

The purchasing department checks a requisition for proper approval and selects a vendor. A five-part prenumbered purchase order is prepared. Copies are sent to the vendor, receiving department, accounts payable, and the supplies manager. The purchasing agent records the current purchase on the blanket order if applicable and files its purchase order and requisition copies by purchase order number in the open order file. The receiving department files its copy in a file by purchase order number. The supplies manager files his copy with its corresponding requisition.

The receiving department counts the goods when they are received, compares the count to the packing slip, and prepares a four-part receiving report. Copies of the receiving report are sent to the supplies manager, the purchasing department, and accounts payable. The receiving department files its copy of the receiving report and the packing slip with its copy of the purchase order. The supplies manager updates the perpetual inventory records when he receives the receiving report and then files the purchase order, purchase requisition, and receiving report by purchase order number. The purchasing department files its copy with the order in the open order file. The purchasing department receives two-part invoices from the vendors. The invoices are compared by a clerk to the purchase order and the receiving report from the open order file. The clerk initials them if they are accurate. The purchasing agent must approve any price or quantity variances that are more than 5 percent over the price or quantity quoted on the purchase order. One copy of the approved invoice is sent to accounts payable. The purchase order, purchase requisition, invoice, and receiving report are then filed in the closed order file by purchase order number. The accounts payable department receives purchase orders and approved invoices from the purchasing department and receiving reports from the receiving department. As each one is received, it is filed in the pending file by vendor name. When all the documents for an order are received, a clerk posts the payable amount to the payable voucher for the particular vendor. A disbursement voucher is then prepared and attached to the order, receiving report, and invoice. This package is then given to the accounts payable manager for review and approval. The manager gives the approved disbursement vouchers to a second clerk. This clerk batches and totals the approved vouchers and prepares a batch summary. The batch summary is sent to the accounting department. A third clerk completes a two-part, prenumbered check/remittance advice form for each disbursement voucher. The check/remittance advices and the disbursement vouchers are sent to the cashier. The cashier totals the checks and compares that total to the total of all the batches. She then signs the checks with the treasurer’s signature using a check-signing machine that she has in her office.

She then places in envelopes the first copies of the check/remittances and sends them to the vendors. The second copy is sent to the accounting department.

1 identify the specific resources of this process for which we want to ensure secur 629089

For the company assigned by your instructor, draw a systems flowchart. If any exception routines are described in the narrative, they should be shown on a separate page (referenced through an offpage connector), so that the exception routines will not clutter the flowcharting of normal activities.

 3 For the company assigned by your instructor, prepare a control matrix for the purchasing and/or the receiving functions only, as appropriate for the case in question. Observe the following specific instructions:

a. Your choice of recommended control plans should come from this chapter plus any other control plans from through that are germane to your company’s process.

b. Annotate the systems flowchart control plans are “present” (codes P-1 . . . P-n) or where they are “missing” (codes M-1 . . . M-n).

c. Because your explanations of the cell entries are as important as the cell entries themselves, pay particular attention to step 5 in “Steps in Preparing a Control Matrix,”.

d. In the appropriate control goal columns of the matrix, (1) identify the specific resources of this process, for which we want to ensure security of resources, and (2) indicate the master data, for which we want to ensure update accuracy (UA) and update completeness (UC).

baby bell telephone co uses a computer assisted ptop process called prp purchasing r 629090

Baby Bell Telephone Co.

Baby Bell Telephone Co. uses a computer-assisted PtoP process called PRP (purchasing, receiving, payables) that includes an EDI function. An abbreviated description of the purchasing portion of PRP follows. (The description covers only the purchase by field technicians of items to be delivered by suppliers directly to the technicians in the field.)

The company’s field technicians continually need to replace items such as small hand tools, wire, and power tools. (Note: Assume that an external entity called “Field Inventory System” triggers the PRP system by identifying a “Field inventory replacement need.”) They do so by using handheld computers to log into the PRP system. Users have login IDs and passwords that allow them access only to information for which they have clearance. Once logged in, a technician enters the requested item’s stock number. PRP presents the user with a display showing the item’s description, size, and so forth. Information on price, brand, or supplier is not provided to most users because it is information they don’t need to know. To complete the order request, the user visually verifies the information shown in the display, keys in the quantity ordered, and presses the “enter” key.

PRP records the order in the purchase order master data (disk). The order is routed through a wide area network to the workstation of an available order entry clerk in the purchasing department. The clerk enters a code that requests PRP to match the item’s stock number with the supplier code in the inventory master data. The system then retrieves the supplier’s standing data (e.g., name, address, whether or not an EDI vendor, and so forth) from the vendor master data and displays it on the workstation screen. The purchasing clerk next enters another code that either transmits the order electronically to the vendor through an EDI VAN or prints a hard copy purchase order document that is mailed to the vendor, in the case of a supplier that does not have EDI capability. In either case, the purchase order master data are updated to show that the PO has been issued. Hard copy purchase orders are put in envelopes and mailed.

a cash disbursements event was updated on the wrong record in the accounts payable m 629091

Listed below are 12 process failures that indicate weaknesses in control.

Process Failures

1. A cash disbursements event was updated on the wrong record in the accounts payable master data because the data entry clerk transposed digits in the vendor identification number.

2. Several scanned invoice documents were lost and did not get recorded.

3. The amount of a cash disbursement event was erroneous, resulting in a negative balance in the accounts payable master data.

4. Supplies were purchased from a vendor found on an auction site. The supplies arrived late, and were of poor quality.

5. A purchasing agent ordered unneeded inventory items from a supplier company of which he is one of the officers.

6. The total shown on a vendor’s invoice was greater than the sum of the invoice details, resulting in an overpayment to the vendor.

7. The vendor invoiced for goods that were never delivered. The invoice was paid in its full amount.

8. The vendor shipped goods that were never ordered. The invoice for those goods was paid.

9. The unit prices the vendor charged were in excess of those that had been negotiated. The invoice rendered by the vendor was paid.

10. Goods were stolen by storeroom personnel. When the shortage was discovered, the storeroom personnel claimed that the goods had never been delivered to them from the receiving department.

11. A vendor submitted an invoice in duplicate. The invoice got paid twice.

12. Because of several miscellaneous errors occurring over a number of years, the total of the outstanding vendor payable balances shows a large discrepancy from the balance reflected general ledger.

REQUIRED: List the numbers 1 through 12 on your solution sheet. For each of the 12 process failures described above, provide a twoto three-sentence description of the control plan that you believe would best address that deficiency. Obviously, there could be more than one plan for a particular situation. However, select only one plan for each of the 12 process failures and include in your description a justification of why you believe it is best. When in doubt, opt for the plan that is preventive in nature, as opposed to plans that are detective or corrective.

kaiser permanente of southern california is a pioneer in trying to cut medical costs 629092

Uses of Electronic Data Interchange for the PtoP Process

Kaiser Permanente of Southern California is a pioneer in trying to cut medical costs. One more way to do that is through the accounts payable and cash disbursements process. The Southern California region alone processes more than 1 million invoices and 800,000 claims with over 500,000 payments. A small cut in the cost of processing each transaction adds up quickly. The solution was to move to EDI for its patient care providers—both inside and outside the managed care program. Kaiser implemented the ANSI X12 837 healthcare claims standard specifically designed for the detailed health care information required for claims processing. In cases where the provider only accepts a check, check processing has been outsourced at a savings of 35%–40%. For vendors who accept electronic funds transfers (EFT), the savings are even greater.

a trend in the b2b electronic marketplaces environment has been a move toward consol 629095

Uses of B2B Marketplaces for the PtoP Process

A trend in the B2B electronic marketplaces environment has been a move toward consolidation of the numerous marketplaces that popped up quickly in the early 2000s. One example is the merger between MyAircraft and AirNewco—two early entrants into the electronic marketplaces for supplying aviation-related supplies and materials. MyAircraft was a joint venture by supplier organizations such as United Technologies Corp., Honeywell International, Inc. (which at the time of this writing is in the process of merging with General Electric), and BF Goodrich Co. On the other hand, AirNewco was a joint venture by buyer organizations, including eight major international airlines and the United Parcel Service of America, Inc. The result of the merger is a single major exchange that represents the interests of both suppliers and buyers.

faced with declining game attendance and lower television ratings the national baske 629104

Business Intelligence

Faced with declining game attendance and lower television ratings, the National Basketball Association (NBA) has reacted swiftly in applying business intelligence tools to facilitate customer relationship management. The NBA currently assembles information about fans who purchase tickets from a number of sources around the world, including Ticketmaster, the Home Shopping Network, All-Star nominating ballots, New York’s NBA Store, databases of individual teams, and the NBA.com Web site. Each NBA team will soon be able to access the combined data in a data warehouse and use business intelligence applications to analyze the data. Teams will be able to tell if a customer prefers to purchase tickets when a particular opposing team is in town or at specific times of the year. The data analysis will also be used to market sports merchandise directly to select customers through a customer relationship management capability.

troy toys is a retailer operating in several cities the individual store managers de 629609

Troy Toys is a retailer operating in several cities. The individual store managers deposit daily collections at a local bank in a noninterest-bearing checking account. Twice per week, the local bank issues a depository transfer check (DTC) to the central bank at headquarters. The controller of the company is considering using a wire transfer instead. The additional cost of each transfer would be $25; collections would be accelerated by two days; and the annual interest rate paid by the central bank is 7.2% (0.02% per day). At what amount of dollars transferred would it be economically feasible to use a wire transfer instead of the DTC? Assume a 360-day year.

  1. It would never be economically feasible.
  2. $125,000 or above.
  3. Any amount greater than $173.
  4. Any amount greater than $62,500.

the firm estimates that the float will be reduced by two days if the concentration b 629613

A firm is evaluating whether to establish a concentration banking system. The bank will charge $5,000 per year for maintenance and transfer fees. The firm estimates that the float will be reduced by two days if the concentration banking is put into place. Assuming that average daily receipts are $115,000 and short-term interest rates are 4%, what decision should the firm make regarding the concentration banking system?

  1. Do not establish the concentration banking system because the net cost is $5,000.
  2. Do not establish the concentration banking system because the net cost is $21,000.
  3. Establish the concentration banking system because the net benefit is $115,000.
  4. Establish the concentration banking system because the net benefit is $4,200.

the firm estimates that the float will be reduced by three days if the lockbox syste 629614

A firm is evaluating whether to establish a lockbox system. The bank will charge $30,000 per year for the lockbox and the firm will save approximately $8,000 in internal processing costs. The firm estimates that the float will be reduced by three days if the lockbox system is put into place. Assuming that average daily cash receipts are $350,000 and short-term interest rates are 4%, what decision should the firm make regarding the lockbox system?

  1. Do not establish the lockbox system because the net cost is $30,000.
  2. Do not establish the lockbox system because the net cost is $22,000.
  3. Establish the lockbox system because the net benefit is $12,000.
  4. Establish the lockbox system because the net benefit is $20,000.

determine the nominal annual rate assuming semiannual compounding you may find the f 627670

A business receives $235,648.98 today from its bank and signs a one-year note that has a maturity value of $250,000.00. Determine the effective annual interest rate on this loan, and determine the nominal annual rate assuming semiannual compounding. You may find the following form helpful.

Half-Year

Half-Year Start of Period

Interest at ?%

Loan Balance at End of Period

First

$235,648.98

 

 

Second

 

 

$250,000.00

instead assume that you earn 4 5 percent annual interest during the first ten years 627672

The retirement savings account example in which you invest $10,000 today and earn 5 percent annual interest (compounded annually) for 20 years. That example assumes that the 5 percent annual interest remains the same over all years. Instead, assume that you earn 4.5 percent annual interest during the first ten years and 5.5 percent annual interest during the last ten years. Are you better off in this situation?

Suppose you just received your $25,000 year-end bonus. Instead of buying a new car, you decide to put the entire $25,000 in a qualified tax-deferred retirement investment account. You’re 55 years old and plan to retire when you’re 65 years old. You’ve done some research and have come up with two options for where to put your money: One is a safe, conservative investment vehicle that should earn an annual 4.5 percent interest rate (compounded annually), and the other is a more risky investment that has a good chance of being worth $45,000 ten years later, but there’s some chance that it could be worth less than this amount. Compare your two options.

what is the annual payment on the loan under these terms 627674

Your business borrows $100,000 from a bank. You and the bank negotiate an installment loan in which you will pay off the loan over four years. The effective annual interest rate is 6 percent. The bank wants your business to amortize one-fourth of the principal amount each year. Amortize means to pay down the principal value of the loan. At the end of the first year, for instance, your business has to pay $25,000 on the principal balance of the loan plus interest for that year, and so on for the following three years. You sign the note to the bank and receive $100,000, which is deposited in your business”s checking account. Using the basic premise of the preceding question, suppose the bank wants equal payments at the end of each year. (In the preceding answer, the total payment varies year to year.) What is the annual payment on the loan under these terms?

determine the annual payments required under the terms of this loan 627675

Suppose a business borrows $1,000,000 from a bank. The annual interest rate is 7.5 percent and the loan is for four years. The bank wants the business to make payments at the end of each year such that the principal of the loan is amortized in four equal amounts. Determine the annual payments required under the terms of this loan. You may find the following form helpful:

Year

Loan Balance at

Start of Year

Interest at

7.5%

Principal

Payment

Total Payment

to Bank

Loan Balance at

End of Year

1

$100,000.00

$75,000.00

$250,000.00

$325,000.00

$750,000.00

2

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

4

 

 

 

 

 

determine the amount of annual payment required under the terms of the loan 627676

Suppose a business borrows $1,000,000 from a bank. The annual interest rate is 7.5 percent and the loan is for four years. The bank wants the business to make equal payments at the end of each year such that the principal of the loan is completely amortized (paid off) by the end of the fourth year. Determine the amount of annual payment required under the terms of the loan. You may find the following form helpful:

Year

Loan Balance at

Start of Year

Interest at

7.5%

Principal

Payment

Total Payment

to Bank

Loan Balance at

End of Year

1

$100,000.00

$75,000.00

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

 

4

 

 

 

 

$0.00

determine the future value of your retirement account 20 years from now 627677

To be conservative, assume that your retirement account will earn 4.8 percent income per year, compounded monthly (because you make monthly contributions). Although you may increase your monthly contributions in the future if your salary increases, at the present time, you can”t forecast an increase. So you assume that $400 will be contributed into your retirement account at the end of each month. Determine the balance in your retirement account at the end of 20 years. Each month, you put $250 into your retirement account, and your employer matches $150, so $400 is invested each month. Looking ahead, you wonder how much your retirement account will be worth when you retire in 20 years. You assume that your annual rate of income will be 5.4 percent over the next 20 years. Determine the future value of your retirement account 20 years from now.

determine the annual roi for the investment and prove your answer 627680

You invested $1,000,000 today and receive $50,000 at the end of each year for four years. At the end of the fourth year, you liquidate the investment for $1,000,000. Determine the annual ROI for the investment, and prove your answer. You may find the following form helpful:

Cash Flow at End of Year

Year

Investment Balance

at Start of Year

Total Amount

Earnings at

?%

Capital

Recovery

Investment Balance

at End of Year

1

$1,000,000

$50,000

 

 

 

2

 

$50,000

 

 

 

3

 

$50,000

 

 

 

4

 

$1,050,000

 

 

$0

you invest 100 000 today you receive 29 656 22 at the end of each year for four year 627683

You invest $100,000 today. You receive $29,656.22 at the end of each year for four years. Determine the annual ROI on the investment, and prove your answer. You may find the following form helpful:

Cash Flow at End of Year

Year

Investment Balance

at Start of Year

Total Amount

Earnings at

?%

Capital

Recovery

Investment Balance

at End of Year

1

$100,000

$29,656

 

 

 

2

 

$29,656

 

 

 

3

 

$29,656

 

 

 

4

 

$29,656

 

 

$0

determine the annual amounts of return for each year you need to meet your objective 627684

You invest $1,000,000 today. You would like to earn 6.5 percent ROI each year for four years and recover $250,000 capital each year. Determine the annual amounts of return for each year you need to meet your objectives. You may find the following form helpful:

Cash Flow at End of Year

Year

Investment Balance

at Start of Year

Total Amount

Earnings at

?%

Capital

Recovery

Investment Balance

at End of Year

1

$100,000

 

 

$250,000

 

2

 

 

 

$250,000

 

3

 

 

 

$250,000

 

4

 

 

 

$250,000

$0

determine the annual roi for this investment 627686

You invest $100,000 today. The year-end cash flows from the investment are as follows: year 1 = $0; year 2 = $0; year 3 = $0; and year 4 = $128,646.64. Determine the annual ROI for this investment. You may find the following form helpful:

Cash Flow at End of Year

Year

Investment Balance

at Start of Year

Total Amount

Earnings at

?%

Capital

Recovery

Investment Balance

at End of Year

1

$100,000

$0

 

 

 

2

 

$0

 

 

 

3

 

$0

 

 

 

4

 

$128,647

 

 

$0

determine the annual roi for this investment does this answer make sense 627687

You invest $100,000 today. The year-end cash flows from the investment are as follows: year 1 = $0; year 2 = $0; year 3 = $0; and year 4 = $90,368.79. Determine the annual ROI for this investment. Does this answer make sense? You may find the following form helpful:

Cash Flow at End of Year

Year

Investment Balance

at Start of Year

Total Amount

Earnings at

?%

Capital

Recovery

Investment Balance

at End of Year

1

$100,000

$0

 

 

 

2

 

$0

 

 

 

3

 

$0

 

 

 

4

 

$90,369

 

 

$0

determine the annual roi on this investment is there anything unusual about this inv 627690

You invest $100,000 today. The year-end cash flows from the investment are as follows: year 1 = $25,000; year 2 = $48,000; year 3 = $75,000; and year 4 = negative $32,431. Determine the annual ROI on this investment. Is there anything unusual about this investment? You may find the following form helpful:

Cash Flow at End of Year

Year

Investment Balance

at Start of Year

Total Amount

Earnings at

?%

Capital

Recovery

Investment Balance

at End of Year

1

$100,000.00

$25,000

 

 

 

2

 

$48,000

 

 

 

3

 

$75,000

 

 

 

4

 

($32,431)

 

 

$0

how would most mutual funds advertise roi performance for the four years in this exa 627691

You invest $100,000 today in a mutual fund. All dividends are reinvested in additional shares.

The performance of your investment over four years is as follows:

Year

Investment Value

at Start of Year

Total Return

for Year

Investment Value

at End of Year

ROI for Year

1

$100,000.00

$15,000.00

$115,000.00

15.0%

2

$115,000.00

($22,000.00)

$93,000.00

–19.1%

3

$93,000.00

$43,500.00

$136,500.00

46.8%

4

$136,500.00

($450.00)

$136,050.00

–0.3%

How would most mutual funds advertise ROI performance for the four years in this example?

you invest 100 000 today the annual roi on the investment is year 1 12 percent year 627693

You invest $100,000 today. The annual ROI on the investment is: year 1 = 12 percent; year 2 = negative 24.6 percent; year 3 = 33.7 percent; and year 4 = 29.6 percent. Determine the average annual ROI on the investment. You may find the following two forms helpful:

Year

Investment Value

at Start of Year

Earnings

for Year

ROI for Year

Investment Balance

at End of Year

1

$100,000.00

 

12.00%

 

2

 

 

–24.60%

 

3

 

 

33.70%

 

4

 

 

29.60%

 

 

Year

Investment Value

at Start of Year

Return at

? %

Investment Value

at End of Year

ROI for Year

1

$100,000.00

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

 

 

4

 

 

 

 

explain the difference between the category of process control plans covered in this 629039

1 Explain the difference between the category of process control plans covered in this chapter and the process controls to be covered in .

2 a. Describe the relationship between the control matrix and the control framework.

b. What are the four basic elements included in a control matrix?

c. Describe the relationship between the control matrix and the systems flowchart. What does it mean to “annotate” the systems flowchart?

d. What are the five steps involved in preparing a control matrix?

3. Explain how a manager would use the control matrix in performing step 4 of the control framework.

a. How could the matrix be used to recommend changes in the system in order to improve control of that system?

b. How would the matrix be useful in evaluating control effectiveness, control efficiency, and control redundancy? Include in your answer a definition of these three terms.

when we record our exams into the spreadsheet used for our gradebook we employ the f 629043

1 Describe a situation in your daily activities, working or not, where you have experienced or employed controls described in this.

2 When we record our exams into the spreadsheet used for our gradebook, we employ the following procedures:

a. For each exam, manually add up the grade for each exam and record on the front page.

b. Manually calculate the average grade for all of the exams.

c. Input the score for each part of each exam into the spreadsheet.

d. Compare the exam total on the front page of the exam to the total prepared by the computer.

e. After all the exams have been entered, compare the average grade calculated by the computer with that calculated manually. Describe how this process employs controls introduced in this.

the secure sockets layer ssl protocol was developed by netscape communications compa 629045

The secure sockets layer (SSL) protocol was developed by Netscape Communications Company (now owned by America Online) and uses public key cryptography to secure communications on the Internet. With SSL, a secure session is established during which messages transmitted between two parties are protected via encryption. For example, before a consumer transmits a credit card number to a merchant, the merchant’s server establishes a secure session. The merchant decrypts the message, extracts the credit card number, and submits a charge to the consumer’s credit card company (i.e., credit card issuing bank) to clear the transaction using traditional means. SSL protects the consumer from interception and unauthorized use of the purchase and credit card information while it is on the Internet (i.e., from the consumer’s Web browser to the merchant’s Web server). Normally, the merchant cannot authenticate the transmission to determine from whom the message originated and the consumer has only moderate assurance that they have sent their credit card number to a legitimate merchant.

The secure electronic transaction (SET) protocol was developed by MasterCard and Visa to secure credit card transactions on the Internet involving three parties: the consumer, the merchant, and one or more credit card issuing banks. With SET, the consumer separately encrypts the purchase message and the credit card number. The merchant decrypts the purchase message to proceed with the sale and submits a charge to the consumer’s credit card company (i.e., credit card issuing bank) to clear the transaction using traditional means. However, unlike SSL, SET-based clearing will pass through the merchant and go directly to the consumer’s credit card issuing bank. The consumer and the merchant sign their messages with certificates obtained from financial institutions that certify that the consumer holds the credit card in question and that the merchant has a credit card clearing relationship with the issuing bank. SET protects merchants and credit card issuing banks from unauthorized purchases, and consumers from credit card fraud.

the electronic check echeck is a payment mechanism developed by the financial servic 629046

The electronic check (eCheck) is a payment mechanism developed by the Financial Services Technology Consortium (FSTC). Using public-key cryptography and digital signatures, trading partners and their banks can transmit secure messages and payment information. As with SET, eCheck certificates would be issued by banks certifying that the holder of the certificate has an account at that bank. And, payments would be processed automatically through the existing bank systems. Unlike SET, however, payments would be checks drawn on bank accounts. And, a feature beyond SSL and SET is that the eCheck protocol defines message formats, such as purchase orders, acknowledgments, and invoices, that can be processed automatically by trading parties. eCheck provides protections similar to those obtained with SET. That is, merchants and banks are protected from unauthorized use of checks, and the consumer is protected from check fraud.

explain how and where operations process goals would be shown in the goal columns of 629051

1. What do the terms picking ticket, packing slip, bill of lading, tickler file, and one-for-one checking mean?

2. Explain how and where operations process goals would be shown in the goal columns of a control matrix prepared for the M/S process.

At a minimum, include in your discussion the following topics from:

a. Differentiation between operations process control goals and information process control goals.

b. Distinction between process effectiveness and process efficiency, and between process effectiveness and security of resources.

3 Discuss the nature and purpose of the completed picking ticket data store and the shipping notice data, both of which are shown in the logical DFDs and systems flowchart of this . Among other points of discussion, identify each of these data stores as either “sales event” data or “master” data.

for its chain of fast food outlets bambino rsquo s pizzeria has recently installed a 629054

Bambino’s Pizzeria

For its chain of fast food outlets, Bambino’s Pizzeria has recently installed a system to speed up deliveries. In each of its stores, Bambino’s has three or four PCs connected to incoming phone lines. When a customer calls in an order to have pizza delivered, an employee answers and Caller ID checks the phone number against a data store containing past phone orders. If the order is for a repeat customer the system matches the number with the customer database and displays the customer record on the screen. (Customer records contain a variety of information, including whether the customer’s dog bites.) For first-time customers, the employee verifies the caller’s name and address, and creates a record in the customer database. The order taker then types in the customer’s pizza order. The system prints out a three-part order on a printer located in the kitchen. The original is used by the cook to prepare the order. When the order is ready, the cook marks the other two copies completed and gives them to the delivery driver to serve as delivery receipts for the driver and customer, respectively. At the same time that the order is printed, the order taker’s computer displays a city locator grid that is used to help dispatch the drivers. From a copy of the display, a dispatch slip—showing the customer’s street and connecting roads— is printed for the driver. The final system output generated at this time is a record of the order, which is the source for the event data written to the order system. The data will be used later to tally sales, calculate the driver’s pay, and generate other reports. (Note: For this problem, assume that these activities are beyond the order-taking system’s context.)

determine its operating profit for this scenario also how does this change affect th 627635

Suppose that Company C’s product cost increases $0.50 per unit. Assume that all other profit factors for Company C remain the same as shown in table. Determine its operating profit for this scenario. Also, how does this change affect the company’s breakeven sales volume?

 

Company B

Company C

 

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

50,000

 

1,500,000

 

Sales revenue

$15,000,000

$300.00

$36,000,000

$24.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$7,500,000

$150.00

$27,000,000

$18.00

Gross margin

$7,500,000

$150.00

$9,000,000

$6.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,200,000

$2.80

Contribution margin

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,800,000

$3.20

Fixed operating expenses

$1,950,000

$39.00

$3,000,000

$2.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$36.00

$1,800,000

$1.20

how would this 15 sales price increase affect its contribution margin per unit total 627636

Suppose that Company B could increase its sales price $15 per unit and sell the same number of units. Assume Company B’s volume-driven variable operating expenses are $15 per unit sold, and its revenue driven variable operating expenses are 20 percent of sales revenue. How would this $15 sales price increase affect its contribution margin per unit, total contribution margin, and operating profit?

 

Company B

Company C

 

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

50,000

 

1,500,000

 

Sales revenue

$15,000,000

$300.00

$36,000,000

$24.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$7,500,000

$150.00

$27,000,000

$18.00

Gross margin

$7,500,000

$150.00

$9,000,000

$6.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,200,000

$2.80

Contribution margin

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,800,000

$3.20

Fixed operating expenses

$1,950,000

$39.00

$3,000,000

$2.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$36.00

$1,800,000

$1.20

determine company c rsquo s operating profit for this scenario also how does this ch 627638

Suppose that Company C increased its sales price $1.50. Sales volume remains the same as shown in table. The company’s revenue-driven variable operating expenses are 10 percent of sales revenue, and its volume-driven variable operating expenses are $0.40 per unit sold. Determine Company C’s operating profit for this scenario. Also, how does this change affect the company’s breakeven sales volume?

 

Company B

Company C

 

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

50,000

 

1,500,000

 

Sales revenue

$15,000,000

$300.00

$36,000,000

$24.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$7,500,000

$150.00

$27,000,000

$18.00

Gross margin

$7,500,000

$150.00

$9,000,000

$6.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,200,000

$2.80

Contribution margin

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,800,000

$3.20

Fixed operating expenses

$1,950,000

$39.00

$3,000,000

$2.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$36.00

$1,800,000

$1.20

in terms of the impact on operating profit would the rebate strategy to increase sal 627640

Suppose that Company A were to offer all customers special rebates as a sales incentive. As a result, assume that sales price would decrease $10 per unit, but that annual sales volume would increase to 150,000 units. Assume that the company’s fixed operating expenses would not increase at the higher sales volume level (which may be stretching things a bit). Also assume that its variable operating expenses are all revenue-driven and equal to 15 percent of sales revenue. In terms of the impact on operating profit, would the rebate strategy to increase sales volume be a good trade-off for the company?

 

Company A

 

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

120,000

 

Sales revenue

$24,000,000

$200.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$15,600,000

$130.00

Gross margin

$8,400,000

$70.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,600,000

$30.00

Contribution margin

$4,800,000

$40.00

Fixed operating expenses

$3,000,000

$25.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$15.00

how is the 83 600 000 cost of goods sold expense of company x determined 627642

How is the $83,600,000 cost of goods sold expense of Company X determined?

 

Company X

 
 

Per Unit

Totals

Operating Profit Report for Year

   

Sales volume, in Units

 

110,000

Sales Revenue

$1,400.00

$154,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-760

-83,600,000

Gross Margin

$640.00

$70,400,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-300

-33,000,000

Contribution Margin

$340.00

$37,400,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-21,450,000

Operating Profit

 

$15,950,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

150,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

120,000

Raw Materials

$215.00

$25,800,000

Direct Labor

125

15,000,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

70

8,400,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$410.00

$49,200,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

350

42,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$760.00

$91,200,000

suppose instead that its fixed manufacturing overhead costs were 45 600 000 for the 627644

As you can see in table, Company X recorded $42,000,000 fixed manufacturing overhead costs in the year. Suppose, instead, that its fixed manufacturing overhead costs were $45,600,000 for the year, which is an increase of $3,600,000. Would the company’s operating profit have been $3,600,000 lower?

 

Company X

 
 

Per Unit

Totals

Operating Profit Report for Year

   

Sales volume, in Units

 

110,000

Sales Revenue

$1,400.00

$154,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-760

-83,600,000

Gross Margin

$640.00

$70,400,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-300

-33,000,000

Contribution Margin

$340.00

$37,400,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-21,450,000

Operating Profit

 

$15,950,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

150,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

120,000

Raw Materials

$215.00

$25,800,000

Direct Labor

125

15,000,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

70

8,400,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$410.00

$49,200,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

350

42,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$760.00

$91,200,000

does this increase seem reasonable or is the company rsquo s production output compa 627646

Company X produced 120,000 units and sold 110,000 units during the year. Therefore, the company increased its inventory 10,000 units. Does this increase seem reasonable? Or is the company’s production output compared with its sales volume out of kilter?

 

Company X

 
 

Per Unit

Totals

Operating Profit Report for Year

   

Sales volume, in Units

 

110,000

Sales Revenue

$1,400.00

$154,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-760

-83,600,000

Gross Margin

$640.00

$70,400,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-300

-33,000,000

Contribution Margin

$340.00

$37,400,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-21,450,000

Operating Profit

 

$15,950,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

150,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

120,000

Raw Materials

$215.00

$25,800,000

Direct Labor

125

15,000,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

70

8,400,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$410.00

$49,200,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

350

42,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$760.00

$91,200,000

prepare the basic manufacturing entries for the business by following the series of 627648

The operating profit report and manufacturing activity summary of Company Z for the year. Assume that the business had no work-in-process inventory at the start or end of the year.  The business purchased $19,500,000 raw materials on credit during the year. Prepare the basic manufacturing entries for the business by following the series of entries explained table.

 

Company Y

Company Z

Operating Profit Report for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Sales volume, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,000,000

Sales Revenue

$85.00

$42,500,000

$25.00

$50,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-56

-28,000,000

-18.45

-36,900,000

Gross Margin

$29.00

$14,500,000

$6.55

$13,100,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-12.5

-6,250,000

-2.5

-5,000,000

Contribution Margin

$16.50

$8,250,000

$4.05

$8,100,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-5,000,000

 

-7,500,000

Operating Profit

 

$3,250,000

 

$600,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

800,000

 

2,500,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,500,000

Raw Materials

$15.00

$7,500,000

$7.50

$18,750,000

Direct Labor

20

10,000,000

2.75

6,875,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

5

2,500,000

5

12,500,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$40.00

$20,000,000

$15.25

$38,125,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

16

8,000,000

3.2

8,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$56.00

$28,000,000

$18.45

$46,125,000

determine what company z rsquo s operating profit would have been if it had sold 2 1 627650

Determine what Company Z’s operating profit would have been if it had sold 2,100,000 units during the year, which is 100,000 more units than in the example shown in table. Assume that production output had remained the same at 2,500,000 units (the company’s production output capacity).

 

Company Y

Company Z

Operating Profit Report for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Sales volume, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,000,000

Sales Revenue

$85.00

$42,500,000

$25.00

$50,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-56

-28,000,000

-18.45

-36,900,000

Gross Margin

$29.00

$14,500,000

$6.55

$13,100,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-12.5

-6,250,000

-2.5

-5,000,000

Contribution Margin

$16.50

$8,250,000

$4.05

$8,100,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-5,000,000

 

-7,500,000

Operating Profit

 

$3,250,000

 

$600,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

800,000

 

2,500,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,500,000

Raw Materials

$15.00

$7,500,000

$7.50

$18,750,000

Direct Labor

20

10,000,000

2.75

6,875,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

5

2,500,000

5

12,500,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$40.00

$20,000,000

$15.25

$38,125,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

16

8,000,000

3.2

8,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$56.00

$28,000,000

$18.45

$46,125,000

what would be the operating profit of company x if its production output for the yea 627651

What would be the operating profit of Company X if its production output for the year had been 110,000 units (equal to the number of units sold) instead of the 120,000 units production output level assumed in table?

 

Company X

 
 

Per Unit

Totals

Operating Profit Report for Year

   

Sales volume, in Units

 

110,000

Sales Revenue

$1,400.00

$154,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-760

-83,600,000

Gross Margin

$640.00

$70,400,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-300

-33,000,000

Contribution Margin

$340.00

$37,400,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-21,450,000

Operating Profit

 

$15,950,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

150,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

120,000

Raw Materials

$215.00

$25,800,000

Direct Labor

125

15,000,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

70

8,400,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$410.00

$49,200,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

350

42,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$760.00

$91,200,000

determine the operating profit company y would have earned if it had manufactured an 627652

Company Y was on track to sell 550,000 units in the year, but late in the year, a major customer canceled a large order for 50,000 units. The business reduced its production output to 500,000 units, as you see in table. Determine the operating profit Company Y would have earned if it had manufactured and sold 550,000 units in the year.

 

Company Y

Company Z

Operating Profit Report for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Sales volume, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,000,000

Sales Revenue

$85.00

$42,500,000

$25.00

$50,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-56

-28,000,000

-18.45

-36,900,000

Gross Margin

$29.00

$14,500,000

$6.55

$13,100,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-12.5

-6,250,000

-2.5

-5,000,000

Contribution Margin

$16.50

$8,250,000

$4.05

$8,100,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-5,000,000

 

-7,500,000

Operating Profit

 

$3,250,000

 

$600,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

800,000

 

2,500,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,500,000

Raw Materials

$15.00

$7,500,000

$7.50

$18,750,000

Direct Labor

20

10,000,000

2.75

6,875,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

5

2,500,000

5

12,500,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$40.00

$20,000,000

$15.25

$38,125,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

16

8,000,000

3.2

8,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$56.00

$28,000,000

$18.45

$46,125,000

determine the company rsquo s operating profit for the year 627653

Assume that Company Z’s production output for the year is 2,000,000 units. In other words, assume that the business manufactures the same number of units that it sells in the year. Assume all other manufacturing and operating factors are the same. Determine the company’s operating profit for the year.

 

Company Y

Company Z

Operating Profit Report for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Sales volume, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,000,000

Sales Revenue

$85.00

$42,500,000

$25.00

$50,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-56

-28,000,000

-18.45

-36,900,000

Gross Margin

$29.00

$14,500,000

$6.55

$13,100,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-12.5

-6,250,000

-2.5

-5,000,000

Contribution Margin

$16.50

$8,250,000

$4.05

$8,100,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-5,000,000

 

-7,500,000

Operating Profit

 

$3,250,000

 

$600,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

800,000

 

2,500,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,500,000

Raw Materials

$15.00

$7,500,000

$7.50

$18,750,000

Direct Labor

20

10,000,000

2.75

6,875,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

5

2,500,000

5

12,500,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$40.00

$20,000,000

$15.25

$38,125,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

16

8,000,000

3.2

8,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$56.00

$28,000,000

$18.45

$46,125,000

what would be its operating profit for the year if it had produced 150 000 units 627654

In the table scenario Company X manufactured 120,000 units during the year, which caused its inventory to increase 10,000 units. Suppose, instead, that the company had manufactured 150,000 units during the year, which is its production capacity. Assume sales and other factors were the same in this alternative scenario as shown in table – only production output is different. What would be its operating profit for the year if it had produced 150,000 units?

 

Company X

 
 

Per Unit

Totals

Operating Profit Report for Year

   

Sales volume, in Units

 

110,000

Sales Revenue

$1,400.00

$154,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-760

-83,600,000

Gross Margin

$640.00

$70,400,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-300

-33,000,000

Contribution Margin

$340.00

$37,400,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-21,450,000

Operating Profit

 

$15,950,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

150,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

120,000

Raw Materials

$215.00

$25,800,000

Direct Labor

125

15,000,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

70

8,400,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$410.00

$49,200,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

350

42,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$760.00

$91,200,000

determine the production output level that would yield 4 850 000 operating profit fo 627655

Towards the end of the year, the president of Company Y looks at the preliminary numbers for operating profit and doesn’t like what he sees. He’s “promised” the board of directors that operating profit for the year will come in at $4,850,000. In fact, his bonus depends on hitting that operating profit target. There is still time before the end of the year to crank up production output for the year. Therefore, he orders that production output be stepped up. The president asks you to determine what the production output level for the year would have to be in order to report $4,850,000 operating profit for the year. Of course, you have ethical qualms about doing this, but you need the job. So, you reluctantly decide to do the calculation. Determine the production output level that would yield $4,850,000 operating profit for the year.

 

Company Y

Company Z

Operating Profit Report for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Sales volume, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,000,000

Sales Revenue

$85.00

$42,500,000

$25.00

$50,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-56

-28,000,000

-18.45

-36,900,000

Gross Margin

$29.00

$14,500,000

$6.55

$13,100,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-12.5

-6,250,000

-2.5

-5,000,000

Contribution Margin

$16.50

$8,250,000

$4.05

$8,100,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-5,000,000

 

-7,500,000

Operating Profit

 

$3,250,000

 

$600,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

800,000

 

2,500,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,500,000

Raw Materials

$15.00

$7,500,000

$7.50

$18,750,000

Direct Labor

20

10,000,000

2.75

6,875,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

5

2,500,000

5

12,500,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$40.00

$20,000,000

$15.25

$38,125,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

16

8,000,000

3.2

8,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$56.00

$28,000,000

$18.45

$46,125,000

do you go along with the president or do you argue for changing the operating profit 627659

After Company Y’s operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity for the year has been prepared, you, the chief accountant, learn that $1,000,000 of raw materials were thrown away during the year because the items had spoiled and couldn’t be used in the manufacturing process. The company’s president knows about this loss and insists that no change be made in the operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity. Do you go along with the president, or do you argue for changing the operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity?

 

Company Y

Company Z

Operating Profit Report for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Sales volume, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,000,000

Sales Revenue

$85.00

$42,500,000

$25.00

$50,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-56

-28,000,000

-18.45

-36,900,000

Gross Margin

$29.00

$14,500,000

$6.55

$13,100,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-12.5

-6,250,000

-2.5

-5,000,000

Contribution Margin

$16.50

$8,250,000

$4.05

$8,100,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-5,000,000

 

-7,500,000

Operating Profit

 

$3,250,000

 

$600,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

800,000

 

2,500,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,500,000

Raw Materials

$15.00

$7,500,000

$7.50

$18,750,000

Direct Labor

20

10,000,000

2.75

6,875,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

5

2,500,000

5

12,500,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$40.00

$20,000,000

$15.25

$38,125,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

16

8,000,000

3.2

8,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$56.00

$28,000,000

$18.45

$46,125,000

how would company y rsquo s operating profit report and summary of manufacturing act 627660

How would Company Y’s operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity be revised if the cost of idle capacity is treated as a period cost in the year?

 

Company Y

Company Z

Operating Profit Report for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Sales volume, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,000,000

Sales Revenue

$85.00

$42,500,000

$25.00

$50,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-56

-28,000,000

-18.45

-36,900,000

Gross Margin

$29.00

$14,500,000

$6.55

$13,100,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-12.5

-6,250,000

-2.5

-5,000,000

Contribution Margin

$16.50

$8,250,000

$4.05

$8,100,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-5,000,000

 

-7,500,000

Operating Profit

 

$3,250,000

 

$600,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

800,000

 

2,500,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,500,000

Raw Materials

$15.00

$7,500,000

$7.50

$18,750,000

Direct Labor

20

10,000,000

2.75

6,875,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

5

2,500,000

5

12,500,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$40.00

$20,000,000

$15.25

$38,125,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

16

8,000,000

3.2

8,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$56.00

$28,000,000

$18.45

$46,125,000

determine its operating profit for the year assume that the cost of idle capacity is 627661

Assume that Company Z manufactures 2,100,000 units during the year. Determine its operating profit for the year. Assume that the cost of idle capacity is treated as a period cost and isn’t embedded in product cost.

 

Company Y

Company Z

Operating Profit Report for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Sales volume, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,000,000

Sales Revenue

$85.00

$42,500,000

$25.00

$50,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-56

-28,000,000

-18.45

-36,900,000

Gross Margin

$29.00

$14,500,000

$6.55

$13,100,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-12.5

-6,250,000

-2.5

-5,000,000

Contribution Margin

$16.50

$8,250,000

$4.05

$8,100,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-5,000,000

 

-7,500,000

Operating Profit

 

$3,250,000

 

$600,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

800,000

 

2,500,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

500,000

 

2,500,000

Raw Materials

$15.00

$7,500,000

$7.50

$18,750,000

Direct Labor

20

10,000,000

2.75

6,875,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

5

2,500,000

5

12,500,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$40.00

$20,000,000

$15.25

$38,125,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

16

8,000,000

3.2

8,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$56.00

$28,000,000

$18.45

$46,125,000

prepare a revised operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity for 627662

The Company X’s operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity presented below. Note that its annual production capacity is 150,000 units, but the business manufactured only 120,000 units during the year. Therefore, it had 20 percent idle capacity (30,000 units not produced ÷ 150,000 units production capacity = 20 percent idle capacity). However, the cost of idle capacity isn’t treated as a separate period cost; all the company’s fixed manufacturing overhead costs are included in calculating its product cost. Suppose that the business treats the cost of idle capacity as a period cost. Prepare a revised operating profit report and summary of manufacturing activity for the business.

 

Company X

 
 

Per Unit

Totals

Operating Profit Report for Year

   

Sales volume, in Units

 

110,000

Sales Revenue

$1,400.00

$154,000,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense (see below)

-760

-83,600,000

Gross Margin

$640.00

$70,400,000

Variable Operating Expenses

-300

-33,000,000

Contribution Margin

$340.00

$37,400,000

Fixed Operating Expenses

 

-21,450,000

Operating Profit

 

$15,950,000

Manufacturing Activity Summary for Year

Per Unit

Totals

Annual Production Capacity, in Units

 

150,000

Actual Output, in Units

 

120,000

Raw Materials

$215.00

$25,800,000

Direct Labor

125

15,000,000

Variable Manufacturing Overhead Costs

70

8,400,000

Total Variable Manufacturing Costs

$410.00

$49,200,000

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead Costs

350

42,000,000

Product Cost and Total Manufacturing Costs

$760.00

$91,200,000

determine the annual effective interest rate on the loan 627667

Suppose a business borrows $100,000 for one year. The lender quotes a 6 percent annual interest rate that’s compounded semi-annually (twice a year). Determine the annual effective interest rate on the loan.

You may find the following form helpful.

Half-Year

Half-Year Start of Period

Interest at ?%

Loan Balance at End of Period

First

$100,000.00

 

 

Second

 

 

 

determine the effective annual interest rate and the nominal annual interest rate as 627668

A company borrows $250,000 from its bank for one year. At the maturity date, one year after the money’s deposited in the company’s checking account, it writes a check to the bank for $268,324 to pay off the loan. Determine the effective annual interest rate and the nominal annual interest rate assuming semiannual compounding.

Half-Year

Half-Year Start of Period

Interest at ?%

Loan Balance at End of Period

First

$250,000.00

 

 

Second

 

 

$268,324.00

which of the following statements is correct with respect to the differences and sim 626977

Which of the following statements is correct with respect to the differences and similarities between a corporation and a limited partnership?

  1. Stockholders may be entitled to vote on corporate matters but limited partners are prohibited from voting on any partnership matters.
  2. Stock of a corporation may be subject to the registration requirements of the federal securities laws but limited partnership interests are automatically exempt from those requirements.
  3. Directors owe fiduciary duties to the corporation and limited partners owe such duties to the partnership.
  4. A corporation and a limited partnership may be created only under a state statute and each must file a copy of its organizational document with the proper governmental body.

when the price of the stock recovered somewhat gallagher sold this treasury stock to 626984

Gallagher Corporation issued 100,000 shares of $40 par value stock for $50 per share to various investors. Subsequently, Gallagher purchased back 10,000 of those shares for $30 per share and held them as treasury stock. When the price of the stock recovered somewhat, Gallagher sold this treasury stock to Thomas for $35 per share. Which of the following statements is correct?

  1. I. Gallagher’s purchase of the stock at below par value is illegal.
  2. II. Gallagher’s purchase of the stock at below par value is void as an ultra vires act.
  3. Gallagher’s resale of the treasury stock at below par value is valid.
    1. a. I only.
    2. b. II only.
    3. c. III only.
    4. d. I and II only.

caldo corporation filed for bankruptcy on december 1 and the creditors of the corpor 626989

Brawn subscribed to 1,000 shares of $1 par value stock of Caldo Corporation at the agreed amount of $20 per share. She paid $5,000 on April 1 and then paid $9,000 on August 1. Caldo Corporation filed for bankruptcy on December 1 and the creditors of the corporation sought to hold Brawn liable under her subscription agreement. Which of the following is true?

  1. Brawn has no liability to the creditors because subscription contract was with the corporation, not the creditors.
  2. Brawn has no liability to the creditors because she has paid more than $1,000 to the corporation which is the par value of the 1,000 shares.
  3. Brawn is liable for $6,000 to the creditors for the amount unpaid on the subscription price.
  4. Brawn is liable for $6,000 to the creditors based on the doctrine of ultra vires.

after the corporation was formed the board of directors refused to adopt the preinco 626998

Norwood was a promoter of Parker Corporation. On March 15, Norwood purchased some real estate from Burrows in Parker’s name and signed the contract “Norwood, as agent of Parker Corporation.” Parker Corporation, however, did not legally come into existence until June 10. Norwood never informed Burrows on or before March 15 that Parker Corporation was not yet formed. After the corporation was formed, the board of directors refused to adopt the preincorporation contract made by Norwood concerning the real estate deal with Burrows. Burrows sued Parker, Norwood, and the board of directors. Which of the following is correct?

  1. None of these parties can be held liable.
  2. Norwood only is liable.
  3. Norwood and Parker are liable but not the board of directors.
  4. Norwood, Parker, and the board of directors are all liable.

the used equipment is actually owned by parks a director of west corporation for thi 627000

The officers of West Corporation wish to buy some used equipment for West Corporation. The used equipment is actually owned by Parks, a director of West Corporation. For this transaction to not be a conflict of interest for Parks, which of the following is(are) required to be true?

  1. I. Parks sells the used equipment to West Corporation in a contract that is fair and reasonable to the corporation.
  2. II. Parks’ ownership of the used equipment is disclosed to the shareholders of West who approve it by majority vote.
  3. Parks’ ownership of the used equipment is disclosed to the board of directors, who approve it by a majority vote of the disinterested directors.
    1. a. Any one of I, II, or III.
    2. b. I and II are both required.
    3. c. I and III are both required.
    4. d. All three of I, II, and III are required.

when a corporation elects to be a subchapter s corporation which of the following st 627022

When a corporation elects to be a Subchapter S corporation, which of the following statements is(are) true regarding the federal tax treatment of the corporation’s income or loss?

  1. I. The corporation’s income is taxed at the corporate level and not the shareholders’ level.
  2. II. The shareholders report the corporation’s income on their tax returns when the income is distributed to them.
  3. The shareholders report the corporation’s income on their tax returns even if the income is not distributed to them.
  4. The shareholders generally report the corporation’s loss on their tax returns.
    1. a. I only is true.
    2. b. II only is true.
    3. c. III only is true.
    4. d. III and IV only are true.

whether the firm s contention shall be tenable 627224

A, B and C are the partners in a firm called the ABC Firm. A has the intention of deceiving D, a supplier of office stationery, buys certain stationery on behalf of the ABC Firm. The stationery is of use in the ordinary course of the firm”s business. A does not give the stationery to the firm, instead brings it to his own use. The supplier D, who is unaware of the private use of the stationery by A, claims the price from the firm. The firm refuses to pay for the price on the ground that the stationery was never received by it (firm). Referring to the provisions of the Indian Partnership Act, 1932, decide:

  1. Whether the Firm”s contention shall be tenable?
  2. What would be your answer if a part of the stationery so purchased by A was delivered to the firm by him and the rest of the stationery was used by him for private use, about which neither the firm nor the supplier D was aware?

using each of the three analysis methods just explained determine company a rsquo s 627619

Suppose Company A had sold 125,000 units during the year, instead of the 120,000 units in the table. Using each of the three analysis methods just explained, determine Company A’s operating profit at the 125,000 units sales volume level. Assume other profit factors remain the same.

 

Company A

 

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

120,000

 

Sales revenue

$24,000,000

$200.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$15,600,000

$130.00

Gross margin

$8,400,000

$70.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,600,000

$30.00

Contribution margin

$4,800,000

$40.00

Fixed operating expenses

$3,000,000

$25.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$15.00

using the three methods explained in this section analyze why the business suffered 627621

Instead of the scenario shown in table assume that Company A had a bad year. Its internal operating profit report for this alternative scenario is presented below. Using the three methods explained in this section, analyze why the business suffered a loss for the year.

 

Company A

 

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

120,000

 

Sales revenue

$24,000,000

$200.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$15,600,000

$130.00

Gross margin

$8,400,000

$70.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,600,000

$30.00

Contribution margin

$4,800,000

$40.00

Fixed operating expenses

$3,000,000

$25.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$15.00

 

 

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

120,000

 

Sales revenue

$21,000,000

$175.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$15,600,000

$130.00

Gross margin

$5,400,000

$45.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,150,000

$26.25

Contribution margin

$2,250,000

$18.75

Fixed operating expenses

$3,000,000

$25.00

Operating profit (loss)

($750,000)

($6.25)

using the three profit analysis methods explained in this section analyze the profit 627622

Table presents profit performance information for two businesses for their most recent years. Using the three profit analysis methods explained in this section, analyze the profit performance of Company B.

 

Company B

Company C

 

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

50,000

 

1,500,000

 

Sales revenue

$15,000,000

$300.00

$36,000,000

$24.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$7,500,000

$150.00

$27,000,000

$18.00

Gross margin

$7,500,000

$150.00

$9,000,000

$6.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,200,000

$2.80

Contribution margin

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,800,000

$3.20

Fixed operating expenses

$1,950,000

$39.00

$3,000,000

$2.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$36.00

$1,800,000

$1.20

using the three profit analysis methods explained in this section analyze the profit 627623

Using the three profit analysis methods explained in this section, analyze the profit performance of Company C.

 

Company B

Company C

 

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

50,000

 

1,500,000

 

Sales revenue

$15,000,000

$300.00

$36,000,000

$24.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$7,500,000

$150.00

$27,000,000

$18.00

Gross margin

$7,500,000

$150.00

$9,000,000

$6.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,200,000

$2.80

Contribution margin

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,800,000

$3.20

Fixed operating expenses

$1,950,000

$39.00

$3,000,000

$2.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$36.00

$1,800,000

$1.20

calculate its financial leverage gain or loss for the year 627624

Assume the following: Company B’s Sources of Capital: See table for Company B’s operating profit performance for the year. The business paid $480,000 interest for the year. Calculate its financial leverage gain (or loss) for the year.

 

Company B

Company C

 

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

50,000

 

1,500,000

 

Sales revenue

$15,000,000

$300.00

$36,000,000

$24.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$7,500,000

$150.00

$27,000,000

$18.00

Gross margin

$7,500,000

$150.00

$9,000,000

$6.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,200,000

$2.80

Contribution margin

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,800,000

$3.20

Fixed operating expenses

$1,950,000

$39.00

$3,000,000

$2.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$36.00

$1,800,000

$1.20

see table for company c rsquo s profit data for the year the business paid 360 000 i 627625

Assume the following: Company C’s Sources of Capital:

Debt

$6,000,000

Owners’ equity

$6,000,000

Total capital

$12,000,000

See table for Company C’s profit data for the year. The business paid $360,000 interest for the year. Calculate its financial leverage gain (or loss) for the year.

 

Company B

Company C

 

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

50,000

 

1,500,000

 

Sales revenue

$15,000,000

$300.00

$36,000,000

$24.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$7,500,000

$150.00

$27,000,000

$18.00

Gross margin

$7,500,000

$150.00

$9,000,000

$6.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,200,000

$2.80

Contribution margin

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,800,000

$3.20

Fixed operating expenses

$1,950,000

$39.00

$3,000,000

$2.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$36.00

$1,800,000

$1.20

using the sources of capital and interest expense presented calculate company b rsqu 627626

Suppose that Company B’s fixed operating expenses were $3,030,000 for the year. Otherwise, other profit factors are the same as in table. Using the sources of capital and interest expense presented, calculate Company B’s financial leverage gain (or loss) for the year.

 

Company B

Company C

 

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

50,000

 

1,500,000

 

Sales revenue

$15,000,000

$300.00

$36,000,000

$24.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$7,500,000

$150.00

$27,000,000

$18.00

Gross margin

$7,500,000

$150.00

$9,000,000

$6.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,200,000

$2.80

Contribution margin

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,800,000

$3.20

Fixed operating expenses

$1,950,000

$39.00

$3,000,000

$2.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$36.00

$1,800,000

$1.20

suppose company b sold 5 percent fewer units during the year than it did according t 627630

Suppose Company B sold 5 percent fewer units during the year than it did according to table. Determine Company B’s operating profit for this scenario.

 

Company B

Company C

 

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

50,000

 

1,500,000

 

Sales revenue

$15,000,000

$300.00

$36,000,000

$24.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$7,500,000

$150.00

$27,000,000

$18.00

Gross margin

$7,500,000

$150.00

$9,000,000

$6.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,200,000

$2.80

Contribution margin

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,800,000

$3.20

Fixed operating expenses

$1,950,000

$39.00

$3,000,000

$2.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$36.00

$1,800,000

$1.20

determine company c rsquo s operating profit for this scenario 627632

Suppose Company C sold 10 percent fewer units during the year than it did according to table. Determine Company C’s operating profit for this scenario.

 

Company B

Company C

 

Totals

Per Unit

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

50,000

 

1,500,000

 

Sales revenue

$15,000,000

$300.00

$36,000,000

$24.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$7,500,000

$150.00

$27,000,000

$18.00

Gross margin

$7,500,000

$150.00

$9,000,000

$6.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,200,000

$2.80

Contribution margin

$3,750,000

$75.00

$4,800,000

$3.20

Fixed operating expenses

$1,950,000

$39.00

$3,000,000

$2.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$36.00

$1,800,000

$1.20

how much would product cost have to improve to achieve the 240 000 increase in opera 627633

Suppose Company A wants to improve its contribution margin per unit as the means to order to increase its operating profit $240,000. Assume its 120,000 units sales volume remains the same. Assume, further, that the business targeted its product cost as the most feasible way to improve contribution margin per unit. So, assume that sales price, variable operating expenses per unit, and fixed operating expenses remain the same. How much would product cost have to improve to achieve the $240,000 increase in Operating profit?

 

Company A

 

Totals

Per Unit

Sales volume, in units

120,000

 

Sales revenue

$24,000,000

$200.00

Cost of goods sold expense

$15,600,000

$130.00

Gross margin

$8,400,000

$70.00

Variable operating expenses

$3,600,000

$30.00

Contribution margin

$4,800,000

$40.00

Fixed operating expenses

$3,000,000

$25.00

Operating profit

$1,800,000

$15.00

ham won several breach of contract actions against the partnership and the partnersh 626947

Alchorn, Black, and Chan formed a limited partnership with Chan becoming the only limited partner. Capital contributions from these partners were $20,000, $40,000, and $50,000, respectively. Chan, however, helped in the management of the partnership and Ham, who had several contracts with the partnership, thought Chan was a general partner. Ham won several breach of contract actions against the partnership and the partnership does not have sufficient funds to pay these claims. What is the potential liability for Alchorn, Black, and Chan?

  1. Unlimited liability for all three partners.
  2. Unlimited liability for Alchorn and Black; $50,000 for Chan.
  3. Up to each partner’s capital contribution.
  4. None of the above.

explain the reason for the difference in net income between a and b 626698

Costner Company uses an absorption costing system in accounting for the single product it manufactures. The following selected data are for the year  2009:

Sales (10,000 units)

$360,000

Direct materials used (variable cost)

129,600

Direct labor costs (variable cost)

43,200

Variable manufacturing overhead

12,960

Fixed manufacturing overhead

17,280

Variable selling and administrative expenses

21,600

Fixed selling and administrative expenses

72,000

The company produced 12,000 units and sold 10,000 units. Direct materials and  direct labor are variable costs. One unit of direct material goes into each unit of  finished goods. Overhead rates are based on a volume of 12,000 units and are USD 1.08 and USD 1.44 per unit for variable and fixed overhead, respectively. The ending   inventory is the 2,000 units of finished goods on hand at the end of 2009. There was  no inventory at the beginning of 2009.

a. Prepare an income statement for 2009 under variable costing.

b. Prepare an income statement for 2009 under absorption costing.

c. Explain the reason for the difference in net income between a and b.

pocket umbrella inc is considering producing a new type of umbrella this new pocket 626699

Pocket Umbrella, Inc., is considering producing a new type of umbrella. This new pocket-sized umbrella would fit into a coat pocket or  purse. Classify the following costs of this new product as direct materials, direct labor, manufacturing overhead, selling, or administrative.

a. Cost of advertising the product.

b. Fabric used to make the umbrellas.

c. Maintenance of cutting machines used to cut the umbrella fabric so it will fit the  umbrella frame.

d. Wages of workers who assemble the product.

e. President”s salary.

f. The salary of the supervisor of the people who assemble the product.

g. Wages of the product tester who stands in a shower to make sure the umbrellas  do not leak.

h. Cost of market research survey.

i. Salary of the company”s sales managers.

j. Depreciation of administrative office building.

prepare an income statement for the year ended 2009 december 31 626700

Classify the costs listed in Alternate problem A as either product costs or period costs.

Presley Manufacturing Company is a producer of music  compact discs (CDs) and tapes. The following account balances are for the year ended 2009 December 31

Administrative expenses

$60,000

Depreciation expense – Manufacturing equipment

50,000

Direct labor

468,000

Manufacturing supplies expense

40,000

Indirect labor

36,000

Beginning inventories, 2009 January 1:

Direct materials

14,000

Work in process

20,000

Finished goods

128,000

Ending inventories, 2009 December 31

Direct materials

44,000

Work in process

56,000

Finished goods

92,000

Direct materials purchases

216,000

Rent expense – Factory

28,000

Sales

1,400,000

Selling expense

72,000

Other manufacturing overhead

126,000

a. Prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactured for Presley Manufacturing Company for 2009.

b. Prepare an income statement for the year ended 2009 December 31.

what should suzie do does it matter that suzie s company is reimbursed for costs on 626707

Suzie Garcia, an accountant for a consulting firm, had just received the monthly cost reports for the two jobs she supervises: one for Arrow Space, Inc., and one for the US government. She immediately called her boss after reading the figures for the Arrow Space job. “We are going to be way over budget on the Arrow Space contract,” she informed her boss. “The job is only about three-fourths complete, but we have spent all the money that we had budgeted for the entire job.” “You had better watch these job costs more carefully in the future,” her boss advised. “Meanwhile, charge the rest of the costs needed to complete the Arrow Space job to your US government job. The government will not notice the extra costs. Besides, we get reimbursed for costs on the government job, so we will not lose any money on this problem you have with the Arrow Space contract.” What should Suzie do? Does it matter that Suzie”s company is reimbursed for costs on the US government contract? Explain.

in teams of two or three students interview in person or by speakerphone a businessp 626709

In teams of two or three students, interview in person or by speakerphone, a businessperson in your community who uses job costing (for example, businesses that produce custom products such as homes, signs, or landscape design, or business consultants). Ask how this person assigns costs to products and how this information affects business decisions. Keep in mind that many businesspeople use terms other than job costing and manufacturing overhead. Be flexible with your use of accounting terminology in this interview. Each team should write a memorandum to the instructor summarizing the results of the interview. Information contained in the memo should include:

Date:

To:

From:

Subject:

Content of the memo must include the name and title of the person interviewed, name of the company, date of the interview, examples of the use of accounting information   for decision making, and any other pertinent information.

an s corporation has 30 000 shares of voting common stock and 20 000 shares of nonvo 626844

An S corporation has 30,000 shares of voting common stock and 20,000 shares of nonvoting common stock issued and outstanding. The S election can be revoked voluntarily with the consent of the shareholders holding, on the day of the revocation,

Shares of voting stock

Shares of nonvoting stock

a.

0

20,000

b.

7,500

5,000

c.

10,000

16,000

d.

20,000

0

an s corporation rsquo s accumulated adjustments account which measures the amount o 626854

An S corporation’s accumulated adjustments account, which measures the amount of earnings that may be distributed tax-free

  1. Must be adjusted downward for the full amount of federal income taxes attributable to any taxable year in which the corporation was a C corporation.
  2. Must be adjusted upward for the full amount of federal income taxes attributable to any taxable year in which the corporation was a C corporation.
  3. Must be adjusted upward or downward for only the federal income taxes affected by capital gains or losses, respectively, for any taxable year in which the corporation was a C corporation.
  4. Is not adjusted for federal income taxes attributable to a taxable year in which the corporation was a C corporation.

jan an unmarried individual gave the following outright gifts in 2007 626876

Jan, an unmarried individual, gave the following outright gifts in 2007:

Donee

Amount

Use by donee

Jones

$15,000

Down payment on house

Craig

13,000

College tuition

Kande

5,000

Vacation trip

Jan’s 2007 exclusions for gift tax purposes should total

  1. $30,000
  2. $29,000
  3. $27,000
  4. $18,000

fred and amy kehl both us citizens are married all of their real and personal proper 626884

Fred and Amy Kehl, both US citizens, are married. All of their real and personal property is owned by them as tenants by the entirety or as joint tenants with right of survivorship. The gross estate of the first spouse to die

  1. Includes 50% of the value of all property owned by the couple, regardless of which spouse furnished the original consideration.
  2. Includes only the property that had been acquired with the funds of the deceased spouse.
  3. Is governed by the federal statutory provisions relating to jointly held property, rather than by the decedent’s interest in community property vested by state law, if the Kehls reside in a community property state.
  4. Includes one-third of the value of all real estate owned by the Kehls, as the dower right in the case of the wife or curtesy right in the case of the husband.

in connection with a ldquo buy sell rdquo agreement funded by a cross purchase insur 626885

In connection with a “buy-sell” agreement funded by a cross-purchase insurance arrangement, business associate Adam bought a policy on Burr’s life to finance the purchase of Burr’s interest. Adam, the beneficiary, paid the premiums and retained all incidents of ownership. On the death of Burr, the insurance proceeds will be

  1. Includible in Burr’s gross estate, if Burr owns 50% or more of the stock of the corporation.
  2. Includible in Burr’s gross estate only if Burr had purchased a similar policy on Adam’s life at the same time and for the same purpose.
  3. Includible in Burr’s gross estate, if Adam has the right to veto Burr’s power to borrow on the policy that Burr owns on Adam’s life.
  4. Excludible from Burr’s gross estate.

eng and lew both us citizens died in 2007 eng made taxable lifetime gifts of 100 000 626888

Eng and Lew, both US citizens, died in 2007. Eng made taxable lifetime gifts of $100,000 that are not included in Eng’s gross estate. Lew made no lifetime gifts. At the dates of death, Eng’s gross estate was $1,600,000, and Lew’s gross estate was $1,800,000. A federal estate tax return must be filed for

Eng

Lew

a.

No

No

b.

No

Yes

c.

Yes

No

d.

Yes

Yes

lyon a cash basis taxpayer died on january 15 2007 in 2007 the estate executor made 626896

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following:

Lyon, a cash-basis taxpayer, died on January 15, 2007. In 2007, the estate executor made the required periodic distribution of $9,000 from estate income to Lyon’s sole heir. The following pertains to the estate’s income and disbursements in 2007:

2007 Estate Income

$20,000

Taxable interest

10,000

Net long-term capital gains allocable to corpus

2007 Estate Disbursements

$5,000

Administrative expenses attributable to taxable income

For the 2007 calendar year, what was the estate’s distributable net income (DNI)?

  1. $15,000
  2. $20,000
  3. $25,000
  4. $30,000

Lyon’s executor does not intend to file an extension request for the estate fiduciary income tax return. By what date must the executor file the Form 1041, US Fiduciary Income Tax Return, for the estate’s 2007 calendar year?

  1. March 15, 2008.
  2. April 15, 2008.
  3. June 15, 2008.
  4. September 15, 2008.

kopel did not request underlying documentation and was reasonably satisfied by raff 626911

Kopel was engaged to prepare Raff’s 2006 federal income tax return. During the tax preparation interview, Raff told Kopel that he paid $3,000 in property taxes in 2006. Actually, Raff’s property taxes amounted to only $600. Based on Raff’s word, Kopel deducted the $3,000 on Raff’s return, resulting in an understatement of Raff’s tax liability. Kopel had no reason to believe that the information was incorrect. Kopel did not request underlying documentation and was reasonably satisfied by Raff’s representation that Raff had adequate records to support the deduction. Which of the following statements is correct?

  1. To avoid the preparer penalty for willful under-statement of tax liability, Kopel was obligated to examine the underlying documentation for the deduction.
  2. To avoid the preparer penalty for willful under-statement of tax liability, Kopel would be required to obtain Raff’s representation in writing.
  3. Kopel is not subject to the preparer penalty for willful understatement of tax liability because the deduction that was claimed was more than 25% of the actual amount that should have been deducted.
  4. Kopel is not subject to the preparer penalty for willful understatement of tax liability because Kopel was justified in relying on Raff’s representation.

which one of the following statements is correct with regard to an internal revenue 626916

Clark, a professional tax return preparer, prepared and signed a client’s 2006 federal income tax return that resulted in a $600 refund. Which one of the following statements is correct with regard to an Internal Revenue Code penalty Clark may be subject to for endorsing and cashing the client’s refund check?

  1. Clark will be subject to the penalty if Clark endorses and cashes the check.
  2. Clark may endorse and cash the check, without penalty, if Clark is enrolled to practice before the Internal Revenue Service.
  3. Clark may endorse and cash the check, without penalty, because the check is for less than $500.
  4. Clark may endorse and cash the check, without penalty, if the amount does not exceed Clark’s fee for preparation of the return.

according to the profession rsquo s standards which of the following statements is c 626921

According to the profession’s standards, which of the following statements is correct regarding the standards a CPA should follow when recommending tax return positions and preparing tax returns?

  1. A CPA may recommend a position that the CPA concludes is frivolous as long as the position is adequately disclosed on the return.
  2. A CPA may recommend a position in which the CPA has a good faith belief that the position has a realistic possibility of being sustained if challenged.
  3. A CPA will usually not advise the client of the potential penalty consequences of the recommended tax return position.
  4. A CPA may sign a tax return as preparer knowing that the return takes a position that will not be sustained if challenged.

sydney bailey and calle form a partnership under the revised uniform partnership act 626932

Sydney, Bailey, and Calle form a partnership under the Revised Uniform Partnership Act. During the first year of operation, the partners have fundamental questions regarding the rights and obligations of the partnership as well as the individual partners. Which of the following questions can correctly be answered in the affirmative?

  1. I. Is the partnership allowed legally to own property in the partnership’s name?
  2. II. Do the partners have joint and several liability for breaches of contract of the partnership?
  3. Do the partners have joint and several liability for tort actions against the partnership?
    1. a. I only.
    2. b. I and II only.
    3. c. II and III only.
    4. d. I, II, and III.

the following information was obtained from the records of a manufacturing unit usin 626405

The following information was obtained from the records of a manufacturing unit using standard costing system.

Particulars

Standard

Actual

Production

4, 000

3, 800

Working Days

20

21

Fixed Overheads

Rs.40, 000

Rs.39, 000

Variable Overheads

Rs.12, 000

Rs.12, 000

Calculate,

• Variable Overhead Variance

• Fixed Overhead Expenditure Variance

• Fixed Overhead Volume Variance

• Fixed Overhead Efficiency Variance

• Fixed Overhead Calendar Variance

• Also prepare a reconciliation statement for the standard fixed expenses worked out at standard fixed overhead rate and the actual fixed overhead.

the following data has been collected from the cost records of a unit for computing 626406

The following data has been collected from the cost records of a unit for computing various fixed overhead variances for a particular period.

Particular

Details

Number of budgeted working days

25

Budgeted man hour per day

6, 000

Output [budgeted] per man hours

1 unit

Fixed overhead cost as budgeted

Rs.1, 50, 000

Actual number of working days

27

Actual man hour per day

6, 300

Actual output per man hour

0.9 units

Actual fixed overheads

Rs.1, 56, 000

Calculate the following Fixed Overhead Variances

• Expenditure variance

• Calendar variance

• Capacity variance

• Efficiency variance

• Volume Variance

• Cost Variance

a company manufacturing two products uses standard costing system the following data 626407

A company manufacturing two products uses standard costing system. The following data relating to

August 2007 have been furnished to you:

Particulars

Product A

Product B

Standard Cost Per Unit &Direct Materials

Rs.2

Rs.4

Direct Wages

Rs.8

Rs.6

Fixed Overheads

Rs.16

Rs.12

Total

Rs.26

Rs.22

Units processed/in process

 

 

Beginning of the month, all materials applied
and 50% complete in respect of labour and
overheads

4, 000

12, 000

End of the month, all materials applied and 80%
complete in respect of labour and overheads

8, 000

12, 000

Units completed and transferred to warehouse
during the month

16, 000

20, 000

         

You may use average cost method to analyse

The following were the actual costs recorded during the month.

Direct materials purchased at standard price amount to Rs.2, 00, 000 and actual cost of which is Rs.2, 20, 000. Direct materials used for consumption at standard price amount to Rs.1, 75, 000. Direct wages for actual hours worked at standard wages rates were Rs.4, 20, 000 and at actual wages rate were Rs.4, 12, 000. Fixed overheads budgeted were Rs.8, 25, 000 and actual fixed overheads incurred were Rs.8, 50, 000.

Required,

I. Direct material price variance at the point of consumption and at the point of purchase

II. Direct material usage variance

III. Direct wage rate and efficiency variance

IV. Fixed overheads volume and expenditure variance

V. Standard cost of WIP at the end of the month.

compute the following variances from the data given below 626408

Compute the following variances from the data given below.

I. Total sales margin variance

II. Sales margin volume variance

III. Sales margin price variance

IV. Sales margin quantity [sub volume] variance.

Product

Budgeted
Quantity
Units

Actual
Quantity
Units

Budgeted
Sales Price
Per Unit

Actual Sale
Price Per Unit

Standard Cost
Per
Unit

X

240

400

Rs.50

Rs.45

Rs.30

Y

160

200

25

20

15

what is the difference between budgetary control and standard costing 626411

1. Define ‘Standard Cost& and ‘Standard Costing&. In which type of industries standard costing can be employed?

2. What is the difference between ‘budgetary control& and ‘standard costing&?

3. Discuss the benefits and limitations of standard costing.

4. Explain the various types of standards.

5. Discuss briefly the procedure of establishment of standard costs regarding material, labour and overheads.

6. Describe and compare the different methods of accounting for standard costs.

7. Define and explain briefly the following terms:

  •  Material price variance
  •  Material usage variance
  •  Material mixture variance
  •  Material yield variance

8. Define and explain briefly the following terms:

  • Wage rate variance
  • Labour efficiency variance
  • Variable overhead efficiency variance

write short notes on investigation of variances and management by exception in conne 626412

1. Define and explain the following terms:

  • Fixed overhead cost variance
  • Fixed overhead volume variance
  • Fixed overhead capacity variance
  • Fixed overhead calendar variance
  • Fixed overhead efficiency variance.

2. Define and explain the sales variances based on a] profits and b] turnover.

3. Write short notes on investigation of variances and management by exception in connection with standard costing.

4. Recently there have been significant developments in budgetary control and standard costing systems. You are required to discuss, a] five factors which should be kept in mind in deciding whether or not to investigate a variance and b] the importance of recognizing the behavioral aspects in effective system.

5. Explain the meaning, causes and disposal of labour variances.

6. What do you understand by ‘learning curve&? State the uses of learning curve in cost and management accounting.

7. What are the behavioral aspects which should be borne in mind by those who are designing and operating standard costing and budgetary control system?

the budgeted overheads and cost driver volumes of xyz are as follows 626415

The budgeted overheads and cost driver volumes of XYZ are as follows.

Cost Pool

Budgeted
Overheads (Rs.)

Cost Driver

Budgeted Volume

Material procurement

5,80,000

No. of orders

1,100

Material handling

2,50,000

No. of movements

680

Set-up

4,15,000

No. of set ups

520

Maintenance

9,70,000

Maintenance hours

8,400

Quality control

1,76,000

No. of inspection

900

Machinery

7,20,000

No. of machine hours

24,000

The company has produced a batch of 2,600 components of AX-15, its material cost was Rs. 1,30,000 and labor cost Rs. 2,45,000. The usage activities of the said batch are as follows.

Material orders & 26, maintenance hours & 690, material movements & 18, inspection & 28, set ups & 25, machine hours & 1,800

Calculate & cost driver rates that are used for tracing appropriate amount of overheads to the said batch and ascertain the cost of batch of components using Activity Based Costing.

the following information relates to budgeted operations of division x of a manufact 626420

The following information relates to budgeted operations of Division X of a manufacturing company.

Particulars

Amount in rupees

Sales & 50,000 units @ Rest. 8

4,00,000

Less :- Variable Costs @ Rest. 6 per unit

3,00,000

Contribution margin

1,00,000

Less : Fixed Costs

75,000

Divisional Profits

25,000

The amount of divisional investment is Rs. 1,50,000 and the minimum desired rate of return on the investment is the cost of capital of 20%

Calculate

I] Divisional expected ROI and ii] Divisional expected RI

 

a company has two division a and b division a manufactures a component which is used 626421

A company has two division, A and B. Division A manufactures a component which is used by Division B to produce a finished product. For the next period, output and costs have been budgeted as follows.

Particulars

Division A

Division B

Component units

50,000

———-

Finished units

—————

50,000

Total variable costs – Rupees

2,50,000

6,00,000

Fixed Costs Rupees

1,50,000

2,00,000

The fixed costs are separable for each division. You are required to advise on the transfer price to be fixed for Division A&s component under the following circumstances.

A. Division A can sell the component in a competitive market for Rs. 10 per unit. Division B can also purchase the component from the open market at that price.

B. As per the situation mentioned in (A) above, and further assume that Division B currently buys the component from an external supplier at the market price of Rs. 10 and there is reciprocal agreement between the external supplier and another Division C, within the same group. Under this agreement, the external supplier agrees to buy one product unit from Division C at a profit of Rs. 4 per unit to that division, for every component which Division B buys from the sup.

a company fixes the inter divisional transfer prices for its products on the basis o 626422

A company fixes the inter-divisional transfer prices for its products on the basis of cost plus an estimated return on investment in its divisions. The relevant portion of the budget for the

Division A for the year 2006-07 is given below.

Particulars

Amount in Rupees

Fixed Assets

5,00,000

Current Assets (other than debtors)

3,00,000

Debtors

2,00,000

Annual fixed cost for the division

8,00,000

Variable cost per unit of product

10

Budgeted volume of production per year (units )

4,00,000

Desired Return on Investment

28%

You are required to determine the transfer price for Division A.

a company has two divisions division a and division b division a has a budget of sel 626423

A company has two divisions, Division A and Division B. Division A has a budget of selling 20,000 number of a particular component X to fetch a return of 20% on the average assets employed. The following particulars of Division A are also known.

Particulars

Amount in Rupees

Fixed Overheads

5,00,000

Variable Cost

Re. 1 per unit

Average Assets & Debtors
Inventories
Plant

2,00,000
5,00,000
5,00,000

However there is a constraint in marketing and only 1,50,000 units of the component X can be directly sold to the market at the proposed price.

It has been gathered that Division B can take up the balance 50,000 units of component X. A wants a price of Rs. 4 per unit but B is prepared to pay Rs. 2 per unit of X.

Division A has another option on hand, which is to produce only 1,50,000 units of component X. This will reduce the holding of assets by Rs. 2,00,000 and fixed overheads by Rs. 25,000.

You are required to advise the most profitable course of action for Division A.

the existing cost structure of one prepared unit of transferor ltd at the existing c 626425

Transferor Ltd. have two processes & Preparing and Finishing. The normal output per week is 7,500 units [completed] at a capacity of 75%.

Transferee Ltd. Had production problems in preparing and require 2,000 units per week of prepared material for their finishing process.

The existing cost structure of one prepared unit of Transferor Ltd. at the existing capacity is as follows.

Material: Rs. 2.00 [variable 100%]

Labor: Rs. 2.00 [variable 50%]

Overheads: Rs. 4.00 [variable 25%]

The sale price of a completed unit of Transferor Ltd. is Rs. 16 with a profit of Rs. 4 per unit.

Contrast the effect on the profits of Transferor Ltd. for 6 months [25 weeks] of supplying units to

Transferor Ltd. with the following alternative transfer prices per unit.

I] Marginal Cost II] Marginal Cost + 25% III] Marginal Cost + 15% return on capital employed. [

Assume capital employed Rs. 20 lakhs] IV] Existing Cost V] Existing Cost + a portion of profit on the basis of preparing cost/total cost X unit profit. VI] At an agreed market price of Rs. 8.50 Assume no increase in the fixed costs.

a company is organized into two divisions namely a and b a produces three products k 626426

A company is organized into two divisions namely A and B. A produces three products, K, L and

M. The relevant data per unit is given below.

Particulars

K

L

M

Market price

Rs. 120

Rs. 115

Rs. 100

Variable costs

84

60

70

Direct labor hours

4

5

3

Maximum sales potential – units

1600

1000

600

Division B has a demand for 600 units of product L for its use. If division A cannot supply the requirements, division B can buy a similar product from market at Rs.112 per unit. What should be the transfer price of 600 units of L for division B, if the total direct labor hours available in division A are restricted to 15,000.

which of the following are the correct journal entries for the preceding data 626678

Which of the following are the correct journal entries for the preceding data?

Manufacturing overhead

22,500

 

Various accounts

22,500

Work in process inventory

21,000

 

Manufacturing overhead

21,000

Manufacturing overhead

22,500

 

Various accounts

22,500

Work in process inventory

15,428

 

Manufacturing overhead

15,428

Manufacturing overhead

24,000

 

Various accounts

24,000

Work in process inventory

15,428

 

Manufacturing overhead

15,428

Various accounts

22,500

 

Manufacturing overhead

22,500

Manufacturing overhead

15,428

 

Work in process inventory

15,428

prepare a cost of goods manufactured statement and compute the cost of goods sold 626686

Classify the costs listed in the previous exercise as either product costs or period costs.

Gore Company makes products for sporting events. The following data are for the year ended 2010 December 31:

Materials inventory, 2010 January 1

$45,000

Materials inventory, 2010 December 31

65,000

Materials purchases

175,000

Direct labor

225,000

Work in process inventory, 2010 January 1

30,000

Work in process inventory, 2010 December 31

40,000

Manufacturing overhead

130,000

Finished goods inventory, 2010 January 1

80,000

Finished goods inventory, 2010 December 31

140,000

Prepare a Cost of Goods Manufactured Statement and compute the cost of goods sold.

different companies use different bases in computing their predetermined overhead ra 626689

Different companies use different bases in computing their predetermined overhead rates. From the following estimated data, compute the  predetermined rate to be used by each company:

 

Company Paper

Rock

Scissors

Machine-hours

100,000

210,000

125,000

Direct labor-hours

50,000

48,000

39,000

Direct labor cost

$800,000

$735,000

$410,000

Manufacturing overhead cost

$400,000

$432,000

$375,000

Basis for determining predetermined overhead rate:

Company

Basis

Paper

Direct labor cost

Rock

Direct labor-hours

Scissors

Machine-hours

prepare journal entries to transfer overapplied or underapplied overhead to cost of 626690

Refer to the previous exercise. Assume the actual hours and cost data were:

Actual

Paper

Rock

Scissors

Manufacturing overhead

$450,000

$400,000

$375,000

Direct labor cost

$850,000

$700,000

$400,000

Direct labor-hours

45,000

46,000

38,000

Machine-hours

105,000

200,000

130,000

a. Compute overapplied or underapplied overhead for each company.

b. Prepare journal entries to transfer overapplied or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold for each company.

prepare two income statements mdash a variable costing income statement and an absor 626692

The following data relate to Socks Company for the year ended 2010 December 31:

Cost of production:

Direct materials (variable)

$360,000

Direct labor (variable)

504,000

Manufacturing overhead:

Variable

180,000

Fixed

360,000

Sales commissions (variable)

108,000

Sales salaries (fixed)

72,000

Administrative expenses (fixed)

144,000

Units produced

150,000

Units sold (at $18 each)

120,000

Beginning inventory, 2010 January 1

-0-

There were no beginning inventories. Assume direct materials and direct labor are  variable costs. Prepare two income statements—a variable costing income statement and an absorption costing income statement.

total block inc is considering a new sunscreen packet that contains a skin wipe with 626693

Total Block, Inc., is considering a new sunscreen packet that contains a skin wipe with sunscreen on it. These would be particularly useful for people who do not want to carry a bottle of sunscreen, according to Sunspot”s marketing  manager. Classify the following costs of this new product as direct materials, direct labor, manufacturing overhead, selling, or administrative.

a. President”s salary.

b. Packages used to hold the skin wipes.

c. Cleaning materials used to clean the skin wipe packages.

d. Wages of workers who package the product.

e. Cost of advertising the product.

f. The salary of the supervisor of the workers who package the product.

g. Cost accountant”s salary (the accountant works in the factory).

h. Cost of a market research survey.

i. Sales commissions paid as a percent of sales.

j. Depreciation of administrative office building.

prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions including the transfer 626696

Green Thumb Landscaping Company uses a job cost system. As of 2010 January 1, its records showed the following inventory balances:

Materials (shrubs, trees, etc.)

$13,500

Work in process

25,800

Finished goods (Job No. 211)

30,000

The work in process inventory consisted of two jobs:

Job No.

 

Direct

Direct

Manufacturing

Total

   

Materials

Labor

Overhead

212

10 Downing St.

$4,500

$6,000

$2,400

$12,900

213

1010 Wilshire Blvd.

5,100

4,800

3,000

12,900

   

$9,600

$10,800

$5,400

$25,800

Here are data for the company for January: Materials purchased, USD 48,000. Landscaping direct labor costs: direct labor to Job No. 212, USD 12,000; to Job No. 213, USD 24,000; and to Job No. 214, USD 36,000. Indirect labor, USD 30,000. Direct materials used: direct materials for Job No. 212, USD 7,800; for Job No.213, USD 14,400; and for Job No. 214, USD 24,000. Supplies (indirect materials) used amounted to USD 1,200. Overhead is assigned to jobs at USD 3 per labor-hour, with 8,000 labor-hours to Job 212 and 2,000 labor-hours each to Jobs 213 and 214. Jobs 212 and 213 were completed and in Finished Goods Inventory at the end of January. Sales revenues for January were USD 45,000; cost of goods sold was USD 30,000  for Job No. 211 that was in Finished Goods Inventory on 2010 January 1. Overhead costs incurred other than indirect labor and indirect materials were depreciation, USD 3,000, and utilities, fuel, and miscellaneous, USD 3,000.

a. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions, including the transfer of underapplied or overapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold.

b. Assuming selling and administrative expenses were USD 10,000, prepare an income statement for January.

the annual budget of abc ltd at 60 and 80 level of performance is as under rs in tho 626368

The annual budget of ABC Ltd. at 60% and 80% level of performance is as under. [Rs. in thousands]

Particulars

60% capacity

80% capacity

Direct material

360

480

Direct labour

480

640

Production overheads

252

276

Administrative overheads

124

132

Selling and distribution overheads

136

148

Total

1, 352

1, 676

The company is experiencing difficulties in selling its products and is presently operating at 50% capacity. The sales revenue for the year is estimated at Rs.9,00,000. The directors are seriously considering suspending operations till the market picks up. Market research undertaken by the company reveals that in about 12 months time, the sales will pick up and the company can comfortably operate at 75% level of performance and earn a sales income of Rs.18,00,000 in that year. The sales personnel of the company do not want to suspend operations for fear of adverse reactions in the market but the directors want to decide the issue purely on financial considerations.

If the manufacturing and other operations of the company are suspended for a year, it is estimated that,

1) The present fixed cost could be reduced to Rs.2, 20, 000 per annum.

2) The settlement cost of personnel not required would amount to Rs.1, 50, 000.

3) The maintenance of plant has to go on and that would cost Rs.20, 000 per annum

4) On resuming operations, the expenditure connected with reopening after shut down would amount to Rs.80, 000. Submit a report to the directors and indicate therein, based on purely financial considerations, whether it would be advisable to suspend the company&s operations in the current year.

what are the different methods available for segregation of semi variable expenses e 626370

1. The effect of price reduction is always to reduce the profit/volume ratio, to raise the break even point and to shorten the margin of safety. Explain and illustrate by numerical example.

2. What is a break even chart? What is a profit graph? State the purpose of constructing such charts.

3. State the assumptions and limitations of break even point analysis.

4. Construct a profit graph with suitable data and obtain an equation of the profit line. Use this equation in profit planning.

5. What are the different methods available for segregation of semi variable expenses? Explain with examples.

6. Discuss fully the applications of marginal costing.

7. Discuss the reasons for difference between profits under marginal costing and absorption costing.

8. Discuss the limitations of marginal costing.

9. What do you understand by profit/volume ratio? Discuss the importance of the profit/volume ratio and state how it can be improved?

10. Discuss the importance of break even point.

a company manufactures two products x and y a forecast of units to be sold in the fi 626372

A company manufactures two products, X and Y. A forecast of units to be sold in the first four months of the year is given below.

Particulars

Product X [units]

Product Y [units]

January

1, 000

2, 800

February

1, 200

2, 800

March

1, 600

2, 400

April

2, 000

2, 000

May

2, 400

1, 600

Other information is given below.

Particulars

Product X &
Rs. Per Unit

Product Y- Rs. Per Unit

Direct material

12.50

19.00

Direct labor

4.50

7.00

Factory overheads per unit

3.00

4.00

There will be no opening and closing work in progress [WIP] at the end of any month and finished product [in units] equal to half of the budgeted sale of the next month should be in stock at the end of each month. [including previous year December]

You are required to prepare,

A] Production budget for January to April and

B] Summarized production cost budget.

a ltd manufactures a single product p with a single grade of labor the sales budget 626374

A Ltd. manufactures a single product P with a single grade of labor. The sales budget and finished goods stock budget for the 1st Quarter ending on 30th June 2008 are as follows.

Sales: 1,400 units

Opening finished units: 100 units

Closing finished units: 140 units

The goods are imported only when production work is complete and it is budgeted that 10% of finished work will be scrapped. The standard direct labor content of the product P is 3 hours. The budgeted productivity ratio for direct labor is 80% only. The company employs 36 direct operatives who are expected to average 144 working hours each in the 1st quarter. You are required to prepare,

I] Production Budget II] Direct Labor Budget and III] Comment on the problem that your direct labor budget reveals and suggest how this problem might be overcome.

a newly started company wishes to prepare cash budget from january 2008 prepare a ca 626376

A newly started company wishes to prepare Cash Budget from January 2008. Prepare a Cash Budget for the first six months from the following estimated receipts and expenditures.

Month

Total Sales
Rs.

Materials
Rs.

Wages
Rs.

Production
Overheads
Rs.

Selling &
Distribution
Overheads
Rs.

January

20,000

20,000

4,000

3,200

800

February

22,000

14,000

4,400

3,300

900

March

24,000

14,000

4,600

3,300

800

April

26,000

12,000

4,600

3,400

900

May

28,000

12,000

4,800

3,500

900

June

30,000

16,000

4,800

3,600

1,000

Cash balance on 1st January was Rs.10, 000. A new machine is to be installed at Rs.30, 000 on credit to be repaid by two equal installments in March and April. Sales commission @ 5% on total sales is to be paid within the month following actual sales. Rs.10, 000 being the amount of 2nd call on shares may be received in March. Share premium amounting to Rs.2, 000 is also receivable with 2nd call. Credit allowed by suppliers is 2 months, credit allowed to customers is 1 month, delay in payment of overheads is 1 month, and delay in payment in wages is ½ month.

Assume cash sales to be 50% of total sales.

summarized below are the income and expenditure forecasts for the month march to aug 626377

Summarized below are the Income and Expenditure forecasts for the month March to August 2008

Month

Credit
Sales
Rs.

Credit
Purchases
Rs.

Wages
Rs.

Mfg.
Expenses
Rs.

Offi ce
Expenses
Rs.

Selling
Expenses
Rs.

March

60,000

36,000

9,000

4,000

2,000

4,000

April

62,000

38,000

8,000

3,000

1,500

5,000

May

64,000

33,000

10,000

4,500

2,500

4,500

June

58,000

35,000

8,500

3,500

2,000

3,500

July

56,000

39,000

9,000

4,000

1,000

4,500

August

60,000

34,000

8,000

3,000

1,500

4,500

 You are given the following further information

  • Plant costing Rs.16, 000 due for delivery in June. 10% on delivery and balance after three months.
  • Advance tax Rs.8, 000 is payable in March and June
  • Period of credit allowed, Suppliers 2 months and customers 1 month
  • Lag in payment of manufacturing expenses half month
  • Lag in payment of all other expenses one month
  • Cash balance on 1st May 2008 is Rs.8, 000
  • Prepare Cash Budget for three months starting from 1st May 2008

prepare a cash budget in respect of six months from july to december from the follow 626378

Prepare a Cash Budget in respect of six months from July to December from the following information.

Month

Sales
Rs.000

Mat.
Rs.000

Wages
Rs.000

Production
O/H
Rs.000

Admn
O/H
Rs.

Selling
O/H
Rs

Dist.
O/H
Rs

R & D
O/H
Rs

April

100

40

10

4.4

3,000

1,600

800

1,000

May

120

60

11.2

4.8

2,900

1,700

900

1,000

June

80

40

8

5

3,040

1,500

700

1,200

July

100

60

8.4

4.6

2,960

1,700

900

1,200

Aug.

120

70

9.2

5.2

3,020

1,900

1,100

1,400

Sept

140

80

10

5.4

3,080

2,000

1,200

1,400

Oct

160

90

10.4

5.8

3,120

2,050

1,250

1,600

Nov

180

100

10.8

6

3,140

2,150

1,350

1,600

Dec

200

110

11.6

6.4

3,200

2,300

1,500

1,600

The cash balance as on 1st July was expected Rs.1, 50, 000

Expected Capital Expenditure:

Plant and Machinery to be installed in August to a cost of Rs.40, 000 will be payable on September 1st. The extension to the Research and Development Department amounting to Rs.10, 000 will be completed on August 1st, payable Rs.2, 000 per month from the date of completion. Under a hire purchase agreement Rs.4, 000 is to be paid each month. The Cash Sales of Rs.2, 000 per month are expected. No commission is payable. However a commission of 5% on credit sales is to be paid within the month following the sale. Period of credit allowed by suppliers 3 months, credit allowed to customers 2 months, delay in payment of overheads 1 month, delay in payment of wages 1st week of the following month. An income tax of Rs.1, 00, 000 is due to be paid on October 1st. A preference share dividend of 10% on Rs.2, 00, 000 is payable on November 1st. 10% calls on the ordinary share capital of Rs.4, 00, 000 is due on July 1st and September 1st. The dividend from investments amounting to Rs.30, 000 is expected on November 1st.

a manufacturing company is currently working at 50 capacity and produces 10 000 unit 626380

The company desires to maintain a cash balance of Rs.15, 000 at the end of each quarter. Cash can be borrowed or repaid in multiples of Rs.500 at an interest rate of 10% p.a. Management does not want to borrow cash more than what is necessary and wants to repay as early as possible. In any event, loans cannot be extended beyond a quarter. Interest is computed and paid when principal is repaid. Assume that borrowing takes place at the beginning and repayments are made at the end of the quarter. A manufacturing company is currently working at 50% capacity and produces 10, 000 units at a cost of Rs.180 per unit as per the following details.

Materials: Rs.100

Labor: Rs.30

Factory Overheads: Rs.30 [40% fixed]

Administrative Overheads: Rs.20 [50% fixed]

Total Cost Per Unit: Rs.180

The selling price per unit at present is Rs.200. At 60% working, material cost per unit increases by 2% and selling price per unit falls by 2%. At 80% working, material cost per unit increases by 5% and selling price per unit falls by 5%. Prepare a Flexible Budget to show the profits/losses at 50%, 60% and 80% capacity utilization.

abc ltd manufactures a single product for which market demand exists for additional 626383

ABC Ltd. manufactures a single product for which market demand exists for additional quantity.

Present sales of Rs.60, 000 per month utilize only 60% capacity of the plant. Sales Manager assures that with a reduction of 10% in the price, he would be in a position to increase the sales by about 25% to 30%. The following data are available.

Selling price: Rs.10 per unit

Variable cost: Rs.3 per unit

Semi variable cost: Rs.6, 000 fixed plus Rs.0.50 per unit

Fixed cost: Rs.20, 000 at present level estimated to be Rs.24, 000 at 80% output

You are required to,

• Prepare a statement showing the operating profit at 60%, 70% and 80% levels of capacity utilization at current selling price and at proposed selling price

• The percentage increase in the present output which will be required to maintain the present profit margin at the proposed selling price.

the following budget of pq ltd a manufacturing organization has been prepared for th 626384

The following budget of PQ Ltd, a manufacturing organization, has been prepared for the year 2007-08.

Particulars

% of Sales Value

Raw Materials

40

Direct Wages

25

Factory Overheads – Variable

10

Factory Overheads – Fixed

5

Administration and Selling and Distribution
Overheads – Variable

6

Administration and Selling and Distribution
Overheads – Fixed

12

Profit

2

Sales Value

100

After considering the quarterly performance, it is felt that the budgeted volume of sales would not be achieved. But the company expects to achieve 80% of the budgeted sales [equivalent to sales value of Rs.160, 00, 000] At this stage; the company has received an export order for its usual line of products. The estimated prime cost and special export expenses for fulfilling the export order are Rs.13, 00, 000 and Rs.40, 000 respectively. You are required to,

1) Present the original budget and the revised budget based on 80% achievement of the target sales, showing the quantum of profit/loss

2) Prepare a statement of budgeted costs for working out the overhead recovery rates in percentages

3) Work out the lowest quotation for the export order.

the following information relates to the production activities of goodwish ltd for 3 626385

The following information relates to the production activities of Goodwish Ltd for 3 months ending on 31st December, 2006.

Particulars

Amount in Rupees

Fixed Expenses:

Management Salaries

2,10, 000

Rent and Taxes

1,40, 000

Depreciation of Machinery

1,75, 000

Sundry Office Expenses

2,22, 000

Total Fixed Expenses

7,47, 000

Semi & Variable Expenses at 50% capacity

Plant Maintenance

62, 500

Labor

2,47, 000

Salesmen&s salaries

72, 500

Sundry Expenses

65, 000

Total Semi-Variable Expenses

4,47, 000

Variable Expenses

Materials

6,00, 000

Labour

6,40, 000

Salesmen&s commission

95, 000

Total Variable Expenses

13,35, 000

It is further noted that semi-variable expenses remain constant between 40% and 70% capacity, increase by 10% of the above figures between 70% and 85% capacity and increase by 15% of the above figures between 85% and 100% capacity. Fixed expenses remain constant whatever the level of activity may be. Sales at 60% capacity are Rs.25,50, 000, at 80% capacity Rs.34, 00, 000 and at 100% capacity Rs.42, 50, 000. Assuming that all items of produced are sold, prepare a Flexible Budget at 60%, 80% and 100% productive capacity.

s m ltd produces two products a and b the budget for these products at 60 level of a 626386

S.M. Ltd. produces two products, A and B. The budget for these products [at 60% level of activity] for the year 2008-09 gives the following information.

Particulars

Product A

Product B

Raw Material Per Unit

Rs.7.50

Rs.3.50

Direct Labor Per Unit

Rs.4.00

Rs.3.00

Variable Overheads Per Unit

Rs.2.00

Rs.1.50

Fixed Overheads Per Unit

Rs.6.00

Rs.4.50

Selling Price Per Unit

Rs.20.00

Rs.15.00

Production and Sales [Units]

4,000

6,000

The Managing Director, not being satisfied, with the projected results presented above, referred the budget to the Marketing Director for his observations regarding performance improvement. The Marketing Director suggested that the sales [ in quantity] of both the products A and B could be increased by 50% provided the selling price were reduced by 5% and 10% for the products A and B respectively. The price reduction should be made applicable to the entire sales [in quantity] of both the products A and B. You are required to prepare a statement of overall profitability on the basis of original budget and the revised budget.

what is principal budget factor give a list of such factors and state the effect of 626388

1. What factors generally determine a budget period? Give examples.

2. What is ‘Principal Budget Factor&? Give a list of such factors and state the effect of existence of two or more budget factors in an organization.

3. Distinguish between ‘fixed budget& and ‘flexible budget&. What is the starting point for the preparation of budgets?

4. Budgetary control of repairs and maintenance is extremely difficult & Discuss

5. What do you understand by ‘Zero Base Budgeting& as distinct from conventional budgeting? Briefly state its process, its advantages and limitations. Discuss its applications in Indian conditions.

6. What do you understand by ‘Performance Budgeting&? Explain its main features.

7. You are the budget controller of a large organization and are primarily concerned with budgetary control of large-scale administrative expenses.

the following data are available in respect of a manufacturing company 626396

The following data are available in respect of a manufacturing company

Particulars

Budget

Actual

Production – units

400

360

Man-hours to produce above

8,000

7,000

Variable overheads

Rs.10, 000

Rs.9, 150

The standard time to produce one unit of the product is 20 hours.

Calculate variable overhead variances.

the following information is available from the records of a manufacturing company u 626397

The following information is available from the records of a manufacturing company using standard costing system.

Particulars

Standard

Actual

Production

4,000 units

3,800 units

Working days

20

21

Fixed overhead

Rs.40, 000

Rs.39, 000

Variable overheads

Rs.12, 000

Rs.12, 000

Calculate the following overhead variances

I] Variable overhead variance

II] Fixed overhead cost variance

III] Fixed overhead expenditure variance

IV] Fixed overhead volume variance

V] Fixed overhead efficiency variance

VI] Fixed overhead calendar variance

abc ltd produces an article by blending two basic raw materials it operates a standa 626399

ABC Ltd. produces an article by blending two basic raw materials. It operates a standard costing system and the following standards have been set for raw materials.

Material

Standard Mix

Standard Price

A

40%

Rs.4.00

B

60%

Rs.3.00

The standard loss in processing is 15%. During September 2007, the company produced 1, 700 kg of finished output.

The position of stock and purchases for the month of September 2007 is as under,

Material

Quantity as on
1/9/2007 Kg

Quantity as on
30/9/2007 -Kg

Purchases
Kg

Cost
Rs.

A

35

5

800

3, 400

B

40

50

1, 200

3, 000

Calculate Material Cost Variance, Price Variance, Quantity Variance, Mix Variance and Yield Variance. Assume that First In First Out method is followed for material issues

a company is manufacturing a chemical product making use of four different types of 626401

A company is manufacturing a chemical product making use of four different types of raw materials.

The following information is available regarding the standards and actual.

Material

Share of total input
Standard – %

Raw material cost
Standard
Rs/kg

Quantity
consumed
Actual

Raw material
cost & Actual
Rs./kg

A

40

50

42, 000

48

B

30

80

31, 000

80

C

20

90

18, 000

92

D

10

100

9, 000

110

There is an inevitable normal loss of 10% during the processing. Actual output 92, 000 kg

Calculate Material Cost, Price, Quantity, Mix and Yield variances.

the standard material inputs required for 1 000 kg of a finished output are given be 626402

The standard material inputs required for 1, 000 kg of a finished output are given below.

Material in kg

Quantity [Rs.]

Standard Rate Per Kg & Rs.

P

450

20

Q

400

40

R

250

60

Total Input

1100

 

Less: Standard Loss

100

 

Standard Output

1000

 

Actual production in a period was 20, 000 kg of the finished product for which the actual quantities of materials used and the prices paid thereof are as under.

Material

Quantity Used – Kg

Purchased Price Per Unit
[Rs]

P

10, 000

19

Q

8, 500

42

R

4, 500

65

Calculate Material Cost, Price, Quantity, Mix and Yield Variances. Prepare reconciliation among the

Variances

the following standards have been set to manufacture a product direct materials 626404

The following standards have been set to manufacture a product

Direct Materials:

• 2 units of A @ Rs.4 per unit: Rs.8

• 3 units of B @ Rs.3 per unit: Rs.9

• 15 units of C @ Re.1 per unit: Rs.15

• Direct Labour 3 hrs @ Rs.8 per hour: Rs.24

• Standard Prime Cost: Rs.56

The company manufactured and sold 6000 units of the product during the year. Direct Material cost was as follows:

• 12, 500 units of A @ Rs.4.40 per unit

• 18, 000 units of B @ Rs.2.80 per unit

• 88, 500 units of C @ Rs.1.20 per unit

The company worked for 17, 500 direct labour hours during the year. For 2500 of these hours the company paid Rs.12 per hour while for the remaining the wages were paid at the standard rate. Calculate material price and usage variances and labour rate and efficiency variances.

determine its net income for the year 2007 626326

Presents a business’s comparative balance sheet that’s missing the information for owners’ equity. Assume that the company didn’t issue additional capital stock shares during the year and didn’t pay cash dividends to its shareowners during the year. Determine its net income for the year 2007.

Balance Sheets at Year-Ends 2006 and 2007

Assets

2006

2007

Changes

Cash

$456,000

$425,000

($31,000)

Accounts Receivable

$386,000

$340,000

($46,000)

Inventory

$518,000

$576,000

$58,000

Prepaid Expenses

$46,000

$52,000

$6,000

Current Assets

$1,406,000

$1,393,000

 

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$897,000

$1,060,000

$163,000

Accumulated Depreciation

($257,000)

($318,000)

($61,000)

Cost Less Depreciation

$640,000

$742,000

 

Total Assets

$2,046,000

$2,135,000

 

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

     

Accounts Payable

$246,000

$230,000

($16,000)

Accrued Expenses Payable

$204,000

$215,000

$11,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$350,000

$300,000

($50,000)

Current Liabilities

$800,000

$745,000

$125,000

Long-term Notes Payable

$400,000

$525,000

 

determine its cash flow from operating activities for the year present your answer i 626330

The beginning and ending balances of certain accounts in a company’s balance sheet are as follows:

 

Beginning Balance

Ending Balance

Changes

Accounts Receivable

$500,000

$465,000

($35,000)

Inventory

$780,000

$860,000

$80,000

Prepaid Expenses

$110,000

$105,000

($5,000)

Accounts Payable

$350,000

$325,000

($25,000)

Accrued Expenses Payable

$165,000

$175,000

$10,000

The business records $145,000 depreciation expense for the year and its net income is $258,000 for the year. Determine its cash flow from operating activities for the year. Present your answer in the indirect format for cash flow from operating activities in the statement of cash flows.

present your answer for reporting cash flow from operating activities according to t 626331

Assume that the facts remain the same except that the business doesn’t record depreciation expense in the year. Instead, it leases all its fixed assets and pays rent. The rent expense for the year is $145,000. Determine its cash flow from operating activities for the year. Present your answer for reporting cash flow from operating activities according to the indirect format

Cash Flow from Operating Activities

   

Net Income

$405,000

 

Accounts receivable increase

($35,000)

 

Inventory increase

($45,000)

 

Prepaid expenses increase

($15,000)

 

Depreciation expense

$191,000

 

Accounts payable increase

$35,000

 

Accrued expenses payable increase

$40,000

$576,000

Cash Flow from Investing Activities

   

Capital expenditures

 

($425,000)

Cash Flow from Financing Activities

   

Short-term notes payable increase

$125,000

 

Long-term notes payable increase

$125,000

 

Issue of capital stock

$50,000

 

Cash dividends to shareowners

($250,000)

$50,000

Increase in cash during year

 

$201,000

Beginning cash balance

 

$700,000

Ending cash balance

 

$901,000

how can you tell from this listing of accounts that the business has not recorded it 626332

Review the company’s year-end listing of accounts’ balances shown below.

a. How can you tell from this listing of accounts that the business has not recorded its following three expenses for the year?

• Bad debts expense: Caused by uncollectible accounts receivable

• Cost of goods sold expense: For the cost of products sold; the revenue from these sales has been recorded in the sales revenue account

• Depreciation expense: For the use of fixed assets (property, plant, and equipment) during the year

b. Also, did you notice that there is no income tax expense account? What is the explanation for this omission?

 

End of First Year

 

Debits

Credits

Cash

$559,750

 

Accounts Receivable

$645,000

 

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

 

$0

Inventory

$3,725,000

 

Prepaid Expenses

$185,000

 

Property, Plant & Equipment

$1,150,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation

 

$0

Accounts Payable

 

$309,500

Accrued Expenses Payable

 

$108,500

Short-term Notes Payable

 

$350,000

Long-term Notes Payable

 

$500,000

Owners’ Equity – Capital Stock

 

$1,500,000

Owners’ Equity – Retained Earnings

 

$0

Sales Revenue

 

$4,585,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

$0

 

Depreciation Expense

$0

 

Bad Debts Expense

$0

 

Selling & General Expenses

$1,033,000

 

Interest Expense

$55,250

 

Totals

$7,353,000

$7,353,000

At this point the chief accountant sits down with top management to decide which accounting methods the business should use to record cost of goods sold expense, depreciation expense, and bad debts expense. The financial statements for the first year cannot be prepared until these accounting choices are made and the three expenses are recorded.

how can you tell from this listing of accounts that the business has not recorded it 626333

Review the company’s year-end listing of accounts’ balances shown below.

a. How can you tell from this listing of accounts that the business has not recorded its following three expenses for the year?

• Bad debts expense: Caused by uncollectible accounts receivable

• Cost of goods sold expense: For the cost of products sold; the revenue from these sales has been recorded in the sales revenue account

• Depreciation expense: For the use of fixed assets (property, plant, and equipment) during the year

b. Also, did you notice that there is no income tax expense account? What is the explanation for this omission?

 

End of First Year

 

Debits

Credits

Cash

$559,750

 

Accounts Receivable

$645,000

 

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

 

$0

Inventory

$3,725,000

 

Prepaid Expenses

$185,000

 

Property, Plant & Equipment

$1,150,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation

 

$0

Accounts Payable

 

$309,500

Accrued Expenses Payable

 

$108,500

Short-term Notes Payable

 

$350,000

Long-term Notes Payable

 

$500,000

Owners’ Equity – Capital Stock

 

$1,500,000

Owners’ Equity – Retained Earnings

 

$0

Sales Revenue

 

$4,585,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

$0

 

Depreciation Expense

$0

 

Bad Debts Expense

$0

 

Selling & General Expenses

$1,033,000

 

Interest Expense

$55,250

 

Totals

$7,353,000

$7,353,000

does the interest expense in table look reasonable or does it need an adjustment at 626334

Does the interest expense in table look reasonable, or does it need an adjustment at the end of the year?

 

End of First Year

 

Debits

Credits

Cash

$559,750

 

Accounts Receivable

$645,000

 

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

 

$0

Inventory

$3,725,000

 

Prepaid Expenses

$185,000

 

Property, Plant & Equipment

$1,150,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation

 

$0

Accounts Payable

 

$309,500

Accrued Expenses Payable

 

$108,500

Short-term Notes Payable

 

$350,000

Long-term Notes Payable

 

$500,000

Owners’ Equity – Capital Stock

 

$1,500,000

Owners’ Equity – Retained Earnings

 

$0

Sales Revenue

 

$4,585,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

$0

 

Depreciation Expense

$0

 

Bad Debts Expense

$0

 

Selling & General Expenses

$1,033,000

 

Interest Expense

$55,250

 

Totals

$7,353,000

$7,353,000

in table the owners rsquo equity mdash retained earnings account has a zero balance 626335

In table the Owners’ Equity — Retained Earnings account has a zero balance. Why?

 

End of First Year

 

Debits

Credits

Cash

$559,750

 

Accounts Receivable

$645,000

 

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

 

$0

Inventory

$3,725,000

 

Prepaid Expenses

$185,000

 

Property, Plant & Equipment

$1,150,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation

 

$0

Accounts Payable

 

$309,500

Accrued Expenses Payable

 

$108,500

Short-term Notes Payable

 

$350,000

Long-term Notes Payable

 

$500,000

Owners’ Equity – Capital Stock

 

$1,500,000

Owners’ Equity – Retained Earnings

 

$0

Sales Revenue

 

$4,585,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

$0

 

Depreciation Expense

$0

 

Bad Debts Expense

$0

 

Selling & General Expenses

$1,033,000

 

Interest Expense

$55,250

 

Totals

$7,353,000

$7,353,000

suppose the business whose inventory acquisition history appears table sold all 186 626343

Suppose the business whose inventory acquisition history appears table sold all 186,000 units that it had available for sale during the year. In this situation, does the business’s choice of cost of goods sold expense method make any difference?

 

Quantity

Per Unit

Cost

First purchase

14,200 Units

$25.75

$365,650

Second purchase

42,500 Units

$23.85

$1,013,625

Third purchase

16,500 Units

$24.85

$410,025

Fourth purchase

36,500 Units

$23.05

$841,325

Fifth purchase

6,100 Units

$26.15

$159,515

Sixth purchase

52,000 Units

$23.65

$1,229,800

Seventh purchase

18,200 Units

$26.00

$473,200

Totals

186,000 Units

 

$4,493,140

what bad debts expense entry would the chief accountant make at the end of the year 626346

The chief accountant of the business outlined in the example question is from the double-breasted, dull grey suit, old guard school of accounting. He argues that a customer’s account receivable should be written off as uncollectible when it becomes more than 30 days old. The normal credit term offered by the business to customers is 30 days. At the end of its first year, $278,400 of the company’s $645,000 accounts receivable is more than 30 days old. What bad debts expense entry would the chief accountant make at the end of the year if he had his way? Do you agree with his approach?

The president of the business outlined in the example question attends an industry update seminar at which the speaker says that the average bad debts experience of businesses in this field is about 1 percent of sales. Assume that the business adopts this method. Determine its bad debts expense for the first year and for the balances in its accounts receivable and allowance for doubtful accounts at the end of the year.

it will also lease out the required number of buses the following are the other cost 626348

Viveka Elementary School has a total of 150 students consisting of 5 sections with 30 students per section. The school plans for a picnic around the city during the weekend to places such as zoo, the amusement park, the planetarium etc. A private transport operator has come forward to lease out the buses for taking the students. Each bus will have a maximum capacity of 50 [excluding 2 seats reserved for the teachers accompanying the students]. The school will employ two teachers for each bus, paying them an allowance of Rs.50 per teacher. It will also lease out the required number of buses. The following are the other cost estimates:

Breakfast: Rs.5 per student

Lunch: Rs.10 per student

Tea: Rs.3 per student

Entrance fee at zoo: Rs.2 per student

Rent: Rs.650 per bus

Special permit fees Rs.50 per bus

Block entrance fees at the planetarium Rs.250

Prizes to students for games: Rs.250

No costs are incurred in respect of accompanying teachers. [Except the allowance of Rs.50 per teacher]

You are required to prepare a statement showing the total cost and also average cost per student for the levels of 30,60,90,120 and 150 students.

a retail dealer in garments is currently selling 24 000 shirts annually he supplies 626353

A retail dealer in garments is currently selling 24, 000 shirts annually. He supplies the following details for the year ended 31st March 2007.

Selling price per shirt: Rs.800

Variable cost per shirt: Rs.600

Fixed Cost:

Staff salaries: Rs.24, 00, 000

General Office Cost: Rs.8, 00, 000

Advertising Cost: Rs.8, 00, 000

As a Cost Accountant, you are required to answer the following each part independently:

1. Calculate Break Even Point and margin of safety in sales revenue and number of shirts sold.

2. Assume that 30, 000 shirts were sold during the year, find out the net profit of the fi rm.

3. Assuming that in the coming year, an additional staff salary of Rs.10, 00, 000 is anticipated, and price of shirt is likely to be increased by 15%, what should be the break even point in number of shirts and sales?

the following details are available in respect of the two plants regarding their pre 626356

A Company has two Plants at Locations I and II, operating at 100% and 75% of their capacities respectively. The company is considering a proposal to merge the two plants at one location to optimize available capacity. The following details are available in respect of the two plants, regarding their present performance/operation.

Particulars

Location I

Location II

Sales [Rs.in lakhs]

200

75

Variable Costs [Rs. in lakhs]

140

54

Fixed Cost [Rs. in lakhs]

30

14

For decision-making purposes, you are required to work out the following information,

I. The capacity at which the merged plan will break even.

II. The profit of the merged plant working at 80% capacity

III. Sales required if the merged plant is required to earn an overall profit of Rs.22, 00,000

a company wants to buy a new machine to replace one which is having frequent breakdo 626358

A company wants to buy a new machine to replace one, which is having frequent breakdown. It received offers for two models, M1 and M2. Further details regarding these two models are given below

Particulars

M1

M2

Installed Capacity [Units]

10, 000

10, 000

Fixed overheads per annum

Rs.2, 40,000

Rs.1, 00,000

Estimated profit at the above capacity

Rs.1, 60,000

Rs.1, 00,000

The product manufactured using this type of machine, M1 or M2, is sold at Rs.100 per unit. You are required to determine,

a. Break Even level of sales for each model.

b. The level of sales at which both the models will earn the same profit.

c. The model suitable for different levels of demand for the product.

a company manufactures a single product with a capacity of 1 50 000 units per annum 626360

A company manufactures a single product with a capacity of 1 50 000 units per annum. The summarized profitability statement for a year is as under:

Particulars

Amount Rs.

Amount Rs.

Sales: 1 00 000 units @ Rs.15 per unit

 

15, 00,000

Less: Cost of Sales

  • Direct materials
  • Direct labor
  • Production overheads-variable
  • Production overheads-fixed
  • Administrative overheads-fixed
  • Selling and distribution overheads &variable
  • Selling and distribution overheads-fixed

 

3, 00,00

2, 00,000

60,000

3,00,000

 

1, 50,000

 

 

90,000

1,50,000

 

 

Total cost of sales

 

12, 50,000

Profit

 

2, 50,000

You are required to evaluate the following options:

1) What will be the amount of sales required to earn a target profit of 25% on sales, if the packing is improved at a cost of Re.1 per unit?

2) There is an offer from a large retailer for purchasing 30 000 units per annum subject to providing a packing with a different brand name at a cost of Rs.2 per unit. However, in this case there will be no selling and distribution expenses. Also this will not in any way affect the company&s existing business.

What will be the break even price for this additional offer?

3) If an expenditure of Rs.3, 00,000 is made on advertising, the sales would increase from the present level of 1 00 000 units to 1 20 000 units at a price of Rs.18 per unit. Will that expenditure be justified?

4) If the selling price is reduced by Rs.2 per unit, there will be 100% capacity utilization. Will the reduction in selling price be justified?

 

the following particulars are extracted from the records of a company 626361

A] The following particulars are extracted from the records of a company.

Particulars

Product A

Product B

Sale price per unit

Rs.100

Rs.120

Consumption of material

2 kg

3 kg

Material cost

Rs.10

Rs.15

Direct labour cost

15

10

Direct expenses

5

6

Machine hours used

3

2

Fixed overheads per unit

Rs.5

Rs.10

Variable overheads per unit

15

20

Direct labour per hour is Rs.5. Comment on the profitability of each product [both use same raw material] when, I] total sales potential in units is limited II] total sales potential in value is limited III] raw material is in short supply IV} production capacity [in terms of machine hours] is limited.

B] Assuming raw material as the key factor, availability of which is 10,000 kg and maximum sales potential of each product being 3500 units, find out the product mix which will yield maximum profits.

the details of planned production for 2008 09 estimated cost and unit selling prices 626362

P Ltd. manufactures and sells children&s toys of high quality over an extensive market utilizing the services of skilled artists who are paid at an average rate of Rs.15 per hour. The total number of skilled hours available in a year is only 14000. The details of planned production for 2008-09; estimated cost and unit selling prices are given below:

Product
[Toy]

Production
Planned
[Units]

Direct
Materials Per
Unit
Rs.

Direct
Labour
Per Unit
Rs.

Fixed
Overheads
Per Unit
Rs.

Selling
Price
Per Unit
Rs.

A

3000

20

10

15

70

B

4000

24

12

18

92

C

4000

32

12

18

95

D

3000

40

16

24

110

E

2400

60

20

30

180

Variable overheads costs amount to 50% of the direct labor cost. The company has estimated the following maximum and minimum demands for each product.

Particulars

A

B

C

D

E

Maximum & Units

5000

6000

6000

4000

4000

Minimum – Units

1000

1000

1000

500

500

You are required to work out profit as per the production plan of the company and also compute the

optimum profit in the given situation.

a company has compiled the following data for the preparation of its budget for the 626364

A company has compiled the following data for the preparation of its budget for the year 2008-09

Particulars

Product A

Product B

Product C

Sale per month – units

8, 000

4, 000

6, 000

Selling Price

Rs.40 per unit

Rs.80 per unit

Rs.100 per unit

Direct Materials

Rs.20 per unit

Rs.48 per unit

Rs.40 per unit

Direct Labour:
Department 1 Rs.5 per hour
Department 2 Rs.4 per hour

5

10

20

Variable Overheads

8

4

12

Fixed Overheads:
Rs.1, 50, 000 per month

Rs.3 per unit

Rs.3 per unit

Rs.7 per unit

After the budget was discussed, the following action plan was approved for improving the profitability of the company.

I] Direct labour in department 1, which is in short supply should be increased by 15, 000 hours by spending fixed overheads of Rs.8, 000 per month.

II] To boost sales, an advertisement program should be launched at a cost of Rs.10, 000 per month.

III] The selling price should be reduced by: A: 2.5%, B: 8.75%, C: 1%

IV] The sales target have been increased and the sales department has confirmed that the company will be able to achieve the following quantities of sales.

A: 12, 000 units, B: 6, 000 units, C: 10, 000 units

labour for assembling is available according to requirements further details are giv 626366

Sterling Industries Ltd. manufactures product Z by making and assembling three components, A, B and C. The components are made in a machine shop using three identical machines each of which can make any of the three components. However, the total capacity of the three machines is only 12, 000 machine hours per month and is just sufficient to meet the current demand. Labour for assembling is available according to requirements. Further details are given below.

Component

Machine Hours
Per Unit

Variable Cost
Per Unit

A

4

Rs.64

B

5

Rs.75

C

6

Rs.110

Assembling
[per unit of Z]

Fixed cost per month amounts to Rs.50, 000. Product Z is sold at Rs.300 per unit. From next month onwards the company expects the demand for Z to rise by 25%. As the machine capacity is limited, the company wants to meet the increase in demand by buying such numbers of A, B or C which is more profitable.

You are asked to find out the following:

I] Current demand and profits made by the company.

II] Which component and how many units of the same should be bought from the market to meet the increase in demand?

III] Profit made by the company is suggestion in I is accepted?

a company produces 30 000 units of product a and 20 000 units of product b per annum 626367

A company produces 30, 000 units of product A and 20, 000 units of product B per annum. The sales value and costs of the two products are as follows:

Sales value Rs.7, 60, 000 Factory overheads: Rs.1, 90, 000

Direct material: Rs.1, 40, 000 Administrative and selling overheads: Rs.1, 20, 000

Direct labour: Rs1, 90, 000

50% of the factory overheads are variable and 50% of the administrative and selling overheads are fixed. The selling price of A is Rs.12 per unit and Rs.20 per unit for B.

The direct material and labour ratio for product A is 2:3 and for B is 4:5. For both the products, the selling price is 400% of direct labour. The factory overheads are charged in the ratio of direct labour and administrative and selling overheads are recovered at a flat rate of Rs.2 per unit for A and Rs.3 per unit for B.

Due to fall in demand, of the above products, the company has a plan to diversify and make product C using 40% capacity. It has been estimated that for C direct material and direct labour will be Rs.2.50 and Rs.3 per unit respectively. Other variable costs will be the same as applicable to the product A. The selling price of product C is Rs.14 per unit and production will be 30 000 units.

Assuming 60% capacity is used for manufacture of A and B, calculate,

I] Present cost and profit

II] Cost and profit after diversification

III] Give your recommendations as to whether to diversify or not.

how would its balance sheet be different if the business had used accelerated deprec 626299

The company’s most recent balance sheet given below. The business uses the straight-line depreciation method, by which an equal amount of depreciation is allocated to each year of a fixed asset’s estimated useful life. If the business had used accelerated depreciation for its fixed assets instead, the balance in the accumulated depreciation account would be $2,100,000. How would its balance sheet be different if the business had used accelerated depreciation? (Ignore income tax effects in your answer.)

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,500,000

Accounts Payable

$700,000

Accounts Receivable

$1,000,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$600,000

Inventory

$1,800,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$1,500,000

Prepaid Expenses

$300,000

Total Current Liabilities

$2,800,000

Total Current Assets

$4,600,000

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$4,800,000

Owners Equity:

 

Accumulated Depreciation

($1,400,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,000,000

Cost Less Depreciation

$3,400,000

Retained Earnings

$2,200,000

Total Assets

$8,000,000

Total Owners’ Equity

$3,200,000

   

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$8,000,000

using the landscape format prepare a revised balance sheet for the business giving e 626300

The company’s most recent balance sheet given below. The business uses very conservative accounting methods for certain expenses, but it could have used more liberal accounting methods for these expenses. The more liberal accounting methods would have caused the following results:

• Accounts receivable balance would have been $50,000 higher

• Inventory would have been $225,000 higher

• Accumulated depreciation would have been $300,000 lower

Using the landscape format, prepare a revised balance sheet for the business giving effect to these differences. (Ignore income tax effects.)

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,500,000

Accounts Payable

$700,000

Accounts Receivable

$1,000,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$600,000

Inventory

$1,800,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$1,500,000

Prepaid Expenses

$300,000

Total Current Liabilities

$2,800,000

Total Current Assets

$4,600,000

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$4,800,000

Owners Equity:

 

Accumulated Depreciation

($1,400,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,000,000

Cost Less Depreciation

$3,400,000

Retained Earnings

$2,200,000

Total Assets

$8,000,000

Total Owners’ Equity

$3,200,000

   

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$8,000,000

do you see anything suspicious in the balance sheet in figure 6 1 that may indicate 626301

Do you see anything suspicious in the balance sheet in Figure 6-1 that may indicate accounting fraud?

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,500,000

Accounts Payable

$700,000

Accounts Receivable

$1,000,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$600,000

Inventory

$1,800,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$1,500,000

Prepaid Expenses

$300,000

Total Current Liabilities

$2,800,000

Total Current Assets

$4,600,000

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$4,800,000

Owners Equity:

 

Accumulated Depreciation

($1,400,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,000,000

Cost Less Depreciation

$3,400,000

Retained Earnings

$2,200,000

Total Assets

$8,000,000

Total Owners’ Equity

$3,200,000

   

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$8,000,000

is this book value of owners rsquo equity a good guide for putting a value on the bu 626302

In reading the company’s latest balance sheet given below, you see that $3,200,000 is reported for owners’ equity. Is this book value of owners’ equity a good guide for putting a value on the business?

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,500,000

Accounts Payable

$700,000

Accounts Receivable

$1,000,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$600,000

Inventory

$1,800,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$1,500,000

Prepaid Expenses

$300,000

Total Current Liabilities

$2,800,000

Total Current Assets

$4,600,000

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$4,800,000

Owners Equity:

 

Accumulated Depreciation

($1,400,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,000,000

Cost Less Depreciation

$3,400,000

Retained Earnings

$2,200,000

Total Assets

$8,000,000

Total Owners’ Equity

$3,200,000

   

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$8,000,000

using the operating ratios for company x whose income statement appears below determ 626308

Using the operating ratios for Company X, whose income statement appears below, determine the balances for the assets and liabilities driven by its sales revenue and expenses.

Sales Revenue

$5,200,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

-3,120,000

Gross Margin

$2,080,000

Selling and General Expenses

-1,430,000

Depreciation Expense

-160,000

Operating Earnings

$490,000

Interest Expense

-97,500

Earnings Before Income Tax

$392,500

Income Tax Expense

-137,375

Net Income

$255,125

determine the balance of cash based on the normative operating ratio for this asset 626309

Determine the balance of cash based on the normative operating ratio for this asset account.

Sales Revenue

$15,400,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

-8,470,000

Gross Margin

$6,930,000

Selling and General Expenses

-4,368,000

Depreciation Expense

-425,000

Operating Earnings

$2,137,000

Interest Expense

-260,000

Earnings Before Income Tax

$1,877,000

Income Tax Expense

-656,950

Net Income

$1,220,050

determine the balance of accounts receivable based on the normative operating ratio 626310

Determine the balance of accounts receivable based on the normative operating ratio for this asset account.

Sales Revenue

$15,400,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

-8,470,000

Gross Margin

$6,930,000

Selling and General Expenses

-4,368,000

Depreciation Expense

-425,000

Operating Earnings

$2,137,000

Interest Expense

-260,000

Earnings Before Income Tax

$1,877,000

Income Tax Expense

-656,950

Net Income

$1,220,050

determine the balance of inventory based on the normative operating ratio for this a 626311

Determine the balance of inventory based on the normative operating ratio for this asset account.

Sales Revenue

$15,400,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

-8,470,000

Gross Margin

$6,930,000

Selling and General Expenses

-4,368,000

Depreciation Expense

-425,000

Operating Earnings

$2,137,000

Interest Expense

-260,000

Earnings Before Income Tax

$1,877,000

Income Tax Expense

-656,950

Net Income

$1,220,050

determine the balance of accounts payable based on the normative operating ratios fo 626313

Determine the balance of accounts payable based on the normative operating ratios for this liability account.

Sales Revenue

$15,400,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

-8,470,000

Gross Margin

$6,930,000

Selling and General Expenses

-4,368,000

Depreciation Expense

-425,000

Operating Earnings

$2,137,000

Interest Expense

-260,000

Earnings Before Income Tax

$1,877,000

Income Tax Expense

-656,950

Net Income

$1,220,050

determine the balance of accrued expenses payable based on the normative operating r 626314

Determine the balance of accrued expenses payable based on the normative operating ratio for this liability account.

Sales Revenue

$15,400,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

-8,470,000

Gross Margin

$6,930,000

Selling and General Expenses

-4,368,000

Depreciation Expense

-425,000

Operating Earnings

$2,137,000

Interest Expense

-260,000

Earnings Before Income Tax

$1,877,000

Income Tax Expense

-656,950

Net Income

$1,220,050

instead of the amounts shown below suppose that the cost of company x rsquo s fixed 626315

Instead of the amounts shown below, suppose that the cost of Company X’s fixed assets was $3,850,000 and that accumulated depreciation was $958,000. Determine the amount of capital the business would have had to raise in this scenario.

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$700,000

Accounts Payable

$350,000

Accounts Receivable

$500,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$165,000

Inventory

$780,000

   

Prepaid Expenses

$110,000

   

Total Current Assets

$2,090,000

   

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$2,450,000

   

Accumulated Depreciation

($685,000)

   

Cost Less Depreciation

$1,765,000

   

Total Assets

$3,855,000

   

would company x have had to raise more capital 626316

Assume that the balances of assets, accounts payable, and accrued expenses payable were the same as shown below. However, the balance of accumulated depreciation was $400,000. In this scenario, would Company X have had to raise more capital?

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$700,000

Accounts Payable

$350,000

Accounts Receivable

$500,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$165,000

Inventory

$780,000

   

Prepaid Expenses

$110,000

   

Total Current Assets

$2,090,000

   

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$2,450,000

   

Accumulated Depreciation

($685,000)

   

Cost Less Depreciation

$1,765,000

   

Total Assets

$3,855,000

   

based on company rsquo s income statement and balance sheet determine the business r 626317

Based on Company’s income statement and balance sheet, determine the business’s accounts receivable operating ratio. Express the ratio in weeks rather than as a percentage.

Sales Revenue

$23,530,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

-14,118,000

Gross Margin

$9,412,000

Selling and General Expenses

-7,722,000

Depreciating Expense

-826,500

Operating Earnings

$863,500

Interest Expense

-245,000

Earnings Before Income Tax

$618,500

Income Tax Expense

-185,550

Net Income

$432,950

 

Assets

 

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

 

Cash

$1,357,500

Accounts Payable

$2,100,000

Accounts Receivable

$2,715,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$742,500

Inventory

$2,172,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$750,000

Prepaid Expenses

$519,750

Total Current Liabilities

$3,592,500

Total Current Assets

$6,764,250

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, &

$4,575,000

Owners’ Equity:

 

Equipment

($1,385,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,500,000

Accumulated Depreciation

$3,190,000

Retained Earnings

$2,861,750

Cost less Depreciation

$9,954,250

Total Owners’ Equity

$4,361,750

Total Assets

 

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$9,954,250

based on company rsquo s income statement and balance sheet determine the business r 626318

Based on Company’s income statement and balance sheet, determine the business’s inventory operating ratio. Express the ratio in weeks rather than as a percentage.

Sales Revenue

$23,530,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

-14,118,000

Gross Margin

$9,412,000

Selling and General Expenses

-7,722,000

Depreciating Expense

-826,500

Operating Earnings

$863,500

Interest Expense

-245,000

Earnings Before Income Tax

$618,500

Income Tax Expense

-185,550

Net Income

$432,950

 

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,357,500

Accounts Payable

$2,100,000

Accounts Receivable

$2,715,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$742,500

Inventory

$2,172,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$750,000

Prepaid Expenses

$519,750

Total Current Liabilities

$3,592,500

Total Current Assets

$6,764,250

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, &

$4,575,000

Owners’ Equity:

 

Equipment

($1,385,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,500,000

Accumulated Depreciation

$3,190,000

Retained Earnings

$2,861,750

Cost less Depreciation

$9,954,250

Total Owners’ Equity

$4,361,750

Total Assets

 

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$9,954,250

based on company rsquo s income statement and balance sheet determine the business r 626319

Based on Company’s income statement and balance sheet, determine the business’s accrued expenses payable operating ratio. Express the ratio in weeks rather than as a percentage.

Sales Revenue

$23,530,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

-14,118,000

Gross Margin

$9,412,000

Selling and General Expenses

-7,722,000

Depreciating Expense

-826,500

Operating Earnings

$863,500

Interest Expense

-245,000

Earnings Before Income Tax

$618,500

Income Tax Expense

-185,550

Net Income

$432,950

 

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,357,500

Accounts Payable

$2,100,000

Accounts Receivable

$2,715,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$742,500

Inventory

$2,172,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$750,000

Prepaid Expenses

$519,750

Total Current Liabilities

$3,592,500

Total Current Assets

$6,764,250

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, &

$4,575,000

Owners’ Equity:

 

Equipment

($1,385,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,500,000

Accumulated Depreciation

$3,190,000

Retained Earnings

$2,861,750

Cost less Depreciation

$9,954,250

Total Owners’ Equity

$4,361,750

Total Assets

 

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$9,954,250

based on company rsquo s income statement and balance sheet determine the business r 626320

Based on Company’s income statement and balance sheet, determine the business’s prepaid expenses operating ratio. Express the ratio in weeks rather than as a percentage.

Sales Revenue

$23,530,000

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

-14,118,000

Gross Margin

$9,412,000

Selling and General Expenses

-7,722,000

Depreciating Expense

-826,500

Operating Earnings

$863,500

Interest Expense

-245,000

Earnings Before Income Tax

$618,500

Income Tax Expense

-185,550

Net Income

$432,950

 

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,357,500

Accounts Payable

$2,100,000

Accounts Receivable

$2,715,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$742,500

Inventory

$2,172,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$750,000

Prepaid Expenses

$519,750

Total Current Liabilities

$3,592,500

Total Current Assets

$6,764,250

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, &

$4,575,000

Owners’ Equity:

 

Equipment

($1,385,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,500,000

Accumulated Depreciation

$3,190,000

Retained Earnings

$2,861,750

Cost less Depreciation

$9,954,250

Total Owners’ Equity

$4,361,750

Total Assets

 

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$9,954,250

based on this additional information about cash dividends what amount of net income 626321

The president of the business also serves as the chair of its board of directors. After you have determined net income for 2007 based on the balance sheet in Figure 8-1, the president tells you that he thinks $200,000 cash dividends were paid to shareowners during 2007. Based on this additional information about cash dividends, what amount of net income did the business earn in 2007?

Balance Sheets at Year-Ends 2006 and 2007

Assets

2006

2007

Changes

Cash

$700,000

$901,000

$201,000

Accounts Receivable

$500,000

$535,000

$35,000

Inventory

$780,000

$825,000

$45,000

Prepaid Expenses

$110,000

$125,000

$15,000

Current Assets

$2,090,000

$2,386,000

 

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$2,450,000

$2,875,000

$425,000

Accumulated Depreciation

($685,000)

($876,000)

($191,000)

Cost Less Depreciation

$1,765,000

$1,999,000

 

Total Assets

$3,855,000

$4,385,000

 

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

     

Accounts Payable

$350,000

$385,000

$35,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$165,000

$205,000

$40,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$500,000

$625,000

$125,000

Current Liabilities

$1,015,000

$1,215,000

 

Long-term Notes Payable

$1,000,000

$1,125,000

$125,000

Owners Equity:

     

Capital

     

did its cash balance decrease 500 000 during the year because of its loss 626322

After you revise your net income answer (see the example question in this section), the president tells you that he has since talked with other directors of the business and realized that he was wrong about the cash dividends. Now he’s fairly certain that $250,000 cash dividends were paid to shareowners during 2007 and that the business issued additional capital stock shares for $50,000. Based on this additional information, what amount of net income did the business earn in 2007?

A business reports $500,000 net loss for the year just ended. It didn’t issue or retire any capital stock shares during the year, and it didn’t pay cash dividends because of its loss in the year. Did its net worth decrease $500,000 during the year? Did its cash balance decrease $500,000 during the year because of its loss?

which dollar amounts in the business rsquo s comparative balance sheet would be diff 626323

Can the net worth of a business go negative? If so, explain briefly how this may happen and if it means that the business would have a negative cash balance.

Presents the comparative balance sheet of the business and to Figure 8-2 that presents its statement of changes in stockholders’ equity. Suppose the business had paid $175,000 cash dividends (instead of $250,000) to stockholders in 2007. In this scenario, which dollar amounts in the business’s comparative balance sheet would be different as the result of this one change?

Balance Sheets at Year-Ends 2006 and 2007

Assets

2006

2007

Changes

Cash

$700,000

$901,000

$201,000

Accounts Receivable

$500,000

$535,000

$35,000

Inventory

$780,000

$825,000

$45,000

Prepaid Expenses

$110,000

$125,000

$15,000

Current Assets

$2,090,000

$2,386,000

 

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$2,450,000

$2,875,000

$425,000

Accumulated Depreciation

($685,000)

($876,000)

($191,000)

Cost Less Depreciation

$1,765,000

$1,999,000

 

Total Assets

$3,855,000

$4,385,000

 

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

     

Accounts Payable

$350,000

$385,000

$35,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$165,000

$205,000

$40,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$500,000

$625,000

$125,000

Current Liabilities

$1,015,000

$1,215,000

 

Long-term Notes Payable

$1,000,000

$1,125,000

$125,000

Owners Equity:

     

Capital

     

 

 

Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity

 

Capital Stock

Retained Earning

Total Owners’ Equity

Balance at end of 2005

$750,000

$922,000

$1,672,000

Net Income – 2006

 

$318,000

 

Cash Dividends – 2006

 

($150,000)

 

Balance at end of 2006

$750,000

$1,090,000

$1,840,000

Capital Stock Issue

$50,000

   

Net Income – 2007

 

$405,000

 

Cash Dividends – 2007

 

($250,000)

 

Balance at end of 2007

$800,000

$1,245,000

$2,045,000

did its cash balance increase 405 000 the same amount as net income 626325

Continuing the example scenario created earlier in this chapter, the president asks you to determine cash flow from profit (net income) in 2007. In other words, he wants to know how much the business’s cash balance increased from making profit in the year. Based on the information in its comparative balance sheet  and its statement of changes in stockholders equity, determine the business’s cash flow from profit for 2007. Did its cash balance increase $405,000, the same amount as net income? Or, did cash increase a different amount? Did cash decrease as the result of the company’s profit-making activities? (It’s possible.)

Balance Sheets at Year-Ends 2006 and 2007

Assets

2006

2007

Changes

Cash

$700,000

$901,000

$201,000

Accounts Receivable

$500,000

$535,000

$35,000

Inventory

$780,000

$825,000

$45,000

Prepaid Expenses

$110,000

$125,000

$15,000

Current Assets

$2,090,000

$2,386,000

 

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$2,450,000

$2,875,000

$425,000

Accumulated Depreciation

($685,000)

($876,000)

($191,000)

Cost Less Depreciation

$1,765,000

$1,999,000

 

Total Assets

$3,855,000

$4,385,000

 

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

     

Accounts Payable

$350,000

$385,000

$35,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$165,000

$205,000

$40,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$500,000

$625,000

$125,000

Current Liabilities

$1,015,000

$1,215,000

 

Long-term Notes Payable

$1,000,000

$1,125,000

$125,000

Owners Equity:

     

Capital

     

 

Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity

 

Capital Stock

Retained Earning

Total Owners’ Equity

Balance at end of 2005

$750,000

$922,000

$1,672,000

Net Income – 2006

 

$318,000

 

Cash Dividends – 2006

 

($150,000)

 

Balance at end of 2006

$750,000

$1,090,000

$1,840,000

Capital Stock Issue

$50,000

   

Net Income – 2007

 

$405,000

 

Cash Dividends – 2007

 

($250,000)

 

Balance at end of 2007

$800,000

$1,245,000

$2,045,000

how should these transactions be recorded in the business rsquo s accounts 626234

Suppose a small business keeps just the following eight accounts.

Cash

 

 

 

Liability for Unpaid Expenses

 

 

 

Inventory

 

 

 

Notes Payable

 

 

 

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

 

 

 

Owner’s Equity

 

 

 

Operating Expenses

 

 

 

Sales Revenue

 

 

The business’s transactions during the year include:

a. Made sales during the year for $2,400 (all were cash sales)

b. The cost of goods sold during the year was $1,600

c. Incurred $425 in operating expenses, which will be paid sometime later

d. Borrowed $10,000 from bank (ignore the interest expense on this note)

e. Cut a check for $275 in payment of operating expenses; these particular expenses are recorded as paid and haven’t been recorded previously in a liability account.

How should these transactions be recorded in the business’s accounts?

what adjusting entry is made at the end of the year 626265

A business makes almost all credit sales. At the end of the year, the business has $485,000 total accounts receivable. This ending balance doesn’t include $28,500 specific accounts receivable that were written off during the period. The business estimates that customers will not pay $6,500 of the ending balance of its accounts receivable. What year-end adjusting entry is made?

The business has more cash than it needs for day-to-day operations, so the excess cash is invested in short-term marketable securities that pay interest. During the year, the business receives interest checks, which it records in the interest income account. At the end of the year, $48,500 interest has been earned but not yet received. This interest will be included in the interest checks the business receives next year. The business hasn’t recorded this earned interest. What adjusting entry is made at the end of the year?

what is the amount of income tax expense reported in its income statement for the ye 626266

At the end of the year, the business owes its employees $58,300 for accumulated vacation and sick pay. This amount will be paid when employees actually take their vacations and time off for sick leave. No entry has been made for this accrued liability. What adjusting entry is made at the end of the year?

Based on the final determination of its federal income tax for the year, the business owes $431,500. During the year, it made $3,978,500 total installment payments towards its income tax, which were charged (debited) to its income tax expense account. The $431,500 balance still owed to the government will be paid when the business’s income tax return is filed later.

a. What adjusting entry is made at the end of the year?

b. What is the amount of income tax expense reported in its income statement for the year?

what entry is made to close the nominal accounts and enter the profit or loss for th 626268

At the end of the year, the business counts and inspects its ending inventory of products on hand, which is stored in its warehouse and retail sales areas. Usually, employees discover some damaged and spoiled products that can’t be sold. This year is no exception. The cost of spoiled and damaged products that will have to be thrown away is $26,300. What adjusting entry is made?

At the end of the year, after all year-end adjusting entries have been made and posted, the balances in the revenue and expense accounts of the business are as follows:

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

$2,725,000

 

 

Sales Revenue

 

$4,526,500

 

Selling & Administrative Expenses

$1,228,500

 

 

Interest Expense

$175,000

 

 

Income Tax Expense

$138,000

 

What entry is made to close the nominal accounts and enter the profit or loss for the year?

what are the balances in the revenue and expense accounts after the closing entry is 626269

The T accounts before the closing entry is recorded are provided here. What are the balances in the revenue and expense accounts after the closing entry is posted? in the revenue and expense accounts of the business are as follows:

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

$2,725,000

 

 

Sales Revenue

 

$4,526,500

 

Selling & Administrative Expenses

$1,228,500

 

 

Interest Expense

$175,000

 

 

Income Tax Expense

$138,000

 

year end adjusting entries have been recorded and posted and the business rsquo s re 626270

The business is organized legally as a partnership and therefore doesn’t pay income tax. (A partnership’s annual taxable income or loss is passed through to its partners who pick up their share of profit or loss in their individual income tax returns.) Year-end adjusting entries have been recorded and posted, and the business’s revenue and expense accounts are provided here. What closing entry is recorded?

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

$687,500

 

 

Sales Revenue

 

$1,764,500

 

Selling & Administrative Expenses

$674,300

 

 

Interest Expense

$76,500

 

a business reports 3 800 000 loss for the year just ended determine two valid scenar 626274

A business reports $346,000 net income (profit) for the year just ended. Determine two valid scenarios for changes in its assets and liabilities resulting from its profit for the year.

A business reports $3,800,000 loss for the year just ended. Determine two valid scenarios for changes in its assets and liabilities resulting from its loss for the year.

A business reports $5,250,000 net income for the year just ended. In its statement of cash flows for the year, the business reports that its cash flow from operating activities (from its profit for the year) is $4,650,000. In other words, its cash balance increased $4,650,000 from its profit-making activities for the year. Determine two valid scenarios for changes in assets other than cash and in liabilities that result from its profit for the year.

prepare the annual income statement of the business in the single step format 626277

The sales revenue and expenses of a business for the year just ended are as follows:

Cost of goods sold expense

$598,500

Income tax expense

None

Interest expense

$378,000

Selling and general expenses

 $896,500

Sales revenue

$1,698,000

Prepare the annual income statement of the business in the single-step format.

do you want the income statement to report one or more of the following expenses 626278

Assume that you are one of the major shareowners of the private business whose annual income statement is shown below. You aren’t a manager of the business or on its board of directors, but as an outside investor, you’re vitally interested in how the business is doing financially. So you carefully read the business’s financial statements, especially its income statement. You depend on the business making a profit in order to pay dividends from profit to its shareowners. Are you satisfied with the extent of expense disclosure in the income statement? Do you want the income statement to report one or more of the following expenses?

• Compensation of officers

• Salaries and wages of employees

• Repairs and maintenance

• Bad debts

• Rents

• Taxes and licenses

• Depreciation

• Advertising

• Pension and profit-sharing plans

• Employee benefit plans

Sales Revenue

$26,000,000.00

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

14,300,000

Gross Margin

$11,700,000.00

Selling and General Expenses

8,700,000

Operating Earnings

$3,000,000.00

Interest Expense

400,000

Earnings Before Income Tax

$2,600,000

Income Tax Expense

910,000

Net Income

$1,690,000

prepare the summary journal entry for sales revenue 626280

From the five summary journal entries for sales revenue and expenses for the year, can you determine the cash flow from profit (that is, the net cash increase or decrease from its profit-making activities for the year)?

The sales revenue entry given below. Assume that accounts receivable increased $500,000 instead of the $1,000,000 increase in that entry. Prepare the summary journal entry for sales revenue.

Cash

$25,000,000.00

Accounts Receivable

$1,000,000

Sales Revenue

$26,000,000.00

prepare the summary journal entry for cost of goods sold expense 626281

Cost of goods sold expense entry given below. Assume that inventory decreased $500,000 during the year because the business sold more products than it purchased. And assume that accounts payable decreased $250,000 during the year because the business paid more of its purchase liabilities than it bought on credit. Prepare the summary journal entry for cost of goods sold expense.

Cost of Goods Sold Expense

$14,300,000.00

Inventory

$2,000,000

Cash

$14,500,000.00

Accounts Payable

$1,800,000

selling and general expenses are 8 700 000 the same as in the example prepare the su 626282

The selling and general expenses entry given below. Assume that prepaid expenses didn’t change during the year. The amounts for depreciation expense and the increases in accounts payable and accrued expenses payable are the same as in the summary journal entry. Selling and general expenses are $8,700,000, the same as in the example. Prepare the summary journal entry for selling and general expenses.

Selling and General Expenses

$8,700,000.00

Prepaid Expenses

$300,000

Cash

$6,900,000.00

Accounts Payable

$850,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$725,000

Accumulated Depreciation

$525,000

prepare the summary journal entry for income tax expense 626283

The income tax expense entry earlier given below. Assume that the business overpaid its income tax for the year; the total of installment payments during the year was $50,000 more than its $910,000 income tax for the year. The overpayment will be refunded to the business. Prepare the summary journal entry for income tax expense.

Income Tax Expense

$910,000.00

Cash

$830,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$80,000.00

prepare the annual income statement of the business in single step form 626284

This comprehensive journal entry for the asset and liability effects of making profit “speaks” to an accountant, who’s familiar with journal entries and debits and credits. Translate this journal entry into plain English, giving an explanation that non-accounting business managers, lenders, and investors can understand.

The effects from sales and expenses for the year just ended for a business were as follows:

Sales revenue was $15,700,000; the business collected $13,900,000 cash from customers, and accounts receivable increased $1,800,000. The cost of products sold during the year was $9,800,000, and the business added $500,000 of products to inventory. It didn’t pay for all $10,300,000 in purchases. Its accounts payable for inventory purchases increased $250,000. Selling and general expenses were $4,860,000. The business added $125,000 to its prepaid expenses balance during the year. It recorded a $145,000 depreciation expense for the year. (Depreciation is included in the selling and general expenses amount reported in its income statement.) Not all expenses were paid for by the end of the year; unpaid expenses caused a $150,000 increase in accounts payable and a $225,000 increase in accrued expenses payable. The business paid $200,000 interest during the year. The amount of unpaid interest at year-end increased $25,000. The business is organized legally as a limited liability company (LLC) and has elected not to pay income tax. Its taxable income for the year is passed through to its shareowners, who include their respective portions of the business’s taxable income in their individual income tax returns.

a. Prepare the annual income statement of the business in single-step form.

b. Prepare a summary journal entry for the sales and for each expense of the business for the year.

c. Prepare a comprehensive entry showing the changes in assets and liabilities from profit for the year.

prepare a schedule of changes in assets and liabilities that summarizes the effects 626285

The comprehensive entry for this business summarizing the changes in assets and liabilities from its sales and expenses for the year is as follows:

Cash

$280,000

Accounts Receivable

$825,000

Inventory

$375,000

Prepaid Expenses

$25,000

Accounts Payable

$955,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$475,000

Accumulated Depreciation

$390,000

Owners’ Equity — Retained Earnings

$875,000

For the business’s board of directors, prepare a schedule of changes in assets and liabilities that summarizes the effects on the business’s financial condition from its profit for the year.

explain the changes in the company rsquo s balance sheet starting with its balance s 626289

After its initial financing and investing activities, the business manufactures its first batch of products. The total cost of this production run is $800,000. No sales have been made yet, but the business is poised to send out its sales force to call on customers. Its balance sheet after the first production run is as follows:

Assets

 

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

 

Cash

$440,000

Accounts Payable

$225,000

Inventory

$800,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$500,000

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$2,000,000

Long-term Notes Payable

$1,500,000

Accumulated Depreciation

($15,000)

Owners Equity:

 

Cost less Depreciation

$1,985,000

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,000,000

Total Assets

$3,225,000

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$3,225,000

Explain the changes in the company’s balance sheet, starting with its balance sheet immediately after its initial financing and investing transactions (see the preceding example question).

does the balance sheet indicate which depreciation methods the business uses to depr 626293

Does the balance sheet shown below report the current replacement costs of the business’s fixed assets (which are labeled “Property, Plant & Equipment” in the balance sheet)? Also, does the balance sheet indicate which depreciation methods the business uses to depreciate its fixed assets?

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,500,000

Accounts Payable

$700,000

Accounts Receivable

$1,000,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$600,000

Inventory

$1,800,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$1,500,000

Prepaid Expenses

$300,000

Total Current Liabilities

$2,800,000

Total Current Assets

$4,600,000

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$4,800,000

Owners Equity:

 

Accumulated Depreciation

($1,400,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,000,000

Cost Less Depreciation

$3,400,000

Retained Earnings

$2,200,000

Total Assets

$8,000,000

Total Owners’ Equity

$3,200,000

   

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$8,000,000

suppose the business sold only services and not products which account s would you n 626295

Suppose the business sold only services and not products. Which account(s) would you not expect to see in its balance sheet?

The balance sheet given below, how would you assess the short-run solvency of the business? (Solvency refers to the ability of a business to pay its liabilities on time.)

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,500,000

Accounts Payable

$700,000

Accounts Receivable

$1,000,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$600,000

Inventory

$1,800,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$1,500,000

Prepaid Expenses

$300,000

Total Current Liabilities

$2,800,000

Total Current Assets

$4,600,000

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$4,800,000

Owners Equity:

 

Accumulated Depreciation

($1,400,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,000,000

Cost Less Depreciation

$3,400,000

Retained Earnings

$2,200,000

Total Assets

$8,000,000

Total Owners’ Equity

$3,200,000

   

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$8,000,000

suppose that just before the end of the year the business paid an additional 400 000 626296

Suppose that just before the end of the year, the business paid an additional $400,000 of its accounts payable. Normally, it would not have accelerated payments of accounts payable, but the order to do so came down from “on high,” and the payments were made. Why do you think the business may have done this?

Suppose the business held its books open for several days into the next year. It recorded an additional $200,000 of payments from customers as if they had been received on December 31 (the last day of its fiscal year) even though the money wasn’t actually received and deposited in its bank account until after the end of the year. Why do think the business may have done this?

 

Q. Determine whether the size of the business’s balance sheet is consistent with the size of its income statement.

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,500,000

Accounts Payable

$700,000

Accounts Receivable

$1,000,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$600,000

Inventory

$1,800,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$1,500,000

Prepaid Expenses

$300,000

Total Current Liabilities

$2,800,000

Total Current Assets

$4,600,000

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$4,800,000

Owners Equity:

 

Accumulated Depreciation

($1,400,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,000,000

Cost Less Depreciation

$3,400,000

Retained Earnings

$2,200,000

Total Assets

$8,000,000

Total Owners’ Equity

$3,200,000

   

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$8,000,000

does the balance sheet presented below give any indication of how old the company is 626298

Does the balance sheet presented below give any indication of how old the company is, or how many years it has been in business? Are there any particular accounts or other items in the balance sheet that indicate whether the company is fairly new or has been around for many years?

Assets

Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

Cash

$1,500,000

Accounts Payable

$700,000

Accounts Receivable

$1,000,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

$600,000

Inventory

$1,800,000

Short-term Notes Payable

$1,500,000

Prepaid Expenses

$300,000

Total Current Liabilities

$2,800,000

Total Current Assets

$4,600,000

Long-term Notes Payable

$2,000,000

Property, Plant, & Equipment

$4,800,000

Owners Equity:

 

Accumulated Depreciation

($1,400,000)

Capital Stock (10,000 shares)

$1,000,000

Cost Less Depreciation

$3,400,000

Retained Earnings

$2,200,000

Total Assets

$8,000,000

Total Owners’ Equity

$3,200,000

   

Total Liabilities & Owners’ Equity

$8,000,000

determine cash flow from investing activities for the year 626197

Three of the four components of cash flow for the year of a business are as follows:

Cash flow from operating  activities

$2,680,000

Cash flow from investing  activities

????

Cash flow from financing  activities

$1,250,000

Net increase (decrease)  in cash during the year

$400,000

Determine cash flow from investing activities for the year.

determine cash flow from operating activities for the year 626199

Three of the four components of cash flow for the year of a business are as follows:

Cash flow from operating  activities

????

Cash flow from investing  activities

($480,000)

Cash flow from financing  activities

($150,000)

Net increase (decrease)  in cash during the year

$150,000

Determine cash flow from operating activities for the year.

how should its balance sheet be adjusted to correct for this accounting fraud ignori 626201

Suppose a business commits accounting fraud by deliberately not writing down its inventory of $268,000, which is the cost of certain products that it can no longer sell and will be thrown in the junk heap. How should its balance sheet be adjusted to correct for this accounting fraud, ignoring income tax effects?

Cash

 

Accounts Payable

 

Accounts Receivable

 

Notes Payable

 

Inventory

 

Owners’ Equity

 

Fixed Assets (Net of Accumulated Depreciation)

_____

 

_____

Total Assets

 

Total Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

 

how should its balance sheet be adjusted to correct for this accounting fraud ignori 626202

Suppose a business commits accounting fraud by deliberately not recording $465,000 liabilities for unpaid expenses at the end of the year. How should its balance sheet be adjusted to correct for this accounting fraud, ignoring income tax effects?

Cash

 

Accounts Payable

 

Accounts Receivable

 

Notes Payable

 

Inventory

 

Owners’ Equity

 

Fixed Assets (Net of Accumulated Depreciation)

_____

 

_____

Total Assets

 

Total Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

 

purchasing and constructing assets that have multi year lives are long term investme 626203

During the year, a business engaged in the following transactions:

a. Borrowed money from a lender (for example, a bank)

b. Purchased products that it put in inventory to be sold to customers at a later date

c. Bought new delivery trucks that will be used for several years

d. Sold to customers products that had been held in inventory

For each transaction, identify which type of transaction it is according to the four basic types:

• Profit-making activities (sales and expenses)

• Set-up and follow-up transactions for sales and expenses

• Investing activities

• Financing activities

Purchasing and constructing assets that have multi-year lives are long-term investments, which are classified as investing activities.

how does each of the following transactions change the company rsquo s financial con 626206

Refer to the eight basic accounts presented in the condensed balance sheet shown below the four assets, the two liabilities, and the two owners’ equities. How does each of the following transactions change the company’s financial condition?

Condensed Balance Sheet

       

Cash

$250,000

 

Operating liabilities

$350,000

Receivables

$300,000

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

$500,000

Inventory

$400,000

 

Owner’s invested capital

$250,000

PP&E, net

$550,000

 

Owner’s retained earnings

$400,000

Assets

$1,500,000

=

Liabilities and Owner’s Equity

$1,500,000

a. The business borrows $500,000 and signs a legal instrument called a note payable to the lender, promising to pay interest over the life of the loan and to return $500,000 at a future date.

b. The business invests $250,000 in a new machine that it will use for several years and pays for the purchase with a check.

c. The business owners invest an additional $750,000 in the business to aid in its growth and expansion.

d. The business distributes $100,000 of the profit it earned during the year to its shareowners.

how does profit change its financial condition 626207

Suppose that all revenue transactions during the year increase cash and that all expense transactions during the year decrease cash. In other words, suppose no other assets and no operating liabilities are affected by the profit-making activities of the business during the year (this scenario isn’t realistic and is assumed only for this problem). The net income (bottom-line profit) of this a typical business for the year is $950,000. How does profit change its financial condition?

Condensed Balance Sheet

   

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

how do these actions change its financial condition 626208

During the year, a business borrowed $850,000 and used $750,000 of those funds to invest in new long-term operating assets. How do these actions change its financial condition?

Condensed Balance Sheet

   

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

how did paying off the note payable change the business rsquo s financial condition 626210

A note payable liability came due (meaning it reached its maturity date) during the year, and the business decided not to renew (or rollover) this loan. Accordingly, the business paid $500,000 to the lender, and the note payable was cancelled. (All interest expense on this debt was recorded correctly during the year.) How did paying off the note payable change the business’s financial condition?

Condensed Balance Sheet

   

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

what are the effects of these collections on the business rsquo s financial conditio 626212

A business sells only to other businesses and makes all sales on credit; it doesn’t have any cash sales or advance payment sales. During the year, the business made $35,000,000 sales. From these sales, the business collected $31,500,000 during the year, and it also collected the $3,250,000 receivables balance at the start of the year. What are the effects of these collections on the business’s financial condition?

Condensed Balance Sheet

   

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

what are the effects of these exchanges on the business rsquo s financial condition 626213

A business requires advance payments on all sales. In other words, it collects cash from customers before products are delivered to them later. During the year, the business received $12,500,000 in advance payments from customers. By the end of the year, the business had delivered 85 percent of products to customers for advance payments received during the year. Also, the business delivered products to customers during the year that fully discharged the $1,500,000 balance in liability for advance payments at the start of the year. What are the effects of these exchanges on the business’s financial condition?

Condensed Balance Sheet

   

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

what are the effects of these returns on the business rsquo s financial condition 626214

During the year, a business made $3,650,000 cash sales. The business has a very liberal product return policy and therefore accepted product returns from customers and refunded $450,000 cash. What are the effects of these returns on the business’s financial condition?

Condensed Balance Sheet

   

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

what are the effects of these events on its financial condition 626215

During its first year of business, a company made $6,250,000 credit sales. The business collected $5,600,000 cash from customers during the year from these sales. Unfortunately, a few customers didn’t pay despite repeated requests and threats of legal action. The business cut off credit to these “deadbeat” customers and refused to make any more credit sales to them. The business had to write off $150,000 uncollectible receivables. What are the effects of these events on its financial condition?

Condensed Balance Sheet

   

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

how did expenses change the financial condition of the business 626218

A business leases all its long-term operating assets (buildings, machines, vehicles, and so on). Thus, it has no depreciation expense. For the year just ended, the business recorded $2,450,000 total expenses. Expenses caused $75,000 increase in operating liabilities. Inventory increased $45,000 during the year. How did expenses change the financial condition of the business?

Condensed Balance Sheet

   

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

how might management go about misstating the expenses in order to boost profit 125 0 626220

A business decides to engage in accounting fraud to improve its profit performance for the year. Of course this is unethical and illegal, but the chief executive of the business is desperate, and the chief accountant agrees to conspire with the chief executive to carry out this accounting fraud. They decide that they can’t manipulate sales revenue for the year, so the accounting fraud has to be done on the expense side of the ledger. The changes in financial condition caused by the actual expenses of the business for the year are given below. How might management go about misstating the expenses in order to boost profit $125,000?

Condensed Balance Sheet

       

Cash

–$4,800,000

 

Operating liabilities

$275,000

Receivables

   

Interest-bearing liabilities

 

Inventory

$50,000.00

 

Owners’ invested capital

 

PP&E, net

–$400,000

 

Owners’ retained earnings

–$5,425,000

Assets

–$5,150,000

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

–$5,150,000

what is the composite change in the year end financial condition of the business cau 626221

Sales revenue

$3,200,000

Less: Expenses

–3,000,000

Equals: Profit

$200,000

Determining the effects of profit on the year-end financial condition of a business is a little more involved than the profit computation. You merge the two summaries of changes in financial condition presented earlier in this chapter — one from revenue (see the section “Concentrating on Sales”) and the second from expenses (see the section “Concentrating on Expenses”) — to determine the composite effect on assets, liabilities, and owners’ retained earnings.

What is the composite change in the year-end financial condition of the business caused by its profit-making activities over the year? Refer back to the financial condition changes caused by sales and expenses, which are presented .

what is the composite effect on financial condition from the company rsquo s profit 626223

Suppose that sales for the year caused the following changes in the company’s financial condition:

Condensed Balance Sheet

Cash

+$3,000,000

 

Operating liabilities

–$50,000

Receivables

+$250,000

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

 

Inventory

 

 

Owners’ invested capital

 

PP&E, net

 

 

Owners’ retained earnings

+$3,300,000

Assets

+$3,250,000

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

+$3,250,000

What is the composite effect on financial condition from the company’s profit-making activities for the year?

Condensed Balance Sheet

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

what is its financial condition at the end of the year ignoring other transactions t 626224

Starting with the financial condition of the business at the beginning of the year (see “Seeing

Both Sides of Business Transactions” earlier in this chapter) and the changes caused by its profit making activities during the year (see “Concentrating on the Composite Effect of Profit and Loss” earlier in this chapter), what is its financial condition at the end of the year, ignoring other transactions that occurred during the year? To help you work this problem, the company’s financial condition at the start of the year is repeated here.

Condensed Balance Sheet

Cash

$250,000

 

Operating liabilities

$350,000

Receivables

$300,000

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

$500,000

Inventory

$400,000

 

Owners’ invested capital

$250,000

PP&E, net

$550,000

 

Owners’ retained earnings

$400,000

Assets

$1,500,000

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

$1,500,000

 

Condensed Balance Sheet

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

taking into account these additional transactions what is the financial condition of 626225

Building on your answer, assume that the business had other non-profit transactions during the year, as follows:

_ Increased its interest-bearing liabilities $100,000.

_ Paid $80,000 distribution from profit to its shareowners

Taking into account these additional transactions, what is the financial condition of the business at the end of the year?

Condensed Balance Sheet

Cash

 

Operating liabilities

Receivables

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

Inventory

 

Owners’ invested capital

PP&E, net

 

Owners’ retained earnings

Assets

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

which of the eight accounts have a high frequency of transactions recorded in them d 626232

The following condensed balance sheet presents eight core accounts of a business. Which of the eight accounts have a high frequency of transactions recorded in them during the year, and which have a low frequency of transactions? In other words, which of these eight are busy accounts, and which are not?

Condensed Balance Sheet

Cash

$250,000

 

Operating liabilities

$350,000

Receivables

$300,000

 

Interest-bearing liabilities

$500,000

Inventory

$400,000

 

Owners’ invested capital

$250,000

PP&E, net

$550,000

 

Owners’ retained earnings

$400,000

Assets

$1,500,000

=

Liabilities and Owners’ Equity

$1,500,000

steel corporation s comparative statements of income and retained earnings and conso 626159

Steel Corporation”s comparative statements of income and retained earnings and consolidated balance sheet for 2010 and 2009 follow: Steel Corporation  Consolidated statement of Earnings For the years ended 2010 December 31, 2009  (USD thousands)

 

December31

 

(1)

(2)

Net sales

2010

2009

Costs and expenses:

$4,876.5

$4,819.4

Cost of sales

$4,202.8

$4,287.3

Depreciation

284

261.1

Estimated restructuring losses

111.8

137.4

Total costs

$4,598.6

$4,685.8

Income from operations

$268.9

$ 133.6

Financing income (expense):

7.7

7.1

Interest and other income

-60

-46.2

Interest and other financing costs

$ 216.6

$ 94.5

Loss before income taxes and cumulative

effect of changes in accounting

Benefit (provision) for income taxes

-37

14.0)

Net earning (loss)

$ 179.6

80.5

Retained earnings, January 1

-859.4

939.9)

 

$ (679.8)

-859.4

Dividends

0

0

Retained earnings, December 31

$ (679.8)

859.4)

Steel Corporation Consolidated balance sheet As of 2010 December 31, and 2009

 

Dec-31

 
 

-1

-2

Assets

2010

2009

Current Assets

 

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 180.0

$ 159.5

Receivables

374.6

519.5

Total

$ 554.6

$ 679.0

Inventories

 

Raw materials and supplies

$ 335.5

$ 331.9

Finished and semi-finished products

604.9

534.9

Contract work in process less billings of

18

16

$10.9 and $2.3

 

Total inventories

$ 958.2

$ 882.9

Other current assets

$ 13.0

$ 7.2

Total current assets

$ 1,525.8

$ 1,569.1

Property, plant and equipment less

$ 2,714.2

$ 2,759.3

accumulated depreciation of $4329.5 and

$4167.8

   

Investments and miscellaneous assets

112

124

Deferred income tax asset – net

885

903

Intangible asset – Pensions

463

427

Total assets

$ 5,700.3

$ 5,782.4

Liabilities and stockholders” equity

Current liabilities

 

Accounts payable

$ 381.4

$ 387.0

Accrued employment costs

208

166

Postretirement benefits other than pensions

150

138

Accrued taxes

72

68

Debt and capital lease obligations

92

88.9

Other current liabilities

146

163.9

Total current liabilities

$ 1,049.6

$ 1,011.2

Pension liability

$ 1,115.0

$ 1,117.1

Postretirement benefits other than pensions

1,415

1,441.40

Long-term debt and capital lease obligations

546.8

668.4

Other

335.6

388.5

Total noncurrent liabilities

$ 3,412.4

# 3,615.4

Total liabilities

$ 4,462.0

$ 4,626.6

Common stockholders” equity

Preferred stock – at $1 per share par value

$ 11.6

$ 11.6

(aggregate liquidation preference of $481.2);

Authorized 20,000,000 shares

Preference stock – at $1 per share par value

2.6

2.6

(aggregate liquidation preference of $88.2);

Authorized 20,000,000 shares

Common stock – at $1 per share par

112.7

111.9

value/Authorized 250,000,000 and

150,000,000 shares; Issued 112,699,869 and

111,882,276 shares

 

Held in treasury, 1,992,189 and 1,996,715

-59.4

-59.5

shares at cost

 

Additional paid-in capital

1,850.60

1,949

Accumulated deficit

679.8)

-859

Total common stockholders” equity

$ 1,238.3

$ 1,155.8

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$ 5,700.3

$ 5,782.4

a. Perform a horizontal and vertical analysis of Steel”s financial statements in a manner similar to Exhibit 57 and Exhibit 58.

b. Comment on the results obtained in part (a).

prepare a statement showing the trend percentages for each item using 1998 as the ba 626160

Ford Motor Company is the world”s second-largest producer of cars and trucks and ranks among the largest providers of financial services in the United States. The following information pertains to Ford: (in millions)

(in millions)

1998

1999

2000

Sales

$118.017

$135,073

$141,230

Cost of goods sold

1,04,616

1,18,985

1,26,120

Gross margin

$ 13,401

$ 16,088

$ 15,110

Operating expenses

7,834

8,874

9,884

Net operating income

$ 5,567

$ 7,214

$ 5,226

a. Prepare a statement showing the trend percentages for each item, using 1998 as the base year.

b. Comment on the trends noted in part (a).

indicate whether the amount of working capital will increase decrease or be unaffect 626162

Tulip Products, Inc., has a current ratio on 2010 December 31, of 2:1 before the following transactions were completed:

• Sold a building for cash.

• Exchanged old equipment for new equipment. (No cash was involved.)

• Declared a cash dividend on preferred stock.

• Sold merchandise on account (at a profit).

• Retired mortgage notes that would have matured in 2011.

• Issued a stock dividend to common stockholders.

• Paid cash for a patent.

• Temporarily invested cash in government bonds.

• Purchased inventory for cash.

• Wrote off an account receivable as uncollectible. Uncollectible amount is less than the balance of the Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts.

• Paid the cash dividend on preferred stock that was declared earlier.

• Purchased a computer and gave a two-year promissory note.

• Collected accounts receivable.

• Borrowed from the bank on a 120-day promissory note.

• Discounted a customer”s note. Interest expense was involved.

Consider each transaction independently of all the others.

a. Indicate whether the amount of working capital will increase, decrease, or be unaffected by each of the transactions.

b. Indicate whether the current ratio will increase, decrease, or be unaffected by each of the transactions.

which one realized the largest dollar change in operating income explain this change 626163

The following selected data are for three companies:

 

Operating Assets

Net Operating
Income

Net  Sales

Company 1

$ 1,404,000

$ 187,200

$ 2,059,200

Company 2

8,424,000

608,400

1,87,20,000

Company 3

37,440,000

4,914,000

3,51,00,000

a. Determine the operating margin, turnover of operating assets, and rate of return on operating assets for each company.

b. In the subsequent year, the following changes took place (no other changes  occurred): Company 1 bought some new machinery at a cost of USD 156,000. Net operating  income increased by USD 12,480 as a result of an increase in sales of USD 249,600.  Company 2 sold some equipment it was using that was relatively unproductive. The book value of the equipment sold was USD 624,000. As a result of the sale of the equipment, sales declined by USD 312,000, and operating income declined by USD 6,240.  Company 3 purchased some new retail outlets at a cost of USD 6,240,000. As a result, sales increased by USD 9,360,000, and operating income increased by USD 499,200.

• Which company has the largest absolute change in:

a. Operating margin ratio?

b. Turnover of operating assets?

c. Rate of return on operating assets?

• Which one realized the largest dollar change in operating income? Explain this change in relation to the changes in the rate of return on operating assets.

assume average common shares outstanding for 2000 and 1999 are 69 600 and 72 000 in 626164

One of the largest spice companies in the world, McCormick & Company, Inc., produces a diverse array of specialty foods. The following information is for McCormick & Company, Inc.:

 

2000

1999

(USD thousands)

 

Net sales

$2,123,500

$2,006,900

Income before interest and taxes

2,25,700

1,74,700

Net income

1,37,500

98,500

Interest expense

39,700

32,400

Stockholders” equity

3,59,300

3,82,400

Common stock, no par value, November 30

1,75,300

1,73,800

Assume average common shares outstanding for 2000 and 1999 are 69,600 and 72,000 (in thousands), respectively. Compute the following for both 2000 and 1999. Then compare and comment. Assume stockholders” equity for 1998 was USD 388,100.

a. EPS of common stock.

b. Net income to net sales.

c. Return on average common stockholders” equity.

d. Times interest earned ratio.

what other comparisons and procedures would you use to complete the analysis of the 626167

The comparative balance sheets of the Darling Corporation for 2011 December 31, and 2010 follow: Darling Corporation Comparative balance sheets 2011 December 31, and 2010 (USD millions)

 

2011

2010

Assets

   

Cash

$ 480,000

$ 96,000

Accounts receivable, net

86,400

1,15,200

Merchandise inventory

3,84,000

4,03,200

Plant and equipment, net

2,68,800

2,88,000

Total assets

$ 1,219,200

$902,400

Liabilities and stockholders” equity

$ 96,000

$ 96,000

Accounts payable

 

Common stock

6,72,000

6,72,000

Retained earnings

4,51,200

1,34,400

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$1,219,200

$902,400

Based on your review of the comparative balance sheets, determine the following:

a. What was the net income for 2011 assuming there were no dividend payments?

b. What was the primary source of the large increase in the cash balance from 2010 to 2011?

c. What are the two main sources of assets for Darling Corporation?

d. What other comparisons and procedures would you use to complete the analysis of the balance sheet?

how effective is the company s credit policy 626168

As Miller Manufacturing Company”s internal  auditor, you are reviewing the company”s credit policy. The following information is from Miller”s annual reports for 2008, 2009, 2010, and 2011:

 

2008

2009

2010

2011

Nets accounts receivable

$

$ 2,160,000

$ 2,700,000

$ 3,600,000

 

1,080,000

     

Net sales

10,800,000

13,950,000

1,71,00,000

1,98,00,000

Management has asked you to calculate and analyze the following in your report: a. If cash sales account for 30 percent of all sales and credit terms are always 1/10, n/60, determine all turnover ratios possible and the number of days” sales in accounts receivable at all possible dates. (The number of days” sales in accounts receivable should be based on year-end accounts receivable and net credit sales.)

b. How effective is the company”s credit policy

are the stockholders as a group common and preferred better off with or without the 626169

Wendy Prince has consulted you about the possibility of investing in one of three companies (Apple, Inc., Baker Company, or Cookie Corp.) by buying its common stock. The companies” investment shares are selling at about the same price. The long-term capital structures of the companies alternatives are as follows:

 

Apple,

Baker

Cookie

 

Inc.

Company

Corp.

Bonds with a 10% interest rate

$2,400,000

Preferred stock with an 8%

$2,400,000

dividend rate

   

Common stock, $10 par value

$4,800,000

2400000

24,00,000

Retained earnings

3,84,000

3,84,000

3,84,000

Total long-term equity

$5,184,000

$5,184,000

$5,184,000

Number of common shares

4,80,000

2,40,000

2,40,000

outstanding

   

Prince has already consulted two investment advisers. One adviser believes that each of the companies will earn USD 300,000 per year before interest and taxes. The other adviser believes that each company will earn about USD 960,000 per year before interest and taxes. Prince has asked you to write a report covering these points:

a. Compute each of the following, using the estimates made by the first and second advisers.

(a)Earnings available for common stockholders assuming a 40 percent tax rate.

(b)EPS of common stock.

(c)Rate of return on total stockholders” equity.

b. Which stock should Prince select if she believes the first adviser?

c. Are the stockholders as a group (common and preferred) better off with or without the use of long-term debt in the companies?

the following selected financial data excerpted from the annual report of appliance 626170

The following selected financial data excerpted from the annual report of Appliance Corporation represents the summary

information which management presented for interested parties to review: Appliance Corporation

Selected Financial Data (USD thousands except per share data)

 

2010

2009

2008

2007

2006

Net sales

$3,049,524

33,72,515

$2,987,054

$3041223

$2,970,626

Cost of sales

22,50,616

24,96,065

22,62,942

23,39,406

22,54,221

Income taxes

74,800

90,200

38,600

15,900

44,400

Income (loss) from continuing

14,996)

1,51,137

51,270

-8,254

79,017

operations

         

percent of income (loss) from

       

continuing operations to net sales

0.5%)

4.50%

1.70%

-0.30%

2.70%

Income (loss) from continuing

       

operations per share

$ (0.14)

1.42

0.48

-0.08

$ 0.75

Dividends paid per share

0.515

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

Average shares outstanding (in

       

thousands)

1,07,062

1,06,795

1,06,252

1,06,077

1,05,761

Working capital

$ 543,431

$ 595,703

$ 406,181

$452,626

$ 509,025

Depreciation of property, plant and

     

equipment

1,02,572

1,10,044

1,02,459

94,032

83,352

Additions to property, plant and

     

equipment

1,52,912

84,136

99,300

1,29,891

1,43,372

Total assets

21,25,066

25,04,327

24,69,498

25,01,490

25,35,068

Long-term debt

5,36,579

6,63,205

724,65

7,89,232

8,09,480

Total debt to capitalization

45.90%

50.70%

60.00%

58.70%

45.90%

Shareowners” equity per share of

     

common stock

$ 6.05

$ 6.82

$ 5.50

$ 9.50

 

a. As a creditor, what do you believe management”s objectives should be? Which of the preceding items of information would assist a creditor in judging management”s performance?

b. As an investor, what do you believe management”s objectives should be? Which of the preceding items of information would assist an investor in judging management”s performance?

c. What other information might be considered useful?

which that company operates sic codes for specific companies are available on compac 626172

In a group of two or three students, go to the library and attempt to locate Dun & Bradstreet”s Industry Norms and Key Business Ratios. You may have to ask the reference librarian for assistance to see if this item is available at your institution. If it is not available at your institution, ask if it is available through an interlibrary loan. (Obviously, if you cannot obtain this item, you cannot do this project.) Then select and obtain the latest annual report of a company of your choice. Determine the company”s SIC Code (a code that indicates the industry in which that company operates). SIC Codes for specific companies are available on COMPACT DISCLOSURE, an electronic source that may be available at your library. As an alternative, you could call the company”s home office to inquire about its SIC Code. The annual report often contains the company”s phone number. From the annual report, determine various ratios for the company, such as the current ratio, debt to equity ratio, and net income to net sales. Then compare these ratios to the industry norms for the company”s SIC Code as given in the Dun & Bradstreet source. Write a report to your instructor summarizing the results of your investigation.

write a report to your instructor summarizing the results of your investigation 626173

In a group of two or three students, obtain the annual report of a company of your choice Identify the major sections of the annual report and the order in which they appear. Would you recommend the order be changed to emphasize the most useful and important information? If so, how? Then describe some specific useful information in each section. Comment on your perceptions of the credibility that a reader of the annual report could reasonably assign to each section of the report. For instance, if such a discussion appears in the annual report you select, would you assign high credibility to everything that appears in the Letter to Stockholders regarding the company”s future prospects? Write a report to your instructor summarizing the results of your investigation.

you are given the following data relating to a company 626181

You are given the following data relating to a company:

Estimated manufacturing overhead per year

USD 24,000

Expected level of activity per year

40,000 machine-hours

Predetermined overhead rate

USD 0.60 per machine-hour

Actual overhead costs incurred during year

USD 22,500

Actual machine-hours

35,000

is each of the following equations correct what key point does each equation raise 626182

Is each of the following equations correct? What key point does each equation raise?

a.

$250,000 Assets

=

$100,000 Liabilities

+

$100,000 Owners’ equity

b.

$2,345,000 Assets

=

$46,900 Liabilities

+

$2,298,100 Owners’ equity

c.

$26,450 Assets

=

$675,000 Liabilities

+

$648,550 Owners’ equity

d.

$648,550 Owners’ equity

=

$4,250,000 Liabilities

+

$400,000 Owners’ equity

compare the profit or loss of your business for its first year according to the cash 626186

You started a new business one year ago. You’ve been very busy dealing with so many problems that you haven’t had time to sit down and look at whether you made a profit or not. You haven’t run out of cash (which for a start-up venture is quite an accomplishment), but you understand that the sustainability of the business depends on making a profit. The following two summaries present cash flow information for the year and information about two assets and a liability at year-end:

Revenue and Expense Cash Flows For First Year

$558,000 cash receipts from sales

$375,000 cash payments for purchases of products

$340,000 cash payments for other expenses

Two Assets and a Liability at Year-End

$52,000 receivables from customers for sales made to them during the year

$85,000 cost of products in ending inventory that haven’t yet been sold

$25,000 liability for unpaid expenses

Compare the profit or loss of your business for its first year according to the cash- and accrual-basis accounting methods.

expand the condensed income statement to reflect this additional information 626188

Take a look at this extremely abbreviated and condensed income statement for a business’s most recent year.

Income Statement for Year

Sales revenue

$26,000,000

Expenses

24,310,000

Net income

$1,690,000

This business sells products, which are also called goods or merchandise. The cost of products sold to customers during the year was $14,300,000. Expand the condensed income statement to reflect this additional information.

is this cash disbursement treated as an expense 626191

Please refer to the income statement for the answer to the example question. Suppose the business distributed $650,000 cash to its shareowners from its profit (net income) for the year. Is this cash disbursement treated as an expense?

Income Statement for Year

Sales revenue

$26,000,000

Expenses

24,310,000

Net income

$1,690,000

using this information prepare the business rsquo s balance sheet 626192

The following list summarizes the assets and liabilities of a business at the close of business on the last day of its most recent profit period:

Amounts owed by customers to the business

$485,000

Cost of unsold products (that will be sold next period)

$678,000

Cash balance on deposit in checking account with bank

$396,000

Amounts owed by business for unpaid purchases and expenses

$438,000

Notes payable to bank (on which interest is paid)

$500,000

Original cost of long-term operating assets that are being depreciated over their useful lives to the business

$950,000

Accumulated depreciation of long-term operating assets

$305,000

Using this information, prepare the business’s balance sheet.

based on the information provided is it possible to determine the amount of cash flo 626195

The statement of cash flows for a business’s most recent year is presented as follows. Based on the information provided, is it possible to determine the amount of cash flow from operating activities?

Cash flow from operating activities:

 

?????

Cash flow from investing activities:

 

 

Capital

($2,345,000)

 

expenditures

 

 

Proceeds from  disposal of real estate

$225,000

($2,120,000)

Cash flow from financing activities:

 

 

Increase in debt

$1,625,000

 

Issue of capital

$550,000

 

stock shares

 

 

Cash dividends to  shareholders

($400,000)

$1,775,000

Net cash increase during year

$355,000

 

determine the increase or decrease in cash during the year 626196

Three of the four components of cash flow for the year of a business are as follows:

Cash flow from operating  activities

$450,000

Cash flow from investing  activities

($725,000)

Cash flow from financing  activities

$50,000

Net increase (decrease)  in cash during the year

????

Determine the increase or decrease in cash during the year.

mechan company develops manufactures markets installs and supports a wide range of s 626115

Mechan Company develops, manufactures, markets, installs and supports a wide range of standards-based LAN and WAN connectivity hardware and software products. The company”s statements of cash flow for the years 2008-2010 follow. Then the relevant portion of Management”s Discussion and Analysis of the statement of cash flows is provided. Consolidated statements of cash flows

Years ended 2010 February 29, and 2009 February 28 and 2008 (In thousands)

 

2010

2009

2008

Cash flows from operating activities:

Net income

$ 164,418

$ 161,974

$ 119,218

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net

cash provided by operating activities:

Depreciation and amortization

32,061

26,832

17,335

Provision for losses on accounts receivable

356

72

1,734

Loss on disposals of property, plant and equipment

93

174

113

Deferred taxes Changes in assets and liabilities:

-38,766

-4,434

-6,151

Accounts receivables

-55,101

27,698)

-17,707

Inventories

-50,483

23,080)

-8,758

Prepaid expenses and other assets

-18,844

3,123)

1,211

Accounts payable and accrued expenses

62,908

11,336

22,003

Income taxes payable

3,705

10,476

-3,924

Net cash provided by operating activities$

1,00,347

$152,529

$125,074

Cash flows from investing activities:

Capital expenditures

$ (65,035)

$ (63,091)

39,399)

Purchase of available-for-sale securities

-79,427

-71,598

30,097)

Purchase of held-to-maturity securities

-2,05,852

-2,82,712

258,517)

Materials of marketable securities

2,08,922

3,23,682

1,97,406

Net cash used in investing activities

$(141,392

$ (93,719)

$(130,607

Cash flows from financing activities:

Repayment of notes receivable from stockholders

$ 174

$ 131

66

Repurchase of common stock

1,173)

-13,070

Tax benefit of options exercised

7,215

5,712

6,980

Common stock issued to employee stock purchase plan

3,323

2,287

1,637

Proceeds from stock option exercise

16,021

4,887

7,185

Net cash provided by (used for) financing activities

$ 25,560

$ (53)

$ 15,868

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash

$ 166

$ 712

$ 161

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

$ (15,319)

$ 59,469

$ 10,469

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

1,14,032

54,563

44,067

Cash and cash equivalents, end of year

$ 98,713

$ 114,032

$ 54,563

Cash paid during the year for: Income taxes

$ 105,233

$ 68,420

$ 67,263

Management”s discussion and analysis Net cash provided by operating activities was USD 100.3 million in fiscal 2010, compared to USD 152.5 million in fiscal 2009 and USD 125.1 million in fiscal 2008. Capital investment for fiscal 2010 of USD 65.0 million included USD 9.8 million for building costs of which USD 3.4 was for the purchase of an engineering building, USD 21.4 million for engineering computer and computer related software and equipment, USD 5.5 million for manufacturing and related equipment and USD 19.0 million for expanding global sales operations. During fiscal 2009, capital expenditures of USD 63.1 million included approximately USD 8.2 million for building costs related to expanding manufacturing and distribution capacities and  enlarging worldwide sales operations, USD 12.5 million for manufacturing and manufacturing support equipment and USD 15.0 million for engineering computer and computer related equipment. Another USD 15.0 million was spent in support of expanded global sales activities. During fiscal 2008, capital expenditures of USD  39.4 million included USD 3.9 million on buildings, USD 10.1 million on engineering equipment, USD 7.8 million on manufacturing capacity expansions and USD 2.0  million to equip new sales offices.  Cash, cash equivalents and marketable securities increased during fiscal 2010 to USD 407.0 million, from USD 345.9 million in the prior fiscal year. State and local municipal bonds of approximately USD 264.2 million, maturing in approximately 1.5  years, were being held by the Company at 2010 February 29. At 2010 February 29, the Company did not have any short or long term borrowing or any significant financial commitments outstanding, other than those required in the normal course of business. In the opinion of management, internally generated funds from operations and existing cash, cash equivalents and marketable securities will be adequate to support  the Company”s working capital and capital expenditures requirements for both short and long term needs.

a. Which method did the company use in arriving at net cash flows from operating activities?

b. Did current assets other than cash increase or decrease during the year ended 2010 February 29?

c. Did current liabilities increase or decrease during the year ended 2010 February 29?

d. What were the main investing activities during this three-year period?

e. What was the main source of cash from financing activities during the threeyear period?

f. Did the company pay any interest expense during the year ended 2010 February 19?

g. Given the following data, calculate the cash flow per share of common stock ratio, the cash flow margin ratio, and the cash flow liquidity ratio. How do these ratios compare with the ratios shown for other companies in the chapter?

(in thousands)

Average number of shares of common stock outstanding

71,839

Net sales

$ 1,069,715

Cash and marketable securities

2,53,540

Current liabilities

1,64,352

prepare a statement of cash flows under the indirect method 626116

The following comparative balance sheets and other data are for

Dayton Tent & Awning Sales, Inc.:

Dayton Tent & Awning Sales, Inc.

Comparative Balance Sheets 2011 June 30 and 2010

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

   

Accounts receivable, net

$ 441,800

$ 332,600

Merchandise inventory

7,50,750

4,32,900

Prepaid insurance

8,19,000

8,50,200

Land

3,900

5,850

Buildings

3,12,000

3,51,000

Machinery and tools

21,84,000

12,09,000

Accumulated depreciation – machinery and

8,58,000

4,68,000

tools

-8,09,250

510,900)

Total assets

$

$

Liabilities and stockholders” equity

45,60,200

31,38,650

Accounts payable

$ 226,750

$ 275,500

Accrued liabilities payable

1,85,800

1,11,700

Bank loans (due in 2009)

56,550

66,300

Mortgage bonds payable

3,82,200

1,85,250

Common stock – $100 par

17,55,000

5,85,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par

58,500

0-

Retained earnings

18,95,400

19,14,900

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$

$

 

45,60,200

31,38,650

Net income for the year was USD 128,000.

Depreciation for the year was USD 356,850.

There was a gain of USD 7,800 on the sale of land. The land was sold for USD 46,800. The additional mortgage bonds were issued at face value as partial payment for a

building valued at USD 975,000. The amount of cash paid was USD 778,050.

Machinery and tools were purchased for USD 448,500 cash. Fully depreciated machinery with a cost of USD 58,500 was scrapped and written off.

Additional common stock was issued at USD 105 per share. The total proceeds  were USD 1,228,500.

Dividends declared and paid were USD 147,500.

A payment was made on the bank loan, USD 9,750.

The company paid interest of USD 9,000 and income taxes of USD 75,000.

a. Prepare a working paper for a statement of cash flows.

b. Prepare a statement of cash flows under the indirect method. Also prepare any

prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash fl 626117

The following income statement and other data are for

Kennesaw Auto Glass Specialists, Inc..

Kennesaw auto glass specialists, Inc.

Income Statement For the year ended 2010 December 31

Sales

 

$450,000

Cost of goods sold

1,25,000

Gross margin

$325,000

Operating expenses (other than depreciation) $60,000

$60,000

 

Depreciation expense 20,000

20,000

80,000

Net income

$245,000

Changes in current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities during the year were:

 

Increase

Decrease

Accounts receivable

$15,000

 

Merchandise inventory

$25,000

Prepaid insurance

8,000

 

Accounts payable

15,000

Accrued liabilities payable

4,000

 

Depreciation was the only noncash item affecting net income.

a. Prepare a working paper to calculate cash flows from operating activities under the direct method.

b. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the direct method.

c. Prove that the same cash flows amount is obtained under the indirect method by preparing the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash  flows under the indirect method. You need not prepare a working paper.

founded in 1901 the gillette company is the world leader in male grooming products a 626120

Founded in 1901, The Gillette Company is the world leader in male grooming products, a category that includes blades and razors, shaving preparations and electric shavers. Gillette also holds the number one position worldwide in selected female grooming products, such as wet shaving products and hair epilation devices. The Company is the world”s top seller of writing instruments and correction products, toothbrushes and oral care appliances. In addition, the Company is the world leader in alkaline batteries.

Gillette manufacturing operations are conducted at 38 facilities in 19 countries, and products are distributed through wholesalers, retailers, and agents in over 200 countries and territories.

The company”s statements of cash flows for the years 2001-2003 follow. Then the relevant portion of Management”s Discussion and Analysis of the statement of cash flows is provided. Consolidated statement of cash flows (millions of dollars)

Years ended 2003,2002, 2001 December31

2003

2002

2001

Operating activities

   

Income from continuing operations

$ 832

$1,248

$1,073

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net

provided by operating activities:

572

440

Provision of restructuring and asset impairment

535

464

421

Depreciation and amortization

5

-7

-46

Other

     

Changes in assets and liabilities, excluding

effects from acquisition and divestitures:

Accounts receivable

-100

48)

-442

Inventories

149

140)

-62

Accounts payable and accrued liabilities

-45

65

72

Other working capital items

-136

97

-104

Other noncurrent assets and liabilities

-197

252)

-142

Funding German pension plans

-252

Net cash provided by operating activities

$ 1,604

$1,427

$ 958

Investing activities

   

Additions to property, plant and equipment

$ (793)

$ (889)

$ (952)

Disposals of property, plant and equipment

41

124

65

Acquisitions of businesses, less cash acquired

-91

Sale of businesses

539

200

Other

-1

2

5

Net cash used in investing act

$(214)

$ (763)

$ (773)

Financing activities

   

Purchase of treasury stock

$ (944)

$(2,021)

$(1,066)

Proceeds from sale of put options

23

72

56

Proceeds from exercise of stock options and

36

149

126

purchase plans

   

Proceeds from long-term debt

494

1,105

500

Repayment of long-term debt

-365

-12

Increase (decrease) in loans payable

-385

484

708

Dividends paid

-671

-626

-552

Settlements of debt-related derivative contracts

279

42

9

Net cash used in financing activities

$ (1,553)

$ (795)

$ (231)

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash

$ (5)

$ (2)

$ (2)

Net cash provided by discontinued operations

130

111

45

Decrease in cash and cash equivalents

$ (18)

$ (22)

$ (3)

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of

80

102

105

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

$ 62

$ 80

$ 102

Supplemental disclosure of cash paid for:

Interest

$ 243

$ 126

$ 120

Income taxes

$ 480

$ 457

$ 473

Noncash investing and financing activities:

Acquisition of businesses

 

Fair value of assets acquired

$—

$—

$ 100

Cash paid

91

Liabilities assumed

$ —

$ —-

$ 9

 Management”s discussion and analysis –

Financial*

Financial condition

The Company”s financial condition continued to be strong in 2003. Net debt (total debt net of associated swaps, less cash and cash equivalents) decreased USD 82 million during 2003, despite additional spending under the Company”s share repurchase program, due to improved cash flow from operations, proceeds from the sale of the Stationery Products business and the favorable exchange impact on foreign currency debt. Net debt at 2003 December 31, amounted to USD 4.45 billion, compared with USD 4.53 billion and USD 3.18 billion at 2002 December 31 and 2001, respectively. The market value of Gillette equity was USD 38 billion at the end of 2003, compared with USD 43 billion at the end of 2002. The Company”s book equity position amounted to USD 1.92 billion at the end of 2003, compared with

USD 3.06 billion at the end of 2002 and USD 4.54 billion at the end of 2001. The decreases in book equity in 2003 and 2002 were due primarily to the Gillette share repurchase program, as well as to the effect of foreign currency translation.

Net cash provided by operating activities in 2003 was USD 1.60 billion, compared with USD 1.43 billion in 2002 and USD .96 billion in 2001. The current ratio of the

Company was .86 for 2003, compared with ratios of 1.39 for 2002 and 1.40 for 2001.

The decrease in the 2003 current ratio was primarily attributable to the Company”s reclassification of all commercial paper borrowings to short-term debt, due to the

Company”s credit facility agreements expiring within 2001. Capital spending in 2003 amounted to USD 793 million, compared with USD 889 million in 2002 and USD 952 million in 2001. Spending in all three years reflected substantial investments in the blade and razor, Duracell and Braun Products segments.

In 2003, the Company sold the Stationery Products business for USD 528 million.

In 2001, the Company made acquisitions in the Duracell Products segment for USD 100 million and sold the Jafra business for USD 200 million. Share repurchase funding in 2003, net of proceeds received from the sale of put options on Company stock, amounted to USD 921 million, compared with USD 1,949 million in 2002 and USD 1,010 million in 2001.

Strong cash inflows from operations, proceeds from the sale of the Stationery Products business and alternate financing sources enabled the Company to reduce its USD 2.0 billion revolving credit facility in 2003 to USD 1.4 billion, expiring October 2004, and its USD 1.1 billion credit facility, expiring December 2004, to USD 550 million in January 2004. Both facilities are used by the Company to complement its commercial paper program.

In order to increase flexibility in sourcing short-term borrowing, the Company launched a USD 1 billion Euro commercial paper program in 2003. At year-end 2003, there was USD 586 million outstanding under this program and USD 1.45 billion outstanding under the US program, compared with USD 2.41 billion at the end of 2002 and USD 1.66 billion at the end of 2001.

During 2003, the Company issued Euro-denominated notes for USD 228 million, due December 2005, and entered into a USD 264 million Euro-denominated debt obligation, with redemption rights in December 2004. During 2002, the Company  issued Euro-denominated notes for USD 343 million, due February 2007, and entered into a USD 325 million Euro-denominated debt obligation, with redemption rights in March 2005, and a USD 437 million Euro-denominated debt obligation, with redemption rights in January 2007. The net proceeds were used to refinance existing short-term debt associated with the Company”s share repurchase program.

During 2003, both Standard & Poor”s and Moody”s maintained the Company”s current credit ratings. Standard & Poor”s rates the Company”s long-term debt at AA, while Moody”s rating is Aa3. The commercial paper rating is A1+ by Standard & Poor”s and P1 by Moody”s.

Gillette will continue to have capital available for growth through both internally generated funds and significant credit resources. The Company has substantial  unused lines of credit and access to worldwide financial market sources for funds. Source: The Gillette Company”s 2000 annual report, p. 22.

a. Does the company use the direct or indirect method of calculating net cash provided by operating activities?

b. Determine whether each of the current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities increased or decreased during 2003.

c. How is the company expanding its asset base?

d. How much greater is the total market value of the company”s outstanding shares of common stock than the book equity (stockholders; equity)?

e. What is the likelihood that the company will be able to pay at least the current  level of dividends in the future?

f. Do you expect to see purchases of treasury stock increase or decrease in the future?

g. Given the following data, calculate the cash flow per share of common stock ratio, the cash flow margin ratio, and the cash flow liquidity ratio. (Round the net cash provided by operating activities to the nearest million before you calculate the ratios.) How do the ratios compare with the ones for companies illustrated in the chapter?

 

(in millions)

Average number of shares of common stock

1,059

outstanding

Net sales

9,295

Cash and marketable securities

62

Current liabilities

5,471

prepare a statement of cash flows under the indirect method also prepare any necessa 626121

The following information is from the accounting records  of Wescott Office Supplies, Inc., for the fiscal years 2011 and 2010:

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

$ 66,250

$ 61,000

Accounts receivable, net

84,000

42,000

Merchandise inventory

42,000

48,250

Prepaid expenses

7,875

12,125

Land

94,500

78,750

Buildings

1,99,500

1,47,000

Accumulated depreciation – buildings

-31,500

-26,250

Equipment

2,57,250

2,10,000

Accumulated depreciation- equipment

-78,750

-63,000

Total assets

$641,125

$509,875

Liabilities and stockholders” equity

Accounts payable

$73,500

$ 47,250

Accrued liabilities payable

50,500

55,750

Five-year note payable

52,500

-0-

Capital stock -$50 par

4,20,000

3,67,500

Retained earnings

39,375

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$641,125

$509,875

Net income for year ended 2011 June 30, was USD 56,250.

Additional land was acquired for cash, USD 15,750.

No equipment or building retirements occurred during the year.

Equipment was purchased for cash, USD 47,250.

The five-year note for USD 52,500 was issued to pay for a building erected on land leased by the company. Stock was issued at par for cash, USD 52,500.

Dividends declared and paid were USD 51,000. The company paid interest of USD 10,000 and income taxes of USD 40,000.

a. Prepare a working paper for a statement of cash flows.

b. Prepare a statement of cash flows under the indirect method. Also prepare any necessary supplemental schedule(s).

national sports inc is a sports equipment sales company during 2011 the company repl 626122

National Sports, Inc., is a sports equipment sales company. During 2011, the company replaced USD 18,000 of its fully depreciated equipment with new equipment costing USD 23,000. Although a midyear dividend of USD 5,000 was paid, the company found it necessary to borrow USD 5,000 from its bank on a two-year note. Further borrowing may be needed since the Cash account is dangerously low at year-end.

Following are the income statement and “cash flow statement”, as the company”s accountant calls it, for 2011.

National Sports, Inc.

   

Income Statements For the year ended 2011 December 31

Sales

 

$195,000

 

Cost of goods sold

$140,000

   

Operating expense and taxes

49,700

1,89,700

 

Net income

 

$5,300

 

National Sports, Inc.

Cash flow Statement For the Year ended 2011 December 31

Cash received:

   

From operations:

   

Net income

 

$5,300

 

Depreciation

 

5,000

 

Total cash from operations

$10,300

 

Note issued to back

5,000

 

Mortgage note issued

16,000

 

Total funds provided

$31,300

 

Cash paid:

     

New equipment

$23,000

   

Dividends

5,000

28,000

 

Increase in cash

$ 3,300

 

The company”s president is very concerned about what he sees in these  statements and how it relates to what he knows has actually happened. He turns to  you for help. Specifically, he wants to know why the cash flow statement shows an increase in cash of USD 3,300 when he knows the cash balance decreased from USD 15,000 to USD 500 during the year. Also, why is depreciation shown as providing  cash?

You believe you can answer the president”s questions after receiving the following condensed balance sheet data:

National Sports, Inc.

Comparative Balance Sheets 2011 December 31, and 2010 December 31

Assets

2011

2010

Current assets:

 

Cash

$ 500

$ 15,000

Accounts receivable, net

17,800

13,200

Merchandise inventory

28,500

17,500

Prepaid expenses

700

300

Total current assets

$ 47,500

$ 46,000

Property, plant, and equipment:

Equipment

$40,000

 

Accumulated depreciation – equipment

-11,000

 

Total property, plant, and equipment

$ 29,000

 

Liabilities and stockholders” equity

Current liabilities:

 

Accounts payable

$ 8,700

$ 10,000

Accrued liabilities payable

600

1,100

Total current liabilities

$ 9,300

$ 11,100

Long-term liabilities:

Notes payable

5,000

-0-

Mortgage note payable

16,000

-0-

Total liabilities

$ 30,300

$ 11,100

Stockholders” equity:

Common stock

$ 40,000

$ 40,000

Retained earnings

6,200

5,900

Total stockholders” equity

$ 46,200

$ 45,900

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$ 76,500

$ 57,000

Prepare a correct statement of cash flows using the indirect method that shows why National Sports, Inc., is having such a difficult time keeping sufficient cash on hand. Also, answer the president”s questions. The company paid interest of USD 400 and income taxes of USD 3,000.

following are comparative balance sheets for hardiplank siding inc 626123

Following are comparative balance sheets for Hardiplank Siding, Inc.:

Hardiplank Siding, Inc.

Comparative Balance Sheets 2011 December 31, and 2010

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

$ 80,000

$ 57,500

Accounts receivable, net

60,000

45,000

Merchandise inventory

90,000

52,500

Land

67,500

60,000

Buildings

90,000

90,000

Accumulated depreciation buildings

-30,000

27,000)

Equipment

2,85,000

2,25,000

Accumulated depreciation –

-52,500

48,000)

equipment

 

Goodwill

1,20,000

1,50,000

Total assets

$710,000$

710,000$605,000

Liabilities and stockholders” equity

Accounts payable

$ 95,000

$ 65,000

Accrued liabilities payable

30,000

22,500

Capital stock

3,15,000

3,00,000

Paid-in capital – stock dividends

75,000

67,500

Paid-in capital – land donations

15,000

0-

Retained earnings

1,80,000

1,50,000

Total liabilities and stockholders”

$710,000$

710,000$605,000

equity

   

An analysis of the Retained Earnings account for the year reveals the following:

Balance, 2011 January 1

$150,000

Add: Net income for the year

1,07,500

Less: cash dividends

$55,000

$257,500

Stock dividends

22,500

77,500

Balance, 2011 December 31

$180,000

a. Equipment with a cost of USD 30,000 on which USD 27,000 of depreciation had been accumulated was sold during the year at a loss of USD 1,500. Included in net income is a gain on the sale of land of USD 9,000.

b. The president of the company has set two goals for 2012: (1) increase cash by  USD 40,000 and (2) increase cash dividends by USD 35,000. The company”s activities in 2012 are expected to be quite similar to those of 2011, and no new fixed assets will be acquired.

Prepare a schedule showing cash flows from operating activities under the indirect method for 2011. Can the company meet its president”s goals for 2012? Explain.

from the information that is available does it appear that the company is performing 626124

Refer to the Annual report appendix. Evaluate the ease with which The Limited will be able to maintain its dividend payments in the future at 2006 amounts. (Hint: Compare current dividend amount with net cash provided by operating activities.)

Annual report analysis D Refer to “A broader perspective: Johnson & Johnson” and answer the following questions:

a. Over the last three years from which major activities (operations, investing, financing) has Johnson & Johnson received net cash inflows and on which major activities have they spent the funds?

b. What relationship do you see between “Depreciation and amortization of property and intangibles” and “Additions of property, plant, and equipment”?

c. What were the two major sources of cash outflows to stockholders and which was larger?

d. By how much did the investments in marketable securities grow or shrink over the three-year period?

e. By how much did long-term debt grow or shrink over the three-year period?

f. If you were a stockholder, would you feel uncertain or confident that this company will be able to pay future dividends at the same rate as in the past?

g. For what reason or reasons might the company be buying back its own stock?

h. For the latest year, did the current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities go up or down?

i. From the information that is available, does it appear that the company is performing well or poorly?

the following data were abstracted from the 2007 december 31 balance sheet of andrew 626129

The following data were abstracted from the 2007 December 31, balance sheet of Andrews Company (use for the first two questions questions):

Cash

$136,000

Marketable securities

64,000

Accounts and notes receivable, net

1,84,000

Merchandise inventory

2,44,000

Prepaid expenses

12,000

Accounts and notes payable, short-term

2,56,000

Accrued liabilities

64,000

Bonds payable, long-term

4,00,000

 The current ratio is:

a. 1:2.

b. 2:1.

c. 1.2:1.

d. 3:1.

 The acid-test ratio is:

a. 1:2.

b. 2:1.

c. 1.2:1.

d. 3:1.

benson company shows the following data on its 2011 financial statements use for the 626130

Benson Company shows the following data on its 2011 financial statements (use for the rest of the questions ):

Accounts receivable, January 1

$720,000

Accounts receivable, December 31

9,60,000

Merchandise inventory, January 1

9,00,000

Merchandise inventory, December 31

10,20,000

Gross sales

48,00,000

Sales returns and allowances

1,80,000

Net sales

46,20,000

Cost of goods sold

33,60,000

Income before interest and taxes

7,20,000

Interest on bonds

1,92,000

Net income

3,84,000

The accounts receivable turnover is:

a. 5.5 times per year.

b. 5.714 times per year.

c. 5 times per year.

d. 6.667 times per year.

The inventory turnover is:

a. 5 times per year.

b. 4.8125 times per year.

c. 3.5 times per year.

d. 4 times per year.

The times interest earned ratio is:

a. 4.75 times per year.

b. 3.75 times per year.

c. 2 times per year.

d. 3 times per year.

income statement data for boston company for 2009 and 2010 follow 626138

Income statement data for Boston Company for 2009 and 2010 follow:

 

2009

2010

Net sales

$2,610,000

$1,936,000

Cost of goods sold

18,29,600

12,56,400

Selling expenses

3,96,800

3,50,000

Administrative expenses

2,34,800

1,98,400

Federal income taxes

57,600

54,000

Real world question From the financial statements of The Limited in the Annual report appendix, determine the 2003 cash flow margin.Real world question From the financial statements of The Limited in the Annual report appendix, determine the 2003 cash flow margin.

compute the cash flow margin 626141

Columbia Corporation had the following selected financial data for 2009 December 31: Net cash provided by operating activities

Net sales

$1,800,000

Cost of goods sold

10,80,000

Operating expenses

3,15,000

Net income

1,95,000

Total assets

10,00,000

Net cash provided by operating

25,000

activities

 

Compute the cash flow margin.

from the following partial income statement calculate the inventory turnover for the 626142

From the following partial income statement, calculate the inventory turnover for the period.

Net sales

 

$2,028,000

Cost of goods sold:

 

Beginning inventory

$ 234,000

 

Purchases

12,36,000

 

Cost of goods available for sale

$1,560,000

Less: Ending inventory

2,65,200

 

Cost of goods sold

12,94,800

Gross margin

$ 733,200

Operating expenses

3,27,600

Net operating income

$ 405,600

loom s comparative statements of income and retained earnings for 2010 and 2009 are 626151

Loom”s comparative statements of income and retained earnings for 2010 and 2009 are given below. Loom Consolidated statement of earnings For the years ended 2010 December 31, and 2009 (USD thousands, except per data share)

 

Dec-31

 
 

(1)

(2)

 

2010

2009

Net sales

$2,403,100

$2,297,800

Cost of sales

18,85,700

16,51,300

Gross earnings

$ 517,400

$ 646,500

Selling, general and administrative expenses

4,29,700

3,76,300

Goodwill amortization

37,300

35,200

Impairment write down of goodwill

1,58,500

0

Operating earnings (loss)

$(108,100)

$235,000

Interest expense

-1,16,900

-95,400

Other expense-net

-21,700

-6,100

Earnings (loss) before income tax (benefit)

$ (246,700)

$133,500

expense, extraordinary item and cumulative

effect of change in accounting principles

Income tax (benefit) expense

(19,400)

73,200

Earnings (loss) before cumulative effect

$ (227,300)

$60,300

change in account principles

Cumulative effect of change in accounting

principles:

 

Pre-operating costs

(5,200)

0

Net earnings (loss)

$ (232,500)

$60,300

Retained earnings, January 1

6,80,600

6,20,300

 

$ 448,100

$680,600

Dividends

0

0

Retained earnings, December 31

$ 448,100

$680,600

Loom Consolidated balance sheet As of 2010 December 31, and 2009 (USD thousands)

 

Dec-31

 
 

(1)

(2)

Assets

2010

2009

Current assets

 

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 26,500

$ 49,400

Notes and accounts receivable (less allowance

2,61,000

2,95,600

for possible losses of $26,600,000 and

$20,700,000, respectively)

Inventories

 

Finished goods

5,22,300

4,96,200

Work in process

1,32,400

1,41,500

Materials and supplies

44,800

39,100

Other

72,800

54,800

Total current assets

$ 1,059,800

$ 1,076,600

Property, plant, and equipment

Land

$ 20,100

$ 19,300

Buildings, structures and improvements

4,86,400

4,35,600

Machinery and equipment

10,76,600

10,41,300

Construction in progress

24,200

35,200

Total property, plant and equipment

$ 1,607,300

$ 1,531,400

Less accumulated depreciation

5,78,900

4,73,200

Net property, plant and equipment

$ 1,028,400

$ 1,058,200

Other assets

 

Goodwill (less accumulated amortization of

$ 771,100

$ 965,800

$257,800,000 and $242,400,000,

respectively).

 

Other

60,200

62,900

Total other assets

$831,300

$ 1,028,700

Total assets

$ 2,919,500

$ 3,163,500

Liabilities and stockholders” equity

Current liabilities

 

Current maturities of long-term debt

$ 14,600

$ 23,100

Trade accounts payable

60,100

1,13,300

Accrued insurance obligations

38,800

23,600

Accrued advertising and promotion

23,800

23,400

Interest payable

16,000

18,300

Accrued payroll and vacation pay

15,300

33,100

Accrued pension

11,300

19,800

Other accounts payable and accrued expenses

1,23,900

77,200

Total current liabilities

$ 303,800

$ 331,800

Noncurrent liabilities

Long-term debt

14,27,200

14,40,200

Net deferred income taxes

0

43,400

Other

2,92,900

2,22,300

Total noncurrent liabilities

$ 1,720,000

$ 1,705,900

Total liabilities

$ 2,023,900

$ 2,037,700

Common stockholders” equity

Common stock and capital in excess of par

value, $.01 par value; authorized, Class A,

200,000,000 shares, Class B, 30,000,000

shares; issued and outstanding:

Class A Common Stock, 69,268,701 and

$ 465,600

$ 463,700

69,160,349 shares, respectively

Class B Common Stock, 6,690,976 shares

4,400

4,400

Retained earnings

4,48,100

6,80,600

Currency translation and minimum pension

-22,500

-22,900

liability adjustments

Total common stockholders” equity

$ 895,600

$ 1,125,800

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$ 2,919,500

$ 3,163,500

Perform a horizontal and vertical analysis of Loom”s financial statements in a manner similar to those illustrated in this chapter. Comment on the results of the analysis in (a).

prepare a statement showing the trend percentages for each item using 1997 as the ba 626152

Deere & Company manufactures, distributes, and finances a full range of agricultural equipment; a broad range of industrial equipment for  construction, forestry, and public works; and a variety of lawn and grounds care equipment. The company also provides credit, health care, and insurance products for businesses and the general public. Consider the following information from the Deere & Company 2000 Annual Report:

(in millions)

1997

1998

1999

2000

Sales

$12,791

$13,822

$11,751

$13,137

Cost of goods sold

8,481

9,234

8,178

8,936

Gross margin

4,310

4,588

3,573

4,201

Operating expenses

2,694

2,841

3,021

3,236

Net operating income

$ 1,616

$ 1,747

$ 552

$ 965

a. Prepare a statement showing the trend percentages for each item using 1997 as the base year.

b. Comment on the trends noted in part (a).

comment briefly on the company s short term financial position 626153

The following data are for Toy Company:

 

31 December

 

2011

2010

Allowance for uncollectible accounts

$72,000

$57,000

Prepaid expenses

34,500

45,000

Accrued liabilities

2,10,000

1,86,000

Cash in Bank A

10,95,000

9,75,000

Wages payable

-0-

37,500

Accounts payable

7,14,000

5,85,000

Merchandise inventory

13,42,500

14,37,000

Bonds payable, due in 2005

6,15,000

5,94,000

Marketable securities

2,17,500

1,47,000

Notes payable (due in six months)

3,00,000

1,95,000

Accounts receivable

9,07,500

8,70,000

Cash flow from operating activities

1,92,000

1,80,000

a. Compute the amount of working capital at both year-end dates.

b. Compute the current ratio at both year-end dates.

c. Compute the acid-test ratio at both year-end dates.

d. Compute the cash flow liquidity ratio at both year-end dates.

e. Comment briefly on the company”s short-term financial position.

show the computations the accountant made 626155

Digital Company has net operating income of USD 500,000 and

operating assets of USD 2,000,000.

Its net sales are USD 4,000,000.

The accountant for the company computes the rate of return on operating assets after computing the operating margin and the turnover of operating assets.

a. Show the computations the accountant made.

b. Indicate whether the operating margin and turnover increase or decrease after each of the following changes. Then determine what the actual rate of return on operating assets would be. The events are not interrelated; consider each separately, starting from the original earning power position. No other changes occurred.

(a)Sales increased by USD 160,000. There was no change in the amount of operating income and no change in operating assets.

(b)Management found some cost savings in the manufacturing process. The amount of reduction in operating expenses was USD 40,000. The savings resulted from the use of less materials to manufacture the same quantity of goods. As a result, average inventory was USD 16,000 lower than it otherwise would have been. Operating income was not affected by the reduction in inventory.

(c)The company invested USD 80,000 of cash (received on accounts receivable) in a plot of land it plans to use in the future (a non-operating asset); income was not affected.

(d)The federal income tax rate increased and caused income tax expense to increase by USD 20,000. The taxes have not yet been paid.

(e)The company issued bonds and used the proceeds to buy USD 400,000 of machinery to be used in the business. Interest payments are USD 20,000 per year. Net operating income increased by USD 100,000 (net sales did not change).

compute the following for both 2000 and 1999 then compare and comment 626156

Polaroid Corporation designs, manufactures, and markets worldwide \ instant photographic cameras and films, electronic imaging recording devices,  conventional films, and light polarizing filters and lenses. The following information is for Polaroid:

(in millions)

2,000

1999

Net sales

$13,994

$14,089

Income before interest and taxes

2,310

2,251

Net income

1,407

1,392

Interest expense

178

142

Stockholders” equity (on 1998 December 31,

3,428

3,912

$3,988)

   

Common stock, par value $1, December 31

978

978

Compute the following for both 2000 and 1999. Then compare and comment.

a. EPS of common stock.

b. Net income to net sales.

c. Net income to average common stockholders” equity.

d. Times interest earned ratio.

the walt disney company operates several ranges of products from theme parks and res 626157

The Walt Disney Company operates several ranges of products from theme parks and resorts to broadcasting and other creative content. The following balance sheet and supplementary data are for The Walt Disney Company for 2000.

The Walt Disney Company Consolidated balance sheet For 2000 September 30 (USD millions)

Assets

   

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 842

Receivables

3,599

Inventories

702

and television costs

1,162

Other

 

1,258

Total current costs

$7,563

and television costs

5,339

Investments

2,270

Theme parks, resorts, and other property,

Attractions, buildings, and equipment

$16,160

 

Accumulated depreciation

(6,892)

9,718

Project in process

1,995

Land

 

597

Intangibles assets, net

16,117

Other assets

1,428

Total assets

$25,027

Liabilities and stockholders” equity

Accounts payable and accrued liabilities

$ 5,161

Current portion of borrowing

2,502

Unearned royalties

739

Total current liabilities

$ 8,402

Borrowings

6,959

Deferred income taxes

2,833

Other long-term liabilities

2,377

Minority interest

356

Common shareholders” equity

Common shares ($.01 par value)

$12,101

 

Retained earnings

12,767

 

Cumulative translation and other adjustments

(28)

 

Treasury shares

(740)

24,100

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$45,027

• Net income, USD 920.

• Income before interest and taxes, USD 3,231.

• Cost of goods sold, USD 21,321.

• Net sales, USD 25,402.

• Inventory on 1999 September 30, USD 796.

• Total interest expense for the year, USD 598.

Calculate the following ratios and show your computations. For calculations normally involving averages, such as average stockholders” equity, use year-end amounts unless the necessary information is provided.

a. Current ratio.

b. Net income to average common stockholders” equity.

c. Inventory turnover.

d. Number of days” sales in accounts receivable (assume 365 days in 2000).

e. EPS of common stock (ignore treasury stock).

f. Times interest earned ratio.

g. Equity ratio.

h. Net income to net sales.

i. Total assets turnover.

j. Acid-test ratio.

compute the current ratio inventory turnover ratio and rate of return on operating a 626158

Cooper Company currently uses the FIFO method to account for its  inventory but is considering a switch to LIFO before the books are closed for the year. Selected data for the year are:

Merchandise inventory, January 1

$1,430,000

Current assets

36,03,600

Total assets (operating)

57,20,000

Cost of goods sold (FIFO)

22,30,800

Merchandise inventory, December 31 (LIFO)

15,44,400

Merchandise inventory, December 31 (FIFO)

18,87,600

Current liabilities

11,44,000

Net sales

38,32,400

Operating expenses

9,15,200

a. Compute the current ratio, inventory turnover ratio, and rate of return on operating assets assuming the company continues using FIFO.

b. Repeat part (a) assuming the company adjusts its accounts to the LIFO inventory method.

refer to the previous problem cord company uses the equity method assume the followi 626037

Refer to the previous problem, Cord Company uses the equity method. Assume the following are from the adjusted trial balances of Cord Company and Thorpe Company on 2010 December 31

 

Company

Company

Debit balance accounts

 

Cash

$351,000

$315,000

Accounts receivable, net

378,000

180,000

Notes receivable

315,000

45,000

Merchandise inventory, December 31

495,000

287,100

Investment in Thorpe Company

2,790,000

 

Equipment, net

615,000

427,500

Building, net

1,814,400

950,400

Land

765,000

405,000

Cost of goods sold

1,800,000

630,000

Expense (excluding depreciation and taxes)

720,000

270,900

Depreciation expense

108,000

62,100

Income tax expense

585,000

189,000

Dividends

540,000

108,000

Total of the accounts with debit balances

$11,277,000

$3,870,000

Credit balance accounts

 

Accounts payable

$135,000

$180,000

Notes payable

144,000

90,000

Common stock – $45 par value

5,400,000

1,800,000

Retained earnings – January 1

1,800,000

450,000

Revenue from sales

3,600,000

1350000

Income from Thorpe Company

198,000

 

Total of the accounts with credit balances

$11,277,000

$3,870,000

There is no intercompany debt at the end of the year. Prepare a work sheet for consolidated financial statements on 2010 December 31.

where would the accounts appear in the financial statements 626039

On 2010 September 1, Ramsey Company purchased the

following relatively long-term investments classified as available-for-sale securities:

•Two thousand shares of Lacey Company capital stock at USD 439.20 plus  broker”s commission of USD 5,760.

•One thousand shares of Membrow Company capital stock at USD 705.60 plus broker”s commission of USD 5,040. Cash dividends of USD 18.00 per share on the Lacey capital stock and USD 14.40 per share on the Membrow capital stock were received on December 7 and December 10, respectively. On 2010 December 31, per share market values are Lacey, USD 460.80; and  Membrow, USD 655.20.

a. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions.

b. Prepare the necessary adjusting entry(ies) at 2010 December 31, to adjust the carrying values assuming that market price changes are believed to be temporary.  Where would the accounts appear in the financial statements?

how would you recommend that the remaining shares be classified in the 2010 december 626040

Kress, Inc., purchased on 2010 July 2, 240 shares of Baker Company USD 180 par value common stock as a temporary investment at USD 288 per share, plus a broker”s commission of USD 432. On 2010 July 15, a cash dividend of USD 7.20 per share was received. On 2010 September 1, Baker Company split its USD 180 par value common shares two for one. On 2010 November 2, Kress sold 200 shares of Baker common stock at USD 180, less a broker”s commission of USD 288.

a. Prepare journal entries to record all of the above transactions.

b. How would you recommend that the remaining shares be classified in the 2010 December 31, balance sheet if still held at that date?

c. Assume the remaining shares were considered current assets classified as trading securities at the end of 2010, at which time their market value was USD 128 per share. Prepare any necessary adjusting entries for the end of 2010.

compute the investment account balance on 2011 december 31 626042

Codd Company acquired 70 percent of the outstanding voting common stock of Snow Company for USD 8,568,000 on 2010 January 1. The investment is accounted for under the equity method. During the years 2010-2012, Snow Company reported the following:

 

 Net Income(loss)

DividendsPaid

2007

$1,454,880

$871,920

2008

372,960

223,440

2009

-23,520

55,860

a. Prepare general journal entries to record the investment and the effect of the subsidiary”s income, losses, and dividends on Codd Company”s accounts.

b. Compute the investment account balance on 2011 December 31.

refer back to the previous problem maple company uses the equity method assume the f 626044

Refer back to the previous problem. Maple Company uses the equity method. Assume the following amounts are taken from the adjusted trial balances of Maple Company and Dodd Company on 2010 December 31:

 

Maple

Dodd

Debit balance accounts

Company

Company

Cash

$864,000

$364,295

Accounts receivable, net

553,536

414,000

Notes receivable

342,000

90,000

Merchandise inventory, December 31

1,530,000

1,008,000

Investment in Dodd Company

$4,519,356

 

Equipment, net

1,147,500

691,860

Building, net

3,136,500

1,573,200

Land

1,404,000

450,000

Cost of goods sold

8,064,000

$2,160,000

Expense (excluding depreciation and taxes)

2,160,000

810,000

Depreciation expense

243,000

$128,940

Income tax expense

569,664

123,504

Dividends

477,000

178,200

Total of the accounts with debit balances

$25,037,556

$7,992,000

Credit balance accounts

 

Accounts payable

$720,000

$378,000

Notes payable

270,000

180,000

Common stock – $90 par value

9,540,000

3,564,000

Retained earnings

2,610,000

270,000

Revenue from sales

11,520,000

3,600,000

Income from Dodd Company

377,556

 

Total of the accounts with credit balances

$25,037,556

$7,992,000

There is no intercompany debt at the end of the year Prepare a work sheet for consolidated financial statements on 2010 December 31.

does it really make any difference whether the securities are classified as trading 626046

You are the CPA engaged to audit the records of Quigley Company. You find that your client has a portfolio of marketable equity securities that has a total market value of USD 300,000 less than the total cost of the portfolio. You ask the vice president for finance if the client expects to sell these securities in the coming year. He answers that he does not know. The securities will be sold if additional cash is needed to finance operations. When you ask for a cash forecast, you are told that a forecast has been prepared that covers the next year. It indicates no need to sell the marketable securities. Write a brief statement in which you explain how you would classify the client”s portfolio of marketable securities in the balance sheet. Does it really make any difference whether the securities are classified as trading securities or available-forsale securities? Explain.

harner company issued usd 100 000 of 12 percent bonds on 2010 march 1 the bonds are 626053

Harner Company issued USD 100,000 of 12 percent bonds on 2010 March 1. The bonds are dated 2010 January 1, and were issued at 96 plus accrued interest. The entry to record the issuance would be:

Cash

98,000

 

Discount on bonds payable

4,000

 

Bonds payable

100,00

   

0

Bonds interest payable

2,000

Cash

102,000

 

Bonds payable

100,00

   

0

Bond interest payable

2,000

Cash

96,000

 

Discount on bonds payable

4,000

 

Bonds payable

100,00

   

0

d. None of the above.

if the bonds in the first question had been issued at 104 the entry to record the is 626054

If the bonds in the first question had been issued at 104, the entry to record the issuance would have been:

Cash

104,000

 

Bonds payable

100,000

Premium on bonds

4,000

payable

   

Cash

102,000

 

Bonds payable

100,000

Bonds interest payable

2,000

Cash

106,000

 

Bonds payable

100,000

Premium on bonds

4,000

payable

   

Bonds interest payable

2,000

d. None of the above.

on 2009 december 1 new jersey waste management company issued usd 300 000 of 10 year 626079

On 2009 December 1, New Jersey Waste Management Company issued USD 300,000 of 10-year, 9 percent bonds dated 2009 July 1, at 100. Interest on the bonds is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1. All of the bonds are registered. The company”s accounting period ends on March 31. Quarterly financial statements are prepared. The company deposits a sum of money sufficient to pay the semiannual interest on the bonds in a special checking account in First National Bank and draws interest payment checks on this account. The deposit is made the day before the checks are drawn. Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of the bonds; the December 31 adjusting entry; the 2010 January 1, interest payment; and the adjusting entry needed on 2010 March 31, to prepare quarterly financial statements.

compute the price investors should offer if they seek a yield of 8 percent on these 626080

Safe Toy Company is seeking to issue USD 800,000 face value of 10 percent, 20-year bonds. The bonds are dated 2009 June 30, call for semiannual interest payments, and mature on 2029 June 30.

a. Compute the price investors should offer if they seek a yield of 8 percent on these bonds. Also, compute the first six months” interest assuming the bonds are  issued at that price. Use the interest method and calculate all amounts to the nearest dollar.

b. Repeat part (a) assuming investors seek a yield of 12 percent. Alternate problem C On 2009 July 1, Tick-Tock Clock Company issued USD 100,000 face value of 8 percent, 10-year bonds. These bonds call for semiannual interest payments and mature on 2019 July 1. The company received cash of USD 87,538, a price that yields 10 percent. Assume that the company”s fiscal year ends on March 31. Prepare journal entries to record the bond interest expense on 2010 January 1, and the adjustment needed on 2010 March 31, using the interest method. Calculate all amounts to the nearest dollar.

finance entirely by issuing additional shares of common stock at an expected issue p 626084

A company is trying to decide whether to invest USD 2 million on plant expansion and USD 1 million to finance a related increase in inventories and accounts receivable. The USD 3 million expansion is expected to increase business volume substantially. Profit forecasts indicate that income from operations will rise from USD 1.6 million to USD 2.4 million. The income tax rate will be about 40 percent. Net income last year was USD 918,000. Interest expense on debt now outstanding is USD 70,000 per year. There are 200,000 shares of common stock currently outstanding. The USD 3 million needed can be obtained in two alternative ways:

Finance entirely by issuing additional shares of common stock at an expected issue price of USD 75 per share.

•Finance two-thirds with bonds, one-third with additional stock. The bonds would have a 20-year life, bear interest at 10 percent, and sell at face value. The issue price of the stock would be USD 80 per share. Should the investment be made? If so, explain which financing plan you would recommend. (Hint: Calculate earnings per share for last year and for future years under each of the alternatives.)

under what circumstances might the company want to increase the sinking fund payment 626085

An annual report of a company contained the following paragraph in the notes to the financial statements: The 9 7/8 percent Senior Subordinated Debentures are redeemable at the option of [the company] at 103.635 percent of the principal amount plus accrued interest if  redeemed prior to [a certain date], and at decreasing prices thereafter. Mandatory sinking fund payments of USD 3,000,000 (which [the company] may increase to USD 6,000,000 annually)…and are intended to retire, at par plus accrued interest, 75 percent of the issue prior to maturity.

Answer the following questions:

a. What does the term debentures mean?

b. How much is the call premium initially? Does this premium decrease over time?

c. Under what circumstances might the company want to increase the sinking fund payments?

which risk class of bonds was closest to its 52 week high on 4 28 what could have be 626086

The Wall Street Journal contained a table showing yield comparisons for groups of corporate bonds. The following data have been adapted from the table:

   

Yield

Percentage

   

As of

52-week

 
 

28-Apr

27-Apr

High

 

Risk category

     

1-10 year maturities:

 

Low

High quality

7.08%

6.94%

7.16%

5.32%

Medium quality

7.41

7.26

7.49

5.76

Over 10 year maturities:

   

High quality

7.91

7.81

8.06

6.93

Medium quality

8.36

8.25

8.49

7.29

High-yield bonds

10.45

10.48

10.53

9.25

Standard & Poor”s

ratings were:

High quality

AAA to AA

Medium quality

A to BBB

High yield

BB to C

Prepare written answers to the following questions.

a. In each column of numbers, why do the yield rates increase from top to bottom?

b. For the high quality and medium quality bonds, what could account for the increase in the yield rates from 4/27 to 4/28? Take into consideration possible economic events.

c. Which risk class of bonds was closest to its 52-week high on 4/28? What could have been the cause?

if the current market price per share of the stock was usd 29 would you convert the 626087

Refer to the Annual report appendix and determine the times interest earned ratio for 2003 for The Limited. Use “operating income” to represent IBIT. Prepare written comments on the results of your analysis. Annual report analysis E A recent annual report of Emhart Corporation contained the following paragraph in its notes to the financial statements:  The 6 3/4 percent convertible subordinated debentures may be converted into shares of common stock at a price of USD 26.50 per share at any time prior to maturity. They are redeemable at prices decreasing from 105 percent of face amount currently to 100 percent [at a certain future date].

Answer the following questions:

a. If you held one USD 1,000 bond, how many shares of stock would you receive if you converted the bond into shares of stock? (Hint: You can use the principal amount of the bond to buy shares of stock at the stated price.)

b. Assume you held one USD 1,000 bond and the bond was called by the company at a price of 105 percent of the face amount. If the current market price per share of the stock was USD 29, would you convert the bond into shares of stock or would you surrender the bond? Explain.

calculate the amount of cash paid for merchandise for 2010 626104

Cost of goods sold in the income statement for the year ended 2010 was USD 260,000. The balances in Merchandise Inventory and Accounts Payable were:

 

2010 January

2010 December31

Merchandise inventory

$160,000

$180,000

Accounts payable

44,000

36,000

Calculate the amount of cash paid for merchandise for 2010.

assume that the depreciation recorded in 2011 was usd 15 000 compute the cash spent 626109

Following are balance sheet data for Quality Merchandise, Inc.:

 

31-Dec

 
 

2011

2010

Cash

$47,000

$26,000

Accounts receivable, net

141,000

134,000

Merchandise inventory

83,000

102,000

Prepaid expenses

9,000

11,000

Plant assets (net of accumulated depreciation)

235,000

230,000

Accounts payable

122,000

127,000

Accrued liabilities payable

40,000

41,000

Capital stock

300,000

300,000

Retained earnings

53,000

35,000

Assume that the depreciation recorded in 2011 was USD 15,000. Compute the cash spent to purchase plant assets, assuming no assets were sold or scrapped in 2011.

the following data are from a company s automobile and the accumulated depreciation 626111

The following data are from a company”s Automobile and the Accumulated Depreciation—Automobile accounts:

Date Automobile

Debit

Credit

Balance

Jan. 1 Balance brought forward

16,000

July 1 Traded for new auto

16,000

-0-

New auto

31,000

   

Accumulated depreciation

Automobile

 

Jan. 1 Balance brought forward

12,000

July 1 One-half year”s depreciation

2,000

14,000

Auto traded

14,000

 

-0-

Dec. 31 One-half year”s depreciation

4,000

4,000

The old auto was traded for a new one, with the difference in values paid in cash. The income statement for the year shows a loss on the exchange of autos of USD 1,200.  Indicate the dollar amounts, the descriptions of these amounts, and their exact  locations in a statement of cash flows—indirect method.

prepare a working paper to calculate cash flows from operating activities under the 626112

The income statement and other data of Dunbar Carpet Outlet, Inc., follow: Dunbar Carpet Outlet, Inc. Income statement For the Year Ended 2010 December 31

Sales

 

$920,000

Cost of goods sold

380,000

Gross margin

$540,000

Operating expenses (other than depreciation)

$140,000

 

Depreciation expense

40,000

180,000

Net income

$360,000

Changes in current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities during the year were:

 

Increase

Decrease

Accounts receivable

$20,000

Merchandise inventory

$16,000

 

Prepaid insurance

8,000

 

Accounts payable

28,000

 

Accrued liabilities payable

4,000

 

Depreciation was the only noncash item affecting net income.

a. Prepare a working paper to calculate cash flows from operating activities under the direct method.

b. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the direct method.

c. Prove that the same cash flows amount will be obtained under the indirect method by preparing the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the indirect method. You need not prepare a working   paper.

the following comparative balance sheets and other data are for cellular telephone s 626113

The following comparative balance sheets and other data are for Cellular Telephone Sales, Inc.:

Cellular Telephone Sales, Inc. Comparative balance sheets 2011 December 31 and 2010

Assets

2011

2010

Cash

$76,105

$51,000

Accounts receivable, net

26,075

24,250

Merchandise inventory

30,000

35,000

Supplies on hand

1,750

2,550

Prepaid expenses

1,400

1,200

Land

1,80,000

1,42,500

Equipment

2,70,000

3,00,000

Accumulated depreciation – equipment

-75,000

-67,500

Total assets

$510,330

$489,000

Liabilities and stockholders” equity

Accounts payable

$ 45,330

$ 76,300

Salaries payable

4,000

2,000

Accrued liabilities payable

2,000

8,250

Long-term note payable

1,50,000

1,50,000

Common stock ($5 par)

1,85,000

1,65,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par

32,500

-0-

Retained earnings

91,500

87,450

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$510,330

$489,000

Land was bought for USD 37,500 cash. The company intends to build a building on the land. Currently the company leases a building for its operations.

Equipment costing USD 50,000 with accumulated depreciation of USD 30,000 was sold for USD 23,500 (a gain of USD 3,500), and equipment costing USD 20,000 was purchased for cash.

Depreciation expense for the year was USD 37,500.

Common stock was issued for USD 52,500 cash.

Dividends declared and paid in 2011 totaled USD 32,950.

Net income was USD 37,000.

The company paid interest of USD 3,000 and income taxes of USD 17,000. Prepare a statement of cash flows under the indirect method. Also prepare any necessary supplemental schedule(s).

computer associates international inc is leading business software company the compa 626114

Computer Associates International, Inc., is leading business software company. The company was founded in 1977 with four employees and has grown to 18,200 employees and about 4.2 billion in revenues.

The company”s statements of cash flows for the years 2002 through 2004 follow.

Then the relevant portion of Management”s Discussion and Analysis of the statement of cash flows is provided.

Consolidated statements of cash flows Year Ended March 31

Operating activities:

2004

2003(Inmillions)

2002

Net (loss) income Adjustments to reconcile net (loss) income to net cash provided by operating activities:

$ (591)

$ 696

$ 626

Depreciation and amortization

1,110

594

325

Provision for deferred income taxes (benefit)

-350

412

107

Charge for purchased research and development—

795

 

Compensation (gain) expense related to stock pension plants

-146

30

778

Decrease (increase) in noncurrent installment accounts receivable, net

956

-1,039

-422

Decrease (increase) in deferred maintenance revenue

-3

113

43

Foreign currency transaction loss – before taxes

14

5

11

Charge for investment write-off

50

 

Gain on sale of property and equipment Changes in other operating assets and liabilities, net of effects of acquisitions:

-5

-14

Decrease (increase) in trade and installment receivables

418

83

-169

Other changes in operating assets and liabilities

-25

-168

-18

Net cash provided by operating activities Investing activities: Acquisitions, primarily purchased software,

$ 1,383

$ 1,566

$ 1,267

marketing rights and intangibles, net of cash acquired

$ (174)

$ (3,049)

$ (610)

Settlements of purchases accounting liabilities

-367

-429

-57

Purchases of property and equipment

-89

-198

-222

Proceeds from sale of property and equipment

5

12

38

Disposition of businesses

158

Purchases of marketable securities

-48

-95

-2,703

Sales of marketable securities

40

189

2,639

Increase in capitalized development costs and other

-49

-36

-29

Net cash used in investing activities Financing activities:

$ (524)

$ (3,606)

$ (944)

Dividends

$ (47)

$ (43)

$ (44)

Purchases of treasury stock

-449

-1,090

Proceeds from borrowings

1,049

3,672

2,141

Repayment of borrowings

-1,981

-776

-1,216

Exercise of common stock options and other

50

96

38

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

$ (1,378)

$ 2,949

$ (171)

(Decrease) Increase in cash and cash equivalents before effect of exchange rate changes on cash

$ (519)

$ 909

$ 152

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash

-25

-1

-4

(Decrease) Increase in cash and cash equivalents

$ (544)

$ 908

$ 148

Cash and cash equivalents – Beginning of year

1,307

399

251

Cash and cash equivalents – End of the year

$ 763

$ 1,307

$ 399

Liquidity and capital resources Cash, cash equivalents and marketable securities totaled USD 850 million at 2004 March 31, a decrease of USD 537 million from the 2003 March 31 balance of USD 1,387 million. During fiscal year 2004, the Company used cash on hand to repay over USD 900 million in debt and repurchase approximately USD 450 million in treasury stock. Cash generated from operations for fiscal year 2001 was USD 1,383 million, a decrease of USD 183 million from the prior year”s cash from operations of USD 1,566 million. Cash from operations was unfavorably impacted this current fiscal year due  to higher costs associated with increased headcount and other expenses related to the Sterling acquisition. The Company”s bank credit facilities consist of a USD 1 billion four-year revolving  credit facility, a USD 2 billion four-year term loan, and a 75 million British Pound Sterling denominated 364-day term loan. During the year, the Company repaid all  outstanding amounts under both its USD 1.3 billion 364-day and four-year revolving credit agreements. As a reflection of its continued reduced need for bank borrowings,  emphasis on debt reduction, and overall expected ability to generate cash from operations, the Company did not renew its USD 1.3 billion 364-day revolving credit facility when it expired in May 2004. As of 2004 March 31, USD 2 billion remained outstanding under the four-year term loan and approximately USD 124 million was outstanding under the pound sterling term loan at various interest rates. There are no drawings under the Company”s USD 1 billion four-year revolving credit facility. The interest rates on such debt are determined based on a ratings grid, which applies a margin to the prevailing London InterBank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”). In addition, the Company established a USD 1 billion US Commercial Paper (“CP”) program in the first quarter of this year to refinance some of its debt at more attractive interest levels. As of 2004 March 31, USD 340 million was outstanding under the CP program. The Company also utilizes other financial markets in order to maintain its broad sources of liquidity. In fiscal 2002, USD 1.75 billion of unsecured Senior Notes were issued in a transaction governed by Rule 144A of the Securities Act of 1933. Amounts borrowed, rates and maturities for each issue were USD 575 million at 6.25 percent due 2006 April 15, USD 825 million at 6.375 percent due 2008 April 15 and USD 350 million at 6.5 percent due 2011 April 15. As of 2004 March 31, USD 192 million was outstanding under the Company”s 6.77 percent Senior Notes. These Notes call for annual repayment of USD 64 million each April until final maturity in 2006. Unsecured and uncommitted multicurrency lines of credit are available to meet any short-term working capital needs for subsidiaries operating outside the US. These lines total USD 56 million, of which USD 14 million was drawn as of 2004 March 31. Debt ratings for the Company”s senior unsecured notes and its bank credit facilities are BBB+ and Baa1 from Standard & Poor”s and Moody”s Investor Services, respectively. The Company”s Commercial Paper program is rated A-2 from Standard & Poor”s and P-2 from Moody”s. Peak borrowings under all debt facilities during fiscal year 2004 totaled approximately USD 5.4 billion with a weighted-average interest rate of 7.2 percent. As of 2004 March 31, the cumulative number of shares purchased under the  Company”s various open market Common Stock repurchase programs, including almost 16 million shares purchased in the current fiscal year, was 166 million. The remaining number of shares authorized for repurchase is approximately 34 million. Capital resource requirements as of 2004 March 31 consisted of lease obligations for office space, computer equipment, mortgage or loan obligations and amounts due as a result of product and company acquisitions. It is expected that existing cash,  cash equivalents, marketable securities, the availability of borrowings under credit lines and cash provided from operations will be sufficient to meet on going cash requirements. The Company expects its long-standing history of providing extended payment terms to customers to continue under the new business model and thus does not expect a change to its future cash flow, since customers are expected to continue to  finance their purchases over the contract period.

a. Explain how the company could have a net loss in 2004 and yet have a positive net cash provided by operating activities.

b. What was the reason given by management for repaying all outstanding amounts under revolving credit agreements.

c. What is the interest rate on borrowings?

d. What information would normally appear immediately below the statement of cash flows that seems to be missing?

e. Does the amount of cash provided by operating activities seem large enough to continue the present dividend payments?

f. Given the following data, calculate the cash flow per share of common stock ratio, the cash flow margin ratio, and cash flow liquidity ratio.

 

(in millions)

Average number of shares of common stock outstanding

583

Net sales

4,198

Cash and marketable securities

850

Current liabilities

2,286

prepare a schedule that shows a the reported net income for each year b the amount o 626008

Kelley Company reported net income of USD 358,050 for 2009, USD 371,400 for 2010, and USD 325,800 for 2011, using the incorrect inventory amounts shown for 2009 December 31, and 2010. Recently, Kelley corrected the inventory amounts for those dates. Kelley used the correct 2011 December 31, inventory amount in calculating 2011 net income.

 

Incorrect

Correct

2009 December 31

USD 72,600

USD 86,200

2010 December 31

84000

70200

Prepare a schedule that shows: (a) the reported net income for each year, (b) the amount of correction needed for each year, and (c) the correct net income for each year.

comment on the implications of your corrected net income as contrasted with reported 626009

An examination of the financial records of Lanal Company on 2009 December 31, disclosed the following with regard to merchandise inventory for 2009 and prior years:

2005 December 31, inventory was correct.

2006 December 31, inventory was overstated USD 200,000.

2007 December 31, inventory was overstated USD 100,000.

2081 December 31, inventory was understated USD 220,000.

2009 December 31, inventory was correct.

The reported net income for each year was:

2006

$384,000

2007

544,000

2008

670,000

2009

846,000

a. Prepare a schedule of corrected net income for each of the four years, 2006-2009.

b. What error(s) would have been included in each December 31 balance sheet? Assume each year”s error is independent of the other years” errors.

c. Comment on the implications of your corrected net income as contrasted with reported net income.

in view of your answers to parts a and b what would be your reaction to an assertion 626010

Brett Company sells personal computers and uses the specific identification method to account for its inventory. On 2010 November 30, the company had 46 Orange III personal computers on hand that were acquired on the following dates and at these stated costs:

 

Units

Unit cost

3-Jul

10

@ $10,080

10-Sep

20

@ $ 9,600

29-Nov

16

@ $10,700

Brett sold 36 Orange III computers at USD 12,720 each in December. There were no purchases of this model in December.

a. Compute the gross margin on December sales of Orange III computers assuming the company shipped those units that would maximize reported gross margin.

b. Repeat part (a) assuming the company shipped those units that would minimize reported gross margin for December.

c. In view of your answers to parts (a) and (b), what would be your reaction to an assertion that the specific identification method should not be considered an acceptable method for costing inventory?

compute the ending inventory as of 2010 april 30 using perpetual inventory procedure 626012

The following purchases and sales for Ripple Company are for April 2010. There was no inventory on April 1.

Purchases

 

Sales

 

Units

Unit Cost

 

Units

3-Apr

3,200

@ $33.00

6-Apr

1,500

10-Apr

1,600

@ 34.00

12-Apr

1,400

22-Apr

2,000

@ 35.00

25-Apr

2,300

28-Apr

1,800

@ 36.00

   

a. Compute the ending inventory as of 2010 April 30, using perpetual inventory procedure, under each of the following methods: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted-average (carry unit cost to four decimal places and round total cost to nearest dollar).

b. Repeat a using periodic inventory procedure.

assuming use of perpetual inventory procedure compute the ending inventory and cost 626014

The following data relate to the beginning inventory, purchases, and sales of Braxton Company for the year 2010:

 

Units

Unit Cost

Merchandise Inventory, January 1

1,400

@ $5.04

Purchases:

   

2-Feb

1,000

@ 4.80

5-Apr

2,000

@ 3.60

15-Jun

1,200

@ 3.00

30-Sep

1,400

@ 2.88

28-Nov

1,800

@ 4.20

Sales:

   

10-Mar

900

 

15-May

1,800

 

6-Jul

800

 

23-Aug

600

 

22-Dec

2,500

 

a. Assuming use of perpetual inventory procedure, compute the ending inventory and cost of goods sold under each of the following methods: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted-average (carry unit cost to four decimal places and round total cost to nearest dollar).

b. Repeat (a) assuming use of periodic inventory procedure.

state the effect on net income in 2009 if the method in b was used rather than the m 626016

The accountant for Gentry Company prepared the following schedule of the company”s inventory at 2009 December 31, and used the LCM method applied to total inventory in determining cost of goods sold:

Item

Quantity

Unit Cost

Unit Market

Q

4,200

$7.20

$7.20

R

2,400

6

5.76

S

5,400

4.8

4.56

T

4,800

4.2

4.32

a. State whether this approach is an acceptable method of inventory measurement and show the calculations used to determine the amounts.

b. Compute the amount of the ending inventory using the LCM method on an item-by-item basis.

c. State the effect on net income in 2009 if the method in (b) was used rather than the method referred to in (a).

prepare income statements for the first quarter the second quarter and the first six 626017

As part of a loan agreement with a local bank, Brazos Company must present quarterly and cumulative income statements for the year 2009. The company uses periodic inventory procedure and marks its merchandise to sell at a price yielding a gross margin of 30 per cent. Selected data for the first six months of 2009 are as follows:

 

First Quarter

Second Quarter

Sales

$248,000

$256,000

Purchases

160,000

184,000

Purchase returns and allowances

9,600

11,200

Purchase discounts

3,200

3,520

Sales returns and allowances

8,000

4,800

Transportation-in

8,000

8,320

Miscellaneous selling expenses

25,600

24,000

Miscellaneous administrative expenses

9,600

8,000

The cost of the physical inventory taken 2008 December 31, was USD 30,400.

a. Indicate how income statements can be prepared without taking a physical inventory at the end of each of the first two quarters of 2009.

b. Prepare income statements for the first quarter, the second quarter, and the first six months of 2009.

compute the estimated year end inventory balance at cost using the retail method of 626018

Cobb Company records show the following information for 2010:

 

Cost

Retail

Sales

 

$350,400

Purchases

$2/0,000

420,000

Transportation-in

26,280

Merchandise inventory, 1/1/2014

12,000

1/,400

Purchase returns

15,120

18,600

Compute the estimated year-end inventory balance at cost using the retail method of estimating inventory.

prepare a schedule that shows a the reported net income for each year b the amount o 626019

Harris Company reported net income of USD 312,000 for 2009, USD 324,000 for 2010, and USD 348,000 Recently Harris corrected these inventory amounts. Harris used the correct 2011 December 31, inventory amount in calculating 2011 net income.

2009 December 31

$96,000

$108,000

2010 December 31

91,200

84,000

Prepare a schedule that shows: (a) the reported net income for each year, (b) the amount of correction needed for each year, and (c) the correct net income for each year.

comment on the implications of the corrected net income as contrasted with reported 626020

An examination of the financial records of Jersey Company on 2009

December 31, disclosed the following with regard to merchandise inventory for 2009 and prior years:

2008 December 31, inventory was correct.

2009 December 31, inventory was understated USD 50,000.

2010 December 31, inventory was overstated USD 35,000.

2011 December 31, inventory was understated USD 30,000.

2012 December 31, inventory was correct.

The reported net income for each year was:

2009

$292,500

2010

$355,000

2011

$382,500

2012

$350,000

a. Prepare a schedule of corrected net income for each of the four years, 2009-2012.

b. What errors would have been included in each December 31 balance sheet? Assume each year”s error is independent of the other years” errors.

c. Comment on the implications of the corrected net income as contrasted with reported net income.

do you think high surf company should be permitted to use the specific identificatio 626021

High Surf Company sells the Ultra-Light model wind surfer and uses the specific identification method to account for its inventory. The Ultra-Lights are identical except for identifying serial numbers. On 2009 August 1, the company had three Ultra-Lights that cost USD 14,000 each in its inventory. During the month, the company purchased the following:

 

Units

Unit cost

3-Aug

5

@ $13,000

17-Aug

6

@ $14,500

28-Aug

6

@ 15,000

High Surf Company sold 13 Ultra-Lights in August at USD 20,000 each.

a. Compute the gross margin earned by the company in August if it shipped the units that would maximize gross margin.

b. Repeat part (a) assuming the company shipped the units that would minimize gross margin.

c. Do you think High Surf Company should be permitted to use the specific identification method of accounting for Ultra-Lights in view of the manipulation possible as shown by your calculations in (a) and (b)?

compute the cost of goods sold under fifo periodic inventory procedure is there a di 626022

The inventory records of Coral Company show the following:

Jan. 1 Beginning inventory consists of 12 units costing USD 48 per unit.

5 Purchased 15 units @ USD 49.92 per unit.

10 Sold 9 units @ USD 108 per unit.

12 Sold 7 units @ USD108 per unit.

20 Purchased 20 units @ USD 50.16 per unit.

22 Purchased 5 units @ USD 48 per unit.

30 Sold 20 units @ USD 110.40 per unit.

Assume all purchases and sales are made on account.

a. Using FIFO perpetual inventory procedure, compute cost of goods sold for January.

b. Using FIFO perpetual inventory procedure, prepare the journal entries for January.

c. Compute the cost of goods sold under FIFO periodic inventory procedure. Is there a difference between the amount computed using the two different procedures?

compute the ending inventory as of 2010 december 31 assuming use of perpetual invent 626023

Following are data for Dandy Company for the year 2010:

 

Units

Unit Cost

Merchandise Inventor y,

700

@ $20.4

1-Jan

 

0

Purchases:

   

February 2

500

@21

   

@

Apr i l 5

1,000

@24

June 1 5

600

@ 2/ .00

30-Sep

700

@ 30.00

28-Nov

900

@ 31.20

Sales :

4,400

 

March 5

1,200

 

18-Jul

800

 

August 12

900

 

October 15

3,300

 

a. Compute the ending inventory as of 2010 December 31, assuming use of perpetual inventory procedure, under each of the following methods: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted-average (carry unit cost to four decimal places and round total cost to nearest dollar).

b. Compute the ending inventory as of 2010 December 31, assuming use of periodic inventory procedure, under each of the following methods: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted-average.

compute the change in gross margin that would have resulted if the purchase of decem 626026

Star Company accounts for its inventory using the LIFO method under periodic inventory procedure. Data on purchases, sales, and inventory for the year ended 2009 December 31, are:

 

Units

Unit Cost

     

Merchandise inventory,

   

1-Jan

2,000

@ $20

Purchases:

   

January /

5,000

@ 24

7-Jul

10,000

@ 28

21-Dec

6,000

@ 32

During 2009, 16,000 units were sold for USD 1,280,000, leaving an inventory on 2009 December 31, of 7,000 units.

a. Compute the gross margin earned on sales during 2009.

b. Compute the change in gross margin that would have resulted if the purchase of December 21 had been delayed until 2010 January 6.

c. Recompute the gross margin assuming that 9,000 units rather than 6,000 units were purchased on December 21 at the same cost per unit.

d. Solve parts (a), (b), and (c) using the FIFO method.

determine the ending inventory by applying the lcm method on an item by item basis 626027

Data on the ending inventory of Jannis Company on 2009 December 31, are:

Item

Quantity

Unit Cost

Unit Market

1

8,400

$3.20

$3.12

2

16,800

2.88

3.04

3

5,600

2.8

2.88

4

14,000

3.84

3.6

5

11,200

3.6

3.68

6

2,800

3.04

2.88

a. Compute the ending inventory applying the LCM method to the total inventory.

b. Determine the ending inventory by applying the LCM method on an item-by-item basis.

discover how the retail inventory method is applied and how the end of year inventor 626031

Ethics case – Writing experience D Respond in writing to the following questions based on the ethics case concerning Terry Dorsey:

a. Do you believe that Terry”s scheme will work?

b. What would you do if you were Terry”s accountant?

c. Comment on each of Terry”s points of justification.

Group project E In teams of two or three students, interview the manager of a merchandising company. Inquire about inventory control methods, inventory costing methods, and any other information about the company”s inventory procedures. As a team, write a memorandum to your instructor summarizing the results of the interview. The heading of the memorandum should include the date, to whom it is written, from whom, and the subject matter.

Group project F In a team of two or three students, locate and visit a nearby retail store that uses perpetual inventory procedure and a computerized inventory management system. Investigate how the system works by interviewing a knowledgeable person in the company. Write a report to your instructor and make a short presentation to the class on your findings.

Group project G With a small group of students, identify and visit a retail store that uses periodic inventory procedure and uses the retail inventory method for preparing interim (monthly or quarterly) financial reports. Discover how the retail inventory method is applied and how the end-of-year inventory amount is calculated. Write a report to your instructor summarizing your findings.

prepare journal entries to record all of these data assuming the securities are cons 626032

Paris Company acquired on 2010 July 15, 400 shares of Rome Company USD 720 par value capital stock at USD 698.40 per share plus a broker”s commission of USD 1,728. On 2010 August 1, Paris Company received a cash dividend of USD 8.64 per share. On 2010 November 3, it sold 200 of these shares at USD 756 per share less a broker”s commission of USD 1,152. On 2010 December 1, Rome Company issued shares comprising a 100 percent stock dividend declared on its capital stock on November 18. On 2010 December 31, the end of Paris Company”s calendar-year accounting period, the market quotation for Rome Company”s common stock was USD 331.20 per share. The decline was considered to be temporary.

a. Prepare journal entries to record all of these data assuming the securities are considered temporary investments classified as trading securities. Where should the accounts in the last entry appear in the financial statements?

b. Assume Rome Company has become a major customer so the shares are held for long-term affiliation purposes. Indicate how the investment should be shown in the balance sheet.

on 2010 october 17 strong company purchased the following common stocks all trading 626033

On 2010 October 17, Strong Company purchased the following common stocks (all trading securities) at the indicated per share prices that included commissions:

600 shares of X Company common stock @ $216

$129,600

1,000 shares of Y Company common stock @ $144

144,000

1,600 shares of Z Company common stock @ $72

115,200

 

$388,800

On 2010 December 31, the market prices per share of the above common stocks were X, USD 223.20; Y, USD 136.80; and Z, USD 54.  Summarized, the cash dividends per share received in 2011 were X, USD 14.40; Y,  USD 7.20; and Z, USD 5.40. On 2011 December 31, the per share market prices were X, USD 252.80; Y, USD 115.20; and Z, USD 72.  All of these changes in market prices are considered temporary.  Prepare journal entries for all of these transactions, including calendar year-end adjusting entries, assuming the shares of common stock acquired are considered trading securities. If the securities acquired are considered available-for-sale securities, how would the entries differ? For both parts a and b, give the descriptions (titles) and the dollar amounts of the items that would appear in the income statements for 2010 and 2011.

prepare the elimination entry that would be made on the work sheet for a consolidate 626034

On 2010 January 1, Long Company acquired 80 percent of the outstanding voting common stock of Fall Company for USD 4,032,000 cash. Long Company uses the equity method. During 2010, Fall reported USD 672,000 of net income and paid USD 288,000 in dividends. The stockholders” equity section of the 2009 December 31, balance sheet for Fall follows:

Stockholders” equity:

Paid-in capital:

Common stock – $42 par

$4,200,000

Retained earnings

840,000

Total stockholders” equity

$5,040,000

a. Prepare the general journal entries to record the investment and the effect of Fall”s income and dividends on Long Company”s accounts.

b. Prepare the elimination entry that would be made on the work sheet for a consolidated balance sheet as of the date of acquisition.

compute net income for 2010 using the percentage of completion method 625933

The following contract prices and costs relate to all of Orlando Construction Company”s long-term construction projects (in millions of dollars):

 

Contract Price

Prior to 2010

In 2010

Cost to Be Incurred in Future Years

On projects completed in 2010

$46

$4

$36

$0

On incomplete projects

144

24

48

48

General and administrative expenses for 2010 amounted to USD 1,200,000. Assume that the general and administrative expenses are not to be treated as a part of the construction cost.

a. Compute net income for 2010 using the completed-contract method.

b. Compute net income for 2010 using the percentage-of-completion method.

a seller sold merchandise which has a list price of usd 4 000 on account giving a tr 625943

A seller sold merchandise which has a list price of USD 4,000 on account, giving a trade discount of 20 per cent. The entry on the books of the seller is:

       

a.

Accounts Receivable

3,200

 
 

Trade Discounts

800

 
 

Sales

 

4,000

b.

Accounts Receivable

4,000

 
 

Sales

 

4,000

c.

Accounts Receivable

3,200

 
 

Trade Discounts

800

 
 

Sales

 

4,000

d.

Accounts Receivable

3,200

 
 

Sales

 

3,200

in the following table indicate how to increase or decrease debit or credit each acc 625954

In the following table, indicate how to increase or decrease (debit or credit) each account, and indicate its normal balance (debit or credit).

 

Increased by (debit or credit)

Decreased by (debit or credit)

Normal Balance (debit or credit)

Title of Account

     

Merchandise Inventory

     

Sales

     

Sales Returns and Allowances

     

Sales Discounts

     

Accounts Receivable

     

Purchases

     

Purchase Returns and Allowances

     

Purchase Discounts

     

Accounts Payable

     

Transportation-In

     

for each of the following independent assumptions calculate 1 the gross selling pric 625958

Lasky Company sold merchandise with a list price of USD 60,000 on July 1. For each of the following independent assumptions, calculate (1) the gross selling price used to record the sale and (2) the amount that the buyer would have to remit when paying the invoice.

Trade Discount Granted

Credit Terms

Date Paid

a. 30%, 20%

2/10, n/30

10-Jul

b. 40%, 10%

2/EOM, n/60

10-Aug

c. 30%, 10%, 5%

3/10/EOM, n/60

10-Aug

d. 40%

1/10, n/30

12-Jul

in each case use the following information to calculate the missing information 625962

In each case, use the following information to calculate the missing information:

 

Case 1

Case 2

Case 3

Gross sales

$640,000

$ ?

$ ?

Sales discounts

?

25,600

19,200

Sales returns and allowances

19,200

44,800

32,000

Net sales

608,000

1,209,600

 

Merchandise inventory, January 1

256,000

 

384,000

Purchases

384,000

768,000

 

Purchase discounts

7,680

13,440

12,800

Purchase returns and allowances

24,320

31,360

32,000

Net purchases

352,000

 

672,000

Transportation-in

25,600

38,400

32,000

Net cost of purchases

377,600

761,600

?

Cost of goods available for sale

?

1,081,600

1,088,000

Merchandise inventory, December 31

?

384,000

448,000

Cost of goods sold

320,000

?

640,000

Gross margin

 

512,000

320,000

prepare all the necessary journal entries for the buyer and the seller 625966

Mars Musical Instrument Company and Tiger Company engaged in the following transactions with each other during July 2010:

July 2 Mars Musical Instrument Company purchased merchandise on account with a list price of USD 48,000 from Tiger Company. The terms were 3/EOM, n/60, FOB shipping point, freight collect. Trade discounts of 15 per cent, 10 per cent, and 5 per cent were granted by Tiger Company.

5 The buyer paid the freight bill on the purchase of July 2, USD 1,104.

6 The buyer returned damaged merchandise with an invoice price of USD 2,790 to the seller and received full credit.

On the last day of the discount period, the buyer paid the seller for the merchandise.

Prepare all the necessary journal entries for the buyer and the seller.

prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 june 30 no adjusting 625967

The following data for June 2010 are for Rusk Company”s first month of operations:

June 1 Rusk Company was organized, and the stockholders invested USD 1,008,000 cash, USD 336,000 of merchandise inventory, and a USD 288,000 plot of land in exchange for capital stock.

4 Merchandise was purchased for cash, USD 432,000; FOB shipping point, freight collect.

9 Cash of USD 10,080 was paid to a trucking company for delivery of the merchandise purchased June 4.

13 The company sold merchandise on account, USD 288,000; terms 2/10, n/ 30.

15 The company sold merchandise on account, USD 230,400; terms 2/10, n/30.

16 Of the merchandise sold June 13, USD 31,680 was returned for credit.

20 Salaries for services received were paid as follows: to office employees, USD 31,680; to salespersons, USD 83,520.

22 The company collected the amount due on the remaining USD 256,320 of accounts receivable arising from the sale of June 13.

24 The company purchased merchandise on account at a cost of USD 345,600; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.

26 The company returned USD 57,600 of the merchandise purchased June 24 to the vendor for credit.

27 A trucking company was paid USD 7,200 for delivery to Rusk Company of the goods purchased June 24.

29 The company sold merchandise on account, USD 384,000; terms 2/10, n/30.

30 Sold merchandise for cash, USD 172,800.

30 Payment was received for the sale of June 15.

30 Paid store rent for June, USD 43,200.

30 Paid the amount due on the purchase of June 24.

The inventory on hand at the close of business June 30 was USD 672,000 at cost.

a. Prepare journal entries for the transactions.

b. Post the journal entries to the proper ledger accounts. Use the account numbers in the chart of accounts shown in a separate file at the end of the text. Assume that all postings are from page 20 of the general journal.

c. Prepare a trial balance as of 2010 June 30.

d. Prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 June 30. No adjusting entries are needed.

prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 may 31 625968

The Western Wear Company, a wholesaler of western wear clothing, sells to retailers. The company entered into the following transactions in May 2010:

May 1 The Western Wear Company was organized as a corporation. The stockholders purchased stock at par for the following assets in the business: USD 462,000 cash, USD 168,000 merchandise, and USD 105,000 land.

1 Paid rent on administrative offices for May, USD 25,200.

5 The company purchased merchandise from Carl Company on account, USD 189,000; terms 2/10, n/30. Freight terms were FOB shipping point, freight collect.

8 Cash of USD 8,400 was paid to a trucking company for delivery of the merchandise purchased May 5.

14 The company sold merchandise on account, USD 315,000; terms 2/10, n/30.

15 Paid Carl Company the amount due on the purchase of May 5.

16 Of the merchandise sold May 14, USD 13,860 was returned for credit.

19 Salaries for services received were paid for May as follows: office employees, USD 16,800; salespersons, USD 33,600.

24 The company collected the amount due on USD 126,000 of the accounts receivable arising from the sale of May 14.

25 The company purchased merchandise on account from Bond Company, USD 151,200; terms 2/10, n/30. Freight terms were FOB shipping point, freight collect.

27 Of the merchandise purchased May 25, USD 25,200 was returned to the vendor.

28 A trucking company was paid USD 2,100 for delivery to The Western Wear Company of the goods purchased May 25.

29 The company sold merchandise on open account, USD 15,120; terms 2/10, n/30.

30 Cash sales were USD 74,088.

30 Cash of USD 100,800 was received from the sale of May 14.

31 Paid Bond Company for the merchandise purchased on May 25, taking into consideration the merchandise returned on May 27.

The inventory on hand at the close of business on May 31 is USD 299,040.

From the data given for The Western Wear Company:

a. Prepare journal entries for the transactions.

b. Post the journal entries to the proper ledger accounts. Use the account numbers in the chart of accounts shown in a separate file at the end of the text. Assume that all postings are from page 15 of the general journal.

(There were no adjusting journal entries.)

c. Prepare a trial balance.

d. Prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 May 31.

e. Prepare a classified balance sheet as of 2010 May 31.

prepare journal entries for the transactions 625969

a. Candle Carpet Company engaged in the following transactions in August 2010:

Aug. 2 Sold merchandise on account for USD 300,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.

18 Received payment for the sale of August 2.

20 A total of USD 10,000 of the merchandise sold on August 2 was returned, and a full refund was made because it was the wrong merchandise.

28 An allowance of USD 16,000 was granted on the sale of August 2 because some merchandise was found to be damaged; USD 16,000 cash was returned to the customer.

b. Lee Furniture Company engaged in the following transactions in August 2010:

Aug. 4 Purchased merchandise on account at a cost of USD 140,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.

6 Paid freight of USD 2,000 on the purchase of August 4.

10 Sold goods for USD 100,000; terms 2/10, n/30.

12 Returned USD 24,000 of the merchandise purchased on August 4.

14 Paid the amount due on the purchase of August 4.

Prepare journal entries for the transactions.

record all of the entries required on the books of both the buyer and the seller 625970

Edwardo Auto Parts Company and Spoon Company engaged in the following transactions with each other during August 2010:

Aug.15 Edwardo Auto Parts Company purchased merchandise on account with a list price of USD 192,000 from Spoon Company. Trade discounts of 20 per cent and 10 per cent were allowed. Terms were 2/10, n/30, FOB destination, freight prepaid.

16 The seller paid the freight charges, USD 2,400.

17 The buyer requested an allowance of USD 4,512 against the amount due because the goods were damaged in transit.

20 The seller granted the allowance requested on August 17.

The buyer paid the amount due on the last day of the discount period. Record all of the entries required on the books of both the buyer and the seller.

prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 june 30 no adjusting 625971

Gardner Company engaged in the following transactions in June 2010, the company”s first month of operations:

June 1 Stockholders invested USD 384,000 cash and USD 144,000 of merchandise inventory in the business in exchange for capital stock.

3 Merchandise was purchased on account, USD 192,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.

4 Paid height on the June 3 purchase, USD 5,280.

7 Merchandise was purchased on account, USD 96,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination, freight prepaid.

10 Sold merchandise on account, USD 230,400; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.

11 Returned USD 28,800 of the merchandise purchased on June 3.

12 Paid the amount due on the purchase of June 3.

13 Sold merchandise on account, USD 240,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination, height prepaid.

14 Paid height on sale of June 13, USD 14,400.

20 Paid the amount due on the purchase of June 7.

21 USD 48,000 of the goods sold on June 13 were returned for credit.

22 Received the amount due on sale of June 13.

25 Received the amount due on sale of June 10.

29 Paid rent for the administration building for June, USD 19,200.

30 Paid sales salaries of USD 57,600 for June.

30 Purchased merchandise on account, USD 48,000; terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination, freight prepaid.

The inventory on hand on June 30 was USD 288,000.

a. Prepare journal entries for the transactions.

b. Post the journal entries to the proper ledger accounts. Use the account numbers in the chart of accounts shown in a separate file at the end of the text. Assume that all postings are from page 10 of the general journal.

c. Prepare a trial balance as of 2010 June 30.

d. Prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 June 30. No adjusting entries are needed.

prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 may 31 625972

Organized on 2010 May 1, Noah Cabinet Company engaged in the following transactions:

May 1 The stockholders invested USD 900,000 in this new business by purchasing capital stock.

1 Purchased merchandise on account from String Company, USD 46,800; terms n/60, FOB shipping point, freight collect.

3 Sold merchandise for cash, USD 28,800.

6 Paid transportation charges on May 1 purchase, USD 1,440 cash.

7 Returned USD 3,600 of merchandise to String Company due to improper size.

10 Requested and received an allowance of USD 1,800 from String Company for improper quality of certain items.

14 Sold merchandise on account to Texas Company, USD 18,000; terms 2/20, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.

16 Issued cash refund for return of merchandise relating to sale made on May 3, USD 180.

18 Purchased merchandise on account from Tan Company invoiced at USD 28,800; terms 2/15, n/30, FOB shipping point, freight collect.

18 Received a bill for freight charges of USD 900 from Ball Trucking Company on the purchase from Tan Company.

19 Texas Company returned USD 360 of merchandise purchased on May 14.

24 Returned USD 2,880 of defective merchandise to Tan Company. Received full credit.

28 Texas Company remitted balance due on sale of May 14.

31 Paid Tan Company for the purchase of May 18 after adjusting for transaction of May 24.

31 Paid miscellaneous selling expenses of USD 7,200.

31 Paid miscellaneous administrative expenses of USD 10,800.

The May 31st inventory is USD 57,600.

From the data for Noah Cabinet Company:

a. Journalize the transactions. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.

b. Post the entries to the proper ledger accounts. Use the account numbers appearing in the chart of account shown in a separate file at the end of the text. Assume all postings are from page 5 of the general journal.

(There were no adjusting journal entries.)

c. Prepare a trial balance.

d. Prepare a classified income statement for the month ended 2010 May 31.

calculate the gross margin percentage and write an explanation of what the results m 625973

Business decision case A Candy”s Shirts, Inc., has an opportunity to purchase 40,000 shirts with the logo of her favorite school in January 2009. Candy, who is not currently in business, is considering buying these shirts and then renting a display cart from which to sell these shirts (called a kiosk) in a shopping mall. Based on the following information and estimates, Candy needs to decide if the business would be profitable:

Cost of the 40,000 shirts, all of which must be purchased in January 2009, is USD 440,000.

Candy thinks it would take two years to sell all of the shirts. She estimates her sales at 25,000shirts in 2009 and 15,000 shirts in 2010.

Rent of the kiosk would be USD 1,500 per month in 2009 and USD 1,600 per month in 2010.

Candy can buy some counters on which to display the merchandise for USD 4,000. She could sell the counters for USD 500 at the end of the second year.

Candy estimates the cost to decorate her kiosk would be USD 2,500.

Candy would hire employees and pay them USD 1 per shirt sold.

Candy plans to sell the shirts for USD 17 each.

Candy and her husband purchased USD 100,000 of capital stock in the business. Therefore, she plans to borrow USD 400,000 from their family banker. Interest expense on this loan will be USD 52,000 in 2009 and USD 6,500 in 2010. Candy plans to repay USD 300,000 on 2010 January 2, and the remaining USD 100,000 on 2010 July 1

Candy needs to rent some storage space because all 40,000 shirts cannot be stored at the kiosk. Storage space costs USD 2,500 per year.

a. Prepare estimated income statements for 2009 and 2010 for Candy”s business. Does it appear that the business will be profitable?

b. Will Candy have the cash available to pay the bank loan as she planned?

Business decision case B In the Annual report appendix, refer to the consolidated statements of earnings for The Limited”s most recent three years. Calculate the gross margin percentage and write an explanation of what the results mean for each of the three years. Annual report analysis C Refer to the consolidated statements of income of The Limited in the Annual report appendix. Identify the 2000, 1999, and 1998 net sales; cost of goods sold; gross profit; selling, administrative, and general expenses; and operating income. Do the results present a favorable trend? Comment on the results.

give the journal entries to record the individual purchases and sales cost of goods 625976

Following are data related to Adler Company”s beginning inventory, purchases, and sales:

Beginning Inventory and Purchases

 

Sales

 

Units

Unit Cost

 

Units

Beginning inventory 6,250

@ $3.00

3-Feb

5,250

March 15 5,000

@ 3.12

4-May

4,500

May 10 8,750

@ 3.30

16-Sep

8,000

August 12 6,250

@ 3.48

9-Oct

7,250

November 20 3,750

@ 3.72

   

30,000

   

25,000

a. Compute the ending inventory under each of the following methods:

Specific identification (assume ending inventory is taken equally from the August 12 and November 20 purchases).

FIFO: (a) Assume use of perpetual inventory procedure.

(b) Assume use of periodic inventory procedure.

LIFO: (a) Assume use of perpetual inventory procedure.

(b) Assume use of periodic inventory procedure.

Weighted-average: (a) Assume use of perpetual inventory procedure.

(b) Assume use of periodic inventory procedure.

(Carry unit cost to four decimal places and round total cost to nearest dollar.)

b. Give the journal entries to record the individual purchases and sales (Cost of Goods Sold entry only) under the LIFO method and perpetual procedure.

compute the estimated ending inventory at cost using the retail inventory method 625977

a. Joel Company reported annual net income as follows:

2007…. USD 27,200

2008…. USD 28,400

2009…. USD 24,000

Analysis of the inventories shows that certain clerical errors were made with the following results:

 

Incorrect inventory amount

Correct inventory amount

2007 December 31

$4,800

$5,680

2008 December 31

5,600

4,680

What is the corrected net income for 2007, 2008, and 2009?

b. The records of Little Corporation show the following account balances on the day a fire destroyed the company”s inventory:

Merchandise inventory, January 1 USD 40,000

Net cost of purchases (to date) USD 200,000

Sales (to date) USD 300,000

Average rate of gross margin for the past five years 30 per cent of net sales.

Compute an estimated value of the ending inventory using the gross margin method.

c. The records of Draper Company show the following account balances at year-end:

 

Cost

Retail

Merchandise inventory, January 1

.$17,600

$25,000

Purchases

68,000

100,000

Transportation-in

1,900

 

Sales

 

101,000

Compute the estimated ending inventory at cost using the retail inventory method.

under the gross margin method an estimate must be made of gross margin to determine 625978

Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false.

(1) Overstated ending inventory results in an overstatement of cost of goods sold and an understatement of gross margin and net income.

(2) In a period of rising prices, FIFO results in the lowest cost of goods sold.

(3) Under LCM, inventory is written down to market value when the market value is less than the cost, and inventory is written up to market value when the market value is greater than the cost.

(4) Under the gross margin method, an estimate must be made of gross margin to determine estimated cost of goods sold and estimated ending inventory.

(5) To use the retail inventory method, both cost and retail prices must be known for the goods available for sale.

(6) Under perpetual procedure, cost of goods sold is determined as a result of the closing entries made at the end of the period.

compute the annual net income for each of the three years assuming the correct inven 625991

Exercise A Crocker Company reported annual net income as follows:

2008

$484,480

2009

487,680

2010

409,984

Analysis of its inventories revealed the following incorrect inventory amounts and these correct amounts:

 

Incorrect Inventory Amount

Correct inventory amount

2008 December 31

$76,800

$89,600

2009 December 31

86,400

77,600

Compute the annual net income for each of the three years assuming the correct inventories had been used.

which method would yield the highest amount of gross margin explain why it does 625995

Kettle Company made the following purchases of Product A in its first year of operations:

 

Units

Unit Cost

2-Jan

1,400

@ $7.40

31-Mar

1,200

@ 7.00

5-Jul

2,400

@ 7.60

1-Nov

1,800

@ 8.00

The ending inventory that year consisted of 2,400 units. Kettle uses periodic inventory procedure.

a. Compute the cost of the ending inventory using each of the following methods: (1) FIFO, (2)

LIFO, and (3) weighted-average.

b. Which method would yield the highest amount of gross margin? Explain why it does.

calculate the dollar amount of the ending inventory using the lcm method applied on 626003

Your assistant has compiled the following data:

Item

Quantity (units)

Unit Cost

Unit Market

Total Cost

Total Market

A

300

$57.60

$55.20

$17,280

$16,560

B

300

28.8

33.6

8,640

10,080

C

900

21.6

21.6

19,440

19,440

D

500

12

13.2

6,000

6,600

Calculate the dollar amount of the ending inventory using the LCM method, applied on an item-by item basis, and the amount of the decline from cost to lower-of-cost-or-market.

the company was fully covered by insurance and asks you to determine the amount of i 626005

Tilley-Mill Company takes a physical inventory at the end of each calendar-year accounting period to establish the ending inventory amount for financial statement purposes. Its financial statements for the past few years indicate an average gross margin on net sales of 25 per cent.

On July 18, a fire destroyed the entire store building and its contents. The records in a fireproof vault were intact. Through July 17, these records show:

Merchandise inventory, January 1 USD 672,000

Merchandise purchases USD 9,408,000

Purchase returns USD 134,400

Transportation-in USD 504,000

Sales USD 14,336,000

Sales returns USD 672,000

The company was fully covered by insurance and asks you to determine the amount of its claim for loss of merchandise.

prepare the closing journal entries 625887

After adjustment, these selected account balances of Cold Stream Campground are:

 

Debits

Credits

Retained earnings

 

$540,000.00

Rental revenue

 

960000

Salaries expense

$336,000.00

 

Depreciated expense – Buildings

64000

 

Utilities expense

208000

 

Dividends

32000

 

In T-account format, show how journal entries to close the books for the period would be posted. (You do not need to show the closing journal entries.) Enter these balances in the accounts before doing so. Key the postings from the first closing entry with the number (1), the second with the number

(2), and so on.

The following account balances appeared in the Income Statement columns of the work sheet entries prepared for Liu Company for the year ended 2010 December 31:

Account Titles

Income Statement

 

Debit

Credit

Service Revenue

 

330,000

Advertising Expense

1,350

 

Salaries Expense

130,000

 

Utilities Expense

2,250

 

Insurance Expense

900

 

Rent Expense

6,750

 

Supplies Expense

2,250

 

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

4,500

 

Interest Expense

562

 

Interest Revenue

 

1,125

 

148,552

331,125

Net Income

182,553

 
 

331,125

331,125

Prepare the closing journal entries.

using the legend at the right determine the category number into which you would pla 625889

Using the legend at the right, determine the category (number) into which you would place each of these items.

 

Item

 

Legend

a.

Land.

1

Current assets.

b.

Marketable securities.

2

Long-term investments.

c.

Notes payable, due in three years.

3

Property, plant, and equipment.

d.

Taxes withheld from employees.

4

Intangible assets.

e.

Patents.

5

Current liabilities.

f.

Retained earnings.

6

Long-term liabilities.

g.

Unearned subscription fees.

7

Stockholders” equity.

h.

Bonds of another corporation (a 20-year investment).

   

i.

Notes payable, due in six months.

   

j.

Accumulated depreciation.

   

prepare the closing journal entries at the end of the fiscal year 2010 june 30 625891

The following adjusted trial balance is for Jasper Appliance Repair Company:

JASPER APPLIANCE REPAIR COMPANY
Adjusted Trial Balance
2010 June 30

 

Debits

Credits

Cash

$63,000

 

Accounts Receivable

42,000

 

Trucks

110,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation—Trucks

 

$30,000

Accounts Payable

 

10,800

Notes Payable

 

20,000

Capital Stock

 

50,000

Retained Earnings, 2009 July 1

 

5,500

Dividends

10,000

 

Service Revenue

 

230,000

Rent Expense

12,000

 

Advertising Expense

5,000

 

Salaries Expense

90,000

 

Supplies Expense

1,500

 

Insurance Expense

1,200

 

Depreciation Expense—Trucks

10,000

 

Interest Expense

1,000

 

Miscellaneous Expense

600

 
 

$346,300

$346,300

Prepare the closing journal entries at the end of the fiscal year, 2010 June 30.

prepare a 12 column work sheet for the year ended 2010 december 31 you need not incl 625892

The following trial balance and additional data are for Sure Sale Reality Company

SURE SALE REALTY COMPANY
Trial Balance
2010 December 31

 

Debits

Credits

Cash

$62,800

 

Accounts Receivable

117,120

 

Prepaid Rent

46,080

 

Equipment

173,760

 

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

 

$21,120

Accounts Payable

 

62,400

Capital Stock

 

96,000

Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1

 

49,920

Dividends

46,080

 

Commissions Revenue

 

653,200

Salaries Expense

321,600

 

Travel Expense

96,480

 

Miscellaneous Expense

18,720

 
 

$882,640

$882,640

The prepaid rent is for the period 2010 July 1, to 2011 June 30.

The equipment has an expected life of 10 years with no salvage value. Accrued salaries are USD 11,520.

Travel expenses accrued but unreimbursed to sales staff at December 31 were USD 17,280

a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the year ended 2010 December 31. You need not include account numbers or explanations of adjustments.

b. Prepare adjusting journal entries.

c. Prepare closing journal entries.

prepare a 12 column work sheet for the year ended 2010 december 31 you need not incl 625893

The following trial balance and additional data are for South Sea Tours, Inc.:

SOUTH SEA TOURS, INC.
Trial Balance
2010 December 31

 

Debits

Credits

Cash

$109,050

 

Accounts Receivable

133,750

 

Prepaid Insurance

4,350

 

Prepaid Advertising

18,000

 

Notes Receivable

11,250

 

Land

90,000

 

Buildings

165,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

 

$49,500

Office Equipment

83,400

 

Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment

 

16,680

Accounts Payable

 

56,850

Notes Payable

 

75,000

Capital Stock

 

240,000

Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1

 

47,820

Dividends

30,000

 

Service Revenue

 

368,350

Salaries Expense

96,000

 

Travel Expense

111,000

 

Interest Revenue

 

600

Interest Expense

3,000

 
 

$854,800

$854,800

The company consistently followed the policy of initially debiting all prepaid items to asset accounts.

The buildings have an expected life of 50 years with no salvage value. The office equipment has an expected life of 10 years with no salvage value.

Accrued interest on notes receivable is USD 450.

Accrued interest on the notes payable is USD 1,000.

Accrued salaries are USD 2,100.

Expired prepaid insurance is USD 3,750.

Expired prepaid advertising is USD 16,500.

a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the year ended 2010 December 31. You need not include account numbers. Briefly explain the entries in the Adjustments columns at the bottom of the work sheet, as was done in Exhibit 20.

b. Prepare the required closing entries.

prepare a 12 column work sheet for the year ended 2010 december 31 you need not incl 625894

The following trial balance and additional data are for Florida Time-Share Property

Management Company:

FLORIDA TIME-SHARE PROPERTY MANAGEMENT COMPANY
Trial Balance
2010 December 31

 

Debits

Credits

Cash

$424,000

 

Prepaid Rent

28,800

 

Prepaid Insurance

7,680

 

Supplies on Hand

2,400

 

Office Equipment

24,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment

 

$5,760

Automobiles

64,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation—Automobiles

 

16,000

Accounts Payable

 

2,880

Unearned Management Fees

 

12,480

Capital Stock

 

360,000

Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1

 

120,640

Dividends

28,000

 

Commissions Revenue

 

260,000

Management Fee Revenue

 

19,200

Salaries Expense

199,840

 

Advertising Expense

2,400

 

Gas and Oil Expense

14,240

 

Miscellaneous Expense

1,600

 
 

$796,960

$796,960

Insurance expense for the year, USD 3,840.

Rent expense for the year, USD 19,200.

Depreciation expense: office equipment, USD 2,880; and automobiles, USD 12,800.

Salaries earned but unpaid at December 31, USD 26,640.

Supplies on hand at December 31, USD 1,000.

The unearned management fees were received and recorded on 2010 November 1. The advance payment covered six months” management of an apartment building.

a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the year ended 2010 December 31. You need not include account numbers or explanations of adjustments.

b. Prepare an income statement.

c. Prepare a statement of retained earnings.

d. Prepare a classified balance sheet.

e. Prepare adjusting and closing entries.

briefly explain the entries in the adjustments columns at the bottom of the work she 625897

The following trial balance and additional data are for Best-Friend Pet Hospital, Inc.

BEST-FRIEND PET HOSPITAL, INC.
Trial Balance
2010 December 31

 

Debits

Credits

Cash

$16,490

 

Accounts Receivable

54,390

 

Supplies on Hand

900

 

Prepaid Fire Insurance

1,800

 

Prepaid Rent

21,600

 

Equipment

125,000

 

Accumulated Depreciation —Equipment

 

$25,000

Accounts Payable

 

29,550

Notes Payable

 

9,000

Capital Stock

 

150,000

Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1

 

20,685

Service Revenue

 

179,010

Interest Expense

225

 

Salaries Expense

142,200

 

Advertising Expense

29,250

 

Supplies Expense

2,135

 

Miscellaneous Expense

3,705

 

Legal and Accounting Expense

13,750

 

Utilities Expense

1,800

 
 

$413,245

$413,245

The company consistently followed the policy of initially debiting all prepaid items to asset accounts.

Prepaid fire insurance is USD 600 as of the end of the year.

Supplies on hand are USD 638 as of the end of the year.

Prepaid rent is USD 2,625 as of the end of the year.

The equipment is expected to last 10 years with no salvage value.

Accrued salaries are USD 2,625.

a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the year ended 2010 December 31. You need not include account numbers. Briefly explain the entries in the Adjustments columns at the bottom of the work sheet, as was done in Exhibit 20.

b. Prepare the 2010 December 31, closing entries.

prepare a 12 column work sheet for the year ended 2010 december 31 you need not incl 625898

The following trial balance and additional data are for Roswell Interior Decorators, Inc.:

ROSWELL INTERIOR DECORATORS, INC
Trial Balance
2010 December 31

 

Debits

Credits

Cash

$85,400

 

Accounts Receivable

81,600

 

Supplies on Hand

4,000

 

Prepaid Rent

12,240

 

Prepaid Advertising

2,880

 

Prepaid Insurance

4,400

 

Office Equipment

7,600

 

Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment

 

$2,760

Office Furniture

29,200

 

Accumulated Depreciation—Office Furniture

 

8,280

Accounts Payable

 

25,200

Notes Payable (due 2011)

 

4,000

Capital Stock

 

100,000

Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1

 

22,400

Dividends

45,520

 

Service Revenue

 

250,000

Salaries Expense

98,800

 

Utilities Expense

20,000

 

Miscellaneous Expense

24,000

 
 

$412,640

$412,640

Supplies on hand at 2010 December 31, are USD 1,000.

Rent expense for 2010 is USD 10,000.

Advertising expense for 2010 is USD 2,304.

Insurance expense for 2010 is USD 2,400.

Depreciation expense is office equipment, USD 912, and office furniture, USD 3,000.

Accrued interest on notes payable is USD 150.

Accrued salaries are USD 4,200.

a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the year ended 2010 December 31. You need not include account numbers or explanations of adjustments.

b. Prepare an income statement.

c. Prepare a statement of retained earnings.

d. Prepare a classified balance sheet.

e. Prepare adjusting and closing entries.

purchased new electric pencil sharpeners for its offices at a total cost of usd 60 t 625900

For each of the following transactions or circumstances and the entries made, state which, if any, of the assumptions, concepts, principles, or modifying conventions of accounting have been violated. For each violation, give the entry to correct the improper accounting assuming the books have not been closed.

During the year, Dorsey Company did the following:

Had its buildings appraised. They were found to have a market value of USD 410,000, although their book value was only USD 380,000. The accountant debited the Buildings and Accumulated

Depreciation—Buildings accounts for USD 15,000 each and credited Paid-in Capital—From Appreciation. No separate mention was made of this action in the financial statements.

Purchased new electric pencil sharpeners for its offices at a total cost of USD 60. These pencil sharpeners were recorded as assets and are being depreciated over five years.

match the items in column a with the proper descriptions in column b 625914

Match the items in Column A with the proper descriptions in Column B.

Column A

Column B

Going concern (continuity).

a. An assumption relied on in the preparation of
the primary financial statements that would be
unreasonable when the inflation rate is high.

Consistency.

b. Concerned with relative dollar amounts.

Disclosure.

c. The usual basis for the recording of assets.

Periodicity.

d. Required if the accounting treatment differs
from that previously used for a particular item.

Conservatism.

e. An assumption that would be unreasonable to
use in reporting on a firm that had become insolvent.

Stable dollar.

f. None of these.

Matching.

g. Requires a company to use the same accounting
procedures and practices through time.

Materiality.

h. An assumption that the life of an entity can be
subdivided into time periods for reporting purposes.

Exchange-price (cost).

i. Discourages undue optimism in measuring and
reporting net assets and net income.

Business entity.

j. Requires separation of personal from business
activities in the recording and reporting processes.

compute the net income for 2011 assuming use of the installment basis of recognizing 625915

Parker Clothing Company sells its products on an installment sales basis. Data for 2010 and 2011 follow:

 

2010

2011

Installment sales

$800,000

$960,000

Cost of goods sold on installment sales

560,000

720,000

Other expenses

120,000

160,000

Cash collected from 2010 sales

480,000

240,000

Cash collected from 2011 sales

 

640,000

a. Compute the net income for 2011, assuming use of the accrual (sales) basis of revenue recognition.

b. Compute the net income for 2011, assuming use of the installment basis of recognizing gross margin.

match the descriptions in column b with the accounting qualities in column a use som 625918

Match the descriptions in Column B with the accounting qualities in Column A. Use some descriptions more than once.

Column A: Accounting qualities

Column B: Descriptions

Relevance.

a. Users of accounting information.

Feedback value.

b. Pervasive constraint.

Decision makers.

c . User-specific qualities.

Representational faithfulness.

d. Primary decision-specific qualities.

Reliability.

e. Ingredients of primary qualities.

Comparability.

f. Secondary and interactive qualities.

Benefits exceed costs.

g. Threshold for recognition.

Predictive value.

 

Timeliness.

 

Decision usefulness.

 

Verifiability.

 

Understandability.

 

Neutrality.

 

Materiality.

 

compute net income for 2010 using the installment method of accounting for sales and 625923

Ramirez Video, Inc., sells video recorders under terms calling for a small down payment and monthly payments spread over three years. Following are data for the first three years of the company”s operations:

2008

2009

2010

Gross margin rate 30%

40%

50%

Cash collected in 2010:

   

From sales in…………$216,000

   

From sales in

$288,000

 

From sales in

 

$480,000

Total sales for 2010 were USD 1,600,000, while general and selling expenses amounted to USD 400,000.

a. Compute net income for 2010, assuming revenues are recognized at the time of sale.

b. Compute net income for 2010, using the installment method of accounting for sales and gross margin.

match the descriptions in column b with the proper terms in column a 625926

Match the descriptions in Column B with the proper terms in Column A.

Column A

 

Column B

1. Financial reporting objectives.

a.

Information is free of measurement method bias.

2. Qualitative characteristics.

b.

The benefits exceed the costs.

3. Relevance.

c.

Relatively large items must be accounted for in a theoretically correct way.

4. Predictive value.

d.

The information can be substantially duplicated by independent measurers using the same measurement methods.

5. Feedback value.

e.

When information improves users” ability to predict outcomes of events.

6. Timeliness.

f.

Broad overriding goals sought by accountants engaging in financial reporting.

7. Reliability.

g.

When information is pertinent or bears on a decision.

8. Representational faithfulness.

h.

The characteristics that accounting information should possess to be useful in decision making.

9. Verifiability.

i.

Information that reveals the relative success of users in predicting outcomes.

10. Neutrality.

j.

When accounting statements on economic activity correspond to the actual underlying activity.

11. Comparability.

k.

When information is provided soon enough that it may be considered in
decision making.

12. Consistency.

l.

When information faithfully depicts for users what it purports to represent.

13. Cost-benefit.

m.

Requires a company to use the same accounting principles and reporting practices through time.

14. Materiality.

n.

When reported differences and similarities in information are real and not
the result of differing accounting treatments.

compute net income for 2010 assuming use of the installment basis of accounting for 625932

Nevada Real Estate Sales Company sells lots in its development in Dry Creek Canyon under terms calling for small cash down payments with monthly installment payments spread over a few years. Following are data on the company”s operations for its first three years:

 

2008

2009

2010

Gross margin rate

45%

48%

50%

Cash collected in 2010 from sales of lots made in

$640,000

$800,000

$900,000

The total selling price of the lots sold in 2010 was USD 3,000,000, while general and administrative expenses (which are not included in the costs used to determine gross margin) were USD 800,000.

a. Compute net income for 2010 assuming revenue is recognized on the sale of a lot.

b. Compute net income for 2010 assuming use of the installment basis of accounting for sales and gross margin.

why is a reconciliation of cost and financial accounts necessary under what circumst 625857

1. Explain the need for reconciliation of cost and financial accounts.

2. Explain the importance of reconciliation of cost and financial accounts. Mention four items of expenses or incomes, which will appear in financial accounts but normally appear in cost accounts.

3. Why is a reconciliation of cost and financial accounts necessary? Under what circumstances a reconciliation statement can be avoided?

4. At the end of an accounting period, it is found that the profit as shown in the financial accounts falls considerably short of the profits according to the cost accounts. Indicate how the discrepancy may have arisen.

5. Indicate the reasons why it is necessary for the cost and financial accounts organization to be reconciled and explain the main sources of difference, which would enter into such a reconciliation.

the following are the cost estimates and other details for the year ending on 31st m 625859

A lodging home is being run in a small hill station with 50 single rooms. The home offers concessional rates during six off- season months in a year. During this period, half of the full room rent is charged. The management’s profit margin is targeted at 20% of the room rent. The following are the cost estimates and other details for the year ending on 31st March 2006. [Assume a month to be of 30 days].

I] Occupancy during the season is 80% while in the off- season it is 40% only.

II] Expenses:

o Staff salary [Excluding room attendants] Rs.2, 75, 000

o Repairs to building Rs.1, 30, 500

o Laundry and linen: Rs.40, 000

o Interior and tapestry: Rs.87, 500

o Sundry expenses: Rs.95, 400

III] Annual depreciation is to be provided for buildings @ 5% and on furniture and equipments

@ 15% on straight-line basis.

IV] Room attendants are paid Rs.5 per room day on the basis of occupancy of the rooms in a month.

V] Monthly lighting charges are Rs.120 per room, except in four months in winter when it is Rs.30 per room and this cost is on the basis of full occupancy for a month.

VI] Total investment in the home is Rs.100 lakhs of which Rs.80 lakhs relate to buildings and balance for furniture and equipments.

You are required to work out the room rent chargeable per day both during the season and the off-season months on the basis of the foregoing information.

depreciation expense for the month is usd 200 accrued salaries on july 31 are usd 30 625864

This problem involves using a work sheet for Green Hills Riding Stable, Incorporated, for the month ended 2010 July 31, and performing the closing process. The trial balance for Green Hills Riding Stable, Incorporated, as of 2010 July 31, was as follows:

GREEN HILLS RIDING STABLE, INCORPORATED
Trial Balance
2010 July 31

Acct. No.

Account Title

Debits

Credits

100

Cash

$10,700

 

103

Accounts Receivable

8,100

 

130

Land

40,000

 

140

Buildings

24,000

 

200

Accounts Payable

 

$1,100

201

Notes Payable

 

40,000

300

Capital Stock

 

35,000

310

Retained Earnings, 2010 July 1

 

3,100

320

Dividends

1,000

 

402

Horse Boarding Fees Revenue

 

4,500

404

Riding Lesson Fees Revenue

 

3,600

507

Salaries Expense

1,400

 

513

Feed Expense

1,100

 

540

Interest Expense

200

 

568

Miscellaneous Expense

800

 
   

$87,300

$87,300

Depreciation expense for the month is USD 200. Accrued salaries on July 31 are USD 300.

a. Prepare a 12-column work sheet for the month ended 2010 July 31.

b. Journalize the adjusting entries.

c. Journalize the closing entries.

determine under which major column headings each of the following items would appear 625878

Three of the major column headings on a work sheet are Trial Balance, Income

Statement, and Balance Sheet. Determine under which major column headings each of the following items would appear and whether it would be a debit or credit. (For example, Cash would appear on the debit side of the Trial Balance and Balance Sheet columns.)

 

Account Titles

Trial Balance Debit

Credit

Income
Statement
Debit

Credit

Statement of
Retained
Earnings Debit

Credit

Balance
Sheet
Debit

Credit

a.

Accounts Receivable

               

b.

Accounts Payable

               

c.

Interest Revenue

               

d.

Advertising Expense

               

e.

Capital Stock

               

f.

Retained Earnings (Beg.)

               

g.

Net income for the month

               

h.

Retained Earnings (End)

               

using these account balances and the following additional information prepare a work 625882

The Trial Balance of the Printer Repair Company at 2010 December 31, contains the following account balances listed in alphabetical order to increase your skill in sorting amounts to the proper work sheet columns.

Printer Repair Company
Trial Balance Account Balances
2010 December 31

Accounts Payable

$41,000

Accounts Receivable

92,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

25,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

9,000

Buildings

140,000

Capital Stock

65,000

Cash

60,000

Equipment

36,000

Prepaid Insurance

3,600

Retained Earnings, 2010 January 1

4,800

Salaries Expense

96,000

Service Revenue

290,000

Supplies on Hand

4,000

Utilities Expense

3,200

Using these account balances and the following additional information, prepare a work sheet for Printer Repair Company. Arrange the accounts in their approximate usual order.

Supplies on hand at 2010 December 31, have a cost of USD 2,400.

The balance in the Prepaid Insurance account represents the cost of a two-year insurance policy covering the period from 2010 January 1, through 2011 December 31.

The estimated lives of depreciable assets are buildings, 40 years, and equipment, 20 years.

No salvage values are anticipated.

prepare necessary accounts from the following details 625818

Prepare necessary accounts from the following details.

Particulars

Process I

Process II

Materials – Rs.

30,000

3,000

Labor – Rs.

10,000

12,000

Overheads – Rs.

7,000

8,600

Input [Units]

20,000

Transfer from Process I [Units]

17,500

Normal loss

10%

4%

Sales value of wastage per unit – Rs.

Re.1

Rs.2

There was no opening or closing stock or work in progress

The final output from Process II was 17, 000 units.

ab ltd is engaged in the process engineering industry during the month october 2007 625819

AB Ltd is engaged in the process engineering industry. During the month, October 2007, 2000 units were introduced in process ‘X’. The normal loss is estimated at 5% of input. At the end of the month, 1400 units had been produced and transferred to process ‘Y’, 460 were incomplete units, and 140 units had to be scrapped at the end of the process. The incomplete units reached the following degree of completion:

Material: 75%, Labor: 50%, overheads: 50%

Following are the further details regarding process X.

Cost of 2000 units introduced: Rs. 58,000

Additional material consumed Rs. 14,400

Direct labor: Rs. 33,400

Allocated overheads: Rs. 16,700

Note: The scrapped units fetched Rs.10 each.

Required: [As per First In First Out Method]

A] Statement of equivalent production

B] Statement of cost

C] Statement of evaluation

D] Process ‘X’ Account.

vinal ltd produces article b from a material which passes through two processes name 625822

Vinal Ltd. produces Article B from a material, which passes through two processes, namely P and Q.

The details relating to a month are as under,

Particulars

Process P

Process Q

Materials introduced- units

10,000

Transferred to next process

9,000

Work in progress: At the beginning of the month- units

600

At the end of the month- units

400

Expenses: Work in progress – beginning of the month Materials introduced at the beginning of the month

Rs. 1,20,000

Rs. 9,400

Labor and overheads:

Rs. 27,600

Rs. 18,200

Stage of completion of work in progress:

Process P: Closing work in progress 20% complete in respect of labor and overheads

Process Q: Opening work in progress 331/3% complete in respect of labor and overheads

Closing work in progress 25% complete in respect of labor and overheads

The finished output B, emerging out of Process Q is sold for Rs. 20 per unit

The management is considering an alternative by which the finished output B could be further processed by installing a new machine at a capital cost of Rs. 8 lakhs. In such an event, the final product known as article N produced by this operation could be sold at Rs. 25 per unit. The operating expenses of the aforesaid further treatment are estimated at Rs. 23, 000. The company desires a return on investment of 25%

Required:

I] Prepare the process cost accounts for Process P and Q [Show the working of equivalent units and cost per equivalent unit in each process according to FIFO method]

II] Prepare a statement of profitability of Product B as it emerges from Process Q

III] Advise the management whether further treatment of Product B by installing the new machine should be taken up or not.

following information is available regarding process a for the month of august 2007 625823

Following information is available regarding Process A for the month of August 2007

Production Record:

  • Units in process as on 1st August: 4,000 [All materials used, 25% complete for labor and overheads]
  • New units introduced: 16, 000
  • Units completed: 14, 000
  • Units in process as on 31st August 2007: 6,000 [All materials used, 331/3% complete for labor and overheads]

Cost Records:

  • Work in process as on 1st August 2007
  • Materials: Rs.6,000
  • Labor: Rs.1,000
  • Overheads: Rs.1,000

Cost during the month:

  • Materials: Rs. 25, 600
  • Labor: Rs.15, 000
  • Overheads: Rs.15, 000

Presuming that Average Method of inventory is used, prepare,

I] Statement of equivalent production

II] Statement showing cost for each element

III] Statement of apportionment of cost

IV] Process Account

the following information is given in respect of process no 3 for the month of janua 625824

The following information is given in respect of Process No.3 for the month of January 2001.

Opening stock: 2000 units made of,

Direct Material I: Rs.12, 350

Direct Material II: Rs.13, 200

Direct Labor: Rs.17, 500

Overheads: Rs.11, 000

Transferred from Process No.2: 20, 000 units @ Rs.6 per unit

Transferred to Process No.4: 17, 000 units

Expenditure incurred in Process No.3:

Direct Materials: Rs.30, 000

Direct Labor: Rs.60, 000

Overheads: Rs.60, 000

Scrap: 1, 000 units: Degree of completion: Direct Materials. 100%, Direct Labor: 60%, Overheads. 40%, normal loss 10% of production

Scrapped units realized @ Rs. 4 per unit.

Closing stock: 4,000 units, degree of completion: Direct Materials 80%, Direct Labor 60% and overheads 40%

Prepare Process 3 A/c using average price method, along with necessary supporting statements.

stocks in each process have been valued at prime cost of the processes 625826

A certain product passes through three processes before it is completed. The output of each process is charged to next process at a price calculated to give a profit of 20% on transfer price.[i.e. 25% on the cost price] The output of Process III is charged to finished goods stock account on a similar basis. There was no work in progress at the beginning of the year and overheads had been ignored. Stocks in each process have been valued at prime cost of the processes.

The following data are obtained at the end of December 2007

Particulars

Process I Rs.

Process II Rs.

Process III Rs.

Finished Stock Rs

Direct Material

30,000

20,000

40,000

Direct Wages

20,000

30,000

10,000

Stock as on 31st December

10,000

20,000

30,000

30,000

Sales during the year

1,70,000

From the above information prepare,

[a] Process cost accounts showing the profit element at each stage

[b] Actual realized profit

[c] Stock valuation as would appear in the Balance Sheet

x ltd manufactures product a which yields two by products b and c the actual joint e 625830

X Ltd. manufactures Product A, which yields two by-products B and C. The actual joint expenses of manufacture for a period were Rs.8, 000. It was estimated that the profits on each product as a percentage of sales would be 30%, 25% and 15% respectively. Subsequent expenses were as follows:

Particulars

Product A

Product B

Product C

Materials

Rs.100

Rs.75

Rs.25

Direct wages

200

125

50

Overheads

150

125

75

Total

450

325

150

Sales

Rs. 6,000

Rs. 4,000

Rs. 2,500

Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of the joint expenses of manufacture over the different products. Also presume that selling expenses are apportioned over the products as a percentage to sales.

in the course of manufacture of the main product p a and b also emerge 625831

In the course of manufacture of the main product ‘P’, A and B also emerge. The joint expenses of manufacture amount to Rs.1, 19, 550. All the products are processed further after separation and sold as per details given below.

Particulars

Main Product P
Rs.

By-Product A
Rs.

By – Product B
Rs.

Sales

90,000

60,000

40,000

Cost beyond split off point

6,000

5,000

4,000

Profit as percentage of sales

25%

20%

15%

Selling and administration overheads are absorbed as a percentage of cost of sales. Prepare a statement showing the apportionment of joint cost to the main product and by-products. Also prepare main product ‘P’ account.

the details of output additional cost after split off point and sales value of the p 625833

In a concern engaged in process industry, four products emerge from a particular process of operation. The total cost of input for the period ended 30th September 2002 is Rs.2, 53, 500. The details of output, additional cost after ‘split off point’ and sales value of the products are appended below.

Product

Output – kg

Additional processing
cost after split-off
point – Rs.

Sales value
Rs.

A

8, 000

60, 000

1,68,000

B

5, 000

10, 000

1,10,000

C

3, 000

60,000

D

4, 000

20, 000

90,000

If the products are sold at ‘split off point’ without further processing, the sales value would have been,

A: Rs.1, 15, 000

B: Rs.90, 000

C: Rs.55, 000

D: Rs.80, 000

You are required to prepare a statement of profitability based on the products being sold:

I] After further processing, and

II] At the split off point.

jb ltd produces four joint products a b c and d all of which emerge from the process 625834

JB Ltd. produces four joint products, A, B, C and D, all of which emerge from the processing of one raw material. The following are the relevant data:

Production for the period:

Joint Product

Number of Units

Selling Price per Unit Rs.

A

500

18.00

B

900

8.00

C

400

4.00

D

200

11.00

The company budgets for a profit of 10% on sales value. The other estimated costs are:

Carriage inwards: Rs.1, 000

Direct wages: Rs.3, 000

Manufacturing overheads: Rs.2, 000

Administration overheads: 10% of the sales value

You are required to,

I] Calculate the maximum price that may be paid for the raw material

II] Prepare a comprehensive cost statement for each of the products allocating the materials and other costs based up on: Number of units and Sales value.

the processing of raw materials into the four products cost rs 28 lakhs to the compa 625835

A company purchases raw materials worth Rs.11.04 lakhs and processes them into four products, P,

Q, R and S, which have a unit sales value of Rs.3, Rs.9, Rs.16 and Rs.60 respectively at split-off point, as they could be sold as such to other processors. However, during a year, the company decided to further process and sell products P, Q and S while R was not be processed further but sold at split off point to other processors. The processing of raw materials into the four products cost Rs.28 lakhs to the company. The other data for the year were as under:

Product

Output -Units

Sales Rs. in lakhs

Additional processing costs after split
off [All variable costs] Rs. in lakhs

P

10,00,000

46.00

12.00

Q

20,000

4.00

2.40

R

10,000

1.60

——

S

18,000

12.00

.40

You are required to work out the following information for managerial decision- making.

I] If the joint costs are allocated amongst the four products on the basis of ‘Net Realizable Value’ at split off point, what would be the company’s annual income?

II] If the company had sold off all other three products at split off stage, identify the increase/ decrease in the company’s annual income as compared to I above.

III] What sales strategy could the company have planned to maximize its profit in the year?

IV] Identify the net increase in income if the strategy at III is adopted, as compared to I above?

xyz ltd is maintaining separate set of books for financial accounts and cost account 625840

XYZ Ltd. is maintaining separate set of books for financial accounts and cost accounts. You are required to prepare accounts in cost books and trial balance for the year ended 31st March 2006.

Information Available From Financial Accounts:

  • Sales: Rs.6, 30, 000
  • Indirect wages: Production Rs.38, 000, Administration Rs.22, 000, Sales and distribution

Rs. 30, 000

  • Materials purchased: Rs.1, 50, 000
  • Direct factory wages: Rs.2, 30, 000
  • Production overheads: Rs.70, 000
  • Selling and distribution overheads: Rs.60, 000
  • Administration overheads: Rs.48, 000

The data available from cost accounts for the period include the following:

  • Raw materials issued to production as indirect material Rs.20, 000
  • Stores issued to production as direct materials Rs.1, 15, 000
  • Raw materials of finished production Rs.4, 05, 000
  • Cost of goods sold at finished goods stock valuation Rs.4, 00, 000
  • Standard rate of production overhead absorption Re.0.50 per operating hour
  • Rate of administration overhead absorption 20% of cost of production
  • Rate of sales and distribution overhead absorption 10% of sales
  • Actual operating hours worked 2, 40, 000
  • There is no balance of stock on 1-4-2005

the profit and loss accounts is shown in the financial books of a company for the ye 625841

The Profit and Loss Accounts is shown in the financial books of a company for the year ended 30th September, 2002 together with a statement of reconciliation between the profit as per financial and cost accounts is given below.

Profit and Loss Account for the Year Ended 30/9/2002

Particulars

Amount Rs.

Particulars

Amount Rs.

Opening Stock –R.M.

90, 000

Sales

15, 00, 000

Opening Stock – WIP

50, 000

Closing Stock – R.M.

98, 000

Opening Stock – FG

70, 000

Closing Stock – WIP

53, 000

Raw material purchases

5, 00, 000

Closing Stock – F.G.

72, 000

Direct wages

2, 00, 000

Miscellaneous receipts

45, 000

Factory overheads

2, 00, 000

Administrative expenses

1, 70, 000

Selling and Distribution expenses

2, 20, 000

Preliminary expenses written off

75, 000

Debenture interest

30, 000

Net profit

1, 63, 000

Total

17, 68, 000

Total

17, 68, 000

Statement of Reconciliation of Profit as per Financial and Cost Accounts

Particulars

Amount Rs.

Amount Rs.

Profit as per financial accounts

1, 63, 000

I] Difference in valuation of stock

Add: Raw materials –closing stock

1, 200

Work-in-progress –opening stock

1, 300

Finished goods – opening stock

2, 000

Closing stock

1, 500

Total [A]

5, 500

Less: Raw materials – opening stock

1, 650

Work – in –progress –closing stock

750

Total [B]

2, 400

A – B

3, 100

II] Other items

Add: Preliminary expenses written off

75, 000

Debenture interest

30, 000

Less: Miscellaneous receipts

45, 000

60, 000

Profit as per Cost Accounts

2, 26, 100

You are required to prepare the following accounts as they would appear in the Costing Ledger

i. Raw Material Control A/c

ii. Work –in – progress Control A/c

iii. Finished Goods Control A/c

iv. Cost of Sales A/c

v. Costing Profit and Loss A/c

what do you understand by integral and non integral system of accounting what is a g 625842

1. What do you understand by integral and non-integral system of accounting? What is a general ledger adjustment account?

2. What procedure you would adopt in order to reconcile, at the end of an accounting period, the overheads charged in cost accounts with that shown in the financial accounting?

3. Explain a] General ledger adjustment account. b] Stores ledger control account. c] Work in progress ledger control account. d] Finished goods ledger control account.

4. What are the advantages of control accounts?

5. A] State the advantages of maintaining a cost ledger.

B] Insert specimen entries in the following accounts of a cost ledger, explaining from what sources such entries are normally obtained, stores ledger control account, work in progress ledger control account, finished stock ledger control account, cost of sales account.

journalize the following transactions in the integrated books of account in the book 625844

Journalize the following transactions in the integrated books of account in the books of XYZ Ltd.

Particulars

Amount Rs.

Credit purchases

12, 00, 000

Production wages paid

7, 00, 000

Stocks issued to production orders

8, 00, 000

Work expenses charged to production

4, 50, 000

Finished goods transferred from production orders

18, 00, 000

Administration expenses charged to production

1, 50, 000

Work expenses outstanding

1, 20, 000

Work expenses paid

4, 60, 000

prepare a reconciliation statement from the following particulars 625850

Prepare a Reconciliation Statement from the following particulars:

Particulars

Amount – Rs.

Profit as per cost accounts

2, 91, 000

Works overheads under-recovered

19, 000

Administration overheads under – recovered

45, 500

Selling overheads over – recovered

39, 000

Overvaluation of opening stock in cost accounts

30, 000

Overvaluation of closing stock in cost accounts

15, 000

Interest earned during the year

7, 500

Rent received during the year

54, 000

Bad debts written off during the year

18, 000

Preliminary expenses written off during the year

36, 000

Profit as per financial accounts

2,88,000

the following information is available from the financial books of a company having 625851

The following information is available from the financial books of a company having a normal production capacity of 60, 000 units for the year ended 31st March 2007.

a) Sales Rs.10, 00, 000 [50, 000 units]

b) There was no opening and closing of finished units.

c) Direct material and direct wages cost were Rs.5, 00, 000 and Rs.2, 50, 000 respectively

d) Actual factory expenses were Rs.1, 50, 000 of which 60% are fixed

e) Actual administration expenses were Rs.45, 000, which are completely fixed.

f) Actual selling and distribution expenses were Rs.30, 000 out of which, 40% are fixed.

g) Interest and dividends received Rs.15, 000.

You are required to,

A. Find out profits as per financial books for the year ended 31st March 2007.

B. Prepare cost sheet and ascertain the profit as per the cost accounts for the year ended 31st

March 2007.

C. Prepare a statement reconciling profits shown by financial and cost books.

from the following particulars prepare 625852

From the following particulars, prepare

a] A statement of cost of manufacture for the year,

b] A statement of profit as per cost accounts

c] Profit and Loss Accounts in financial books and,

d] Reconciliation of the difference in the profits as shown by b] and c] above,

Opening stock of raw materials: Rs.1, 00, 000

Closing stock of raw materials: Rs.1, 50, 000

Opening stock of finished product: Rs.2, 00, 000

Closing stock of finished product: Rs.50, 000

Purchases of raw materials: Rs.6, 00, 000

Wages: Rs.2, 50, 000

Charge factory overhead at 25% on prime cost. Office overheads will be levied at 75% on factory overheads. Actual works expenditure amounted to Rs.1, 93, 750 and actual office expenses amounted to Rs.1, 52, 500. The selling price was fixed at 25% above cost price.

from the following profit and loss a c prepare a memorandum reconciliation account s 625854

From the following Profit and Loss A/c, prepare a Memorandum Reconciliation Account, showing the profit as per the Cost Accounts.

Profit And Loss A/c

Particulars

Amount – Rs.

Particulars

Amount – Rs.

To office salaries

11, 282

By gross profit

54, 648

To office expenses

6, 514

By dividends received

400

To salesmen’s salaries

4, 922

By interest received

150

To sales expenses

9, 304

To distribution expenses

2, 990

To loss on sale of machinery

1, 950

To fines

200

To discount on debentures

100

To net profit

17, 936

Total

55, 198

Total

55, 198

To income tax

8, 000

By net profit

17, 936

To reserve

1, 000

To dividend

4, 000

To balance c/d

4, 936

Total

17, 936

Total

17, 936

The Cost Accountant of the company has ascertained a profit of Rs.19, 636 as per his books.

prepare a reconciliation statement and arrive at a profit as per cost accounts using 625856

During the year ended, 31st March 2007, the profit of a company as per financial Profit and Loss A/c was Rs.33, 248 as given below. Prepare a reconciliation statement and arrive at a profit as per cost accounts using the additional information given.

Profit and Loss Account

Debit Credit

Particulars

Amount- Rs.

Particulars

Amount – Rs.

To opening stock

4, 94, 358

By sales

6, 93, 000

To purchases

1, 64, 308

By sundry income

632

Less: Closing stock

1, 50, 242

5, 08, 424

To direct wages

46, 266

To factory overheads

41, 652

To administrative overheads

19, 690

To selling expenses

44, 352

To net profit

33, 248

Total

6, 93, 632

Total

6, 93, 632

The costing records show:

A. Closing stock Rs.1, 56, 394

B. Direct wages absorbed Rs.49, 734

C. Factory overheads absorbed Rs.39, 428

D. Administration expenses calculated @ 3% of sales

E. Selling expenses absorbed @ 5% of sales

what is a purchase requisition give a specimen form of purchase requisition and stat 625770

1. What do you understand by ‘Material Control’? What are the essentials of an efficient material control system?

2. Explain the role played by ‘Material Control’ in cost control and cost reduction.

3. Describe briefly the functions of each of the following departments with regard to material control.

A] Stores Purchase B] Stores receiving and inspection department C] Store keeping department

D] Production department and E] Stock control department

4. Indicate the reasons why the purchase department should function as a separate department and state the advantages of a centralized purchase function.

5. What is a purchase requisition? Give a specimen form of purchase requisition and state the information contained therein.

the existing incentive system of a certain factory is normal working week 5 days of 625783

The existing incentive system of a certain factory is, Normal working week: 5 days of 9 hours each plus 3 late shifts of 3 hours each Rate of payment: Day work – Rs.10 per hour, late shift – Rs.15 per hour

Additional hours payable: Rs.25 per day shift, Rs.15 per late shift Average output per operative for 54 hours week, i.e. including 3 late shifts: 120 articles In order to increase output and eliminate overtime it was decided to switch on to a system of payment by results. The following information is obtained.

Time rate [as usual] Rs.10 per hour

Basic time allowed for 15 articles: 5 hours

Piecework rate: Add 20% to price

Premium bonus: Add 50% to time

You are required to work out,

[I] Hours worked

[II] Weekly earnings

[III] Number of articles produced and

[IV] Labor cost per article for an operative under the following systems

  • Existing time rate
  • Straight piece rate
  • Rowan plan
  • Halsey plan

Assume that 135 articles are produced in a 45 hours week under straight piece rate, Rowan plan and Halsey plan. The additional bonus under the existing system will be discontinued in the proposed incentive scheme.

in a factory bonus system bonus hours are credited to the employees in the proportio 625784

In a factory bonus system, bonus hours are credited to the employees in the proportion of time taken which time saved bears to time allowed. Jobs are carried forward from one week to another. No overtime worked and payment is made in full for all units worked on, including those subsequently rejected. From the following information you are required to calculate for each employee –

[a] The bonus hours and amount of bonus earned.

[b] The total wage costs and

[c] The wages cost of each good unit produced.

Particulars

Worker A

Worker B

Worker C

Z

Rs.10

Rs.16

Rs.12

Units produced for production

2500

2200

3600

Time allowed for 100 units

2 hrs. 35 minutes

3 hours

1 hour 30 minutes

Time taken

52 hours

75 hours

48 hours

Rejects

100 units

40 units

400 units

xyz ltd has introduced a scanlon plan of incentive bonus for its employees from the 625785

XYZ Ltd. has introduced a Scanlon plan of incentive bonus for its employees from the year 2006 -07.The relevant information for three previous years is as follows.

Year

Sales Revenue Rs.

Total Salaries and Wages Rs

2003-04

2,40,000

72,000

2004-05

2,50,000

70,000

2005-06

2,70,000

86,400

For the year 2006-07, the sales revenue has been Rs.3, 25, 000 and the total salaries and wages paid Rs.90, 000. What is the amount due to employees under Scanlon Plan? If 50% is set-aside in the bonus equalization reserve fund, how much money is to be paid out for 2006-07 as Scanlon Bonus?

your organization is experiencing a high labor turnover in recent years and manageme 625786

Your organization is experiencing a high labor turnover in recent years, and management would like you to submit a report on the loss suffered by the company due to such labor turnover. Following figures are available for your consideration.

Sales: Rs.600 lakhs

Direct materials: Rs.150 lakhs

Direct labor: Rs.48 lakhs on 4, 80, 000 man hours

Other variable expenses: Rs.60 lakhs

Fixed overheads: Rs.80 lakhs

The direct man hours include 9000 man hours spent on trainees and replacements, only 50% of which were productive. Further, during the year 12, 000 man-hours of potential work could not be availed of because of delayed replacement. The cost incurred due to separation and replacements amounted to Rs.1 lakh. On the basis of the above data, prepare a comparative statement showing actual profit vis-à-vis the profit which would have been realized had there been no labor turnover.

a company uses an old method of machining a part manufactured for sale the estimates 625787

A company uses an old method of machining a part manufactured for sale. The estimates of operating details for the year 2005-06 are given below.

Number of parts to be manufactured and sold: 30, 000

Raw materials required per part: 10 kg @ Rs.2 per kg

Average wage rate per worker: Rs.40 per day of 8 hours

Average labor efficiency: 60%

Standard time required to manufacture one part: 2 hours

Overhead rate: Rs.10 per clock hour

Material handling expenses: 2% of the value of raw material.

The company has a suggestion box scheme and an award equivalent to three months saving in labor cost is passed on to the employee whose suggestion is accepted. In response to this scheme suggestion has been received from an employee to use a special Jig in the manufacture of the aforesaid part. The cost of the Jig, which has life of one year is Rs.30, 000 and the use of the Jig will reduce the standard time by 12 minutes.

Required:

[a] Compute the amount of award payable to the employee who has given the suggestion.

[b] Prepare a statement showing the annual cost of production before and after the implementation of the suggestion to use the Jig and indicate the annual saving.

[c] State the assumptions on which your calculations are based.

management of a manufacturing unit is considering extensive modernization of the fac 625788

Management of a manufacturing unit is considering extensive modernization of the factory through progressive mechanization, which would result in improved productivity and reduced strength. Through negotiations with the union, it was agreed that for every 1% increase in productivity, workers would be paid 0.5% incentive wages. It was also agreed that through voluntary retirement the staff strength would be reduced to 300 from the present level of 400. The following further comparative data are available before and after the proposed mechanization.

Particulars

Before mechanization

After mechanization

Number of articles produced per month

50,000

48,000

Fringe benefits: 50% of wages

Wages paid per month: Rs.4,00,000

Sales per month: [value] Rs.24,00,000

Profit/volume ratio: 25%

Based on the above data, you are required to work out the annual financial implications of the

proposal.

a company has three production departments a b and c and two service departments x a 625793

A company has three production departments A, B and C and two service departments, X and Y.

The following data are extracted from the records of the company for a particular period.

Sr. No.

Particulars

Amount (Rs.)

01

Rent and Taxes

25,000

02

General lighting

3,000

03

Indirect Wages

7,500

04

Power

7,500

05

Depreciation of Machinery

50,000

06

Sundries

50,000

Additional Data

Particulars

Total

Dept. A

Dept. C

Dept. X

Dept. Y

Direct Wages (Rs.)

50,000

15,000

15,000

7,500

2,500

Horsepower of Machines

150

60

50

10

Cost of Machinery (Rs.)

12,50,000

3,00,000

5,00,000

25,000

25,000

Production has worked

6226

4066

Floor space (sq.mtrs)

10,000

2,000

3,000

2,000

500

Lighting points ( Nos.)

60

10

20

10

05

Service Departments’ Expenses Allocation:-

Department

A

B

C

X

Y

X (%)

20

30

40

10

Y (%)

40

30

20

10

You are required to,

A. Prepare primary and secondary distribution summary according to repeated distribution System.

a company has three production departments a b and c and two service departments p a 625794

A company has three production departments, A, B and C and two service departments, P and Q. The following figures are available from the primary distribution summary.

Department

Dept A

Dept B

Dept C

Dept P

Dept Q

From Primary Distribution (Rs.)

3,150

3,700

1,400

2,250

1,000

The expenses of the service departments are to be apportioned on a percentage basis as follows.

Department

Dept A

Dept B

Dept C

Dept P

Dept Q

P (%)

40

30

20

10

Q (%)

30

30

20

20

Prepare Secondary Distribution Summary as per the Simultaneous Equations Method.

a company has two production departments and two service departments the data relati 625796

A company has two production departments and two service departments. The data relating to a kperiod are as follows.

Particulars

Prod. Dept. I

Prod. Dept. II

Service Dept I

Service Dept II

Direct Materials

80,000

40,000

10,000

20,000

Direct Wages

95,000

50,000

20,000

10,000

Overheads

80,000

50,000

30,000

20,000

Power requirement at normal capacity operation (Kwh)

20,000

35,000

12,500

17,500

Actual power consumption (Kwh)

13,000

23,000

10,250

10,000

The power requirement of these departments are met by a power generation plant. The said plant incurred an expenditure which is not included above, of Rs.1,21,875 out of which a sum of Rs. 84,375 was variable and the rest fixed.

After apportionment of power generation plant costs to the four departments, the service department overheads are to be redistributed on the following basis.

Departments

Prod. Dept I

Prod. Dept II

Service Dept I

Service Dept II

Service Dept I (%)

50

40

10

Service Dpet II

60

20

20

You are required to,

i. Apportion the power generation plant costs to the four departments

ii. Reapportion service department cost to production departments

iii. Calculate the overhead rate per direct labor hour of production departments, given that the direct wages rates of Production Dept I, II are Rs. 5 and Rs. 4 per hour respectively.

a machine was purchased on 1st january 2007 for rs 5 lakhs the total cost of all mac 625798

A machine was purchased on 1st January, 2007 for Rs. 5 lakhs. The total cost of all machinery inclusive of the new machine was Rs. 75 lakhs. The following further particulars were available.

Expected life of the machine – 10 years

Scrap value at the end of the life – Rs. 5,000

Repairs and maintenance for the machine during the year Rs. 2,000

Expected number of working hours of the machine per year 4,000

Insurance premium annually for all machines Rs. 4,00

Power consumption for the machine per hour @ Rs. 5 @ per unit = 25 units

Area occupied by the machine – 100 sq feet

Area occupied by other machines – 1,500 sq. feet

Rent per month of the department Rs. 800

Lighting charges for 20 points for the whole department out of which three points are for the new

machine – Rs.120 per month

Compute the machine hour rate for the machine.

the cost accounts of abc chemicals ltd determined the overhead recovery rate for the 625799

The cost accounts of ABC Chemicals Ltd., determined the overhead recovery rate for the year 2006

–07 (based on direct labor hours) with the following estimates.

Indirect labor Rs. 1,15,000

Inspection Rs. 70,000

Factory supervision Rs. 50,000

Depreciation and maintenance Rs. 1,25,000

Total Factory Overheads Rs. 3,60,000

Direct labor hours – 75,000

Hourly wages rate – Rs. 15

The actual results for the year are as follows

Particulars

Amount in Rupees

Indirect labor

99,000

Inspection

73,000

Factory supervision

51,000

Depreciation and maintenance

1,15,000

Total actual factory overheads

3,38,000

Direct labor hours

Hrs 67,600

Hourly wage rate

Rs. 16

Calculate the predetermined overhead recovery rate and find out the amount of over/under absorptionif any.

How will you treat the over/under absorption amounts in Cost Accounts?

how would unabsorbed overheads be treated in cost accounts 625801

In a manufacturing unit, overhead was recovered at a predetermined rate of Rs. 20 per labor hour. The total factory overhead incurred and the labor hours actually worked were Rs. 45,00,000 and2,00,000 respectively. During this period, 30,000 units were sold. At the end of the period 5,000 units were held in stock while there was no opening stock of finished goods. Similarly though there was no stock of uncompleted units at the beginning of the period, at the end of the period there were 10,000 incomplete units which may be reckoned as 50% complete. On analyzing the reasons, it was found that 60% of the unabsorbed overheads were due to defective planning and rest were attributed to increase in overhead costs.

How would unabsorbed overheads be treated in cost accounts?

discuss fully machine hour rate method of absorption of overheads how will you compu 625805

1. What do you understand by ‘overheads’? How will you classify them?

2. Write a detailed note on ‘Collection and Codification of Overheads.’

3. Distinguish between ‘Primary and Secondary Distribution of Overheads.’

4. What do you understand by ‘Secondary Distribution Summary’? What are the methods of the same?

5. Distinguish between ‘allocation and apportionment’ of overheads.

6. Describe the different bases on which factory overheads can be apportioned.

7. What is ‘absorption of overheads’? What are the methods used for absorption of overheads?

8. Explain a] Direct Material Cost and b] Prime Cost Method of absorption of overheads.

9. Discuss fully ‘machine hour rate method’ of absorption of overheads. How will you compute the machine hour rate?

work has progressed as per schedule and the actual costs charged till march 1998 was 625808

M/s New Century Builders have entered into a contract to build an office building complex for Rs.480 lakhs. The work started in April 1997 and it is estimated that the contract will take 15 months to be completed. Work has progressed as per schedule and the actual costs charged till March 1998 was as follows.

Particulars

Amount Rs.in lakhs

Materials

112.20

Labor

162.00

Hire charges for equipment and other expenses

36.00

Establishment charges

32.40

The following information are available:

Particulars

Amount- Rs.in lakhs

Material in hand 31st March 1998

10.50

Work certified [of which Rs.324 lakhs have been paid] as on 31st March 1998

400.00

Work not certified as on 31st March 1998

7.50

As per Management estimates, the following further expenditure will be incurred to complete the work.

Materials: Rs.10.50 lakhs

Labor: Rs.16.00 lakhs

Sub-contractor: Rs.20.00 lakhs

Equipments hire and other charges: Rs.3.00 lakhs

Establishment charges: Rs.6.90 lakhs

You are required to compute the value of work-in-progress as on March 31st, 1998 after considering a reasonable margin of profit and show the appropriate accounts. Make a provision for contingencies amounting to 5% of the total costs.

construction ltd is engaged in two contracts a and b during the year following infor 625810

Construction Ltd. is engaged in two contracts, A and B during the year. Following information is available at the year- end.

Particulars

Contract A Rs.

Contract B Rs.

Date of commencement

April 1st

September 1st

Contract price

6,00,000

5,00,000

Materials delivered direct to site

1,20,000

50,000

Materials issued from store

40,000

10,000

Materials returned to store

4,000

2,000

Material on site on December 31st

22,000

8,000

Direct labor payments

1,40,000

35,000

Direct expenses

60,000

30,000

Architect’s fees

2,000

1,000

Establishment charges

25,000

7,000

Plant installed at cost

80,000

70,000

Value of plant on 31st December

65,000

64,000

Accrued wages 31st December

10,000

7,000

Accrued expenses 31st December

6,000

5,000

Cost of contract not certified by architect

23,000

10,000

Value of contract certified by architect

4,20,000

1,35,000

Cash received from contractor

3,78,000

1,25,000

During the period, materials amounting to Rs.9, 000 have been transferred from contract A to contract

B. You are required to show,

[a] Contract A/c, Contractee A/c and

[b] Extract from the Balance Sheet as on 31st December showing the calculation of WIP

the construction work commenced on 1st april 2005 and the following data are availab 625811

A company undertook a contract for construction of a large building complex. The construction work commenced on 1st April 2005 and the following data are available for the year ended on 31st March 2006.

Particulars

Amount
Rs.000s

Contract price

35,000

Work certified

20,000

Progress payment received

15,000

Materials issued to site

7,500

Planning and estimating costs

1,000

Direct wages paid

4,000

Materials returned from site

250

Plant hire charges

1,750

Wages related costs

500

Site office costs

678

Head office expenses apportioned

375

Direct expenses incurred

902

Work not certified

149

The contractors own a plant which originally cost Rs.20 lakhs has been continuously in use in this contract throughout the year. The residual value of the plant after 5 years of life is expected to be Rs.5 lakhs. Straight-line method of depreciation is in use. As on 31st March 2006, the direct wages due and payable amounted to Rs.2, 70, 000 and the materials at site were estimated at Rs.2, 00,000.

Required:

[a] Prepare the contract account for the year ended 31st March 2006

[b] Show the calculation of profits to be taken to the Profit and Loss A/c of the year

[c] Show the relevant Balance Sheet entries.

prabhu builders ltd commenced work on 1st april 2005 on a contract of which the agre 625812

Prabhu Builders Ltd. commenced work on 1st April 2005 on a contract of which the agreed price was Rs. 5 lakhs. The following expenditure was incurred during the year up to 31st March 2006.

Particulars

Amount Rs.

Wages

1, 40, 000

Plant

35, 000

Materials

1, 05, 000

Head office expenses

12, 500

Materials costing Rs.10, 000 proved unsuitable and were sold for Rs.11, 500 and a part of plant was scrapped and sold for Rs.1, 700. Of the contract price Rs.2, 40, 000 representing 80% of work certified had been received by 31st March 2006 and on that date the value of the plant on the job was Rs.8, 000 and the value of materials was Rs. 3, 000. The cost of work done but not certified was Rs.25, 000. It was decided to [a] Estimate what further expenditure would be incurred in completing the contract.

[b] Compute from the estimate and the expenditure already incurred, the total profit that would be made on the contract and [c] Ascertain the amount of profit to be taken to the credit of Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on 31st March 2006. While taking profit to the credit of Profit and Loss A/c, that portion of the total profit should be taken which the value of work certified bears to the contract price. Details of the estimates are given below.

i. That the contract would be completed by 30th September 2006

ii. The wages to complete would amount Rs.84, 750

iii. That materials in addition to those in stock on 31st March 2006 would cost Rs.50, 000

iv. That further Rs.15, 000 would have to be spent on plant and the residual value of the plant on 30th

September 2006 would be Rs.6, 000

v. The head office expenses to the contract would be at the same annual rate as in 2005-06.

vi. That claims, temporary maintenance and contingencies would require Rs.9, 000

Prepare contract account for the year ended 31st March 2006 and show your calculations of the sum to be credited to Profit and Loss A/c for the year.

a product passes through two processes a and b prepare the process accounts from the 625816

A product passes through two processes A and B. Prepare the process accounts from the following details.

Particulars

Process A

Process B

10, 000 units introduced at a cost Rs.

20,000

Materials consumed Rs.

24,000

12,000

Direct labor Rs.

28,000

16,000

Manufacturing expenses Rs.

8,000

8,566

Normal wastages on input

5%

10%

Scrap value of normal wastage Rs. Per 100 units

40

50

Output [units]

9,400

8,500

Also prepare the abnormal wastage/effective account as the case may be with each process account.

a material used for building is produced in three grades the following information i 625817

A material used for building is produced in three grades. The following information is available.

Particulars

Process I – Rs.

Process II – Rs.

Process III – Rs.

Raw material used [1000 tons]

1, 00, 000

Wages

87, 500

39, 500

10, 710

Weight lost [% of input]

5%

10%

20%

Scrap [sales price of Rs.50 per ton]

50 tons

30 tons

51 tons

Sale price per ton of finished goods

Rs.350

Rs.500

Rs.800

Management expenses were Rs.17,500 and selling expenses Rs.10,000. 2/3rd of output of process and 50% of the output of process II is passed to the next process and remaining is sold. The entire output of process III is sold. Prepare Process Accounts and Statement of Profit.

for the year ended december 31 2007 ajax corporation had net income per books of 1 2 625482

For the year ended December 31, 2007, Ajax Corporation had net income per books of $1,200,000. Included in the determination of net income were the following items:

Interest income on municipal bonds

$ 40,000

Damages received from settlement of patent infringement lawsuit

200,000

Interest paid on loan to purchase municipal bonds

8,000

Provision for federal income tax

524,000

What should Ajax report as its taxable income for 2007?

  1. $1,492,000
  2. $1,524,000
  3. $1,684,000
  4. $1,692,000

what amount should appear on the last line of reconciliation schedule m 2 of form 11 625489

Olex Corporation’s books disclosed the following data for the calendar year 2007:

Retained earnings at beginning of year

$50,000

Net income for year

70,000

Contingency reserve established at end of year

10,000

Cash dividends paid during year

8,000

What amount should appear on the last line of reconciliation Schedule M-2 of Form 1120?

  1. $102,000
  2. $120,000
  3. $128,000
  4. $138,000

bank corp owns 80 of shore corp rsquo s outstanding capital stock shore rsquo s capi 625490

Bank Corp. owns 80% of Shore Corp.’s outstanding capital stock. Shore’s capital stock consists of 50,000 shares of common stock issued and outstanding. Shore’s 2007 net income was $140,000. During 2007, Shore declared and paid dividends of $60,000. In conformity with generally accepted accounting principles, Bank recorded the following entries in 2007:

Debit

Credit

Investment in Shore Corp. common stock

$112,000

Equity in earnings of subsidiary

$112,000

Cash

48,000

Investment in Shore Corp. common

stock

48,000

In its 2007 consolidated tax return, Bank should report dividend revenue of

  1. $48,000
  2. $14,400
  3. $ 9,600
  4. $0

sly sold the land in june 2007 for 125 000 in its 2007 and 2006 tax returns what amo 625492

Potter Corp. and Sly Corp. file consolidated tax returns. In January 2006, Potter sold land, with a basis of $60,000 and a fair value of $100,000, to Sly for $100,000. Sly sold the land in June 2007 for $125,000. In its 2007 and 2006 tax returns, what amount of gain should be reported for these transactions in the consolidated return?

2007

2006

a.

$25,000

$40,000

b.

$25,000

$0

c.

$40,000

$25,000

d.

$65,000

$0

using the following facts determine the amount of gain that would be recognized by s 625501

Salon, Inc. distributed cash and personal property to its sole shareholder. Using the following facts, determine the amount of gain that would be recognized by Salon, Inc. as the result of making the distribution to its shareholder?

Item

Amount

Cash

$20,000

Personal property:

Fair market value

6,000

Adjusted basis

3,000

Liability on property assumed by shareholder

10,000

  1. $ 3,000
  2. $ 4,000
  3. $ 7,000
  4. $23,000

kent corp is a calendar year accrual basis c corporation in 2007 kent made a nonliqu 625502

Kent Corp. is a calendar-year, accrual-basis C corporation. In 2007, Kent made a nonliquidating distribution of property with an adjusted basis of $150,000 and a fair market value of $200,000 to Reed, its sole shareholder. The following information pertains to Kent:

Reed’s basis in Kent stock at January 1, 2007

$500,000

Accumulated earnings and profits at January 1, 2007

125,000

Current earnings and profits for 2007

60,000

What was taxable as dividend income to Reed for 2007?

  1. $ 60,000
  2. $150,000
  3. $185,000
  4. $200,000

in 2007 kara corp incurred the following expenditures in connection with the repurch 625513

In 2007, Kara Corp. incurred the following expenditures in connection with the repurchase of its stock from shareholders to avert a hostile takeover:

Interest on borrowings used to repurchase stock

$100,000

Legal and accounting fees in connection with the repurchase

400,000

The total of the above expenditures deductible in 2007 is

  1. $0
  2. $100,000
  3. $400,000
  4. $500,000

how much gain must green recognize in 2007 as a result of this distribution 625521

On June 1, 2007, Green Corp. adopted a plan of complete liquidation. The liquidation was completed within a twelve-month period. On August 1, 2007, Green distributed to its stockholders installment notes receivable that Green had acquired in connection with the sale of land in 2006. The following information pertains to these notes:

Green’s basis

$ 90,000

Fair market value

162,000

Face amount

185,000

How much gain must Green recognize in 2007 as a result of this distribution?

  1. $0
  2. $23,000
  3. $72,000
  4. $95,000

in computing its 2007 personal holding company tax what amount should hull deduct fo 625532

The following information pertains to Hull, Inc., a personal holding company, for the year ended December 31, 2007:

Undistributed personal holding company income

$100,000

Dividends paid during 2007

20,000

Consent dividends reported in the 2007 individual income tax returns of the holders of Hull’s common stock, but not paid by Hull to its stockholders

10,000

In computing its 2007 personal holding company tax, what amount should Hull deduct for dividends paid?

  1. $0
  2. $10,000
  3. $20,000
  4. $30,000

kee holding corp has eighty unrelated equal stockholders for the year ended december 625538

Kee Holding Corp. has eighty unrelated equal stockholders. For the year ended December 31, 2007, Kee’s income comprised the following:

Net rental income

$ 1,000

Commissions earned on sales of franchises

3,000

Dividends from taxable domestic corporations

90,000

Deductible expenses for 2007 totaled $10,000. Kee paid no dividends for the past three years. Kee’s liability for personal holding company tax for 2007 will be based on

  1. $12,000
  2. $11,000
  3. $ 9,000
  4. $0

from the following figures relating to two components x and y compute reorder level 625760

From the following figures relating to two components X and Y, compute Reorder Level, Minimum Level, Maximum Level and Average Stock Level.

Particulars

Component X

Component Y

Maximum consumption per week

75 units

75 units

Average consumption per week

50 units

50 units

Minimum consumption per week

25 units

25 units

Reorder period

4 to 6 weeks

2 to 4 weeks

Reorder quantity

400 units

600 units

the annual demand for the material is 4000 kg stock holding costs are 20 of the mate 625763

From the following particulars in respect of a material, compute the Economic Ordering Quantity by preparing a table.

Ordering Quantities

Price Per Kg.

Less than 250

6.00

250 and less than

5.90

800 and less than

5.80

2000 and less than

5.70

4000 and above

5.60

The annual demand for the material is 4000 kg. Stock holding costs are 20% of the material cost per Annum. The ordering and receiving costs are Rs.10 per order.

the following is the summary of the receipts and issues of material in a factory dur 625765

The following is the summary of the receipts and issues of material in a factory during December

2007. Prepare Store Ledger according to First in First Out Method. December 2007

1. Opening balance 500 units @ Rs.25 per unit

3. Issue 70 units

4. Issue 100 units

8. Issue 80 units

13. Received from supplier 200 units @ Rs.24.50 per unit

14. Returned to store 15 units @ Rs.24 per unit

16. Issue 180 units.

20. Received from supplier 240 units @ Rs.24.75 per unit

24. Issue 304 units.

25. Received from supplier 320 units @ Rs.24.50 per unit

26. Issue 112 units

27. Returned to store 12 units @ Rs.24.50 per unit

28. Received from supplier 100 units @ Rs.25 per unit

It was revealed that on 15th there was a shortage of five units and another on 27th of 8 units.

the store ledger account for material x in a manufacturing concern reveals the follo 625766

The Store Ledger Account for Material X in a manufacturing concern reveals the following data for the quarter ended on 30th September

Date

Particulars

Receipts

Issue

Quantity

Price Rs.

Quantity

Price Rs.

July1

Balance b / d

1,600

2.00

July 9

Receipts

3,000

2.20

July13

Issue

1,200

2.556

Aug.5

Issue

900

1.917

Aug.17

Receipts

3,600

2.40

Aug.24

Issue

1,800

4.122

Sept.11

Receipts

2,500

2.50

Sept.27

Issue

2,100

4.971

Sept.29

Issue

700

1.656

Physical verification on September 30th revealed an actual stock of 3, 800 units. You are required to,

[a] Indicate the method of pricing employed above.

[b] Complete the above account by making entries you would consider necessary including adjustments, if any, and giving explanations for such adjustments.

the following transactions in respect of material y occurred during the six months e 625767

The following transactions in respect of Material Y occurred during the six months ended 30th June 2007.

Month

Purchased [Units]

Price Per Unit Rs.

Issued [Units]

January

200

25

Nil

February

300

24

250

March

425

26

300

April

475

23

550

May

500

25

800

June

600

20

400

Required: The Chief Accountant argues that the value of closing stock remains the same, no matter which method of pricing of material issues is used. Do you agree? Why or why not? Detailed Stores Ledgers are not required.

abc ltd provides you the following information calculate the cost of goods sold and 625768

ABC Ltd. provides you the following information. Calculate the cost of goods sold and ending inventory applying the Last in First Out method of pricing raw materials under the Perpetual Inventory and Periodic Inventory Control System.

Date

Particulars

Units

Per Unit Cost Rs.

January 1

Opening Stock

200

10

January 10

Purchases

400

12

January 12

Withdrawals

500

January 16

Purchases

300

11

January 19

Issues

200

January 30

Receipts

100

15

Also explain the difference in profits if any.

on june 30 2006 berk retired from his partnership at that time his capital account w 625412

On June 30, 2006, Berk retired from his partnership. At that time, his capital account was $50,000 and his share of the partnership’s liabilities was $30,000. Berk’s retirement payments consisted of being relieved of his share of the partnership liabilities and receipt of cash payments of $5,000 per month for eighteen months, commencing July 1, 2006. Assuming Berk makes no election with regard to the recognition of gain from the retirement payments, he should report income of

2006

2007

a.

$13,333

$26,667

b.

20,000

20,000

c.

40,000

d.

40,000

mike reed a partner in post co received the following distribution from post 625414

Items 1 and 2 are based on the following data:

Mike Reed, a partner in Post Co., received the following distribution from Post:

Post’s basis

Fair market value

Cash

$11,000

$11,000

Inventory

5,000

12,500

Before this distribution, Reed’s basis in Post was $25,000.

If this distribution were nonliquidating, Reed’s basis for the inventory would be

  1. $14,000
  2. $12,500
  3. $ 5,000
  4. $ 1,500

If this distribution were in complete liquidation of Reed’s interest in Post, Reed’s recognized gain or loss resulting from the distribution would be

  1. $7,500 gain.
  2. $9,000 loss
  3. $1,500 loss.
  4. $0

adams beck and carr organized flexo corp with authorized voting common stock of 100 625420

Adams, Beck, and Carr organized Flexo Corp. with authorized voting common stock of $100,000. Adams received 10% of the capital stock in payment for the organizational services that he rendered for the benefit of the newly formed corporation. Adams did not contribute property to Flexo and was under no obligation to be paid by Beck or Carr. Beck and Carr transferred property in exchange for stock as follows:

Adjusted basis

Fair market value

Percentage of Flexo stock acquired

Beck

5,000

20,000

20%

Carr

60,000

70,000

70%

What amount of gain did Carr recognize from this transaction?

  1. $40,000
  2. $15,000
  3. $10,000
  4. $0

bass corp a calendar year c corporation made qualifying 2006 estimated tax deposits 625430

Bass Corp., a calendar-year C corporation, made qualifying 2006 estimated tax deposits based on its actual 2005 tax liability. On March 15, 2007, Bass filed a timely automatic extension request for its 2006 corporate income tax return. Estimated tax deposits and the extension payment totaled $7,600. This amount was 95% of the total tax shown on Bass’ final 2006 corporate income tax return. Bass paid $400 additional tax on the final 2006 corporate income tax return filed before the extended due date. For the 2006 calendar year, Bass was subject to pay

  1. I. Interest on the $400 tax payment made in 2007.
  2. II. A tax delinquency penalty.
    1. a. I only.
    2. b. II only.
    3. c. Both I and II.
    4. d. Neither I nor II.

edge corp a calendar year c corporation had a net operating loss and zero tax liabil 625431

Edge Corp., a calendar-year C corporation, had a net operating loss and zero tax liability for its 2006 tax year. To avoid the penalty for underpayment of estimated taxes, Edge could compute its first quarter 2007 estimated income tax payment using the

Annualized income method

Preceding year method

a.

Yes

Yes

b.

Yes

No

c.

No

Yes

d.

No

No

this includes 10 000 in dividends from a 15 owned taxable domestic corporation given 625437

Kisco Corp.’s taxable income for 2006 before taking the dividends received deduction was $70,000. This includes $10,000 in dividends from a 15%-owned taxable domestic corporation. Given the following tax rates, what would Kisco’s income tax be before any credits?

Taxable income partial rate table

Tax rate

Up to $50,000

15%

Over $50,000 but not over $75,000

25%

  1. $10,000
  2. $10,750
  3. $12,500
  4. $15,750

what was eastern rsquo s 2007 alternative minimum taxable income before the adjusted 625439

Eastern Corp., a calendar-year corporation, was formed during 2006. On January 3, 2007, Eastern placed five-year property in service. The property was depreciated under the general MACRS system. Eastern did not elect to use the straight-line method. The following information pertains to Eastern:

Eastern’s 2007 taxable income

$300,000

Adjustment for the accelerated depreciation taken on 2007 5-year property

1,000

2007 tax-exempt interest from private activity bonds

5,000

What was Eastern’s 2007 alternative minimum taxable income before the adjusted current earnings (ACE) adjustment?

  1. $306,000
  2. $305,000
  3. $304,000
  4. $301,000